Yaskawa cp717 Programing Manual

YASKAWA
Machine Controller MP900 Series

Programming Panel Software
USER'S MANUAL
FOR STANDARD OPERATION
YASKAWA MANUAL NO. SIEZ-C887-2.4

Safety Information
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed
precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or
damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
WARNING Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or seri-
ous injury.
Caution Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
In some situations, the precautions indicated could have serious consequences if

not heeded.
Prohibited Indicates prohibited actions that must not be performed. For example, this symbol
would be used to indicate that fire is prohibited as follows: .
Mandatory Indicates compulsory actions that must be performed. For example, this symbol
would be used as follows to indicate that grounding is compulsory: .
iii
Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
Also, indicates low-level precautions that, if not heeded, may cause an alarm to
sound but will not result in the device being damaged.
INFO Indicates additional information or information that is useful to have memorized.
Describes technical terms that are difficult to understand, or appear in the text with-
out an explanation being given.
Copyright © Yaskawa Corporation, 2001.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover,
because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless,
Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from
the use of the information contained in this publication.
iv
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Safety Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii

Visual Aids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iv
Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - xiii
Using This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - xiv
About the Software - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - xiv
1 Welcome to the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-1

1.1 CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.1.1 Recommended Personal Computers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-3
1.1.2 Main Functions of the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-4
1.1.3 Function Tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-5
1.1.4 System Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-7
1.2 Installing the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8

1.2.1 Installation Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-8
1.2.2 Starting the Installer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-8
1.2.3 Installation Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-9
1.2.4 Completing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.2.5 Confirming Setup Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.3 Communications Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12

1.3.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.3.2 Opening the Communications Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.3.3 Serial Communications Port Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
1.3.4 Setting the CP-717 Logical Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
1.4 Outline of the Motion Program Development Procedure - - - 1-15

1.4.1 Simple Development Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.2 Environment Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.3 Creating Definition Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.4.4 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
1.4.5 Developing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.4.6 Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
2 Manager Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-1

2.1 File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.1.1 File Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-3
2.1.2 Basic Tree Concepts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-5
2.1.3 Command Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-9
2.1.4 Registering PLC Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
2.1.5 User Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
2.1.6 Switching between Online and Offline Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
v
2.1.7 Logging On and Logging Off from the CPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
2.1.8 Switching the CPU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.1.9 Program File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.1.10 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
2.1.11 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-37
2.2 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41

2.2.1 Automatic Startup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41
2.2.2 Basic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42
2.2.3 Basic Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-43
2.2.4 Function Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-44
2.2.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-46
2.3 List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47

2.3.1 Basic Outline of the List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47
2.3.2 List Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47
2.3.3 List Manager Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-48
2.3.4 Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-49
2.4 Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60

2.4.1 Starting the Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2.4.2 Communications Manager Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2.4.3 Closing the Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2.5 User Menu Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61

2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61
2.5.2 Starting from a Shortcut Icon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-62
3 Module Configuration
Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
3.1 Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.1.1 MP900-series Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation - - - - - - - - - 3-5

3.2.1 Outline of Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation - - - - - - - - 3-5
3.2.2 Basic Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.4 Module Configuration Definitions Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.2.5 Setting Module Configuration Definitions Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations - - - - - - - - - - 3-10

3.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
3.4 MP910 Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

3.4.1 MP910 Virtual Module Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
3.4.2 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
3.4.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.4.4 Opening Individual Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - 3-15
vi
CONTENTS
3.4.5 Local I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15

3.4.6 SVB-01 Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
3.5 MP920 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19

3.5.1 MP920 Module Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
3.5.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20
3.5.4 Saving, Deleting, and Closing Module Configuration Definitions - - - - 3-31
3.5.5 Opening Separate Definition Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5.6 General-purpose Serial Communications Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.5.7 215IF Transmission Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37
3.5.10 260IF Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.5.11 Local I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-69
3.5.12 Digital Input Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-72
3.5.13 Digital Output Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74
3.5.14 Counter I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-76
3.5.15 Analog Input Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
3.5.16 Analog Output Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-83
3.5.17 SVA Motion Parameters Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86
3.5.18 PO-01 Motion Parameters Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93
3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
3.5.20 MECHATROLINK Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106
3.6 MP930 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-113

3.6.1 MP930 Virtual Module Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-113
3.6.2 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - - - - 3-113
3.6.4 Opening Individual Module Definition Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-115
3.6.5 RS-232C Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-116
3.6.6 MC350-I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-118
3.6.7 MC350-NET Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-121
3.6.8 MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-126
3.7 MP940 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133

3.7.1 Outline of MP940 Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133
3.7.2 MP940 Virtual Module Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133
3.7.3 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - - - - 3-134
3.7.6 Serial Transmission Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-136
3.7.7 LIO Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-141
3.7.8 SVA Parameter Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-143
3.7.9 CNTR I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-147
3.7.10 MLINK (CERF) Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-152
vii
3.7.11 260IF Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-158
4 System Configuration
Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
4.1 System Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.2 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6

4.2.1 Opening the System Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
4.2.2 System Configuration Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.2.3 System Configuration Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.2.4 Changing Machine Controller Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
4.2.5 Saving System Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.2.6 Closing System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.3 Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11

4.3.1 Opening the Scan Time Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
4.3.2 Scan Time Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
4.3.3 Setting the System Scan Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
4.3.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4.3.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.3.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.4 Application Information Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

4.4.1 Opening the Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.4.2 Application Information Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.4.3 Setting Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4.4.4 Saving Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4.4.5 Closing Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4.5 Data Trace Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

4.5.1 Opening the Data Trace Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.5.2 Data Trace Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19
4.5.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.5.4 Data Trace Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
4.5.5 List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29
4.5.6 Graph Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
4.5.7 Closing Data Trace Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-38
5 Motion Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1

5.1 Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.1.1 Outline of Motion Program Development - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3

5.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
viii
CONTENTS
5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-4

5.2.3 Group Definition Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-5
5.2.4 Setting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-6
5.2.5 Saving Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-9
5.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.2.7 Closing Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.3 Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11

5.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Global Registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12
5.3.3 Motion Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
5.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5.3.5 Motion Editor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20
5.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25
5.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
5.4 Compiling Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29

5.4.1 Compile Execution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29
5.4.2 Compile Execution Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.3 Normal Completion of the Compile Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.4 Error Completion of the Compile Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.5 Debugging Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31

5.5.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.5.2 Opening the Debug Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.5.3 Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34
6 Monitoring Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-1

6.1 Monitoring Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.1.1 Outline of the Monitoring Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-3
6.2 Using the Ladder Programming Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4

6.2.1 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-4
6.2.2 Tuning Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-4
6.3 Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6

6.3.1 Outline of Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-6
6.3.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-6
6.3.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-8
6.4 Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10

6.4.1 Outline of Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.4.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.4.3 Position Monitor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
6.4.4 Position Monitor Window Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
6.4.5 Closing Position Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
ix
6.5 Task Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.5.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.5.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.5.3 Task Monitor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
6.5.4 Task Monitor Display Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16
6.5.5 Task Monitor Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16
6.5.6 Closing Task Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6.6 Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

6.6.1 Outline of Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.6.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.6.3 Motion Alarm Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19
6.6.4 Displaying Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20
6.6.5 Closing Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
7 Ladder Logic Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1

7.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.2 Setting Drawing Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

7.2.1 Outline of Property Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.2.2 Opening Property Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.2.3 Property Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.2.4 Configuration Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.2.7 # Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
7.2.8 Update History - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.2.9 Saving Property Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.3 Creating Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17

7.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3.2 Programming Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3.3 Programming Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.3.4 Programming Window Display Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.3.5 Entering Ladder Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.3.6 Editing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31
7.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-37
7.3.8 Disabling Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-44
7.3.9 Displaying Current Values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-46
7.3.10 Creating Comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-48
7.3.11 Saving Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-48
7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-50
7.3.13 Closing Ladder Logic Program Editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-51
x
CONTENTS
7.4 Creating Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52

7.4.1 Outline of Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52
7.4.2 Table Program Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52
7.4.3 Table Program Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-53
7.4.4 Switching Input Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-54
7.4.5 Inputting # Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-55
7.4.6 Inputting M Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-56
7.4.7 Inputting I/O Conversion Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-56
7.4.8 Inputting Interlock Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-58
7.4.9 Inputting Component Assembly Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-60
7.4.10 Inputting Data in C Constant Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-62
7.4.11 Editing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-68
7.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-72
7.4.13 Printing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-73
7.5 Creating Data Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-74

7.5.1 Outline of Data Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-74
7.5.2 Table Data List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-75
7.5.3 Table Data List Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-77
7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-77
7.5.5 Opening Column Attributes Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-79
7.5.6 Column Attributes Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-80
7.5.7 Setting Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-80
7.5.8 Editing Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-81
7.5.9 Saving Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-83
7.5.10 Opening Table Data Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7.5.11 Table Data Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7.5.12 Setting Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7.5.13 Editing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-85
7.5.14 Saving and Closing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-86
7.6 Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-87

7.6.1 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-87
7.6.2 Creating Tuning Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-92
7.6.3 Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-97
7.6.4 Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-102
7.6.5 Comment Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-104
7.6.6 Replacing Register Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-106
xi
A Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-1
A.1 System Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-9
B File Manager Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B-1

B.1 Common Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2
B.2 Individual Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-3
C Drawing and Function Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -C-1

C.1 Auxiliary Input Keys for Drawings and Function Programs - - - - - - - - - - C-2
D MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -D-1

D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-2
xii
Overview
Overview
About this Manual

This manual describes the installation and operation of the CP-717 Engineering Tool, a pro-
gramming software package that aids in the design and maintenance of MP900-series
Machine Controllers.
This manual is written for readers with a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 95/NT.
Refer to Windows documentation provided with your computer for information on basic
operations, such as opening and closing windows and mouse operations.
Read this manual carefully to ensure the proper use of the CP-717 Engineering Tool. Also,
keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary.
Related Manuals
Refer to the following related manuals as required.
Manual Name Manual Number Contents
MP900 Series Machine Controller SIEZ-C887-1.2 Describes the instructions used in
User's Manual: MP900 ladder logic programming.
Ladder Programming
MP900 Series Machine Controller SIEZ-C887-1.3 Describes the motion programming
User's Manual: language used for MP900 Machine
Motion Programming Controllers.
MP900 Series Machine Controller SIEZ-C887-5.1 Describes MECHATROLINK Mod-
User's Manual: ules used for MP900 Machine Con-
MECHATROLINK trollers.
MP910 Machine Controller SIEZ-C887-3.1 Describes the design and mainte-
User's Manual: nance for the MP910 Machine Con-
Design and Maintenance troller.
MP920 Machine Controller SIEZ-C887-2.5 Describes the functions, specifica-
User's Manual: tions, and usage of the MP920
Motion Module Motion Modules (SVA-01, SVB-01,
and PO-01).
User's Manual: tions, and usage of the MP920 Com-
Communications Module munications Modules (217IF, 215IF,
and 218IF).
User's Manual: tions, and operating methods of the
DeviceNet MP920 DeviceNet Module (260IF).
xiii
Using This Manual
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following users.
• Those responsible for designing the MP900 System
• Those responsible for writing MP900 motion programs
• Those responsible for writing MP900 ladder logic programs
Description of Technical Terms

In this manual, the following term is defined as follows:
• PLC = Machine Controller
• CP-717 = CP-717 Engineering Tool
About the Software
Precautions
• This software is to be installed on one and only one computer. You must purchase
another copy of the software to install it on another computer.
• This software is not to be copied for any reason other than when installing it on the com-
puter.
• Store the floppy disks containing the software in a safe place.
• This software is not to be decompiled, disassembled, or reverse engineered.
• This software is not to be given to, rent to, exchanged with, or otherwise released to a
third party without the prior permission of Yaskawa Corporation.
Trademarks
• Windows and Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
xiv
1 Welcome to the CP-717
1
This chapter introduces the CP-717 software for the MP900-series Machine
Controller Engineering Tool.
1.1 CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

1.1.1 Recommended Personal Computers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.1.2 Main Functions of the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.1.3 Function Tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.1.4 System Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7
1.2 Installing the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8

1.2.1 Installation Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8
1.2.2 Starting the Installer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8
1.2.3 Installation Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.2.4 Completing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.2.5 Confirming Setup Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.3 Communications Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12

1.3.1 Outline- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.3.2 Opening the Communications Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.3.3 Serial Communications Port Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
1.3.4 Setting the CP-717 Logical Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
1.4 Outline of the Motion Program Development Procedure- - - - 1-15

1.4.1 Simple Development Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.2 Environment Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.3 Creating Definition Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.4.4 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
1.4.5 Developing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.4.6 Operation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1-1
Welcome to the CP-717
1.1 CP-717
The CP-717 Engineering Tool is a software programming package used to control and monitor
MP900-series Machine Controllers.
The CP-717 Engineering Tool runs on Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0. In general, the CP-717
running on a personal computer (PC) is called a Programming Device.
A CP-717 Programming Device and an MP900-series Machine Controller are normally con-
1 nected by an RS-232C communications interface. A CP-215 high-speed communications inter-
face and CP-218 Ethernet interface are also available depending on the MP900-series model.
Refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance for
details.
Installation device
CD-ROM
Installation
CP-717
Communications
interface MP900-series
Machine Controller
Programming Device
1-2
1.1 CP-717
1.1.1 Recommended Personal Computers
The Programming Device must be able to perform many functions, such as high-speed data
transfer with Machine Controllers, control operations, and monitoring operations.
The personal computer should conform to the specifications listed below to allow smooth
operation of the CP-717. Check the specifications before installing the CP-717.
Operating system
1
Windows 95
or
Windows NT 4.0
Notebook PC
or
PC architecture DOS/V*1
CPU Punting 200 MHz or better *2
Memory 64 MB min. (128 MB recommended)*3
Resolution 800 x 600 pixels
Hard disk 200 MB *4
Communications port RS-232C (19.2 Kbps)
Desktop computer
∗ 1. NEC9800-series personal computers can be used. However, only RS-

232C communications are supported with the Machine Controller.
The 215 high-speed communications interface is not supported.
∗ 2. Other CPUs with equivalent specifications to Intel CPUs can be used.

∗ 3. Increase memory size if other applications are to be run simulta-
neously. If memory size is not increased, performance may be
adversely affected by the computer frequently searching for free
memory.
∗ 4. The hardware disk capacity includes normal working space after

installation.
1-3
1.1.2 Main Functions of the CP-717
1.1.2 Main Functions of the CP-717
The CP-717 is configured from five management programs called the Managers. The Man-
agers are used to manage and control MP900-series systems. The main functions provided
by these Managers are listed below.
Manager Function Outline

File Manager Displays the CP-717 system and file configuration as a tree diagram, and
provides file management functions. The File Manager can be used both
1 online and offline.
File operations Provides folders and files necessary for system
configuration structured in a tree hierarchy.
User management Provides user security functions, mainly for
logon and logoff.
File transfers Provides functions for data transmission
between the Engineering Tool and Machine Con-
trollers.
Commands Starts the tools.
Engineering Accesses the engineering tools. When online with an MP900-series Con-
Manager troller, monitoring is also possible.
Commands Provides all of the programming functions.
The File Manager can also be accessed.
Definitions Provides functions for defining Module configu-
rations, systems, scan times, application infor-
mation, data traces, groups, and motion
parameters.
Ladder programming Provides functions for new programs, properties,
constant tables, I/O conversion tables, interlock
tables, element assemble tables, and tuning pan-
els as the programming environment.
Utilities Provides register lists, cross-references, disable
coil lists, comment lists, and register number
replacement tools.
Motion programs Accesses the motion programming environment
using the Motion Editor.
List and Print Print processing Displays the status of jobs that are printing and
Manager jobs that are queued. Can also be used to cancel
print commands.
User Menu Shortcut registration Creates a shortcut icon on the desktop.
Manager
Communications Communications pro- Sets the communications parameters and man-
Process Manager cessing ages communications processing with MP900-
series Controllers.
1-4
1.1 CP-717
1.1.3 Function Tree
The following schematic diagram shows the commands activated by each manager. The first
window displayed by the CP-717 is the File Manager Window.
1-5
1.1.3 Function Tree
Configuration
File Manager Print Manager User Manager
Communications Process List Manager
Transfer Online/Offline
1
User Menu Manager Engineering Manager
Register Lists Properties
Menu Lists
Definitions Motion Tools C Register Tables Programs
Group Definitions New Programs Register Lists C register Lists Table Lists New Drawings
Scan Setting Existing Programs Cross-Reference Properties
Data Trace Position Monitoring Disable Lists Main Programs
Task Monitoring Comments Constant Tables
Motion Alarm Replace Register No. I/O Conversion Table
Module Configuration Interlock Tables
SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR MLINK Parts Assembling Table
System Definitions
Tuning Panel
Application Settings
1-6
1.1 CP-717
1.1.4 System Connections
The standard system configuration is 1:1 between the CP-717 and a MP900-series Machine
Controller.
A MECHATROLINK/DeviceNet Interface Unit can also be connected using the MP900
Series network functions.
Engineering Tool
CP-717
1
CP-717
Or
Notebook personal computer Desktop personal computer
RS-232C
MP930
RDY RUN
POWER ERR ALM
PRT1 PRT2
BAT
YASKAWA
JEPMC-MC350
6
CN1
SW 1
RS-232C PORT1
device A1 B1
1
6
Local I/O
PORT2 (DI/DO, CNTR, AO)
BATTERY
I/O
MP900 Machine Controller MECHATROLINK,

DeviceNet
Distributed I/O
I/O I/O I/O

device device device
1-7
1.2.1 Installation Disk
1.2 Installing the CP-717
This section explains the procedure for installing the CP-717 system software.
1.2.1 Installation Disk
The CP-717 installation driver is provided on a CD-ROM.
1 1.2.2 Starting the Installer
The installation procedure for the CP-717 software is given below.

1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The following window will be displayed.
2. To install the Japanese version, click the CP-717 (Japanese Version) Button.
To install the English version, click the CP-717 (English Version) Button.
3. Double-click setup.exe in the file list to start the Installer.
INFO 1 setup.exe can also be started using the Add/Delete Applications Icon on the Control Panel.
2 1.2.3 Installation Procedure and 1.2.4 Completing Setup below explain using the CP-717 (English
Version) Installer.
If using the CP-717 (Japanese Version) Installer, the same content as the English version is displayed
in Japanese. If installing the Japanese version, refer to the procedure for the English version.
1-8
1.2.3 Installation Procedure
1. When setup.exe is started, the following window will be displayed and installation will
start.
2. Check the message in the window, and then click the Next Button to proceed with the
installation. The User Registration Window will be displayed. Enter your name, com-
pany name, and serial number, and then click the Next Button. The Setup Method Win-
dow will be displayed.
3. Select the installation directory using the Select Destination Box, and then click the
Next Button.
4. Specify the program folder in which the application group is registered from the Select
Program Folder Box, and then click the Next Button. The default folder is
YE_Applications.
5. The information entered so far will be displayed in the Start File Copy Window. Check
that the information is correct, and then click the Next Button to start copying the file.
6. Check the progress of the copying using the Progress Bar and the Information Gauge
displayed at the bottom of the Window. Wait until copying has been completed.
1-9
1.2.4 Completing Setup
1.2.4 Completing Setup
Once the files have been copied, the Setup Complete Window will be displayed.
The following two options are shown on the Window. Set the options to suit your require-
ments, and click the Finish Button.
• The Yes, Open the ReadMe file right away option displays the ReadMe file, which
contains the Software License Agreement (shown below). Deselect this option if not
required.
• The Yes, Execute the File Manager right away option starts the File Manager once
setup has been completed.
1.2.5 Confirming Setup Information
Once setup has been completed, the program folder, which serves as the basis for the group
of applications, will have been created on the desktop. The default folder is
YE_Applications.
Perform the following procedure to check that setup has been executed correctly.
1. Double-click the YE_Applications program folder. The folder will open and its contents
will be shown on the next window.
1-10
1
2. Double-click the Total Engineering Workstation icon and check that the application
starts up correctly.
INFO This application can also be selected and started from the Program Menu on the Start Button of your
screen.
1-11
1.3.1 Outline
1.3 Communications Settings
This section explains settings for communications between the CP-717 and Machine Control-
lers.
1.3.1 Outline
Be sure to make the CP-717 communications settings once installation has been completed.
1 Once the communications interface has been set, the settings will be stored as CP-717 sys-
tem information, and will not need to be set again unless the communications interface is
changed.
MP930
RDY RUN
POWER ERR ALM
PRT1 PRT2
YASKAWA
BAT
JEPMC-MC350
SW1
6
CN1
CP-717
PORT1
A1 B1
1
6
PORT2
BATTERY
I/O
MP900-series
Machine Controller
Set the communications port
on the Programming Device.
1.3.2 Opening the Communications Process
Double-click the communications process icon called Communications Manager in the

YE_Applications program folder.
Double-click this icon.
The Communications Process Window will be displayed. The communications process can
operate logical ports for up to 16 channels. Select and set the first unused port from the top.
Double-click the logical port number, or, alternatively, click File and then Setting. Selecting
the logical port will display the following Logical Port Setting Window.
1-12
1.3 Communications Settings
1.3.3 Serial Communications Port Settings
Procedure
The procedure for setting a serial communications port is as follows:
1. Select Serial under Port Kind on the Logical Port Setting Window and click the Detail
Button.
2. The settings will be displayed. Set the serial port parameters, and click the OK Button.
Normally the default settings will be displayed. Check these settings and click the OK
Button if they are acceptable.
3. The Logical Port Setting Window will be displayed. Click the OK Button again. The
Communication Process Window will be displayed. Confirm that Serial is allocated to
logical port 1.
Saving Communications Port Settings

Communications port settings are saved in a file. When the communications process is sub-
sequently activated, these settings will be provided as the communications port information.
1. Click File and then Save.
2. The CpPrc Window will open to confirm that the information is to be saved. Click the
Yes Button to save the information.
Exiting the Communications Process

Click File and then Exit to close the Communication Process Window.
1-13
1.3.4 Setting the CP-717 Logical Port
1.3.4 Setting the CP-717 Logical Port
Up to 16 logical ports can be set for the communications process. The logical port to be used
needs to be specified when engineering a Machine Controller using the CP-717.
The logical port to be used can be set for each Machine Controller. The logical port is usu-
ally set when registering a new Machine Controller under the File Manager. The following
window will be displayed when registering a new PLC folder or opening the property win-
dow for an existing PLC folder. Click the Network Tab.
1
This number corresponds to the

logical port number in the Com-
munication Process Window.
Set the logical port number in this window to the number of the logical port to be used.
1-14
1.4 Outline of the Motion Program Development Procedure
This section explains the standard procedure and points for developing a motion program.
1.4.1 Simple Development Flowchart
The basic procedure is as follows: After installing the system, create the Machine Controller
Folder, and then define the Machine Controller and servos before starting programming. The
definition settings given here are the minimum required to execute a motion program. 1
Depending on the system configuration, other definition settings may be necessary. Refer to
Chapter 4 System Configuration Definitions for details.
Make environment settings
Create definition data
Transfer the data
Develop program
Run the program
1.4.2 Environment Settings
The environment settings regulate the hardware, software, and communications environ-
ments.
Hardware Installation
This section assumes that hardware installation has been completed. If the hardware has not
yet been installed, refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design
and Maintenance, and install the required hardware.
This restriction does not apply when defining systems and creating programs offline.
CP-717 Installation
Install the CP-717 system on the personal computer to be used as an Engineering Tool.
1-15
1.4.3 Creating Definition Data
Communication Settings
Set the communications conditions for communications between the Engineering Tool and
the Machine Controller.
The following example shows the connection between a CP-717 and an all-in-one Machine
Controller using an RS-232C Serial Cable.
MP940
TX
BAT
RX
RDY
Connect to personal Connect to MC Unit

RUN
ALM
1
1
BAT
PRT1
computer serial port communications port 1

PRT2
M
RUN E
6
C
INIT
5
H
TEST A
4
T
FLASH R
3
2
O
PP
2
L
COPY IN
1
→ NO K
PORT1
Communications cable
I/O
PORT2
POWER
+24V LED
GND
FG
Engineering Tool
1.4.3 Creating Definition Data
Use the following procedure to configure the Machine Controller Modules and make opera-
tion settings in offline mode.
Registering the PLC Folder

Create a new MP900-series Machine Controller registration using the CP-717 File Manager.
The newly registered Machine Controller will be registered as a PLC Folder, and the rele-
vant data folders will be created automatically. At this time, the programming environment
will be set up.
Refer to 2.1 File Manager for details.
(root)
Group Group Folder
System Order Folder
Machine PLC Folder
1-16
Logging On from Offline

The group definitions set later are important definition files for the motion program operat-
ing environment, so they cannot be defined while online. Consequently, logon1 while offline
to make definition settings at the first time.
Setting Module Configuration Definitions

Set the Machine Controller Module configurations. These settings are essential. Set the
Machine Controller Module configurations, the communications port, network, and I/O for 1
each Module. Refer to Chapter 3 Module Configuration Definitions for details.
Defining System Information

Group definitions and scan time definitions are required settings for Machine Controller
operations. Be sure to make these settings. Set other definitions depending on your system
configuration.
Defining Groups
Of the definition settings, set the group definitions while offline. These settings cannot be
made online.
Use group definitions to set the signals for controlling the machine, number of axes, number
of parallel processes, etc. The CP-717 provides standard control signals that enable auto-
matic generation (default). The motion control ladder program, which is required for pro-
gram operation, will be generated automatically. In this case, the following step, Creating
Motion Control Ladder Programs, is not necessary. Normally, it is recommended to use the
default to enable automatic generation.
1
Logon
Logging on is necessary from the viewpoint of safety and confidentiality using functions that identify
the user operating the Machine Controller. Unless logged on, Machine Controller operations cannot
be performed.
1-17
1.4.4 Transferring Files
For example, if operating multiple machines using a single Motion Controller, it is easier to
consider allocating one group to each machine. Assuming that currently there are two
machines operating independently, set the definitions for each by allocating group names
Machine 1 and Machine 2.
Group name
Machine 1 Machine 2
Definition
Operation control signal Operation control signal

1
Axis allocation Axis allocation
Axis input signal allocation Axis input signal allocation
Override signal Override signal
No. of parallel processes No. of parallel processes
Automatic generation Automatic generation
Often, one machine is operated by one group.
Defining Scan Time

Set the scan times for both high and low speed for the system. Set the high-speed scan in
multiples of 2-ms units from 2 ms minimum. The low-speed scan is processed using the
empty time slots between high-speed scans.
The motion program is scheduled using the high-speed scan, so set the actual scan time
value in 2-ms units using x2 the current high-speed scan time value as a standard.
Refer to Chapter 4 System Configuration Definitions for information on acquiring and set-
ting the scan time current value.
Setting Motion Parameters

Motion parameter settings are required to adjust the initial setting parameters for the servo
amplifier and motor. Refer to MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and
Maintenance, and set the parameters depending on the type of servo and its application.
Transfer the data that has been defined to the Machine Controller.
Log online
Transfer files
1-18
Logging Online
Communications are required between the CP-717 and the Machine Controller, so log on to
online mode.
If you are logged on in offline mode, log off first, and then log on again using online mode.
Transferring Data
Normally, define the system and create programs in offline mode, and then log online and
transfer the definition data and programs that have been generated to the Machine Control- 1
ler.
Group definitions in particular cannot be edited online, so be sure to define groups offline.
Other definitions can be edited online.
Refer to 2.1.10 Transferring Files for the operations required.
MP940
TX
BAT
RX
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2 M
E
LOAD
C
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
CP-717
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2
PP O
L
COPY
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K
I/O
PORT2
DUMP
POWER
LE
+24V
D
GND
FG
1.4.5 Developing Programs
The procedure performed up to this point completes the settings required for programming.
This section explains the procedure for actual programming.
Create motion control ladder program
Create motion program
Debug online
Log off
Creating Motion Control Ladder Programs

A motion program is controlled by the motion control ladder program. The motion control
ladder program is generated automatically if automatic generation is enabled in the group
definitions.
If using a unique control signal system, however, disable automatic generation and create a
new motion control ladder program. Be sure to read and understand ladder programs and
1-19
1.4.6 Operation
motion programs in the MP900 Series Motion Controller User's Manual: Design and Main-
tenance before creating new motion control ladder programs.
Refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIE-
C887-1.2) for details on writing ladder programs.
If automatically generated motion control ladder programs require considerable revision,
use the ladder editor for easy revision. Refer to Chapter 7 Ladder Logic Programming for
details.
1 Creating Motion Programs

Create motion programs using the motion editor. Refer to Chapter 5 Motion Programming
for details of editor operations, and refer to the MP900 Series User's Manual: Motion Pro-
gramming (SIEZ-C887-1.3) for individual motion commands.
Debugging Tool
The Debugging Tool is a testing tool for motion programs. It cannot be used offline.
The Debugging Tool monitors program execution in addition to step commands that execute
the program one step at a time, and brake point setting commands that specify steps to stop
execution.
Logoff
Check that the program is operating normally before logging off. All data (including pro-
gram data) created while online is also written to the hard disk.
To quit operations, including debugging programs, be sure to log off. Debugging can be con-
tinued by logging on again and opening the program.
1.4.6 Operation
This completes the motion programming. The Machine Controller can now be operated.
1-20
2 Manager Functions
This chapter explains the main manager windows in the CP-717.

2
2.1 File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3

2.1.1 File Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.1.2 Basic Tree Concepts- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
2.1.3 Command Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9
2.1.4 Registering PLC Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
2.1.5 User Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
2.1.6 Switching between Online and Offline Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
2.1.7 Logging On and Logging Off from the CPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
2.1.8 Switching the CPU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.1.9 Program File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.1.10 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
2.1.11 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-37
2.2 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41

2.2.1 Automatic Startup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41
2.2.2 Basic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42
2.2.3 Basic Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-43
2.2.4 Function Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-44
2.2.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-46
2.3 List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47

2.3.1 Basic Outline of the List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47
2.3.2 List Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47
2.3.3 List Manager Window Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-48
2.3.4 Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-49
2.4 Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60

2.4.1 Starting the Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2.4.2 Communications Manager Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2.4.3 Closing the Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
2-1
Manager Functions
2.5 User Menu Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61

2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61
2.5.2 Starting from a Shortcut Icon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-62
2-2
2.1 File Manager
2.1 File Manager
This section explains the File Manager Window configuration and menus.
2.1.1 File Manager Window
The File Manager Window is the first window that opens when the CP-717 Engineering
Tool is started. All CP-717 operations are started from this window, which provides a user
interface mainly for files.
The File Manager Window is made up of three sections to enable easy comprehension of the
MP900 Series system configuration. The three sections are the Directory Tree, List Display,
and Details. 2
File Manager Window
Directory Tree List Details
The following table gives an outline of each section of the File Manager Window.
Section Outline
Directory Tree This section shows the system configuration in a hierarchical structure.
List This section shows the files contained in each folder.
Details This section shows the attributes of each file.
Directory Tree Section

The Directory Tree shows the system configuration in a hierarchical structure. The program
and definition data lists are displayed in the Directory Tree by group or order name.
Hard disk folders are displayed when the CP-717 is in offline mode, and the files saved in
the Machine Controller are displayed when it is in online mode.
2-3
Manager Functions
2.1.1 File Manager Window
Opening Folders
A small symbol in front of the folder icon means that the folder contains other folders.
Symbol Meaning
• The + symbol indicates that the folder is closed. Click the + symbol and it
will change to a - symbol, and the folders inside will be displayed.
• The same operation can be performed by double-clicking the folder name.
• This symbol indicates that the folder is open. Click the - symbol and it will
change to the + symbol, and the folders inside will no longer be displayed.
• The same operation can be performed by double-clicking the folder name.
Folder Icons
2 Different types of folders can be distinguished by the folder icons shown in the following
table. These icons appear in the directory tree.
Icon Meaning
Root folder. This is a fixed folder, and is the first icon in the Directory Tree.
Group folders (group names), order folders (order names), program folders,
interrupt programs folders, function programs folders, initialization pro-
grams folders, high scan programs folders, low scan programs folders, defi-
nition folders, table data folders, motion program folders, and group
definition folders
PLC folders (Motion Controller names)
Files (programs, definitions, etc.)
List Section
A list of the folders and files contained within the folder at the cursor position will be dis-
played. The detailed information displayed will differ depending on the type of folder or file
selected with the cursor.
Changing the List Display Mode

The list display mode can be changed. Select between list and detailed display, and change
the icon size, using the View (V) Menu in the File Manager.
Details Section
The detailed display shows detailed data for each folder and file selected with the cursor in
the tree display. The details displayed will differ depending on the type of folder or file
selected. If (root) is selected with the cursor, nothing will be displayed.
2-4
2.1 File Manager
Detailed/Basic Display
Click View (V) and then Detail Window (W) on the File Manager Menu to switch between
detailed and basic display.
2.1.2 Basic Tree Concepts
This section explains the configuration of folders displayed in tree diagrams. Each tree dia-
gram has a root folder under which multiple systems can be created by job.
Folder Configuration
The root folder is displayed as the top branch of the tree, and contains group folders, order
2
folders, PLC folders, and the data folders.
The CP-717 is designed to handle multiple systems and Machine Controllers, so logically, a
group folder and order folder are above the PLC folder, which defines the MP900 Series.
(root)
Group
Order
PLC
Data
Fig 2.1 Folder Tree Branches
Root Folder
User-defined folders are managed under the root folder, which is the only folder provided by
default by the CP-717. The CP717 can manage multiple group folders and order folders.
Group Folders
Group folders are relevant to one project and indicate one large job unit.
Order folders, in which one job can be broken down into multiple tasks, can be defined
under the group folder. The group folder can be omitted, however, if the entire job can fit
into one order folder.
A maximum of 20 group folders can be defined for large-scale projects, but their manage-
ment is complicated.
2-5
Manager Functions
INFO The group folder names are not connected to the group definitions in the PLC folder. Allocate group
names in control units related to the relevant Machine Controller in the group definitions.
Order Folders
Order folders hold system information, and can contain PLC folders, each of which defines
multiple Machine Controllers.
Order folders cannot be branched on their own, but at least one order folder must be created.
PLC Folders
2 A PLC folder defines a MP900-series Machine Controller. Multiple data folders are created
automatically under the PLC folder.
PLC folders cannot be branched on their own, but at least one PLC folder must be created.
Specifically, connect online to the MP900 Series from the PLC folder. Multiple PLC folders
can be defined, but only one PLC can be connected online at a time, so do not try to connect
online to multiple Machine Controllers.
2-6
2.1 File Manager
Folder Configuration Example

An example of a folder configuration is shown below. Refer to the portions of the folder
configuration example that resemble the system to be created.
(root) Root folder
Group folder name

Project1
Order folder name

System10
PLC folder name

Machine1
Machine2 PLC folder name
System11 Order folder name

2
Project2 Group folder name
PLC folder name

Machine5
System30 Basic configuration Order folder name (group

folder omitted)
Project4 Group folder name (with

branching)
Proj40 Group folder name
2-7
Manager Functions
Expanded PLC Folder Diagram

When creating a new PLC folder, the data folder groups under the PLC folder are generated
automatically as shown below. The following diagram shows the standard tree diagram
when logged on to the MP900 Series.
Root folder
Group folder
Group folder
Order folder
PLC folder
C register folder
Constant register definition file
Definitions folder
2
Definition files
Program folder
Functions folder
High-speed scan folder
High-speed scan files
Motion folder
Group definitions file
Motion group folder
Motion parameter file
Initialization folder
Low-speed scan folder
Table data folder
Table data list file
2-8
2.1 File Manager
2.1.3 Command Menus
Select commands from the pull-down menus or pop-up menus.

The contents of the menu depends on the type of folder or file selected with the cursor in
both tree and list display.
Selecting from the Pull-down Menu

Click the File Manager Menu bar to display the pull-down menu.
The following example shows the differences in the File (F) Menu when the group folder
and the PLC folder are selected with the cursor.
Group Folder PLC Folder 2
Selecting from the Pop-up Menus

Right-click a folder or file to display the pop-up menu.
Refer to Appendix B File Manager Menus for menu changes dependent on the position of
the cursor.
2-9
Manager Functions
2.1.4 Registering PLC Folders
This section explains the operating procedure to create new PLC folders, which are neces-
sary to create the program.
Creating New Group Folders

The operating procedure to create new group folders is given below.
1. Select the root folder with the cursor.
2. Select File (F), New (N), and then Group Folder (G) from the CP-717 File Manager
Menu.
2 Alternatively, right-click the root folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the group folder name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and then
click the OK Button. Group folder names must be 8 characters maximum.
A new group folder will be created.
INFO Path names for group folders can be up to 64 characters in length.

Example: "Group 2" is created under "Group 1."
C:$GROUP1$GROUP2$... 17 characters
Changing Group Folder Names

The procedure to change group folder names is given below.
1. Select the group folder whose name you want to change with the cursor.
2. Select File (F) and then Rename (M) from the menu bar. Alternatively, right-click the
group folder and make the selection using the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the new file name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and then
click the OK Button. Group folder names must be 8 characters maximum.
4. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the Yes (Y) Button. The file name
will be changed.
INFO Names cannot be changed while logged on to the CPU. Names can be changed for folders and files
created by the user.
2-10
2.1 File Manager
Deleting Group Folders

In online mode, the group folder data on both the Machine Controller and hard disk will be
deleted. In offline mode, the group folder data on the hard disk will be deleted.
The procedure to delete group folders is given below.
1. Select the group folder to be deleted with the cursor.
2. Select File (F), and then Delete (D) from the menu bar. Alternatively, right-click the
group folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the Yes (Y) Button to delete the
group folder. The folder and its files will be deleted.
1 Deleting files and folders while the system is operating may cause the currently operating
2
device to malfunction. Be sure to check before deleting.
2 The delete function deletes files and folders created by the user. Consequently, folders (including pro-
gram folders and definition folders) created by the system by the CP-717 cannot be deleted.
Creating New Order Folders

The procedure to create new order folders is given below.
1. Select the group folder in which to create the root folder or order folder with the cursor.
2. Select File (F), New (N), and then Order Folder (O) from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the group folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the new order folder name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and
then click the OK Button.
4. The new order folder will be created.
INFO Group folder names must be 8 characters maximum.
Changing and Deleting Order Folders

Refer to changing and deleting group folders.
Creating New PLC Folders

The procedure to create new PLC folders is given below.
1. Select the order folder in which to create the new PLC folder with the cursor.
2. Select File (F), New (N), and then Controller Folder (C) from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the order folder and make the selection using the pop-up menu.
2-11
Manager Functions
3. Set the information for each Machine Controller in the Controller Configuration Win-
dow, and then click the OK Button.
The new PLC folder will be created.
Information Tab Page Settings
Setting Details
Order Name Displays the order folder name. The order folder name cannot be
changed.
Controller Name Enter the Machine Controller name up to 8 characters maximum.
CPU Name CPU names cannot be set for the MP900 Series.
Comment Enter comments for the Machine Controller and CPU up to 32 char-
acters maximum.
Controller Type Select the MP900 Series.
Multi-CPU Multi-CPU cannot be set for the MP900 Series.
Network Tab Page Settings
Set the communications port for the MP900 Series to which the CP-717 will log on.
Setting Details
Online Set whether or not the CP-717 and the Machine Controller will be
connected online.
Logical Port No. Specify the logical port number set using the communications pro-
(Device Type) cess. Be sure that the port number is set to 1.
"Device Type" displays the Communications Module type.
Unit No. If the CP-717 is connected to a serial port, specify the serial port
device address.
2-12
2.1 File Manager
Setting Details
Route If the 215IF’s Relay Function is used, set the network number and
the station number. For details, refer to 5.6 Relay Function in the
MP920 Machine Controller Communications Module User’s Man-
ual (SIEZ-C887-2.6).
Application Tab Page Settings
Setting Details
Customer Enter the client name up to 32 characters maximum.
User Enter the user name up to 32 characters maximum.
Equipment Enter the facilities name up to 32 characters maximum.
Usage
Date
Enter the application name up to 32 characters maximum.
Enter the date of creation. The current date will be displayed as the
2
default.
Revision history When creating a new Machine Controller, a revision history cannot
be entered.
Changing PLC Folder Information

The procedure to change PLC folder information is given below.
1. Select the PLC folder to be changed with the cursor.
2. Select File (F), and then Properties (R) from the menu bar.
Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. The Controller Configuration Window will be displayed. Change the Machine Control-
ler information using the following three tabs in the Controller Configuration Window:
Information Tab, Network Tab, and Application Tab. Refer to creating new PLC infor-
mation for the Information Tab Page and Network Tab Page settings.
INFO When logged on to the Machine Controller or CPU, the Machine Controller information cannot be
changed.
Information Tab Page

Set the new PLC information, and then click the OK Button.
Network Tab Page

Set the new network information, and then click the OK Button.
2-13
Manager Functions
Revision History on Application Tab Page
Double-click.
2
Double-click a number entered in the revision history to display the Controller Configura-
tion Window. Next, enter the revision history information up to 50 characters maximum, and
click the OK Button to set the revised data of the application tab page.
1 Changing settings while the system is operating may cause the currently operating device to
malfunction. Be sure to check before making any changes.
2 If the user's write privileges are set lower than the write privileges of the deleted programs, the pro-
gram cannot be deleted.
3 When a program is deleted, all the sub-programs pertaining to the main program (SFC program, format
program, etc.) will also be deleted at the same time.
4 The delete function deletes files and folders created by the user. Consequently, folders (including pro-
gram folders and definition folders) created by the system of the CP-717 cannot be deleted.
2-14
2.1 File Manager
2.1.5 User Management
This function manages the registration of users who can access the PLC folders. Users are
managed by user ID and password, and an access level can be set individually for each user.
In online mode, the user management data stored in the MP900 Series is used, and in offline
mode, the user management data stored on the Engineering Tool hard disk is used.
User Management Window

Use the User Management Window to register new user information, and to change and
delete existing information.
1. Select the PLC folder with the cursor. Next, select Edit (E) and then User Manager (U)
from the File Manager Menu.
2
The User Management Window will be displayed.
Display Item Details

Active Two asterisks ("**") are displayed next to the current user. "User-A"
is shown as logged on in the dialog box shown above.
User Name Displays users with authorization lower than the current user.
Password Displays the password corresponding to each user name.
User Privilege User privileges enable reading and writing to existing programs. The
user privilege and the privilege of the file for each program are com-
pared, and if the user's read (R) privilege is greater than the pro-
gram's read (R) privilege, the user can read the program. Similarly, if
the user's write (W) privilege is greater than the program's write (W)
privilege, the user can save or update the program.
Default Privileges When a user creates a new program, the privilege for the new pro-
gram is set. The default privilege is set automatically for the new
program, so if you set the privileges most often used, there is nor-
mally no need to change the program privileges afterwards.
2-15
Manager Functions
Relationship between User and File Privileges

A user privilege level is given to each user, but the user can allocate any file privileges
within their user privilege range to files they have created.
For example, if the user privileges granted to USER-M are R7W7, the default privileges can
be set in between R0 to R7 and W0 to W7. The file privileges are set automatically by
default privileges when the file is created, however, they can be reset within the user privi-
lege range by manipulating the sequence or motion program properties.
User privilege: R7W7 Default privilege: R3W3 File 1 privilege: R0W1

File 2 privilege: R2W2
2 ......
In the above example, the file privileges for Files 1 to 3 created by USER-M are different
from the default privileges. This indicates that the properties for each program file have been
manipulated and the file privileges changed. The default privileges are used for File 4.
User privileges
File 1 privileges
Default privileges File 2 privileges

File 4 privileges
File 3 privileges
The read (R) and write (W) privilege values in the user privileges can be thought of as the
maximum values that the user can allocate as file privileges.
INFO 1 Select the PLC folder before opening the User Management Window. The User Management Window
cannot be opened if the user is not logged on to the PLC folder.
2 The first user on the list of users is the current user, followed by users with lower privileges. Informa-
tion on users with higher privileges will not be displayed.
3 Program file privileges can be set and browsed via the drawing program or motion program properties.
Registering New Users

Up to 20 users can be registered.
The procedure to register new users in the User Management Window is given below.
2-16
2.1 File Manager
1. Click New (N) in the User Management Window. Input the new user information in the
User Info-New Dialog Box that is displayed, and click the OK Button.
Setting Details
2
User Name Input a user name of up to 16 characters. Spaces, comma (,), and an
existing user name cannot be used. USER-A, USER-B, and USER-C
are already registered in the CP-717 system, and cannot, therefore,
be used.
Password Input a password of up to 16 characters. Passwords can be the same
as long as the user name is not.
User Privilege Input the existing program file's read privilege in the R column, and
the write privilege in the W column as numbers between 0 and 7.
The higher the number, the higher the privilege.
Default User Input the new program file's read privilege in the R column, and the
(Default Privileges) write privilege in the W column as numbers between 0 and 7. The
higher the number, the higher the privilege.
2. When the settings have been completed, click the OK Button. The new user that has
been set will be registered.
INFO Standard Registered Users

1 The CP-717 has users that are registered beforehand for each Machine Controller. Standard user privi-
leges and default privileges are also registered for each of these users.
2 The following table shows the standard registered users.
Table 2.1 Standard Registered Users
User Default
User Name Password Remarks
Privileges Privileges
USER-A USER-A R7W7 R0W1 For system administrator
USER-B USER-B R1W1 R0W1 For security administrator
USER-C USER-C R1W0 R0W1 For operators
Changing User Information

The registered user information can be changed from the User Management Window.
2-17
Manager Functions
The procedure to change the user information is given below.

1. In the No. column, click the number of the user to be changed.
2. Click the Modify (M) Button. User Info-New Window will be displayed. Set the new
user information, and then click the OK Button. The information for the selected user
will be changed.
Deleting Users
The registered user information can be deleted from the User Management Window.
The procedure to delete users is given below.
1. In the No. column, click the number of the user to be deleted.
2 2. Click the Delete (D) Button. A confirmation message box will be displayed. Click the
Yes (Y) Button after confirming that the user is to be deleted. The user will be deleted.
INFO The current user cannot be deleted. The current user is indicated by ** in the Active column.
Saving User Management Data

The procedure to save user management data is given below.
1. Click the OK Button in the User Management Window to save user management data.
When in online mode, the data is saved to both the Machine Controller and the hard
disk. When in offline mode, the data is saved only to the hard disk.
2. The User Management Window closes once the data is saved.
INFO The Error Detected Message Box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully.
Refer to Appendix A Error Messages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.
Setting the Default User

Normally, a user name and password must be input when logging on to a PLC folder. This
step can be omitted, however, by setting a default user. The default user will then be logged
on automatically.
The procedure to set and to delete the default user is given below.
1. Select the PLC folder with the cursor, and select Edit (E) and then Default User Set (D).
2. Input the user name and password in the Default User Set Window, and then click the
OK Button. The default user will be set.
2-18
2.1 File Manager
Deleting Default Users

The default user can be deleted by clearing the user name and password in the Default User
Set Window and clicking the OK Button.
2
The default user is not saved on the Machine Controller or hard disk, and, therefore, is deleted if the
File Manager is closed or the system rebooted. The default user must be reset if the CP-717 is restarted.
2.1.6 Switching between Online1 and Offline2 Modes
Once a PLC folder has been registered, logging on to the CPU is possible, but always be
aware of whether login is being performed online or offline.
When online, the Engineering Tool's hard disk and the MP900 Series' data are both updated
simultaneously, but when offline, only the Engineering Tool's hard disk is updated. Conse-
quently, caution is required.
The procedure to switch between online and offline modes is given below.
1. Click the PLC folder which is to be switched to either online or offline mode.
2. Click File (F) and then Properties (R) on the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-
click the PLC folder and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click either Yes or No for Online on the Network tab page in the Controller Configura-
tion Window, and then click the OK Button.
1 Online Mode
The Engineering Tool and the MP900-series Machine Controller are connected using a serial communica-
tions connection and data is transferred back and forth between them via the CP-717. The CP-717 must be
online to display or update Machine Controller data. When the data is updated, both the Engineering Tool
hard disk and the MP900-series Machine Controller data are updated.
2 Offline Mode
The Engineering Tool is operated independently of the Engineering Tool. Machine Controller data cannot
be referred or updated. Only data stored on the hard disk can be accessed.
2-19
Manager Functions
2.1.7 Logging On and Logging Off from the CPU
INFO The user cannot switch between online and offline mode when logged on to the CPU. Set whether to
use online or offline mode before logging on.
2.1.7 Logging On and Logging Off from the CPU

2
The user must log on to the PLC folder’s CPU to operate or reference data in the PLC folder,
such as MP900 Series programs and definition settings.
The data to be handled is important, so security management using user IDs and passwords
is provided for logging on. The privileges levels set for each user ID is also a security man-
agement function.
Logging On to the CPU

The procedure to log on to the CPU is given below.
1. Double-click the PLC folder to be logged on to.
2. Input the user name and password, and click the OK Button.
3. A plus (+) mark will appear in front of the PLC folder. The logon process has now been
completed.
The programs and definition data in the PLC folder that has been logged on to can now
be referenced or edited.
INFO The user name and password do not need to be input when a default user has been set. The default user
setting, however, will be deleted when the File Manager is closed.
2-20
2.1 File Manager
Logging Off from the CPU

The procedure to log off from the CPU is given below.
1. Click the PLC folder to be logged off from the CPU.
2. Click File (F) and then Logoff (U) on the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the folder, and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the logoff confirmation dialog box to confirm the logoff.
4. The plus (+) mark in front of the selected folder name (the minus (-) mark if the folder is
open) will disappear. The logoff process has now been completed.
2.1.8 Switching the CPU Status

2
The CPU status refers to the operating status of the MP900-series Machine Controller. RUN
means the Machine Controller is operating, and STOP means it is not operating. The CPU
status can be valid when in online mode.
Normally, the CPU can be in RUN mode with no problem, but must be in STOP mode in
some cases, for example, when transferring files, or the command will not operate.
The procedure to switch the CPU status is outlined below.
1. Select the PLC or CPU folder for which the CPU status is to be switched with the cur-
sor.
2. Click Edit (E) and then CPU Control (C) on the File Manager Menu. Alternatively,
right-click the folder and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click either RUN to start operation, or STOP to stop operation, in the Controller Run-
ning Status Dialog Box.
4. The CPU status will be switched.
INFO The current CPU status is indicated by a black dot. The CPU status cannot be changed when in offline
mode or if the user has not logged on to the CPU.
2.1.9 Program File Operations
Copying DWG Program Files

The procedure to copy DWG program files is given below.
1. Right-click the DWG program file to be copied.
2-21
Manager Functions
2.1.9 Program File Operations
2. Click Copy DWG (C) on the pop-up menu.

3. Input the copy destination program number or function symbol and the name of the pro-
gram, and click the OK Button.
4. The specified program will be saved as a new program under the copy destination num-
ber.
2
INFO 1 All drawings contained in the program file will be copied.
2 The program name can be up to 48 characters.
3 If a main program is copied, all associated subroutines, such as table format programs, will be copied
at the same time.
4 Programs cannot be copied to existing programs.
Enabling and Disabling DWG Programs

The DWG program can be set to enable or disable in online mode.
The procedure to enable and to disable DWG programs is given below.
1. Select with the cursor the DWG program to be disabled.
2. Click Edit (E) and then Enable/Disable (E) on the File Manager Menu. Alternatively,
right-click the program and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the confirmation window that is displayed.
An X will appear on the icon for the disabled program file. This means this file will not
be scanned.
INFO 1 If the selected program is already disabled, the disable setting will be cancelled. If the selected pro-
gram is not disabled, it will be disabled.
2 Only drawing or function programs can be enabled or disabled.
2-22
2.1 File Manager
Switching Display between Subroutines

This function can be used in all interrupt program, function program, high-speed scan pro-
gram, startup program, and low-speed scan program folders that have been selected. File
types displayed in the List Display Section of the File Manager Window can be designated.
Select the type of subroutine to be displayed on the submenu under View (V) and then List
Display (L) on the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the subroutine and make
the selection using the pop-up menu.
Updating Information
When executing motion programs and DWG/function program files, display the latest tree
status by selecting View (V) and then Refresh (R) from the File Manager Menu. 2
Copying Motion Programs
The procedure to copy motion programs is given below.
1. Select the motion program file to be copied with the cursor.
2. Click Copy DWG (C) on the pop-up menu. Alternatively, right-click the file and make
the selection using the pop-up menu.
3. Input the name of the copy destination motion program and click the OK Button.
4. A new program will be created at the copy destination.
INFO Existing motion programs cannot be copied to or overwritten.
This function reads and writes data between the Engineering Tool and the MP900-series
Motion Controllers using the CP-717.
Outline of File Transfers

All data in the PLC folder can be transferred at one time, or individual files can be desig-
2-23
Manager Functions
nated for transfer. The Load1, Dump2, and Compare3 functions can be used only when the
user is logged on in online mode. The transfer source and destination will be either the hard
disk or the MP900-series Machine Controller.
File
transfer
CP-717 Load
FD
HD Machine Controller
Compare (MP930 CPU)
2 Dump
Removal
Disk File
transfer
Other media
(magneto-optical disk or Machine Controller
other media) (MP920 CPU)
Generally, the Load Function is used to register or update data or programs on the MP900-
series Machine Controller that have been defined or developed using the CP-717. The Dump
Function is used when MP900-series Machine Controller data is to be saved in the CP-717.
The Compare Function is used to compare data stored on both the CP-717 and the Machine
Controller to see if it is the same.
In addition, there are functions to register, update, and store data on CP-717 hard disk,
floppy disks, or other media.
1 Load
The function for transferring data from the CP-717 to the Machine Controller.
2 Dump
The function for transferring data from the Machine Controller to the CP-717.
3 Compare
The function used to compare CP-717 and Machine Controller data.
2-24
2.1 File Manager
The following table outlines the transfer functions described above.
Transfer Type File Transfer Function Function

All File Load all files (from HD to CPU) Transfers all pro-
Transfer (A) Dump all files (from CPU to HD) grams or definition
data.
Compare all files (between CPU and HD)
Transfer all files (from HD to FD)
Transfer all files (from FD to HD)
Transfer all files (from HD to other medium)
Transfer all files (from other medium to HD)
Individual File Load individual file (from HD to CPU) Transfers individual
Transfer (I) Dump individual file (from CPU to HD) designated pro-
Compare individual files (between CPU and HD)

grams or definition
data.
2
Transfer individual file (from HD to FD)
Transfer individual file (from FD to HD)
Transfer individual file (from HD to other medium)
Transfer individual file (from other medium to HD)
Continuous Load continuously (from HD to CPU) Transfers multiple
File Transfer Dump continuously (from CPU to HD) Machine Controller
(C) programs or defini-
Continuous file transfer (from HD to other medium) tion data.
Continuous file transfer (from other medium to HD)
Other (O) Flash save Transfers programs
or definition data
Flash comparison
between flash mem-
ory and the
Machine Controller.
Opening the File Transfer Window

The procedure to open the File Transfer Window is given below.
1. Select the PLC folder with the cursor.
2. Click File (F) and File Transfer (T) on the File Manager Submenu, and then click the
required file transfer function.
Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder and make the selection from the following pop-
up menu. Select from the range of transfer functions available on the submenu under
File Transfer (T): All File Transfer (A), Individual File Transfer (I), Continuous File
Transfer (C), and Other (O).
3. The window for the selected file transfer will be opened.
2-25
Manager Functions
INFO 1 File transfer cannot be executed if the user is not logged onto the Machine Controller.
2 Continuous File Transfer (C) and Other (O) transfer functions are not available for the MP930.
3 For functions that use floppy disks (FD) or magneto-optical disks (MO), the floppy disk or MO must
be inserted into the floppy disk or MO drive. File transfer to or from the Machine Controller cannot be
executed when the user is in offline mode.
Transferring All Files

All files, such as programs or definition data, are transferred.
If this function is to be used to transfer all files to the Machine Controller, Machine Control-
2 ler operation must be stopped first. Be sure to perform the following procedure to change the
Machine Controller Status before transferring all files.
Changing the CPU Status

The procedure to change the CPU status is given below.
This function is used to switch the MP900-series Machine Controller status between RUN
and STOP modes.
1. Click Edit (E) and then CPU Control (C) on the menu.
2. In the PLC Running Status Window, click the RUN or STOP Button as required to
switch the operation status of the Machine Controller.
3. The Machine Controller status will be switched.
INFO The current status of the Machine Controller is shown by the black dot. The Machine Controller status
cannot be switched when in offline mode or if the user has not logged onto the Machine Controller.
When transferring all files to the Machine Controller, set the Machine Controller in STOP mode to
stop program operation before executing the transfer.
Starting the All File Transfer

The procedure to start the all file transfer is given below.
1. Select All Program File Load[HD → CPU] [L]. The following Execute Window will
be displayed. Make the required settings.
2-26
2.1 File Manager
Setting Details
Source The source path name will be displayed if the source is a hard disk,
floppy disk, or magneto-optical disk.
If the source is a Machine Controller, the communications address 2
and Machine Controller type of the source Machine Controller will
be displayed.
Destination The destination path name will be displayed if the destination is a
hard disk, floppy disk, or magneto-optical disk.
If the destination is a Machine Controller, the communications
address and Machine Controller type of the destination Machine
Controller will be displayed.
Transfer Mode Select the write mode for the destination.
Change:If a file with the same name exists at the destination, it will
be overwritten.
New:If a file with the same name exists at the destination, the folder
and its contents will be deleted, a new directory created, and the
transfer executed.
The transfer mode will be Change if the destination is a Machine
Controller. The mode cannot be changed to New.
Type of File to be Select the type of file to be transferred. Program and register files are
Transferred already specified for transferred. These specifications can be can-
celed. Normally, the default settings should be used.
2. Click the OK Button once the parameters for loading all files have been checked. The
transfer will start. A confirmation message will be displayed when transfer has been
completed. Click the OK Button.
The next Execute Status Window will be displayed when the OK Button is clicked. The
next All load Window will appear if the operation is cancelled or an error is generated
before the transfer has been completed.
All File Transfer Window

The title of the window will change depending on whether the function to be performed is
load, dump, or file transfer. The procedure, however, is the same.
2-27
Manager Functions
2
The process of transferring all files can be continued or stopped on this window. To stop file
transfer click File (F) and then Exit (E) and return to the File Manager screen.
To continue file transfer, perform the procedures explained below.
All File Transfer Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for transferring all
files.
Menu Command Function

File (F)
Execute (S) Starts transfer of all files.
Clear (W) Cancels the settings for the transfer files.
Exit (E) Closes the File Transfer Window.
View (V)
Tool Bar (T) Displays the tool bar.
Status Bar (S) Displays the status bar.
Error List (I) Reopens the error window.
PLC Running Status Changes the status of the Machine Controller.
(P)
Change Source (O) Changes the transfer source.
Change Destination Changes the transfer destination.
(R)
Help (H)
About Application (A) Displays version information for the CP-717.
Help Topics (H) Searches for topics.
Changing Transfer Source and Destination

Check and set the transfer source and destination. Skip this step if no changes are required.
The procedure to change transfer source and transfer destination is given below.
1. Changing the CPU
2-28
2.1 File Manager
If the transfer source or destination is a Machine Controller, the communications set-

tings or CPU used in the transfer can be changed.
a) Click View (V) and then Change Source (O) or Change Destination (R) on the File
Transfer Menu. The transfer source and transfer destination can also be changed by
clicking the Change Button.
b) Input the communications information in the dialog box, and click the OK Button.
2. Changing Floppy Disk Transfer Directories

If the transfer source or destination is a floppy disk, the floppy disk drive number and
the PLC folder name can be changed.
Transfer Menu. The transfer directory can also be changed by clicking the Change
Button.
b) Set the floppy disk drive number and PLC name in the dialog box, and click the OK
Button. Enter the PLC name as the directory name on the floppy disk up to 8 charac-
ters maximum.
3. Changing Hard Disk Transfer Directories
If the transfer source or destination is a hard disk, the PLC information on the hard disk
can be changed.
Transfer Menu. The Select CPU Window will be displayed. The PLC name can also
be changed by clicking the Change Button.
b) Point to the appropriate Machine Controller name, and click the OK Button.
4. Changing Transfer Drives for Other Media
If the transfer source or destination is a magneto-optical disk or other medium, the drive
number and path name can be changed.
Transfer Menu. The folder name can also be changed by clicking the Change Button.
b) Set a new drive number and transfer path name in the dialog box, and click the OK
Button.
2-29
Manager Functions
Starting Transfer
The procedure to start transfer is given below.
1. Click File (F) and then Execute (S) on the File Transfer Menu.
2. A start file transfer confirmation message box will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to
continue.
3. Once the transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message box
will be displayed. Click the OK Button in the message box.
INFO The screen display will return to the All Load/Dump/File Compare Window when the file transfer has
been completed.
2
Stopping Transfers
The following dialog box will be displayed while files are being transferred. Click the Can-
cel Button to stop the transfer.
Transfer Errors
The Error List Window will be displayed if an error is generated during transfer. Click the
Cancel Button to close this window, and click View (V) and then Error List (I) on the File
Transfer Menu to display this window again.
Data listed in the Data Name column must be transferred again. Check the error and retrans-
fer the data.
Individual File Transfers

This function differs from All File Transfer in that individual files are selected for transfer.
Opening Individual File Transfer Windows

Select File (F), Transfer (T), and then Individual File Transfer (I) to display the Individ-
ual File Load/Dump/Compare Window.
2-30
2.1 File Manager
2
Setting Details
Source If the transfer source is a hard disk, floppy disk, or magneto-optical
disk, the source directory name will be displayed.
If the transfer source is a Machine Controller, communications infor-
mation for the source Machine Controller and the Machine Control-
ler type will be displayed.
Destination If the transfer destination is a hard disk, floppy disk, or magneto-
optical disk, the destination directory name will be displayed.
If the transfer destination is a Machine Controller, communications
information for the destination Machine Controller and the Machine
Controller type will be displayed.
Transfer Mode Select the transfer mode.
Change:If a directory with the same name exists at the destination, it
will be overwritten.
New:If a directory with the same name exists at the destination, that
directory and its contents will be deleted, a new directory created,
and the file transferred.
The transfer mode will be Change if the transfer is for a Machine
Controller. The combo box menu for the transfer mode cannot be
changed.
DWG to Motion Select the type of file to be transferred.
Program Click File (F) and then Clear (W) in the File Transfer Window to
clear transfer file type settings.
2-31
Manager Functions
Menu Commands

File (F)
Execute (S) Starts transfer of all files.
Clear (W) Deletes the settings for the transfer files.
View (V)
Error List (I) Reopens the error window.
2 Change Source (O) Changes the transfer source.

Change Destination Changes the transfer destination.
(R)
Help (H)
Changing Transfer Source and Destination

The Machine Controller or floppy disk used in the transfer can be changed. Refer to Chang-
ing Transfer Source and Destination under page 2-27 All File Transfer Window.
Detailed Data Settings

If a Details Button is displayed to the right of a file type, detailed data settings must be made
for that type of file.
Click the Details Button to display the Detail Data Set Window for that type of file. Make
the data settings and click the OK Button to save the settings.
The procedure to make detailed data settings is given below.
1. DWG Detail Data Set Window
Select the drawing program to be transferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all drawing programs for transfer.
2. FUNC Detail Data Set Window
Select the function programs to be transferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all function programs for transfer.
3. Table Data Detail Window
Select the table data to be transferred.
If Table Data Transfer is selected, column attribute definitions and table data will be
transferred. If not selected, both column attribute definitions and table data are trans-
ferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all table data for transfer.
2-32
2.1 File Manager
4. Constant Tables (C registers) Detail Data Set Window

Select the C register tables to be transferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all C register tables for transfer.
5. Motion Main Program Detail Set Window
Select the motion main programs to be transferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all motion main programs for transfer.
6. Motion Sub Program (Subroutine) Detail Set Window
Select the motion subroutines to be transferred.
Click the Select All Button to select all motion subroutines for transfer.
Starting Transfer 2
The procedure to start individual file transfers is given below.
1. Select File (F) and then Execute (S) in the File Transfer Menu.
2. A file transfer start confirmation message box will be displayed. Click the Yes (Y) But-
ton to continue.
3. When transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message box will
be displayed. Click the OK Button to finish.
Table 2.2
All File Transfer Individual File Transfer

Transfer File
Load Dump File Transfer Load Dump File Transfer
DWG (program) Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
FUNC (program) Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Table Data Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Constant Table (C REG) Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
FBD Menu Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
System Configuration Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Application Information Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Module Configuration Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Type Definition No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
Scan Time Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Data Trace Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Failures Definition Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Group Definition Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Motion Parameters Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Motion Main Program Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Motion Sub Program Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
M Register Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
S Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
I Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
O Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
2-33
Manager Functions
All File Transfer Individual File Transfer

Transfer File
Load Dump File Transfer Load Dump File Transfer
D Register Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
DWG (comments) No (Yes) No (Yes)
FUNC (comments) No (Yes) No (Yes)
User Menu - - - -
Note: Yes: Defaults, but the specification can be canceled.
(Yes): Must be selected if required for transfer.
No: Cannot be transferred.
-: Not supported in the current version.
Continuous Transfers
2
Multiple Machine Controller programs or definition data files can be transferred.
Continuous Transfer Window

The Continuous Transfer Window that is used when multiple Machine Controller programs
or definition data files are transferred is shown below.
Setting Details
Transfer Mode Select the transfer mode.
Change: If a directory with the same name exists at the destina-
tion, it will be overwritten.
New: If a directory with the same name exists at the destina-
tion, that directory and its contents will be deleted, a
new directory created, and the file transferred.
The transfer mode will be Change if the transfer is for a Machine
Controller. The combo box menu for the transfer mode cannot be
changed.
Type of File to be Select the type of files to be transferred.
Transferred All of the files on the selected Machine Controller will be selected.
2-34
2.1 File Manager
Continuous File Transfer Menus

File (F)
Execute (S) Starts continuous file transfer.
View (V)
Error List (I) Reopens the Error Window.
Change Transfer Drive Changes the transfer drive.
(D)
Help (H)
2
Changing Transfer Drives

Change the transfer drive when the files to be transferred are in the Other Media category.
The procedure to change the transfer drive is given below.
1. Click View (V) and then Change Transfer Drive on the File Transfer Menu.
2. Select the drive number in the Select Drive Dialog Box and click the OK Button.
Starting a Transfer
The procedure to start continuous file transfers is given below.
1. Select File (F) and then Execute (S) on the File Transfer Menu.
2. A file transfer start message confirmation box will be displayed. Click the Yes (Y) But-
ton to continue.
3. When transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message box will
be displayed. Click the OK Button to finish.
Saving in and Comparing with Flash Memory

Flash Memory Save/Compare Window
The window used to transfer files between the Machine Controller memory and the Flash
Memory is shown below.
2-35
Manager Functions
2
Setting Details
CPU The communications information for the CPU with which the trans-
fer will be made and the type of Machine Controller is displayed.
Status When transfer is being executed, the status will be "Running." When
transfer is completed, the status will be "Completed Normally."
INFO The function for saving and comparing files between the Machine Controller and flash memory is not
available in offline mode.
Flash Memory Transfer Menus

The menus displayed on the Flash Memory Transfer Window are shown in the following
table.
Table 2.3 Flash Memory Transfer Menus

File (F)
Execute (S) Starts saving to flash memory or comparing to
flash memory.
Exit (E) Closes the File Memory Transfer Window.
View (V)
Change CPU (C) Changes the transfer CPU.
Help (H)
2-36
2.1 File Manager
Changing the Transfer CPU

The communications information and the transfer CPU can be changed. For details, refer to
"All File Transfer Window."
Click File (F) and then Change CPU (C) on the pull-down menu.
Starting a Transfer
The procedure to start file transfer between the Machine Controller and the flash memory is
given below.
1. Click File (F) and then Execute (S).
2. Click the Yes Button in the message box that is displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box that is displayed when the transfer has been 2
completed.
INFO To compare flash memory, stop Machine Controller operation and start the comparison immediately
after saving the flash memory. Comparison errors may be generated for the D register if the compari-
son is executed while the Machine Controller is operating.
Closing the File Transfer Window

The procedure to close the File Comparison Window is given below.
1. Click File (F) and then Exit (E) on the File Transfer Menu.
2. The File Transfer Window will be closed.
INFO Log on again to the CPU when files that may change the User Management file are transferred.
2.1.11 Configuration
The Configuration Window is used to set the CP-717 system environment.
Opening the Configuration Window

Select View (V) and then Configuration (C) from the menu bar.
2-37
Manager Functions
2
Configuration of the Configuration Window
The Configuration Window consists of tab pages and command buttons for each function.
Tab Page Details

Start up Not currently supported.
Controller type Displays the models of controller compatible with the CP-717.
Functional setup Sets write protect, etc.
File manager Not currently supported.
Engineering manager Sets the conditions for opening ladder programs.
User menu Not currently supported.
User management Registers default user names and passwords for logging on.
File transfer Sets the default drive for other transfer destinations.
Other Sets the communications process timeout value.
Operation Button Details

OK Updates system environment infor-
mation. Enabled from the next time
the system is started.
Cancel Disables the operation.
Reset Resets all set values to their initial
values.
Controller Type Tab Page

The PLC models that can be currently operated are displayed.
2-38
2.1 File Manager
Functional Setup Tab Page

Function
Details Default
Specification
Monitor Mode When turned On, the user cannot write files to the Off
(Write protected) Controller.
Server Not currently supported. ---
appointment
Client Not currently supported. ---
appointment
Ladder This function changes ladder programs created using On
conversion the CP9200H to ladder programs that can be used by
function the CP-9200SH.
Function Key Set whether to enable or disable the function keys. On 2
Total number of Select the number of function keys on the keyboard 12
function Keys (10 or 12).
Engineering Manager Tab Page

Function
Details Default
Specification
Default Not currently supported. ---
Retain settings Not currently supported. ---
after closing
Monitor ON/OFF Set whether to enable or disable the Get Current Enable
Value ON/OFF function while the ladder program is
open.
Monitor start Set whether or not to get current value when ladder Yes
when open program is open.
window
The number of Set the number of ladder programs that can be 5
ladder program opened simultaneously (2 to 16).
windows
INFO 1 Get Current Value

This function reads and displays the current value in the register when online. Although a real-time
system is required, a load is applied to the system when multiple ladder programs are open. For exam-
ple, when multiple ladder programs are open, attempting to open a queued ladder may require more
time than expected.
This phenomenon can be avoided by using the Display Current Value ON/OFF function.
When a ladder program is opened in online mode, the Get Current Value ON/OFF Button is displayed
in the top right of the ladder program editing window (when the Get Current Value ON/OFF function is
enabled).
Use this button to turn ON and OFF get current value processing.
2-39
Manager Functions
DWG No. X
Start Stop
Ladder logic program
While the ladder program is open, the ON/OFF function can be specified using "Monitor ON/OFF."
2 Number of Open Ladder Programs
A maximum of 16 ladder programs can be open simultaneously, but time may be required to open
2 them, depending on the personal computer's memory resources.
User Management Tab Page

Use this tab page to register the default user name and password.
When logging on to the Controller from the CP-717, the user name and password registered
using this tab page will be used unless a default user has been specified.
This value is normally enabled, so once registered, there is no need to enter a user name and
password when logging on.
File Transfer Tab Page

Alternative Default Drive for All Transfers
Set the drive letter of other transfer destinations (e.g., MO drive).
M Register Clearing Setup During All Load File Transfer

Set whether or not to clear the contents of the M register to zero when loading all files.
Overwrite Message
Set whether to enable or disable the Overwrite message when transferring files.
Other Tab Pages

Communication Timeout
Set the communications process timeout value in milliseconds.
Path for Online Monitor Animation File

The animation file, which shows that the system is connected online, are displayed. The ani-
mation file name is displayed here.
2-40
2.2 Engineering Manager
This section explains how to start the Engineering Manger and the role it plays.
2.2.1 Automatic Startup
The Engineering Manager is automatically started as a result of operations performed in the

File Manager. It cannot be started independently. If certain programming tools are called
from the File Manager, the Engineering Manager is started first, and then the function win-
dow for the programming tool is opened in the Engineering Manager. All function windows
are managed under the Engineering Manager.
CP-717 File Manager

2
Directory
tree
Click File (F) and then Open (O), or double-click a

file in the directory tree display area.
CP-717 File Manager

Directory
tree Engineering Manager
XXX . . .XX (Function window) The programming tool allo-

cated to the specified file is
PT#... (Login information) opened, and the contents of
the file are displayed.
The contents of the file are
displayed. (This area will be
blank for new files.)
∗ The file program that is opened from the File Menu will depend on the
type of file or folder that was opened.
2-41
Manager Functions
2.2.2 Basic Functions
The following screens are displayed when the Motion Editor is opened from the File Man-
ager.
1. Start the Motion Editor from the File Manager.
2. Click Motion Editor (E) from the File Menu, as shown in the above screen, or double
click the MPM001 file to open the Engineering Manager (large window) and the
Motion Editor (small window) as shown below.
Selection
3. If the Motion Editor is closed at this stage, only the Engineering Manager Window will
be displayed.
The Engineering Manager Window
2.2.2 Basic Functions
All of the functions called using the Engineering Manager can be selected by clicking File
(F) and then Open (O).
2-42
Position Monitor
(P), Task Monitor
(T), Motion Alarm
(A), and the menu
are displayed
only when online.
Several function windows can be open at once, and the window to be used can be activated
as needed.
2.2.3 Basic Menus

2
The basic menus are active when no function windows are open, i.e., they are active when
no function windows are displayed in the Engineering Manager Window.

File (F)
File Manager (F) Opens the File Manager.
Open (O)
Definition (D)
Module Configuration (M) Define the Modules.
System Configuration (S)
Scan Time Setting (T)
Application Info. (I)
Data Trace (D)
Fault Monitor (F)
Group Definition (G)
Motion Parameter (P) *1
Drawing (D)
Open New DWG (O) Calls sequence programming tools.
Properties (R)
Main Program (L)
SFC Flow Chart (S)
SFC Time Chart (T)
SFC Action Box (B)
Constant Table (# Reg) (H)
Constant Table (M Reg) (M)
I/O Convert Table (C)
Interlock Table (I)
Part Composition Table (A)
Tuning Panel (P)
2-43
Manager Functions
2.2.4 Function Windows

Tool (T)
Register List (C) Calls programming support tools.
Cross Reference (X)
Disable Coil List (D)
Comment List (C)
Register Replace (S)
C Register (C)
C Register Map (M) Displays C registers.
Data Table Definition (G)
Table Data Map (L) Displays table data.
2 Motion Program (M)
Motion Editor (E) Calls motion programming tools.
Position Monitor (P)*2
Task Monitor (T)*2
Motion Alarm (A)*2
Print (P) Prints data.
Exit (X) Closes the Engineering Manager.
View (V)
Tool Bar (T) Displays and hides the Tool Bar.
Status Bar (S) Displays and hides the Status Bar.
Help (H)
∗ 1. Motion Parameters (M) is only displayed when the MP930 is used.

∗ 2. Position Monitor (P), Task Monitor (T), and Motion Alarm (A) are
active only when online.
2.2.4 Function Windows
More than one function window can be open at the same time in the Engineering Manager.
The menus differ for each function window. The menu for the active function window will
be displayed. Refer to the explanations for each function window menu.
In the following diagram, the Motion Editor and Scan Time Windows are open. The Engi-
neering Manager uses the Motion Editor Menu because the Motion Editor is the active func-
tion window. The menu will switch to the Scan Time Menu if the Scan Time Window is
made active.
2-44
Currently displaying
the main menu for the
Motion Editor.
Active function
window
Window Configuration
This section explains the basic configuration of function windows.
Window Title System Path PLC Online/Offline Title bar
PT#: UT#: ... Indicator Login information
Client area
Title Bar
Display Details
Window Title Displays the title of the function window after the icon.
System Path Displays the path information from the group name to the PLC
folder.
PLC Displays the connected Controller name.
Online/Offline Displays whether currently online or offline.
2-45
Manager Functions
2.2.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager
Login Information
The login information is displayed under the title bar. When logging in while offline,
hyphens are displayed for the number.
Display Details
PT# Displays the communications logical port number.
UT# The MP900 Series unit number is fixed at 1.
CPU# Number of the CPU currently logged in.
Indicators Displays the animation data when online.
Client Area
2
The function window internal information is displayed in the client area. Refer to each win-
dow for details.
2.2.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager
The procedure to exit the Engineering Manager is given below.

1. Close all open function windows.
2. Close the Engineering Manager by selecting File (F) and then Exit (X).
No confirmation message will be displayed.
Be sure to close the Engineering Manager. If the Engineering Manager is not closed, the
logoff operation will not be possible.
2-46
2.3 List and Print Managers
2.3.1 Basic Outline of the List and Print Managers
Use this manager to print lists and details of motion programs, ladder programs, registers,
and definition files managed by the CP-717.
Print processing is executed by the List Manager and Print Manager.
The List Manager is equipped with a print cancellation function for print jobs that are
queued, and a print status is displayed at the same time as actually printing data requested
from the Print Manager.
The Print Manager edits data selected via the user interface and requests print jobs to the
List Manager.
2
*1
Print
List Manager
*2
Program file Print Manager Machine Controller
definition file
Hard disk
(Data transfer)
∗ 1. The List Manager starts when the Print Manager Window is first
opened. The List Manager is an independent window, as print jobs can
also be requested from applications other than the CP-717. Conse-
quently, when the CP-717 finishes, the List Manager must be closed
manually.
∗ 2. Data for printing is stored on the Engineering Tool hard disk. To print
data stored on the Machine Controller, the data must be transferred to
the hard disk using the transfer function (dump). In normal operations,
however, Machine Controller and hard disk data are the same, so no
transfer is necessary.
2.3.2 List Manager
The List Manager is the tool used to display the printing status and cancel printing jobs.
Opening the List Manager Window

The List Manager can be opened from the Print Manager.
2-47
Manager Functions
2.3.3 List Manager Window Menus
To open the List Manager, select Print (P) and then Printing Status (D) on the Print Man-
ager Menu, or click the List Manager icon on the task bar. The print status window will
open.
2 Alternatively, click the List Manager icon.
List Manger icon
INFO The List Manager is started automatically when the Print Manager is opened. If the Print Manager has
never been opened, the List Manager will not have been started, and so will not be registered on the
task bar. The List Manager cannot be started independently.
2.3.3 List Manager Window Menus
Table 2.4 List Manager Window Menus

File (F)
Cancel (C) Cancels printing jobs.
Exit (X) Ends printing of the CP-717 document.
View (V)
Help (H)
2-48
Displaying Printing Status

The current printing status is displayed in the List Manager Window.
Display Details
No. Displays the queue number of queued printing jobs.
Status Preparing for print.: The printing data is being converted to a
printing image.
Print job cancelled.: The printing job has been cancelled.
Print Folder Group name, order name, PLC name, CPU number, and print setting
file title are all displayed.
Cancelling Printing Jobs 2

The procedure to cancel printing jobs is given below.
1. Select the printing job to be cancelled.
2. Select File (F) and then Cancel (C) on the List Manager Menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box.
The printing job selected in step 1. will be cancelled.
2.3.4 Print Manager
Opening the Print Manager Window

Opening from the File Manager
Click a Machine Controller folder, CPU folder, or a drawing folder under within these fold-
ers on the directory tree. Select File (F) and then Print (P) on the File Manager Menu. The
Print Manager is started and the Print Manager Window is opened.
Opening from the Engineering Manager

Select File (F) and then Print (P) on the Engineering Manager Menu to start the Print Man-
ager and open the Print Manager Window.
2-49
Manager Functions
2.3.4 Print Manager
INFO The Print (P) command under the File (F) Menu in Ladder Logic Program Windows prints the main
program displayed in the window. Accordingly, the Print Manager is not started.
Print Manager Menus

Table 2.5 Print Manager Menus

File (F)
Read (R) Reads printing settings files.
2 Save (S) Saves printing settings data.
Delete (D) Deletes printing settings files.
Exit (X) Closes the Print Manager.
Edit (E)
Date (D) Sets the current date.
Copy History (N) Copies revision history data.
Print (P)
Execute Print (E) Executes printing.
Printing Status (D) Displays the printing status.
View (V)
Next Page (N) Displays the next tab page.
Back Page (B) Displays the previous tab page.
Help (H)
Print Window Tab Pages

The Print Manager Window has the four tab pages shown below.
Table 2.6 Print Manager Window Tab Pages
Tab Page Name Function

Program Sets the printing data for drawing and function programs.
Register Sets printing data for S, I, O, M, and D registers.
Definition Sets printing data for system definitions, transfer definitions, and
other definitions.
Motion Sets printing data for motion programs.
2-50
Program Tab Pages

1. Program Print Settings
Setting Details
O/# Data from the Order No. column in the Application Information
Window is displayed. This data cannot be altered.
This information is printed on the cover page and in the footer of the
document.
DWG No. Enter a drawing number of up to 16 characters.
This data is printed in the header and footer of the documents.
Draw Enter a name of up to 16 characters of the person who created the
drawing.
This data is printed in the Draw column of the document footer.
Date Enter a date of up to 16 characters for when the drawing was created.
This data is printed in the Date column of the document footer.
User Data from the User column in the Application Information Window
will be displayed. This data cannot be altered.
This data is printed in the User column on the document cover page.
Used At Data from the Used At column in the Application Information Win-
dow is displayed. This data cannot be altered.
This data is printed in the Used At column on the document cover
page.
Equipment Data from the Equipment column in the Application Information
Window is displayed. This data cannot be altered.
This data is printed in the Equipment column on the document cover
page.
2-51
Manager Functions
2.3.4 Print Manager
Setting Details
Usage Data from the Usage column in the Application Information Win-
dow is displayed. This data cannot be altered.
This data is printed in the Usage column on the document cover
page.
Selection Status The items to be printed are selected and the selection status indi-
cated.
• : Indicates items that have not been selected for printing.
• : Indicates items that have been selected for printing.
Print Items Printing items are displayed.
Page No. Enter the first and last page numbers to be printed for the printing
item.
2 If the document has more pages than the number of pages specified,
the pages following the page designated as the last page will also be
printed.
Details Detail printing item selections can be made.
Refer to the next section for information on the Details Button.
History Enter revision history data for the printing settings file of up to 64
characters.
Up to 20 pieces of revision history data can be entered. Select Edit
(E) and then Copy History (N) on the Print Menu to copy revision
history data from the current tab page to revision history data on
another tab page.
2. Detailed Settings for Programs

Detailed printing settings are required for items that have a Details Button to the right of
the printing item. Click the Details Button, and then set the print details.
a) Detailed Settings for Drawing Lists
Select the Print Class Window and designate the drawing trees and drawing lists for
printing.
Check Item Details

DWG Tree Prints drawing trees, which are drawing levels displayed in a
directory tree format.
DWG List Prints a list of drawings.
b) Detailed Settings for Drawing Programs

Select either Select All or Individual Select in the DWG Program List Detail Win-
dow.
Check Item Details

Select All Prints all drawing programs.
Individual select Selects and prints individual drawing programs from the list box.
Type Button Displays the Select Print Class Dialog Box to select the type of
drawing program to be printed. Only the selected data will be
printed.
2-52
c) Detailed Settings for Function Programs

Designate Select All or Individual Select using the Function Program List Details
Window.
Check Item Details

Select All Prints all function programs.
Individual Select Selects individual function programs from the list box.
Type Button Displays the Function Program List Details Dialog Box to select
the type of function program to be printed. Only the selected data
will be printed.
d) Detailed Settings for C Register Constant Tables

Designate either Select All or Individual Select in the C Register Constant Table 2
(Creg) Detail Window.
Check Item Details

Select All Prints all C register constant tables.
Individual Select Selects individual C register constant tables from the list box.
Print Cross Prints the C register cross information.
e) Detailed Settings for Table Data
Designate either Select All or Individual Select in the Table Data Detail Window.
Check Item Details

Select All Prints all the table data.
Individual Select Selects individual table data from the list box. If the table data
exceeds 501, switch the displayed lists of table data in the list box
in units of 500 by pressing the PageUp Key and the PageDown
Key.
2-53
Manager Functions
2.3.4 Print Manager
Register Tab Pages

1. Register Printing Settings
The window configuration is the same as the one for program printing settings. Refer to
page 2-51 1.Program Print Settings.
2. Detailed Settings
the printing item. Click the Details Button to make the detailed settings.
a) Detailed S Register Settings
The whole register range can be selected at a time, and the registers can be sorted and
displayed in the S Register List Details Window.
Button Details
Select All Designates all the S registers.
Delete Move the cursor to the register range to be deleted and click the
Delete Button to delete the register range at the cursor position.
Sort Sorts the entered register range by register number.
b) Detailed Settings for I Registers

Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the I registers to be printed
in the I Register List Details Window.
The method for selecting the register range is the same as for S registers. Refer to
Detailed Settings for S Registers for details.
2-54
c) Detailed Settings for O Registers

Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the O registers to be printed
in the O Register List Details Window.
d) Detailed Settings for M Registers
Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the M registers to be printed
in the M Register List Details Window.
Button Details 2
Map List Prints the M register utilization status list before the M registers.
e) Detailed Settings for D Registers
Designate Select All or Individual Select in the D Register List Details Window.
Check Item Details

Map List Prints the D register utilization status list before the D registers.
Select All Prints all drawing and function program D registers.
Individual Select Selects drawing or function programs, and prints the D registers
used in the selected programs.
f) Detailed Settings for # Registers
Designate Select All or Individual Select in the # Register List Details Window.
Check Item Details

Print Cross Prints the # register cross-reference information before the # reg-
isters.
Print Data Prints the # register data.
Select All Selects and prints all drawing and function program # registers.
Individual Select Selects drawing or function programs, and prints the # registers
used in the selected programs.
Definitions Tab Page

System definition, scan time, module configuration definition, failure monitor definition,
and data trace printing data can be selected.
2-55
Manager Functions
2.3.4 Print Manager
1. Definition Printing Settings
The window configuration is the same as the one for the program printing settings.
Refer to page 2-51 1.Program Print Settings.
2. Detailed Settings for Definitions
the printing item. Click the Details Button and make the detailed settings.
• Detailed Settings for Module Configuration Definitions
Select the slot numbers for the definition data to be printed using the Select Print
Class Window, and then click the OK Button.
INFO Data at RESERVED or UNDEFINED slot numbers is invalid even if selected.
2-56
Motion Tab Page

Motion program and motion parameter printing data can be selected.
1. Motion Printing Settings
Setting Details
Group Select a group. The motion program and other data for the desig-
nated group will be printed.
Selection Status Select the items to be printed.
• : Indicates items that have not been selected for printing.
• : Indicates items that have been selected for printing.
Print Item Displays the items to be printed. The items will be printed in the
Draw column in the document footer.
Page No. Enter the first and last page numbers to be printed for the printing
item. Input a lower number for the first page. If the document has
more pages than the number of pages entered, the pages following
the page designated as the last page will also be printed.
Details Printing item details are selected.
2. Detailed Settings for Motion Parameters and Programs

the printing item. Click the Details Button and make the detailed settings.
• Detailed Settings for Motion Parameters and Programs
Designate Select All or Individual Select in the Motion Program List Details Win-
2-57
Manager Functions
2.3.4 Print Manager
dow.
Check Item Details

Select All Prints all motion programs.
Individual Select Selects and prints individual motion programs.
Print Cross Prints the motion program cross-reference information.
Type Button Select individual MP configuration definitions, MP texts, and
revision histories from the Select Print Class Dialog Box.
Printing
The Print command is executed according to the program, register, definition, and motion
2 tab page settings. The current printing status can be displayed during printing.
Printing Procedure
The procedure to print is given below.
1. Select Print (P) and then Execute Print (E) on the Print Menu.
2. Set the file to be printed and the printing margins in the Execute Print Dialog Box, and
click the Execute Button.
3. Set the printer in the Execute Print Dialog Box and click the OK Button.
INFO Refer to individual printer manuals for information on printing setting details.
Editing Printing Settings Files

Printing settings selected in the Program, Register, Definition, and Motion Tab Pages can be
2-58
saved as files. Such files are called printing settings files.

This section explains how to read, delete and save printing settings files.
Reading Printing Settings Files

Select File (F) and then Read (R) on the Print Menu. In the Read Print Information File
Window, point to the printing settings file to be read and click the OK Button.
Deleting Printing Settings Files

Select File (F) and then Delete (D) on the Print Menu. In the Delete Print Information File
Window, point to the printing settings file to be deleted and click the OK Button.
Saving Printing Settings Files

2
Select File (F) and then Save (S) on the Print Menu. In the Save Print Information File Win-
dow, enter the file name and title and click the OK Button.
INFO Enter a file name of up to 8 characters and a title of up to 48 characters.
2-59
Manager Functions
2.4.1 Starting the Communications Manager
2.4 Communications Manager
The Communications Manager function provides communications services between the engi-
neering Tool and the MP900-series Machine Controllers. The Communications Manager is
called the Communications Process in the CP-717.
The Communications Manager itself supports various physical lines, but the MP900-series Con-
trollers can only support serial communications.
2.4.1 Starting the Communications Manager
Start the Communications Manager by double-clicking the Communications Manager

2 Icon in the applications folder set during installation.
Normally, however, there is no need to start the Communications Manager manually, as it
starts automatically when the CP-717 is started.
2.4.2 Communications Manager Operations
Click the Communications Process icon on the task bar to display the Communications
Process Window.
Use the Communications Manager to update and check the communications parameters, and
to check the communications status.
INFO Do not close the Communications Manager by selecting File (F) and then Exit (X) during online com-
munications, as a communications error will occur.
During communications, keep the Communications Process Window closed.
2.4.3 Closing the Communications Manager
Click the Communications Process icon on the task bar to display the Communications
Process Window.
Select File (F) and then Exit (X) from the menu bar. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the OK Button to continue. The Communications Manager and the communications process
will be closed.
INFO The Communications Manager starts at the same time as the CP-717, but does not close at the same
time. They must be closed separately.
2-60
2.5 User Menu Manager
2.5 User Menu Manager
The User Menu Manager allows you to register a shortcut icon on the desktop for function win-
dows. Once a shortcut icon has been registered, simply click that icon to open the corresponding
function window and execute the function. The user will have to log on after clicking the icon.
User Menu Registration allows users to bypass the startup sequence and open the execution pro-
cesses directly.
INFO The User Menu Manager Window is opened by selecting Tool (T) and then Shortcut Menu (S) from the
File Manager, but is not currently supported. The User Menu Manager shortcut function, however, can
be used by selecting File (F) and then Register User Menu (S) from the menu bar in the Functions
Window. 2
2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons
Click Register User Menu (U) located on the File Menu in each function window. A short-
cut icon will be registered for the function window that is currently active.
The following Register User Menu Dialog Box will be displayed. Input the required infor-
mation. A shortcut icon can be registered simply by inputting the title at each stage.
This information is
also registered in
the system.
2-61
Manager Functions
2.5.2 Starting from a Shortcut Icon
The Register User Menu Dialog Box is displayed when the Motion Editor Window is open.
Input Motion Editor as the title, and click the OK Button to register a shortcut icon like the
one shown below on the desktop.
2.5.2 Starting from a Shortcut Icon
Double-click the shortcut icon on the desktop.

The registered function window will be opened. The user can execute the function immedi-
2 ately.
The original startup sequence can, therefore, be reduced to two steps: using a shortcut icon
and performing the logon operation. Simply click the shortcut icon and log on to open the
Motion Editor. Operability of the CP-717 is greatly improved by using shortcut icons for fre-
quently used function windows.
2-62
3 Module Configuration
Definitions
This chapter explains how to set the operating conditions for Basic Modules
that have already been installed and summarizes the configuration of each 3
Machine Controller. Refer to the following manuals for more details on the
Machine Controllers.
• MP900-series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance

• MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Modules
• MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Communications Modules
3.1 Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3

3.1.1 MP900-series Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation- - - - - - - - - - 3-5

3.2.1 Outline of Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation - - - - - - - - 3-5
3.2.2 Basic Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.4 Module Configuration Definitions Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.2.5 Setting Module Configuration Definitions Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations- - - - - - - - - - - 3-10

3.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
3.4 MP910 Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

3.4.1 MP910 Virtual Module Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
3.4.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.4.4 Opening Individual Module Configuration Definitions Window - - - - - - 3-15
3.4.5 Local I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.4.6 SVB-01 Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
3-1
Module Configuration Definitions
3.5 MP920 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19

3.5.1 MP920 Module Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
3.5.2 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window- - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
3.5.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20
3.5.4 Saving, Deleting, and Closing Module Configuration Definitions - - - - 3-31
3.5.5 Opening Separate Definition Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5.6 General-purpose Serial Communications Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.5.10 260IF Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.5.11 Local I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-69
3.5.12 Digital Input Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-72
3.5.13 Digital Output Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74
3.5.14 Counter I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-76
3 3.5.15 Analog Input Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
3.5.16 Analog Output Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-83
3.5.17 SVA Motion Parameters Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86
3.5.18 PO-01 Motion Parameters Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93
3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
3.5.20 MECHATROLINK Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106

3.6.1 MP930 Virtual Module Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-113
3.6.2 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window- - - - - - - - - - 3-113
3.6.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-114
3.6.5 RS-232C Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-116
3.6.6 MC350-I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-118
3.6.7 MC350-NET Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-121
3.6.8 MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-126

3.7.1 Outline of MP940 Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133
3.7.2 MP940 Virtual Module Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133
3.7.3 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window- - - - - - - - - - 3-134
3.7.4 Setting Module Configuration Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-135
3.7.6 Serial Transmission Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-136
3.7.7 LIO Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-141
3.7.8 SVA Parameter Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-143
3.7.9 CNTR I/O Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-147
3.7.10 MLINK (CERF) Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-152
3.7.11 260IF Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-158
3-2
3.1 Module Configurations
3.1 Module Configurations
3.1.1 MP900-series Module Configurations
The configuration of MP900-series Machine Controllers vary with the application and
include All-in-one Machine Controllers, in which all functions are housed in a single case,
Interface Board Controllers mount in a personal computer, Building-block Machine Control-
lers in which the required basic Modules are mounted to Mounting Bases, and Machine
Controllers integrated with a SERVOPACK.
MP910 MP920
MP930 MP940
Machine
Module Configuration
Controller
MP910 Interface board
MP920 Building block
MP930 All-in-one
MP940 Integrated with SERVOPACK
For Building-block Machine Controllers, Expansion Interface Modules of system bus can be
used to connect up to 4 Mounting Bases (Racks). When multiple building blocks are con-
nected in a single system, the racks are identified by their rack numbers, rack 1 to rack n (n ≤
4) in the Module configuration definitions.
The operation to define Module configurations differs for each Machine Controller. They are
explained here in the following order.
• MP910 Module configuration definitions
3-3
3.1.1 MP900-series Module Configurations

3-4
3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation
3.2.1 Outline of Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation
The Module Configurations Definitions Window consists of individual Module Configura-

tion Definitions Windows, which define individual Modules, and the Module Configuration
Definitions Window, which shows the overall configuration, regardless of the model of
Machine Controller. Select the Module to be defined in the main window to open the indi-
vidual Module Configuration Definitions Windows.
Module configuration definitions

217F definition
Rack settings
Rack 01 ・・・
・・・ 00 01 02 ・・・
SVA definition 3
Module ・・・ 217IF SVA ・・・
Defini- ・・・・・・・・・・・・

tion item
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
...Definition
Module Configuration Definitions Window
(Windows) Individual
Module definitions
3-5
3.2.2 Basic Flowchart
3.2.2 Basic Flowchart
Open Module Configuration Definition

Window
Set and save Module configuration

definition data
Open individual Module Configuration

Definitions Window
Set and save individual Module

definition data
3 NO
All Modules defined?
YES
Close Module Configuration

Definitions Window
3.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Definitions Window

The Module Configuration Definitions Window can be opened from the File Manager or
Engineering Manager.

Open the Definition Folder on the directory tree and double-click Module Configuration.

Select File (F), Open (O), Definition (D), and then Module Configuration (M).
Configura-
tion racks
Slot infor-
mation
Module combinations depend on the Machine Controller.
3-6
3.2.4 Module Configuration Definitions Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands that can be selected in the
Module Configuration Definitions Window.

File (F)
Open (O) Selects or executes another function.
Close (C) Closes the Module Configuration Window.
Regist User menu (U) Registers a shortcut icon on the desktop.
Save (S) Saves definition data.
Delete (D) Deletes definition data.
Delete Slot (Z) Deletes definition data for one slot.
Open Slot (T) Displays the Module Configuration Window for
a slot. 3
Print (P) Prints definition data.
View (V)
Tool Bar (T) Displays the Tool Bars.
Status Bar (S) Displays the Status Bar.
Order (O)
Reset Module (R) Resets a Module.
Window (W)
Cascade (C) Stacks windows in the display.
Tile (T) Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons (A) Lines up icons.
Help (H)
3.2.5 Setting Module Configuration Definitions Data
Definition data is given as follows: Columns (left to right) are slot numbers, and rows (top to
bottom) are setting items.
Setting Item Details

Select Rack and Sets the configuration rack information.
Rack Kind
No. This number shows the slot numbers on the rack.
Module The Module name set in the slots is set automatically.
Control CPU No. Sets the CPU number to control the Modules.
3-7
3.2.5 Setting Module Configuration Definitions Data

Cir No. Sets the circuit number in order from 01 for each Communications
and Motion Module.
Module (Dual) The Dual Modules Setting is not supported in the current version.
Cir (Dual) Dual Transmission Paths Setting is not supported in the current ver-
sion.
Replacement Hot Swapping (removal/insertion under power) is not supported in
the current version.
I/O Start Register Sets the I/O register start (leading) address.
I/O End Register Sets the I/O register ending address.
Input DISABLE Sets to enable/disable inputs.
Blank: Disable specification not allowed, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Output DISABLE Sets to enable/disable outputs.
Blank: Disable specification not allowed, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Motion Start Register Sets the start address for the motion parameters register. This address
is set automatically.
3 Motion End Register Sets the end address for the motion parameters register. This address
is set automatically.
Detail It is not supported in the current version.
Status Displays each Module's status when online.
INFO For detailed items, refer separately to each of the following Machine Controllers.
• MP910 Module configuration
3-8
Saving Module Configuration Definitions

Nothing has been set immediately after installation, so be sure to save the data at least one
time.
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the menu.
2. Verify the message in the message box and click the Yes Button to save the definition
data.
Deleting Module Configuration Definitions

When deleting the module configuration definitions file, the definition files for all the indi-
vidual Modules are also deleted.
1. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) from the menu.
2. Verify the message in the message box and click the Yes Button to delete the definition
data.
3
Ending the Module Configuration Definitions
Select File (F) and then Close (C) from the menu to return to the Engineering Manager Win-
dow.
3-9
3.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows
3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations
Opening from the File Menu

The procedure to open the Module Definitions Window for the slot that has been selected
with the cursor are given below.
1. Click the name of the desired Module.
2. Select File (F) and then Open Slot (T). The individual Module Definitions Window will
be displayed.
Rack 1
No. 00 01 02 ・・・
Module MC350 RESERVED RS-232C
3
・・・
・・・
For example, click here,

and then select File (F) and
then Open Slot (T).
Opening from the Slot Number Row

To open a window directly from its slot number, double-click the slot number of the slot in
which the desired Module is mounted. The individual Module Definitions Window will be
displayed.
Rack 1
No. 00 01 02 ・・・
Module MC350 RESERVED RS-232C ・・・
・・・
For example, click here.
INFO New File Confirmation Window

Attempting to open an individual Module Definitions Window for the first time will display a confir-
mation message that this is a new file. Click the OK Button to proceed.
3-10
3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations
Individual Module Definitions Window Configurations

The basic configuration of individual Module Definitions Windows is shown below.
Definition
PT#...UT#...CPU#... Rack # Slot # Cir. # I/O address
The individual Module Definitions Window will be displayed in the title bar, and the login
information bar, including the following information, will be displayed below the title bar.
Login information items can vary depending on the Module model.
3
Item Details
PT # Displays the logical port number used when online.
CPU # Displays the logged on CPU number when online.
Rack # Displays the rack number to which the Module is mounted.
Slot # Displays the slot number to which the Module is mounted on the
rack.
Circuit # Displays the circuit number allocated using Module configuration
definitions for Communications Modules.
I/O Address Displays the I/O address space allocated to the Module using Mod-
ule configuration definitions.
INFO Individual Module Definition Data Settings

Refer to the following Machine Controllers separately.
• MP910 individual Module definitions
3-11
Saving Individual Module Definitions

Nothing has been set immediately after installation, so be sure to save the data at least one
time.
2. Verify the message in the message box and click the Yes Button to save the definition
data.
Deleting Individual Module Definitions

1. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) from the menu.
2. Verify the message in the message box and click the Yes Button to delete the definition
data.
Closing Individual Module Definitions

3
Select File (F) and then Close (C) from the menu to return to the Module Configuration
Definitions Window.
3-12
3.4 MP910 Module Configuration Definitions
This section explains the parameter settings for the Main Board and the Server Control Board
installed in the personal computer as the MP910.
3.4.1 MP910 Virtual Module Configuration
The MP910 is a Machine Controller installed in a personal computer, and whose essential
basic Module functions are contained in two boards.
The parameter settings for the boards are realized by the same operating environment as the
Module Machine Controllers. Consequently, definitions can be easily understood by assum-
ing that the built-in personal computer construction is a Modular design. If the MP910 is
shown as a virtual Modular design, its configuration is shown below.
Virtual Module Structure
Main
Servo
control MP910 LOCAL HSTIF SVB-01 SVB-01
3
CP717 board I/O
+ board
MC100/ MC101/
MC150 MC151
Open the window shown below according to 3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition
Operation.
Fig 3.1 MP910 Module Configuration Definitions Window
3-13
3.4.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions
Configuration Information
This window consists of tab pages that define the slot details for the racks and the rack set-
tings.
A maximum of a 4-rack Machine Controller can be set using the CP-717, but the MP910 is
restricted to Rack 1settings. Racks 2 to 4 cannot be set.
The number of functional Modules (i.e., number of slots) that can be mounted to a rack is 9
maximum, but the MP910 is installed in a personal computer, so settings are limited to slot
04. Also, the Modules allocated to the slots cannot be changed.
Rack 1:
Slot 00 Slot 01 Slot 02 Slot 03 Slot 04
MP910 LOCAL I/O HSTIF UNDEFINED UNDEFINED
(SVB-01) (SVB-01)
3 3.4.3 Setting Module Configuration Definitions
Configuration Rack Information and Slot Information

MP910 virtual racks are allocated to the tab page for Rack 1.

Select Rack, The MP910 is automatically set to Rack 1 and a short rack.
Rack Kind
No. This number shows the slot numbers in the rack.
Module Automatically set using the Module name set in the slots.
Control CPU No The MP910 CPU is set automatically to 01.
Cir No. In the MP910, LOCAL I/O and HSTIF Modules are automatically
set to 01.
sion.
Replacement Hot Swapping (removal/insertion under power) is not supported in
I/O Start Register Refer to LOCAL I/O and SVB-01 settings.
I/O End Register Refer to LOCAL I/O and SVB-01 settings.
Input DISABLE Sets to enable/disable inputs.
Blank: Enable/disable, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Output DISABLE Sets to enable/disable outputs.
Blank: Enable/disable, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Motion Start Register This is set automatically.
Motion End Register This is set automatically.
Detail Performs MECHATROLINK communications definitions for SVB-
01.
Status This is not currently supported.
3-14
INFO Setting Ranges for the MP910 I/O Start/End Register Numbers
1 0000 to 13FF hex (5,120 words total)
Be sure that the register numbers set for each Module do not overlap with any other Module's register
numbers.
2 With the MP910, standard register numbers have been set for each Module. We recommend using
these standard register number settings.
• LOCAL I/O: 0000 to 0001
• SVB-01: 0100 to 04FF (slot 03)
0500 to 08FF (slot 04)
Automatically set items cannot be changed.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Module Configuration Definitions

3
For the saving, deleting, and closing procedures, refer to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Defi-
nition Operations.
3.4.4 Opening Individual Module Configuration Definitions Window
Set the individual Module definition data for the MP930 using the procedure in 3.3 Basic
Individual Module Definition Operations. Refer to the following for individual Module set-
ting data.
• LOCAL I/O definitions
• SVB-01 definitions
3.4.5 Local I/O Definitions
This section explains the local I/O definitions that are set for virtual slot 01.
MP910 CN1
JEPMC-MC100/
JEPMC-MC150
I/O port
CN2 (LOCAL I/O)
Opening the Local I/O Definition Window

Open the following window by referring to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Opera-
tions.
3-15
Fig 3.2 Local I/O Definitions Window
Local I/O Definition Details

No. Indicates the number of the setting.
Item Indicates the name of the setting and the I/O signal name.
D Controls the register's disable setting. A register is one word in
3 length, so the setting applies to 16 I/O bits. The register is disabled
when a check is displayed in the box.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No. Indicates the I/O register number. In the MP910, the inputs use 5 bits
and the outputs use 4 bits, and the register number allocation is fixed
(IW0000 and OW0001).
Word Indicates the number of consecutive words in the register. In the
MP910, the allocation is fixed at 1 word, so the number of words is
"1."
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan.
• High: High-speed scan
• Low: Low-speed scan
• (NA): No scan specification
Current value In online mode, the current value of the allocated Machine Control-
ler register will be displayed in binary. The current value of “Dis-
crete Output” can be changed and is immediately saved in the
Machine Controller's register when inputs are confirmed. In offline
mode, nothing will be displayed.
HEX Displays the hexadecimal equivalent of the binary values in the cur-
rent value column. In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
REG-No.
The following table shows the default register allocations for group input signals.
For details, refer to 5.2 Group Definitions.
Group Input Signal Register

Auto Mode IB00000
Manual Mode IB00001
Start IB00002
Program Stop IB00003
3-16

Pause IB00004
E-Stop IB00005
Alarm Reset IB00006
Machine Lock IB00007
Debug Mode IB00008
Debug Run IB00009
Skip 1 IB0000A
Skip 2 IB0000B
Local I/O Definition Window (Current Values)
0000 0001 0010 1010 H012A

0000 0000 0000 0000 H0000
3
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Local I/O Definition Data
Refer to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations.
3.4.6 SVB-01 Definitions
This section explains SVB-01 (MECHATROLINK) definitions, which can be allocated to

MP910 virtual slot numbers 03 and 04.
MECHATROLINK Network Outline

The following example provides a conceptual diagram of MECHATROLINK connections.
In this example, Network Servos and an I/O Unit are connected to the MP910 (servo control
board) by high-speed serial communications (MECHATROLINK).
Two MECHATROLINK network systems can be configured in the MP910.
3-17
3.4.6 SVB-01 Definitions
S#1
I/O Unit
YASKAWA
JEPMC-IO350
(IO350)
CN1
IN1 OUT1 IN2 OUT2
Servo control board A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1
SW1
IN2
SW2 IN1
MC101/MC151
OUT2
OUT1
DC24V
DC 0V
MECHATROLINK
14 stations max.
！！！！
3
S#2 S#3 S#3 S#6
SERVOPACKs (SGD-ooAN/SGDB-ooN/SGDH-oooE + NS100 Module)
Fig 3.3 MECHATROLINK Connections Example

In this diagram, a Remote I/O Unit is connected in station 1 (S#1) and SERVOPACKs are
connected in stations 2 through 5 (S#2 through S#5).
SVB-01 and MECHATROLINK Definitions

Refer to 3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters Settings and 3.5.20 MECHATROLINK Definitions.
3-18
3.5 MP920 Module Definitions
This section explains how to select Modules that compose the MP920 Machine Controller and
how to make settings such as disabling I/O registers. After defining the Module configuration
here, make the individual I/O and transmission definitions for each Module.
3.5.1 MP920 Module Configuration
The MP920 is a Building-block Machine Controller and Modules can be assembled as

required with only certain restrictions. Expansion Interface Modules can be used to create a
system with up to 4 racks.
The following diagram shows an example MP920 configuration.
Power Supply
Module MP920
CPU Module SVA-01
Module DI-01
Module DO-01
3
Module
Mounting
Base
(Rack)
The number of Basic Modules can be

increased by mounting an Expansion
Interface Module here and expanding to
another rack.
Open the following window according to the procedure in 3.2 Basic Module Configuration
Definition Operation.
On the MP920, slots 00 to 08 (with a long rack) on racks 1 to 4, the maximum system con-
figuration, must be set. The first time registration is attempted, all Modules will be UNDE-
FINED, so settings must be made from the CPU Module. For details information concerning
racks and slots, refer to the MP920 User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-
2.1).
3-19
Fig 3.4 Initial Registration Window
Configuration of the Module Configuration Definitions Window

This section describes the information displayed in the Module Configuration Definitions
Window and the settings that can be changed in the window. In the following window, sev-
eral Basic Modules have already been set.
Rack
information
Slot
information
3-20
Power Supply
Module MP920 CPU
Module SVA-01
Module DI-01 DO-01
Module Module
The Power
Supply Module Mounting Base
is mounted on (Rack)
the left side of
each rack.
Slots are numbered 0, 1, 2, ... from the left

following the Power Supply Module.
Slot
PS
3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Slot numbers on a long rack)
The Power Supply Module is required, even though it is not displayed in the Module Con-
figuration Definitions Window.
Setting Configuration Rack Information

Select the kind of rack to be connected to the Module. A maximum of 4 racks can be con-
nected to the MP920. Short racks have 6 slots and long racks have 9 slots. Set the configura-
tion rack information depending on the system configuration in use.
Machine Maximum No. of

Remarks
Controller Racks
MP920 4
Rack numbers must be consecutive. For example, it is not possible to jump from rack 1 to
rack 3. When setting two or more racks from rack 1 to rack 4, always define an EXIOIF
Module on each rack.
For example, if Modules from slot 8 onwards are defined using the long configuration, and
this is changed to the short configuration, Modules from slot 8 onwards cannot be edited.
For single CPU configuration and multiple CPU configuration, select "long" or "short."
If changing racks in online mode, execute the change while Machine Controller operation is stopped.
Refer to 2.1.8 Switching the CPU Status for the procedure to stop the Machine Controller.
3-21
Setting Slot Information Columns

This section explains the following setting items for the slot information columns.
• No. • I/O End Register

• Module • Input DISABLE
• Control CPU No. • Output DISABLE
• Cir No. • Motion Start Register
• Module (Dual) • Motion End Register
• Cir (Dual) • Detail
• Replacement (Hot Swapping) • Status
• I/O Start Register ---
No. (Slot Number)
3 Indicates the slot number of the slot in which Modules are mounted.
Slot numbers are determined by the kind of rack for racks 1 through 4. Modules are defined
for slot numbers that are in the long/short rack's range. Slot numbers outside of a rack's
range are listed as "UNDEFINED," and an error will occur when the settings are saved.
Rack Kind Slot Numbers

Long 00 to 08
Short 00 to 05
Module
Set the Module mounted in each slot. Some Basic Modules occupy one slot and others
occupy two slots.
No. of Occupied
Item Module Remarks
Slots
UNDEFINED Not defined 1
MP920 CPU Module 2 Can only be mounted
to slots 00 and 02 on
rack 1.
EXIOIF EXIOIF Module 1
215IF 215IF Module 1
LIO-01 LIO-01 Module 1
AI-01 AI-01 Module 1
AO-01 AO-01 Module 1
DI-01 DI-01 Module 1
DO-01 DO-01 Module 1
3-22
No. of Occupied
Item Module Remarks
Slots
CNTR-01 CNTR-01 Module 1
SVA-01 SVA Module 2 Enabled with Control
PO-01 PO-01 Module 1 CPU number 1.
SVB-01 SVB-01 Module 1

SVA-02 SVA-02 Module 1
When a Module requiring two slots (MP920 or SVA-01) is selected, "RESERVED" will be
displayed in the next slot number's Module row and another Module can't be defined in that
slot. If another Module has already been defined in the next slot, either delete that Module or
define it in a different slot.
The MP920, CPU Modules must be mounted in slots 00 and 02 of rack 1. When a single CPU Module
is used, mount it in slot 00; when two CPU Modules are used, mount them in slot 00 and slot 02.
The following diagram shows a multiple-CPU configuration. 3
PS-03 MP920 CPU-01 MP920 CPU-01 DI-01 EXIOF
DC24V
POWER SW1 SW1 CN1
ON RDY ON RDY RUN RUN
L.RST BATTERY L.RST BATTERY
12 34 5 67 8
12 34 5 67 8
RUN RUN RUN RUN

INIT INIT
TEST ALM TEST ALM
MULTI ERR MULTI ERR
FLASH FLASH CN1 CN2
M.RST BAT M.RST BAT IN OUT
ALM ALM
ON OFF ON OFF
PRT2 PRT2
PORT2 PORT2
PRT1 PRT1
TB1
CN2
+24V
PORT1 PORT1
0V
FG
CN1 CN1
SG
RLY OUT RLY OUT
Slot No. 00 01 02 03 04
Control CPU No.

Input the CPU number of the CPU which controls each Module.
Input "1" to select the CPU Module in slot 0 or "2" to select the CPU Module in slot 2. Input
"1" for a single-CPU configuration. An error will occur when the settings are saved if the
Control CPU Number is set to "2" but there is only one CPU Module.
Input "1" for the SVA, PO-01, and SVB Modules regardless of the CPU configuration.
It is not necessary to input a Control CPU Number for the MP920 CPU Module or an
EXIOIF Module.
An error will occur when the settings are saved if different Control CPU Numbers are set for
Dual Modules.
INFO To use the multiple-CPU configuration, multiple CPUs must be specified when creating a new PLC
folder with the File Manager. See 2.1 File Manager for details.
1. CPU Configuration
a) Single/Multiple CPU
There are two CPU configurations: The single CPU configuration and the multiple
3-23
CPU configuration. The CPU configuration can be defined by setting the Modules as
shown in the following table.
Rack Number Slot Number MP920

1 00 MP920 MP920
1 01 RESERVED RESERVED
1 02 Desired Modules MP920
1 03 RESERVED
1 04 Desired Modules
1 05
1 06
1 07 or greater
Ø Ø
Single CPU Multiple CPUs
3 b) CPU Rack
Define the MP920 CPU Module in slot number 00 (and 02 for a multiple-CPU con-
figuration) of rack 1 and define other Modules in slot 02 and later slots (slot 04 and
later slots for a multiple-CPU configuration). An error will occur when the settings
are saved in the following cases:
• If a CPU Module is not defined in slot 00 of rack 1.
• If the multiple-CPU configuration has been set in the CP-717 File Manager Win-
dow, but only one CPU Module is set in the Module Configuration Definitions
Window.
c) Other Points
Defined Modules cannot be changed when one of the CPUs in a multiple-CPU con-
figuration is in RUN state, but Modules can be added and deleted. For example, when
a Module such as a 217IF Module is defined in a slot that was occupied by a 215IF
Module, the previous Module's definition data (the 215IF transmission definition
parameters) will be deleted.
2. Control CPU Number Setting and Module Operation
A multiple-CPU configuration requires setting the CPU numbers to control the Mod-
ules.
• Control CPU Number = 1
Control CPU: CPU Module in slot 0 (CPU #1)
Non-Control CPU: CPU Module in slot 2 (CPU #2)
• Control CPU Number = 2
Control CPU: CPU Module in slot 2 (CPU #2)
Non-Control CPU: CPU Module in slot 0 (CPU #1)
a) Module Initialization
The following Modules are initialized by the Control CPU. The non-control CPU
does not perform any initialization processing on any Modules.
3-24
Compatible Modules are as follows:

• 215IF, 217IF, 218IF, 260IF, LIO-01, AI-01, AO-01, CNTR-01, DI-01, DO-01,
SVA-01/02, PO-01, SVB-01
b) Link I/O Processing
A 215IF Module's I/O scan is executed in synchronization with the control CPU's
scan.
The only compatible Module is the 215IF Module.
c) Local I/O Processing
For the following Modules, the I/O scan is executed in synchronization with the con-
trol CPU's scan.
Compatible Modules are as follows:
• LIO-01, AI-01, AO-01, DI-01, DO-01, CNTR-01
d) Message I/O Processing
For the following Modules, messages can be input and output by using the system 3
functions (MSG-SND and MSG-RCV) in the control CPU.
Compatible Modules are as follows: 215IF, 217IF, 218IF, and 260IF.
• Master (Send):
Messages can be sent using the MSG-SND function in the control CPU.
• Slave (Receive):
Messages specified for the CPU number are received using the MSG-RCV func-
tion in the control CPU. With the 217IF Module, the CPU number is not speci-
fied in messages, so the receiving CPU can be selected by controlling the MSG-
RCV function startup in the application.
e) Motion Control
The SVA-01/02, PO-01, and SVB-01 Modules can perform motion control. Motion
can be controlled only for Control CPU #1. Only CPU #1 can be displayed and set in
the Motion Parameter Window, but it is possible to program motion I/O with CPU
#2's drawing/function programs or display and set the motion I/O registers in the reg-
ister list.
Compatible Modules are as follows: SVA-01/02, PO-01, SVB-01.
f) Other Points
• External Interrupt Processing
For the LIO-01, CNTR-01, and DI-01 Modules, external interrupts are controlled
by the control CPU, although the Interrupt Process Drawing (DWG.I) is activated
simultaneously for both the CPUs.
Compatible Modules are as follows: LIO-01, CNTR-01, and DI-01.
• Hot Swapping (Replacement) and Dual Modules
These functions are controlled by the control CPU. Hot swapping is not sup-
ported in the current version for the MP920. The 215IF and EXIOIF Module
support Dual Module operation.
3-25
Cir No. (Circuit Number)

Input each Module's circuit number. When two or more of the same model Module are used,
assign circuit numbers in order (1, 2, 3, ...).
The circuit number for Motion Modules (SVA-01, SVA-02, PO-01, and SVB-01) are han-
dled as Motion Module numbers.
The following table shows the range of circuit numbers that can be input for each Module.
Module Circuit Numbers Module Circuit Numbers

MP920 - AO-01 -
EXIOIF - DI-01 -
215IF 1 to 8 DO-01 -
217IF 1 to 25 CNTR-01 -
218IF 1 to 8 SVA-01 1 to 16
260IF 1 to 8 SVA-02 1 to 16
3 LIO-01 - PO-01 1 to 16
AI-01 - SVB-01 1 to 16
Each 217IF Module uses three circuits, so allow three circuit numbers for each Module by
inputting values 3n+1 (1, 4, 7, ...).
Modules other than the 217IF Module use just 1 circuit per Module, so allow just one circuit
number for each Module by inputting consecutive values (1, 2, 3, ...).
Circuit numbers for Motion Modules (SVA-01, SVA-02, PO-01, and SVB-01) are treated as
Motion Module numbers. The maximum number of Motion Modules that can be used in one
system is limited to 16.
The same circuit number cannot be set for more than one of the same type of Module, in sys-
tems using multiple racks (4 max.).
An error will occur when the settings are saved if the same circuit number is set for more
than one Modules.
Module (Dual) (Dual Modules)

Some Modules can be set as Dual Modules to improve reliability.
The following table shows the Modules for which can be set as Dual Modules.
Module Specification Module Specification

MP920 No AO-01 No
EXIOIF Yes DI-01 No
215IF Yes DO-01 No
217IF No CNTR-01 No
218IF No SVA-01 No
260IF No SVA-02 No
LIO-01 No PO-01 No
AI-01 No SVB-01 No
3-26
1. Dual Module Setting

When setting a Dual Module, the same type of Module must be defined in another slot
and the Dual Module setting for the Modules must be set to "Enable."
2. Dual Setting Error
An error will occur when the settings are saved if Dual Modules are set but there are not
two Dual Modules, i.e., if there is just one Module or more than two Modules.
3. Dual Transmission Paths
With 215IF Modules, it is possible to specify a dual transmission path. The Dual Mod-
ule setting must also be made for the dual transmission path.
Cir (Dual) (Dual Transmission Paths)

Sets a dual 215IF transmission path.
Replacement (Hot Swapping)

3
Hot swapping (removal/insertion under power) is not supported in the current version.
I/O Start Register

Inputs the leading register number for each Module's I/O.
• Register Ranges
The following table shows the fixed range of registers for each Module.
Table 3.1 Register Ranges
Module Minimum Number of Words Maximum Number of Words

MP920 - -
LIO-01 - -
215IF 0 Hex 800 Hex
217IF - -
218IF - -
260IF - -
LIO-01 1 Hex 10 Hex
AI-01 1 Hex 8 Hex
AO-01 1 Hex 4 Hex
DI-01 1 Hex 4 Hex
DO-01 1 Hex 4 Hex
CNTR-01 1 Hex 40 Hex
SVA-01 400 Hex 400 Hex
SVA-02 400 Hex 400 Hex
PO-01 400 Hex 400 Hex
SVB-01 400 Hex 400 Hex
3-27
When the leading register number of the register range is input, the default ending register
will be calculated automatically by adding the fixed register range for each Module to the
leading register number. A value of "-" can be input to set the register range to 0. (The dis-
play will show "-----" when the register range is 0.)
An error will occur when the settings are saved if a value that exceeds the register range has
been input.
An error will occur when the settings are saved if Dual Modules has been set but the Mod-
ules have different register ranges.
INFO With the SVA-01, SVA-02, PO-01, and SVB-01 Modules, the circuit number is also the Servo Module
number and the register range is fixed according to that Motion Module number. This fixed register
range is not displayed in the I/O Start Register and I/O End Register columns, but in the Motion Start
Register and Motion End Register columns.
Details on register ranges for the above Modules are displayed in the 3.5.17 SVA Motion Parameters
Settings, 3.5.18 PO-01 Motion Parameters Settings, or 3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters Settings.
3
I/O End Register
Inputs the ending register number for each Module's I/O. See Table 3.1 Register Ranges on
the previous page for details.
Input DISABLE
Controls the Input Disable setting for each Module.
• Blank:Disable specification not allowed.
• D: Inputs disabled.
• E: Inputs enabled.
The following table shows the Modules in which I/O can be disabled.
Module Specification Allowed Module Specification Allowed

MP920 No AO-01 Yes
EXIOIF No DI-01 Yes
215IF No DO-01 Yes
217IF No CNTR-01 Yes
218IF No SVA-01 No
260IF No SVA-02 No
LIO-01 Yes PO-01 No
AI-01 Yes SVB-01 -
Output DISABLE
Controls the Output Disable setting for each Module. See Input DISABLE above for a table
listing the Modules in which I/O can be disabled.
3-28
• Blank:Disable specification not allowed.

• D: Outputs disabled.
• E: Outputs enabled.
Select "D" to disable or "E" to enable.
Modules marked with a "-" in the I/O disabled column cannot be disabled.
An error will occur when the settings are saved if Dual Modules has been set but the Mod-
ules have different I/O DISABLE settings.
Motion Start Register

With Motion Modules (SVA-01, SVA-02, PO-01, and SVB-01), this row displays the motion
parameter register's leading offset address, which is allocated according to the circuit num-
ber (Motion Module number) setting for the Module. The Motion Start Register cannot be
set.
Motion Module Leading Register Number Ending Register Number 3

Number (Motion Start Register) (Motion End Register)
1 C000 C3FF
2 C400 C7FF
3 C800 CBFF
4 CC00 CFFF
5 D000 D3FF
6 D400 D7FF
7 D800 DBFF
8 DC00 DFFF
9 E000 E3FF
10 E400 E7FF
11 E800 EBFF
12 EC00 EFFF
13 F000 E3FF
14 F400 E7FF
15 F800 EBFF
16 FC00 EFFF
Motion End Register

With Motion Modules (SVA-01, SVA-02, PO-01, and SVB-01), this row displays the motion
parameter register's ending offset address, which is allocated according to the circuit number
(Motion Module number) setting for the Module. The Motion End Register cannot be set.
Detail
This heading was provided to indicate a second set of individual definitions when the Mod-
ule assigned to the slot has individual definitions that are divided into more than one group.
For example, both MECHATROLINK Interface Definitions and Servo Parameter Defini-
3-29
tions are required when an SVB-01 Module is assigned, so "M-LINK" will be displayed
under the Detail heading and the Module's MECHATROLINK Definitions can be displayed
by double-clicking M-LINK.
Status
3 The status of each Module will be displayed when the CP-717 is in online mode. Nothing
will be displayed in this row in offline mode. The following table lists the status that is dis-
played.
Display Meaning
No Display A Module has not been defined and no Module is mounted.
Empty A Module has been defined, but no Module is mounted.
Running The Module is operating normally.
Waiting The Module is in standby status.
Breaking An error was detected in the Module.
X "Module name" The mounted Module doesn't match the defined Module.
Waiting a Initialize A Module is mounted, but no Module is defined.
Stopped An LIO-01 Module is stopped.
Stop The Remove Switch is ON, but hot swapping (Replacement) has
(DO NOT REPLACE) been disabled in the Module Configuration Definitions Window.
Replacement Ready The Remove Switch is ON and the RMV indicator is lit.
Running (Control) The Module is operating in Dual Synchronous Operation1 and has
control of the bus.
Running (Standby) The Module is operating in Dual Synchronous Operation but does
not have control of the bus.
1 Dual Synchronous Operation

To increase reliability in RUN mode, two of the same Modules are run simultaneously for redundant con-
trol. The specification can be made for the 215IF and EXIOIF Modules.
3-30
3.5.4 Saving, Deleting, and Closing Module Configuration Definitions
Save, delete, and close Module definitions according to the procedure in 3.2 Basic Module
Configuration Definition Operation.
INFO In a multiple-CPU configuration, the Module configuration definitions cannot be deleted if one of the
CPUs is in RUN state.
Saving or deleting Module configuration definitions in online mode can have a significant effect on
operation. Be sure that it is safe to change the Module configuration definitions before saving or delet-
ing Module definitions in online mode.
3.5.5 Opening Separate Definition Windows

3
Set the definition data for the individual MP920 Modules according to 3.3 Basic Individual
Module Definition Operations. An MP920 Module example is shown below.
INFO When the individual Definition Window of one Dual Module is opened and its configuration data is
saved, the other duplicated Module's configuration data will be saved at the same time.
Table 3.2 Individual Definitions Table
Basic Module Slot

Module Name Reference Item
(Abbreviation) Occupied
MP920 CPU 2 Generic Serial definitions
RESERVED Reserved by system 1 No individual definitions.
Reserved using slot 2 Module.
UNDEFINED Undefined 1 No individual definitions.
EXIOIF System bus expan- 1 No individual definitions.
sion interface
215IF 215IF 1 215IF communications defini-
tions
217IF Serial 1 217IF communications defini-
tions
218IF Ethernet 1 218IF communications defini-
tions
260IF DeviceNet 1 260IF definitions
LIO-01 Local I/O 1 Local I/O communications defi-
nitions
DI-01 Digital input 1 Digital input definitions
DO-01 Digital output 1 Digital output definitions
CNTR-01 Counter 1 Counter I/O definitions
AI-01 Analog input 1 Analog input definitions
3-31
3.5.6 General-purpose Serial Communications Definitions
Basic Module Slot

Module Name Reference Item
(Abbreviation) Occupied
AO-01 Analog output 1 Analog output definitions
SVA-01 4-axis servo 2 SVA settings
SVA-02 2-axis servo 1 SVA settings
PO-01 Pulse output 1 PO-01 settings
SVB-01 MECHATROLINK 1 MECHATROLINK definitions,
I/F SVB definitions
INFO 1 An individual Module Definition Window cannot be opened for slots set to "EXIOIF," "UNDE-
FINED," or "RESERVED."
2 The MP920 Module has two general-purpose serial ports. The Generic Serial Definitions Window will
be displayed when the MP920 is clicked. The general-purpose serial port parameters are the only
parameters set for the MP920 Module.
3 The SVB-01 Module's MECHATROLINK settings must be made before the Motion Parameters. The
3 MECHATROLINK Definitions Window can be opened by double-clicking M-LINK in the Details
row of the Module Configuration Definitions Window.
This section explains the methods for defining general-purpose serial communications sys-
tems.
Outline of Generic Serial Communications

The MP920 is equipped as a standard feature with two RS-232 general-purpose serial ports
(port 1 and port 2), enabling data communications with other Machine Controllers and
devices that support RS-232 communications. Ports 1 and 2 can also be used as engineering
ports for the CP-717.
Here, the hardware and software definitions necessary for serial communications are set.
The Machine Controller operates as a master or slave depending on the protocol and accord-
ing to these settings.
• Generic serial communications 01 and 02: If the MP920 is being used as a slave,
responses are sent automatically in answer to queries from the master. If the MP920 is
being used as a master, communications are started using MSG-SND functions within
the DWG or function programs.
3-32
Self-diagnostic Setting switches

function
Program execution Displays and indica-

control tors (LEDs)
System bus interface

System bus connector
Main memory Status output
(battery backup) (contact outputs)
Program memory Engineering control

(flash memory)
Scan sync control

between multi-CPUs
Option I/O control Option Module man-

agement and control
Transmission
processing 2 RS-232 DSUB-9 PORT2
Generic Serial ports
Transmission
processing 1 RS-232 DSUB-9 PORT1
3-33
Generic Serial Connections Example
1
CP-717
RS-232C MP920
Master Slave
Notebook computer
2
RS-232C MP920
Master Slave
Display panel
3
3 MP920 RS-232C MP920
Master Slave
4
MP920 RS-232C MP920
Master Slave
(port 1)
Slave
(port 2)
Master
Or
CP-717
Display panel
Notebook computer
Opening the Generic Serial Communications Definitions Window

Open the Generic Serial Communication Definitions Window according to 3.3 Basic Indi-
vidual Module Definition Operations.
The general-purpose serial ports are provided on the MP920 CPU Module, so they corre-
spond to the Module for slot 00.
3-34
Fig 3.5 Generic Serial Communication Definitions Window
Generic Serial Communications Definitions

Setting Generic Serial Parameters
Set the required parameters to use the general-purpose serial communications system.
Use the CIR#01 tab to set general-purpose serial 01, and use the CIR#02 tab to set general-
purpose serial 02.
Table 3.3 Generic Serial Communication Definitions Window
Setting Items Details

Transmission Protocol Select the desired protocol.
• MEMOBUS: Yaskawa's standard MEMOBUS protocol.
• MELSEC: Mitsubishi's special protocol (control protocol
type 1) for use with general-purpose sequencers
and computer links.
• No protocol: Data can be transferred at any time by the user
application program.
Master/Slave When the Transmission Protocol has been set to MEMOBUS or
MELSEC, select whether the Machine Controller will operate as a
Master or a Slave.
Device Address Select the device address. When the Machine Controller is being
used as a Master, set the device address to 0. When the Machine
Controller is being used as a Slave, set the device address to a value
between 1 and 63.
Serial I/F Select the serial interface.
(Serial Interface)
3-35

Transmission Mode Select the transmission mode.
• RTU: Specifies RTU mode when the Transmission Protocol is
set to MEMOBUS.
• ASCII: Specifies ASCII mode when the Transmission Protocol is
set to MEMOBUS.
• None: Use for MELSEC, OMRON, and no-protocol transmis-
sions.
Data Length Select the number of bits in one character.
• 8Bit: 8 bits
• 7Bit: 7 bits
Parity Bit Specify whether or not the parity bit will be used.
• Even: Even parity
• Odd: Odd parity
• None: No parity check
Stop Bit Select whether there will be one or two stop bits at the end of the
sending character.
3 • 1stop: 1 stop bit
• 2stop: 2 stop bits
Baud Rate Select the transmission speed (bps).
Sending When Enable is selected, a delay until the beginning of transmis-
(Send Delay Setting) sions (1 to 100 ms) can be set.
• Master Station:
The delay will be included between execution of the MSG-SND
function and the transmission of the command.
• Slave Station:
The delay will be included between reception of a command by
the MSG-RCV function and the transmission of the response.
Setting Slave Interface Registers (Automatic Response)

Specify the ranges of relays, registers, and coils to check when automatically sending a
response message to a query from the master. These settings are valid for slave stations only.
There is no need to set the ranges when message communications will not be performed
between the master and slaves. Also, if the ladder program is being used to return a response
message with the MSG-RCV function, disable the MSG-RCV so that redundant processing
is not performed.
With the system default settings, response messages will be sent using the ranges set with
the following parameters.

Readout of Input Relay With general-purpose serial communications, set the range and start
address of input relays that can be read using serial communications.
Refer to the table below for setting details.
Readout of Input With general-purpose serial communications, set the range and start
Register address of input registers that can be read using serial communica-
tions. Refer to the table below for setting details.
Readout/Write-in Coil With general-purpose serial communications, set the range and start
address of coils that can be read or written to using serial communi-
cations. Refer to the table below for setting details.
3-36

Readout/Write-in of With general-purpose serial communications, set the range and start
Hold Register address of holding registers that can be read or written to using serial
communications. Refer to the table below for setting details.
Write-in width of Coil/ Set the range that can be written to of the coils and holding registers
Hold Register as a whole.
Table 3.4 Start Register Address and Number of Words
Machine Controller
Setting Item
MP920 CP-316 CP-316H CP-916A CP-916G RIO-55
Readout of Leading reg- IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000
Input Relay ister
No. of words 5120 6400 6400 2304 2304 2304
Readout of Leading reg- IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000
Input ister
Register No. of words 5120 6400 6400 2304 2304 2304
Readout/ Leading reg- MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 3
Write-in Coil ister
No. of words 32768 8192 16384 3072 3072 3072
Readout/ Leading reg- MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000 MW00000
Write-in Hold ister
Register
No. of words 32768 8192 16384 3072 3072 3072
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Generic Serial Definitions Data

Refer to the procedures in 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations for details.
3.5.7 215IF Transmission Definitions
This section explains how to define the 215IF transmission system.
Outline of 215IF Transmissions

The 215IF transmission system is a unique real-time Yaskawa network with transmission
speed 4 Mbps. Twisted-pair cable is used for the transmission lines, so an inexpensive but
highly reliable transmission system can be constructed.
The settings required for 215IF transmissions are divided into four tab pages: The Parame-
ter Settings, Link Assignments, I/O Map, and Status Tabs.
There are two kinds of transmissions in a 215IF Transmission System: Link transmissions
and message transmissions. The required settings for the link transmissions are made here.
Link transmissions are repeated every cycle according to the settings made here. Message
transmissions are programmed in drawing/function programs using the MSG-SND and
MSG-RCV functions.
3-37
System Bus Interface

System Bus Connector
Connector
Shared Transmis-
Memory sion Pro- Transmission Interface
cessor
3 Station #1 Station #2
Station #3
Desktop CP717
computer
MP900 215 CP- 215
series □□□
IF IF
215/AT
Network #1
Station #4
215 215 (A Message Relay
IF IF Function is used.)
Network #2
RIO 215 MP900 215

series IF
IF
Note: 1. The network is composed of two segments: Network #1 and Net-

work #2.
2. Station 4 (S#4) uses the 215IF Module's Message Relay Function
to exchange data between Network #1 and Network #2.
3. A 215/AT Interface Card is required in the desktop computer.

Fig 3.6 215IF Network Configuration Example
3-38
Opening the 215IF Transmission Definitions Window

Open the 215IF Transmission Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic
Individual Module Definition Operations.
215IF Transmission Definitions Window Original Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the 215IF Transmission
Definitions Window.

Edit (E)
Default (S) Sets default values.
Assignment Delete (D) Deletes assignment data.
Set (L)
Set DI/DO (S) Allocates DI/DO for the RIO-05.
(Not currently supported.)
3
Setting 215IF Transmission Definitions

The CP-215 Transmission Definitions Window is composed of four tab pages: The Parame-
ter Settings, Link Assignments, I/O Map, and Status Tabs. The following table shows the
settings grouped in each tab page.
3-39
Table 3.5 Tab Pages in the 215IF Transmission Definitions Window
Tab Name Function

Transmission Parameters Sets the 215IF transmission parameters.
(Parameter Settings)
Link Assignment Allocates the 215IF link transmissions.
I/O Map Sets the I/O map.
Status Displays the Link status.
Parameter Settings Tab Page

The Parameter Settings Tab contains the various parameters required to use the 215IF trans-
mission system.

Own Station No. Input the local station number (1 to 64) of the 215IF Module.
3 Own Network No. Input the network number (1 to 254) of the network in which the
215IF Module is connected.
Token1 Cycle Time Input the desired time (5 to 100) for the interval between station
receptions of the token.
Setting*
MEMOBUS Response Input the time to wait (0 to 255) for a response after sending a
Monitoring Time MEMOBUS command by executing the MSG-SND function.
If the time is set between 1 and 255, a timeout will occur after the
time setting x 2 s and the MSG-SND function will return an error.
If the time is set to 0, the MSG-SND function will wait indefinitely
for a response without returning an error.
Station Search Input the number of cycles (5 to 1,000) between each search for a
Interval* new station. A station search will be performed at this interval (once
every 5 to 1,000 token cycles) to determine whether a new station
has been started.
Transmission Speed* Select the 215IF transmission speed (1, 2, or 4 Mbps).
Max No. of Stations Input the maximum number of stations that can be connected (16,
Connected* 32, 48, or 64). This setting is used as an upper limit value during sta-
tion searches. Input a value higher than the local station number
shown in the "Own Station No." box.
1
Token
A token is a piece of data that circulates from station to station in the network and provides each station
with the right to send data. The Token Cycle Time is the time required for the token to make a complete
cycle through the network and return to a given station.
3-40

Message Relay This setting determines whether the 215IF will receive messages
Function from another transmission interface and relay that message through
the 215IF interfaces, i.e., this setting enables or disables the Message
Relay Function.
When not using the Message Relay Function, set to "0." When using
the Message Relay Function, set to "1."
215IF
215IF I /F
Enables/disables
PLC the Relay Function.
I /F
Message Relay Function

No. of Relayed When the Message Relay Function is enabled, this setting specifies
Network 1 the range of network numbers (0 to 254) that can be relay destina-
tions. Messages will not be relayed to networks that are outside of 3
the specified range. The network number in the No. of Relayed Net-
work 1 setting is ORed with the network number in the No. of
Relayed Network 2 setting. The Relay Function will be disabled if
both settings are "0."
No. of Relayed See the explanation for the No. of Relayed Network 1 setting, above.
Network 2
Maintenance Switch These settings are all OFF during operation. These switches are used
for Yaskawa maintenance. Do not change the settings.
∗ For parameter set values and network configuration, refer to the MP920
Machine Controller User's Manual: Communications Module (SIEZ-
C887-2.6).
Setting Default Values

The transmission parameters can be reset to their default values without inputting each
parameter, by selecting Edit (E) and then Default (S) from the 215IF Transmission Defini-
tions menu.
Table 3.6 Default Values of Transmission Parameters
Parameter Default
Own Station No. 0
Own Network No. 0
Token Cycle Time Setting 100
MEMOBUS Response Monitoring Time 0
Station Search Interval 0
Transmission Speed 4
Max No. of Stations Connected 16
Message Relay Function 0
No. of Relayed Network 1 0
No. of Relayed Network 2 0
3-41
Parameter Default
Maintenance Switches SW1 All OFF
SW2
Link Assignments Tab Page

1. Setting Assignment Data
Parameters such as the 215IF I/O assignment data, station name, and synchronous scan
parameters are set in the Link Assignments Tab.

SYNC-SCAN 215IF transmission is always executed. Select the scan frequency at which the
215IF transmission data is to be synchronized with the Machine Controller.
• HIGH: High-speed scan
• LOW: Low-speed scan
ST# Displays the station number. Two asterisks (**) will be displayed for the local
3 station number. The local station number is determined by the number input in
the Transmission Parameter Tab's Own Station Number Box. The station num-
ber displays only the number input in the Transmission Parameter Tab's Max
No. of Stations Connected Box.
3-42

TYPE Select a name for the I/O device connected to each station. The following table
shows the I/O devices that can be selected.
Selected Item I/O Device Name Selected Item I/O Device Name
CP-3500H CP-3500H CP-517 CP-517
CP-316 CP-316 MP920 MP920
CP-916A CP-916A CP-902 CP-902
CP-9200SH CP-9200SH 215IF/INV 215IF/INV
CP-317 CP-317 RIO-05 RIO-05
CP-316H CP-316H RIO-2000 RIO-2000
CP-916G CP-916G RIO-120 RIO-120
ACGC4000 ACGC4000 - -
REG-No., SIZE Set the leading register number (I register number) and amount of I/O data.
Input an O register number for the leading register number of the local station.
Be sure that the registers set for each station does not overlap with the register
numbers for another station. 3
SCAN Select the transmission processing scan that services I/O.
Station Name Comments up to 32 characters can be input for each station.
(Comment)
2. Deleting Assignment Data

The procedure to delete the assignment data for one station is given below.
a) Move the cursor to the row to be deleted.
b) Click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (D) on the 215IF Transmission Defini-
tions Menu.
The assignment data selected in step 1. will be deleted.
I/O Map Tab Page

Allocate the Machine Controller's process I/O (local I/O and remote I/O) in the I/O Map Tab
Page.
3-43

Register Number Each column in the table represents the first digit of the register
numbers displayed on the left side of the table. In the following dia-
gram, the cursor is positioned over bit IB30B03.
I/O Assignments Allocate bits to I/O registers for high-speed or low-speed scan.
• HI: Input set for a high-speed scan.
• HO: Output set for a high-speed scan.
• LI: Input set for a low-speed scan.
• LO: Output set for a low-speed scan.
To allocate I/O, move the cursor to the desired bit and click HI, HO,
LI, or LO at the bottom of the display. An I/O allocation can be
deleted by moving the cursor to the desired bit and clicking DEL at
the bottom of the display.
ST# Displays the station number set in the I/O Assignment Tab.
TYPE Displays the I/O device name set in the I/O Assignment Tab.
1. Limitations on Changing I/O Map Allocations
3 The settings made in advance in the Link Assignment Tab are allocated as defaults for
the high-speed scan I/O and low-speed scan I/O. The following limitations apply when
changing I/O allocations.
• I/O allocation can be deleted.
• The scan speed designation can be changed. (For example, "LI" can be changed to
"HI.")
• The I/O designation cannot be changed. (For example, "LI" cannot be changed to
"LO.")
Status Tab Page

The Status Tab displays the data that the 215IF is actually handling in link transmissions.
The tab only displays the settings; the settings cannot be changed.
3-44

Token Cycle Time, Displays the Token Cycle Time Setting set in the Transmission
Setting, Max. Value, Parameter Tab, as well as the actual maximum and current values. In
Current Value offline mode, data will not be displayed in the "Max. Value" and
"Current Value" boxes.
ST# Displays the station number. Two asterisks (**) will be displayed for
the local station number. The local station number is determined by
the number input in the Transmission Parameter Tab's Own Station
Number Box. The station number displays only the number input in
the Transmission Parameter Tab's Max. No. of Stations Connected
Box.
TYPE Displays the I/O device name set in the Link Assignment Tab.
REG-No., SIZE Displays the leading register number and amount of I/O data set in
the Link Assignment Tab.
SCAN Displays the transmission mode set in the Link Assignment Tab.
LISTS In online mode, the 215IF's link status data is displayed in hexadeci-
mal. In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
The following diagrams show the meaning of the link status data for
other stations and the local station.
3
Station Name Displays the station name set in the Link Assignment Tab.
(Comment)
3-45
a) Link Status Data for Other Stations
F E DC B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Link Transmissions: Reception Length Error

Link Transmissions: Timeout Error
Link Transmissions: Reserved
Link Transmissions: Reserved
Reserved
Link Map Registered Station
Initial Status (Nothing Received Since Reset)
Completed Normal Reception of Link Data
PLC Model Code
(Corresponds to the content
02 ： CP-350H
of the "TYPE" column.)
0D ： CP-317 0F ： CP-916G
： CP-316
02:05CP-350H 110D: ACGC4000
： CP-317 ： RIO-05
C2 0F: CP-916G
05:06CP-316
： CP-916A 1211: CP-517
：ACGC4000 C5 C2:
： RIO-2000
RIO-05
0C ：
06: CP-916ACP-9200SH 0E ： CP-316H
12: CP-517 C6 ： RIO-120
C5: RIO-2000
14 ： MP920
0C: CP-9200SH 16 ： CP-902
0E: CP-316H 62 ： 215IF/INV
C6: RIO-120
14: MP920 16: CP-902 62: 215IF/INV
Fig 3.7 Link Status Data (Other Stations)
3 b) Link Status Data at the Local Station
F E DCB A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MAC Status: LSI Error

MAC Status: CD Break
MAC Status: Reserved
MAC Status: Out of Ring (Token Not Received Timeout.)
Local Station Display
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PLC Model Code
(Corresponds to the content of the "TYPE" column.)
02 ： CP-350H 0D ： CP-317 0F ： CP-916G
02:05
CP-350H
： CP-316 0D:
11 ： CP-317
ACGC4000 C20F: CP-916G
： RIO-05
05:06
CP-316
： CP-916A 11:：ACGC4000
12 CP-517 C5C2: RIO-05
： RIO-2000
06:0C
CP-916A
： CP-9200SH 12:
0E ：CP-517
CP-316H C6C5: RIO-2000
： RIO-120
0C:14CP-9200SH
： MP920
0E: CP-316H
16 ： CP-902
C6: RIO-120
62 ： 215IF/INV
14: MP920 16: CP-902 62: 215IF/INV
Saving, Deleting, and Closing 215IF Transmission Definitions Data

3-46
This section explains how to set the parameters for the 217IF Transmission System.

The 217IF Module is a Serial Transmission Interface Module equipped with two RS-232C
circuits and one RS-422/485 interface circuit. Each interface supports various transmission
protocols, beginning with Yaskawa's own MEMOBUS transmission protocol. The RS-232C
CN1 D-sub 9-pin connector can be used as an engineering port. The CP-717 can be con-
nected to perform MP920 engineering.
This section explains the hardware and software settings that must be made for 217IF trans-
missions (serial transmissions). These settings allow the Machine Controller to operate as a
Master or a Slave conforming to each transmission protocol.
217IF transmissions can send and receive data using MSG-SND and MSG-RCV functions
programmed in drawing or function programs. 3
Transmis-
RS-232C DSUB－9 CN1
sion Proces-
sor 1
System Bus
Interface
Shared Transmis-
sion Proces- RS-232C DSUB－25 CN2
Memory sor 2
Transmis-
sion Proces- RS-232C MR－8 CN3
sor 3
3-47

Fig 3.8 217IF Transmission Definitions Window
3-48
Setting 217IF Transmission Definitions

This section explains the various parameters required to use the 217IF transmission system.
The 217IF has tabs for the current circuit and the next two circuits. Click another circuit's tab
to switch to that circuit's Transmission Parameters Window.
The numbers displayed in the tabs at the top of the window (CIR#nn) are the 217IF Module
circuit numbers. Each 217IF Module requires 3 circuits and the same circuit number must
not be used more than once.
Machine Controller Circuit Numbers

MP920 1 to 25

Transmission Protocol Select the desired protocol.
• MELSEC: Mitsubishi's special protocol (control protocol
type 1) for use with general-purpose sequencers
3
and computer links.
• OMRON: OMRON's SYSMAC C-series Host Link proto-
col.
• No protocol: Data can be transferred at any time by the user
application program.
Master/Slave When the Transmission Protocol has been set to MEMOBUS,
MELSEC, or OMRON, select whether the Machine Controller will
operate as a Master or a Slave.
Device Address Select the device address. When the Machine Controller is being
used as a Master, set the device address to 0. When the Machine
Controller is being used as a Slave, set the device address to a value
between 1 and 63.
Serial I/F Select the serial interface.
(Serial Interface)
Transmission Mode Select the transmission mode.
• RTU: Specifies RTU mode when the Transmission Protocol is
set to MEMOBUS.
• ASCII: Specifies ASCII mode when the Transmission Protocol is
set to MEMOBUS.
• None: Use for MELSEC, OMRON, and no-protocol transmis-
sions.
Data Length Select the number of bits in one character.
• 8Bit: 8 bits
• 7Bit: 7 bits
Parity Bit Specify whether or not the parity bit will be used.
• Even: Even parity
• Odd: Odd parity
• None: No parity check
Stop Bit Select the number of stop bits.
• 1stop: 1 stop bit
• 2stop: 2 stop bits
3-49

Sending When Enable is selected, a delay until the beginning of transmis-
(Send Delay Setting) sions (1 to 100 ms) can be set.
• Master Station:
The delay will be included between execution of the MSG-SND
function and the transmission of the command.
• Slave Station:
The delay will be included between reception of a command by
the MSG-RCV function and the transmission of the response.
See the Machine Controller's User's Manual for details on each
parameter's settings.
Slave I/F Register See 3.5.6 General-purpose Serial Communications Definitions for
Settings (Automatic details.
Response)

3
INFO When the Delete operation is executed, the CP-217 Transmission Definitions data settings for all 3 cir-
cuits will be deleted.
This section explains how to set the parameters for the 218IF Transmission System.

The 218IF Module is used to connect the MP920 to 218IF related devices. The 218IF Mod-
ule is equipped with one AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) communications port and
10Base5, 10Base2, or 10BaseT circuits can be connected by an external transceiver.
The 218IF Transmission System can connect to a standard Ethernet system, so other com-
pany's controllers and computers can be connected easily. The CP-717 can be connected to
perform MP920 engineering.
To define 218IF transmissions, the required data settings must be made (or referenced) in 2
tab pages: The Transmission Parameters Tab and the Status Tab.
Mounting a 218IF Module enables the Machine Controller to send and receive data through
an Ethernet transmission line. Only message transmissions are possible in the 218IF Trans-
mission System. Program the MSG-SND and MSG-RCV functions in drawing or function
programs for 218IF transmissions.
3-50
12 VDC

DC/DC
System Bus
Shared Transmission
Interface
Transmis- AUI
Memory sion Proces- Interface Connector
sor

Fig 3.9 218IF Transmission Definitions Window
3-51
The 218IF Transmission Definitions Window Menus

The following table shows the menu displayed in the 218IF Transmission Definitions Win-
dow.

Edit (E)
My Port: TCP/IP Sets local station and TCP/IP.
Setting (M)
Ethernet Address Sets the Ethernet address of the remote station.
Setting (A)
Transmission Sets transmission parameters to default value.
Parameters Default
Setting (D)
Assignment Delete (C) Deletes assignment data.
3 Setting 218IF Transmission Definitions

The CP-218 Transmission Definitions Window is composed of two tab pages: The Trans-
mission Parameters and Status Tabs.
Tab Name Function

Transmission Parameters Sets the 218IF transmission parameters.
Status Displays the transmission status.
Setting 218IF Transmission Parameters

The 218IF Transmission Definitions Window contains the various parameters required to
use the 218IF transmission system.
Parameter Settings Tab Page

Set the transmission parameters and connection parameters in the Transmission Parameters
Tab.

IP Address Input the local station's IP address. Do not used the same address as
another node in the Ethernet system.
Response Time Input the time (0 to 255) that the CP-218 will wait for a response
after sending a command using the system function (the MSG-SND
function). If a response is not received and a timeout occurs, the
transmission will be retried. (The number of retries is set with the
Count of Retry.)
Input 0 for the Response Time if the Count of Retry is set to 0 and
the Protocol Type is set to MEMOBUS.
3-52

Count of Retry Input the number of retries (0 to 255) to attempt when a timeout is
detected after execution of the system function (the MSG-SND func-
tion). An error will be returned for the MSG-SND function if a
response is not received after the command is resent by the setting
number of retries.
Input 0 for the Count of Retry if the Response Time (parameter 3) is
set to 0 and the Protocol Type is set to MEMOBUS.
CNO Displays the connection number (1 to 20).
My Port (Local Input the local station's port number (256 to 65,535) for connections.
Station's Port Number) Be sure to input a port number that is not used for other connections
or for diagnostics. If “0” is input for this parameter, that connection
number's data will be cleared and “-----” will be displayed in the My
Port column.
DST. IP Address Input the remote station's IP address for connections.
(Remote Station's IP The input ranges are different for each field of the DST. IP Address:
Address) • Field No. 1: 0 to 255 (excluding 127)
• Field No. 2: 0 to 255
• Field No. 3: 0 to 255
3
• Field No. 4: 1 to 254
When an unpassive open is being used, input 0 in all four fields.
DST. Port (Remote Input the remote station's port number (0 or 256 to 65,535) for con-
Station's Port Number) nections. Be sure that the DST. IP Address and DST. Port combina-
tion are not the same as those for another connection.
Connect Type Select the transport-layer protocol.
• TCP: Communications operate according to TCP (Transmission
Control Protocol).
• UDP: Communications operate according to UDP (User Data-
gram Protocol).
Protocol Type Select an application-layer protocol that is supported by the remote
station.
• Extended MEMOBUS: Yaskawa's Extended MEMOBUS protocol
• MEMOBUS: Yaskawa's MEMOBUS protocol
• MELSEC: Mitsubishi's special protocol (control protocol type
1) for use with general-purpose sequencers and com-
puter links.
• No protocol: General-purpose message communications. Data can
be sent or received without being processed into con-
tinuous MW registers.
3-53

Code Input the data format that matches the format set in the remote sta-
tion.
• RTU: Specifies RTU mode when MEMOBUS protocol is being
used.
• ASCII: Specifies ASCII mode.
• BIN: Specifies binary mode.
The codes that can be selected depend on the data in the Protocol
Type field. The codes that can be selected are shown below.
Protocol Data Code
Selected RTU ASCII BIN
Extended No Yes Yes
MEMOBUS
MEMOBUS Yes Yes No
MELSEC No Yes Yes
No protocol No Yes Yes
3 DST. Station (Remote Input a station name (comment) for the remote station. The station
Station's Name) name can be up to 32 characters.
INFO 1 The address is made up of 32 bits, as shown in the following diagram. The 4 bytes (8 bits each) are sep-
arated by periods and the byte values are input in decimal.
The bytes are handled as 4 fields: Field No. 1 through Field No. 4 from the most-significant byte
through the least-significant byte.
The input ranges are different for each field:

• Field No. 1: 0 to 255 (excluding 127)
• Field No. 2: 0 to 255
• Field No. 3: 0 to 255
• Field No. 4: 1 to 254
2 We recommend IP addresses 192.168.1.1 through 192.168.1.254 as private addresses, but contact your
company's system administrator for confirmation.
3-54
3 When the DST. IP Address and DST. Port are both set to 0, that connection will be in unpassive open
mode and will connect to a station that accesses it. If more than one station accesses a connection in
unpassive open mode, the connection will connect to the first station that requests access. The second
station will be connected after the first station is disconnected.

The transmission parameters can be reset to their default values without inputting each
parameter, by selecting Edit (E) and then Transmission Parameters Default Settings (D)
from the 218IF Transmission Definitions menu.
Table 3.7 Default Values of Transmission Parameters
Parameter Default
IP Address 192.168.001.001
Response Time 0
Count of Retry (Number of Retries) 0 3
Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000
Gateway IP Address 000.000.000.000
System Port No. (Diagnostic/Engineering Port) 65535
TCP Zero Window Timer Value 3
TCP Retry Time 500
TCP Close Time 60
IP Assemble Time 30
MAX. Packet Length 1500
INFO This operation does not return the remote stations' Ethernet addresses or the connection parameters to
their default values.
Setting Local Station and TCP/IP

The procedure to set the local station and TCP/IP is given below.
1. Click Edit (E) and then My Port: TCP/IP Settings (M) on the 218IF Transmission Def-
initions menu.
2. Set each parameter in the dialog box and click the OK Button at the bottom of the win-
dow.
3-55
3-56
Details of the Local Station and TCP/IP Settings

Subnet Mask 1 Input a subnet mask for the local station's IP address. When the sub-
net mask is not being used, input 0 in fields 1 through 4.
Gateway IP Address2 Input the gateway's IP address when transmitting data between con-
nected networks through a gateway (router).
The input ranges are different for each field of the gateway's IP
address:
• Field No. 1: 0 to 255 (excluding 127)
• Field No. 2: 0 to 255
• Field No. 3: 0 to 255
• Field No. 4: 1 to 254
If a gateway is not being used, input 0 in all four fields of the Gate-
way IP Address. When a gateway IP address is being input, be sure
not to duplicate any other IP address.
System Port No. Input the port number/engineering port (256 to 65,535) that receives
diagnostic commands from the diagnostic terminal. 3
TCP (Transmission Input the retry time (1 to 255) for the Send Window confirmation
Control Protocol) Zero packet when the TCP's Send Window size is set to 0.
Window Timer Value
TCP Retry Time Input the time to wait (50 to 32,000 ms) before resending data when
an ACK (acknowledgment) is not received after opening a TCP con-
nection or transmitting data.
TCP Close Time Input the time to wait (1 to 255) for a remote station to completely
close the connection when a TCP connection is being closed.
IP Assemble Time Input the time to wait (1 to 255) for the next segment of data after the
IP has received a segment of data.
MAX. Packet3 Length Input the maximum packet length (64 to 1,500) in the 218IF.
Setting a Remote Station's Ethernet Address

When a remote station does not support the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol), use the fol-
lowing procedure to set a remote station's Ethernet address.
1. Move the cursor to the connection where the Ethernet address needs to be set.
1 Subnet Mask
The IP address is composed of a network address and a host address, but part of the host address can be
used as the network address. This is known as the subnet address and the bit pattern is known as the subnet
mask.
2 Gateway IP Address
Normally transmissions are relayed through a router when transmitting between different network address-
es. This router's IP address is known as the gateway address or default IP address.
3 Packet
A packet is a single segment of transmission data that has a destination address.
3-57
2. Select Edit (E) and then Ethernet Address Setting (A) from the 218IF Transmission
Definitions menu.
3. Complete each setting in the box and then click the OK Button.
Connection Parameter Consistency Check

The following restrictions apply to the input values of connection parameters:
Consistency Item Details

Duplication of the The same local station port number and connect type combination
Local Station Port set in the connection parameters must not be used for any other con-
Number nection.
Duplication of the When the Connect Type is set to “TCP” in the connection parame-
System Port ters, the local station's port number must not be the same as the diag-
nostic (system) port number.
Open Mode A connection's Ethernet address will be all zeroes when its DST. IP
Address is set to all zeroes and its DST. Port is set to zero.
Duplication of a A DST. IP Address, DST. Port, and Connect Type combination set in
Remote Station the connection parameters must not be used for any other connec-
tion. This restriction does not apply when the DST. IP Address and
DST. Port are set to all zeroes.
Ethernet Address The DST. IP Address settings must be the same when the same
Ethernet address has been set in the connection parameters. This
restriction does not apply when the Ethernet address is set to all
zeroes.
Duplication of the Port The DST. Port must not be the same as the local station's port num-
Number: ber.
Remote Station There can be only one local station/remote station pair. The two sta-
tions are paired in the connection parameters, i.e., the local station's
port number is specified for the remote station's port number and the
remote station's port number is specified for the local station's port
number.
3-58
Consistency Item Details

Protocol Type and The following table shows the possible combinations of the Protocol
Code Settings Type and Code (data format) settings for each connection.
The Protocol Type and Code Combinations are shown below.
Protocol Type Code
Extended MEMOBUS Binary or ASCII
MEMOBUS RTU or ASCII
MELSEC Binary or ASCII
General-purpose Binary or ASCII
Table 3.8 Pairing Conditions
CNO
Parameter
XX YY Pairing Condition
Local Station's 10000 20000 Set each other's port
Port Number numbers.
Remote Station's
Port Number
20000 10000 3
Remote Station's 134.237.127.004 134.237.127.004 Set both to the local
IP Address station's IP address.
Connection Type TCP TCP Set both to the same
Protocol Type Extended Extended value.
MEMOBUS MEMOBUS
Code Binary Binary
Remote Station's 12:34:56:78:9A:BC 12:34:56:78:9A:BC
Ethernet Address
Deleting Assignment Data

The procedure to delete the assignment data for one connection is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the connection to be deleted.
2. Click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (C) from the 218IF Transmission Defini-
tions menu.
3. The assignment data selected in step 1. will be deleted.
3-59
INFO The definitions data can be deleted even if 0 is input for My Port (the local station's port number).
Status Tab Page

The Status Tab Page displays the data that the 218IF is actually transmitting. The tab only
displays the data; the settings cannot be changed.

This Station IP Displays My Port (the local station's IP address) set in the Transmis-
Address (Local sion Parameters Tab.
Station's IP
Address)
Gateway IP Displays the Gateway IP Address set in the Transmission Parameters
Address Tab.
Subnet Mask Displays the Subnet Mask set in the Transmission Parameters Tab.
DIAG. Port No Displays the System Port Number (diagnostic/engineering port num-
ber) set in the Transmission Parameters Tab.
CNO Displays the connection number (1 to 20).
Trans Status Displays the status of the connection when in online mode. The fol-
lowing table lists the transmission status values.
Status Value Meaning
1 IDLE status
2 WAIT status (waiting for connection)
3 CONNECT status (data transfers possible)
--- Unused connection
3-60

Error Status Displays the details on the error when an error has occurred in trans-
mission status.
The following table lists the error status.
Status Value Meaning
0 No error
1 System error
2 Local station port number setting error
3 System error (TCP settings)
4 System error (TCP settings)
5 Connection error (TCP settings)
6 System error
7 Data send error (TCP settings)
8 Data send error (TCP settings)
9 Data reception error (TCP settings)
10 Data reception error (TCP settings)
3
11 System error
12 Data conversion error (MEMOBUS and
MELSEC settings)
Send Count Displays the number of data (number of packets) sent to the remote
station.
Receive Count Displays the number of data (number of packets) received from the
remote station.
Error Count Displays the number of times that an error has occurred.
Response Time Displays the time taken for a response to be received after a com-
[ms] mand was sent with the MSG-SND function.
Connection Displays the Connect Type (connection type) set in the Transmission
Parameters Tab.
Protocol Type Displays the Protocol Type set in the Transmission Parameters Tab.
Code Displays the Code (data format) set in the Transmission Parameters
Tab.
DST. Station Displays the DST. Station name (remote station name) set in the
Transmission Parameters Tab.
All of the data listed above will be displayed in online mode. None will be displayed in
offline mode.
3-61
3.5.10 260IF Setup

1 The connection parameters cannot be saved unless the parameter input values pass a consistency
check. See Connection Parameter Consistency Check on page 3-58 for details.
2 An Error Detection Message Box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appendix
A Error Messages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.
3.5.10 260IF Setup
Perform the setup for the 260IF from the CP-717 Engineering Tool.
Opening the 260IF Definitions Window

3 The procedure to open the 260IF Definitions Window is given below.
1. Double-click the Module configuration definitions set in the controller mounting the
260IF Module. The Module Configuration Definitions Window will be displayed.
Rack 1 ・・・・・・・・・
No. 00 01 02
Module MP920 RESERVED 260IF
Control CPU No.

・
・・・・・・・・・・
・
I/O Start Register ・・・・・・・・・
I/O End Register ・・・・・・・・・
・
・・・・・・・・・
・
Fig 3.10 MP920 Module Configurations Window
Rack 1 ・・・・・・・・・
No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Module MP920 RESERVED SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR 260IF
Control CPU No.
・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・
I/O Start Register ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
I/O End Register ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・

With the MP920, select the 260IF Module for the 260IF Module mounting slot. In the
MP920 Module Configurations Window example shown above, 260IF has been allo-
cated to slot 02.
With the MP940, the 260IF is allocated to slot 06 and this cannot be changed; select the
3-62
260IF Module.
The I/O start and end register addresses must be set in the 260IF Module settings. Allo-
cate the I/O register addresses to be used within the ranges shown below.
--- MP920 MP940D

I/O Start Register (IW/OW Register Start Offset) 0000 to 13FF 0000 to 07FF
I/O End Register (IW/OW Register End Offset) 0000 to 13FF 0000 to 07FF
2. Double-click the slot set for the 260IF Module to open the 260IF Definitions Window.
Fig 3.12 260IF Definitions Window
Setting Methods
The 260IF Definitions Window consists of the following three tab pages.
Transmis- I/O Status Status

sion Param-
eters
Tab Page Details

Transmission Sets the communications and network parameters for the 260IF
Parameters Module.
I/O Status Displays the communications status with the slaves when setting the
online master. For details, refer to Chapter 6 Network Maintenance
in the MP900 Series Machine Controller User’s Manual: 260IF
DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-5.2).
Status Displays the 260IF Module status when online. For details, refer to
Chapter 6 Network Maintenance in the MP900 Series Machine Con-
troller User’s Manual: 260IF DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-5.2).
3-63
3.5.10 260IF Setup
Setting Parameters
Set the following items using the 260IF Definitions Window and the Transmission Parame-
ters Tab Page shown above.
1. Communications Cycle Time Information Settings

Communication cycle If using the 260IF as a DeviceNet master, enter the communications
time (Set Value) cycle time set value.
Communication cycle Displays the communications cycle current value during I/O com-
time (Current Value); munications.
Display Only
Communication cycle Displays the communications cycle maximum value during I/O
time (Maximum Value); communications.
Display Only
Refer to 4.2 Calculating Communications Cycle Times in the MP920 Machine Control-
3 ler User's Manual: 260IF DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-5.2) for details.
2. I/O Allocation Settings
The asterisks ("**") displayed on the left of the I/O allocations setting table denote the 260IF
itself, allocated using the Module configuration definitions.

Master/Slave Set the operating mode (i.e., DeviceNet master or slave) for the 260IF.
Set to the same value as the value set using 260IF setting switch SW1
(X1).
MAC ID The MAC ID is the DeviceNet MAC ID (i.e., DeviceNet address) of
the 260IF. Set to the same value as the value set using 260IF setting
switches 2 and 3.
MAC ID column The MAC ID field is the DeviceNet MAC ID (i.e., DeviceNet address)
for I/O allocation. MAC ID column are set automatically in order start-
ing from 00.
D Input enable/disable sets whether or not the Controller CPU exchanges
I/O data with the 260IF. Select it to disable I/O data exchange.
INPUT Set the start address of the input area (input register IWxxxx) allocated
to the relevant device. Specify using a hexadecimal word address.
BSIZE Displays in bytes the size of the output area (input register IWxxxx)
allocated to the relevant device. Specify from 1 to 256 (in decimal) for
1 slave. For example, if setting 3 bytes from IW1100 and 1 byte from
IW1102, the registers are used as shown below.
Register Address F to 8 7 to 0
IW1100H
IW1101H
IW1102H
IW1103H
D Output enable/disable sets whether or not the Controller CPU
exchanges I/O data with the 260IF. Select it to disable I/O data
exchange.
3-64

OUTPUT Set the start address of the output area (output register OWxxxx) allo-
cated to the relevant device. Specify using hexadecimal word address.
BSIZE Displays in bytes the size of the output area (output register OWxxxx)
1 slave. The bytes are little endian, the same as the input registers.
SCAN The data exchange cycle (SCAN) is the timing for exchanging I/O data
between the Controller CPU and the 260IF. The Controller CPU data
exchange cycle is asynchronous with I/O communications. When set
to high, the Controller CPU exchanges I/O data using the CPU’s high-
speed scan timing. When set to low, the Controller CPU exchanges
data using the CPU’s low-speed scan timing.
TYPE Set the I/O communications type (TYPE) to Polled or Strobed.
• Polled enables any DeviceNet slaves to be set.
• Strobed enables input only, and limits DeviceNet slaves to commu-
nications of 8 bytes maximum.
For details on polled and strobed connections, refer to the DeviceNet
specifications manual.
EM (Explicit Select EM allocation (EM) only when the 260IF is the DeviceNet mas-
3
Message) ter and message communications are to be performed with the slaves.
DeviceNet slaves performing I/O communications can exchange mes-
sages, but EM allocation setting is not necessary.
COMMENT A comment of up to 32 characters can be input to include the name,
type, or other information on the relevant device.
1. Saving Parameters
When the parameter settings have been completed, save the parameters by selecting File
(F) and then Save (S) from the menu.
2. I/O Allocation Settings Supplementary Explanation
a) Master/Slave Selection and MAC ID Settings
Select the operating mode in Master/Slave Settings to match the 260IF setting switch
SW1 (X1) set value.
Set the DeviceNet address in MAC ID to match the 260IF setting switches SW2 and
SW3 set values.
b) Communications Cycle Settings
Enter the communications cycle time required in 4.2 Calculating Communications
Cycle Times in the MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: 260IF DeviceNet
(SIEZ-C887-5.2).
This setting is not necessary when using the 260IF as a DeviceNet slave.
c) I/O Allocation
Allocate the I/O registers for sending and receiving I/O data between the Controller
CPU and the 260IF according to the DeviceNet system configuration.
3-65
3.5.10 260IF Setup
3-66
3. Example of Master I/O Allocations

Make the settings as shown in the following diagram to use the 260IF as a DeviceNet
master with MAC ID = 5, to send data to a 2-byte Output Module with MAC ID =2 and
receive data from a 1-byte Input Module with a MAC ID = 3.
PS MP920 260IF
Node address #05
(MAC ID = 05)
Node address Node address

#02 #03
MAC ID = 02 MAC ID = 03
Master/slave: Master
3
MAC ID： 5
MAC ID D INPUT BSIZE D OUTPUT BSIZE SCAN TYPE EM Comment
01
02 OW1100 2 Low Polled
03 IW1101 1 Low Polled
04
・・・
・・・
Node address #03 Node address #05

(MAC ID = 03) (MAC ID = 05)
Input relays
Input contact signal 1 IB11021
・・・
・・・
・・・
Node address #02

(MAC ID = 02) Output coils
Output contact signal 1 OB11000
・・・
・・・
・・・
Output contact signal 16 OB1100F
3-67
3.5.10 260IF Setup
4. Example of Slave I/O Allocation

Set the 260IF as shown in the following diagram to use the 260IF as a DeviceNet slave
with MAC ID = 3, to send and receive I/O data between the slave and the DeviceNet
master using 64 bytes of input and 64 bytes of output.
PS MP920 260IF
Node address #05
(MAC ID = 05)
Node address Node address

#02 #03
MAC ID = 02 MAC ID = 03
Master/slave:
3 Master (0-63)
MAC ID： 5
01
02 OW1100 2 Low Polled
03 IW1101 1 Low Polled
04
・・・
・・・

(MAC ID = 03) (MAC ID = 05)
Input relay
IB11021
IB11022
IB11023
IB11024
IB11025
・・・
・・・
・・・
IB110028
Node address #02

(MAC ID = 02) Output coils
Input contact signal 3 OB11002
・・・
・・・
・・・
Output contact signal 16 OB1100F
3-68
• I/O Allocation Using Network Configuration Information

When using the 260IF as a DeviceNet master, the settings can be configured based on
the I/O sizes read from the slaves.
To read the I/O sizes from the slaves, use the network configuration information read
function.
For setting method details, refer to 6.1 Reading Network Configuration Information
in the MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: 260IF DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-
5.2).
INFO If allocating I/O using the network configuration information, delete the I/O allocation from all the
slaves before performing allocation.

3
This section explains how to set Local I/O Definitions.
Outline of the Local I/O Definitions

The LIO-01 Module is equipped with 32 digital inputs (DI) and 32 digital outputs (DO). I/O
servicing is performed at fixed intervals, once for each high-speed scan or low-speed scan in
the MP920 CPU Module.
Four digital inputs can be used as interrupts by enabling interrupts in the Module Configura-
tion Definitions Window.
The Local I/O Definitions Window sets the scan timing and assigns registers to the discrete
inputs and outputs (16 of each) in connectors CN1 and CN2.
I/O Type CN1 CN2

Discrete Input 16 inputs 16 inputs
Discrete Output 16 outputs 16 outputs
3-69
Output Isolated
Port DO 16
CN1
Input Port Isolated
16
DI

2
System Bus
Interrupt
Port
Interface
Output Isolated 16
Port DO
Input Port Isolated CN2

16
DI
Interrupt 2
Port
Opening the Local I/O Definitions Window

Open the Local I/O Definitions Window in accordance with 3.3 Basic Individual Module
Definition Operations.
3-70
Setting Local I/O Definitions

The Local I/O Definitions determine the operation and disable status of the Module's I/O.

Item Displays the I/O items.
D Controls the register's disable setting. When the register range is set
to one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6 will be displayed; a "-" will be
displayed for items 2, 4, 7, and 8.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No Displays the I/O register number. When the register range is set to
one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6 will be displayed; a "-" will be
Word Displays the number of consecutive register words. When the regis-
ter range is set to one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6 will be dis-
played; a "-" will be displayed for items 2, 4, 7, and 8.
3
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan. When the register range is set
to one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6 will be displayed; a "-" will be
Current Value In online mode, this column displays the current value of the
Machine Controller's register. The current values of discrete I/O are
displayed in binary and the current values of discrete outputs can be
changed. The current values of interrupt inputs 1 to 4 are displayed
as ON or OFF.
When a new current value is input, the value will be checked and
immediately stored in the Machine Controller's register.
In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
When the register range is set to one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6
will be displayed; a "-" will be displayed for items 2, 4, 7, and 8.
HEX Displays the hexadecimal equivalent of the binary values in the Cur-
rent Value column. In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
When the register range is set to one word, only items 1, 3, 5, and 6
will be displayed; a "-" will be displayed for items 2, 4, 7, and 8.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Local I/O Definitions

3-71
3.5.12 Digital Input Definitions
3.5.12 Digital Input Definitions
This section explains how to set the Digital Input Definitions.
Outline of the Digital Input Definitions

The DI-01 Module is equipped with 64 digital inputs (DI). Input servicing is performed at
fixed intervals, once for each scan (high-speed or low-speed) in the CPU-01 Module.
The Digital Input Definitions Window sets the scan timing and allocates registers to the dis-
crete inputs (32 each) in connectors CN1 and CN2.
I/O Type Connector CN1 Connector CN2

Discrete Input 32 inputs 32 inputs
3 Input Port Isolated DI 32

CN1
Interrupt 2
System Bus
Port
Interface
Input Port Isolated DI 32

CN2
Interrupt 2
Port
Opening the Digital Input Definitions Window

Open the Digital Input Definitions Window according to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Defi-
nition Operations.
Fig 3.13 Digital Input Definitions Window
3-72
Digital Input Definitions Window Original Menus

Table 3.9 Digital Input Definitions Window Original Menus

Edit (E)
Assignment Delete (D) Deletes allocation data.
Setting Digital Input Definitions

Setting Allocation Data
The Digital Input Definitions determine the operation and the disable status of the digital
inputs.

Item Displays the input item. 3
D Controls the register's disable setting.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No Enter the number of the register (I register number) that handles the
input. Register numbers are allocated to interrupt inputs automati-
cally if the register number for a discrete input is entered.
WD (Number of Displays the number of consecutive register words.
Words)
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan in which inputs are serviced.
HIGH:High-speed scan
LOW:Low-speed scan
(NA):No scan specification
Current Value In online mode, this column displays the current value of the
Machine Controller's register.
The current values of discrete inputs are displayed in binary and the
current values of interrupt inputs are displayed as ON or OFF. In
offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
HEX Displays the hexadecimal equivalent of the binary values in the cur-
rent value column. In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
Deleting Allocation Data

1. Click the REG-No line to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (D) from the Digital Input menu.
3. The data selected in step 1. will be deleted.
3-73
3.5.13 Digital Output Definitions
INFO Register allocations can be deleted for discrete inputs 1 to 4. When the register allocation for discrete
input 1 is deleted, the allocations for interrupt inputs 1 and 2 will be deleted simultaneously. When the
allocation for discrete input 2 is deleted, the allocations for interrupt inputs 3 and 4 will be deleted
simultaneously.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Digital Input Definitions

3.5.13 Digital Output Definitions
This section explains how to set the Digital Output Definitions.
Outline of the Digital Output Definitions

3
The DO-01 Module is equipped with 64 digital outputs (DO). Output servicing is performed
at fixed intervals, once for each scan (high-speed or low-speed) in the CPU-01 Module.
The Digital Output Definitions Window sets the scan timing and allocates registers to the
discrete outputs (32 each) in connectors CN1 and CN2.
I/O Type Connector CN1 Connector CN2

Discrete Output 32 outputs 32 outputs
Output Isolated 32 CN1

Port DO
System Bus
Interface
Output Isolated 32 CN1

Port DO
Opening the Digital Output Definitions Window

Open the Digital Output Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Indi-
3-74
Fig 3.14 Digital Output Definitions Window
Digital Output Definitions Window Original Menus 3

The following table shows the functions of the original menu commands in the Digital Out-
put Definitions Window.
Table 3.10 The Digital Output Definitions Window Original Menus

Edit (E)
Setting Digital Output Definitions

The Digital Output Definitions determine the operation and the disable status of the digital
outputs.

Item Displays the output item.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No Input the number of the register (O register number) that handles the
output.
WD (Number of Displays the number of consecutive register words.
Words)
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan in which outputs are serviced.
3-75
3.5.14 Counter I/O Definitions

Current Value In online mode, displays the current values of the Machine Control-
ler's registers in binary. The current values of discrete outputs can be
changed. When a new current value is input, the value will be
checked and immediately stored in the Machine Controller's register.

1. Click the REG-No line to be deleted.
2. Click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (D) on the Digital Output menu.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Digital Output Definitions

3 Refer to the procedures in 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations for details.
This section explains how to set the Counter I/O Definitions.
Outline of the Counter I/O Definitions

The CNTR-01 Module uses up to 4 channels for 4 pulse inputs (PI).
Select either a 5-V differential or 12-V voltage input for each channel. Connect 5-V differ-
ential inputs to connector CN1 and 12-V voltage inputs to connector CN2.
The CNTR-01 Module has a Latch Input Signal, so the counter value can be latched when
the latch signal is received. A Coincident Detection Signal Output is also provided, so a sig-
nal can be recognized by the CPU and output to an external device when the count matches
an internal set value.
Input servicing of the count data is performed at fixed intervals, once for each scan (high-
speed or low-speed) in the CPU-01 Module. At this time, 4 channels are scanned as a group.
Each channel can be specified as used or unused to reduce the processing time required in
the CNTR-01 Module and CPU-01 Module.
Set the pulse input parameters for 1 to 4 channels.
A maximum of 4 channels must be selected from a total of 8 pulse input channels: Four 5-V
input channels on CN1, and four 12-V input channels on CN2.
3-76

5-V Differential CN1
Interface
Pulse Input
Shared Processor
Memory
12-V Voltage
Interface
CN2
Latch Input
Coincident Detection Output
Opening the Counter I/O Definitions Window

Open the Counter I/O Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individ-
ual Module Definition Operations.
The Fix Parameter Set Tab Page will be displayed.
Fig 3.15 Counter I/O Definitions Window
3-77
Counter I/O Definitions Window Original Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Counter I/O Defini-
tions Window.
Table 3.11 Counter I/O Definitions Window Original Menus

Set (S)
Default (R) Returns settings to default values by channel.
View (V)
Tool Bar (T) Displays the Tool Bar.
DEC (D) Displays the I/O data in decimal.
HEX (H) Displays the I/O data in hexadecimal.
BIN (B) Displays the I/O data in binary.
3
Counter I/O Definitions
The Counter I/O Definitions Window is composed of two tab pages: the Fix Parameter Set
and I/O Data Set Tabs. The following table shows the settings grouped in each tab page.
Table 3.12 Tab Pages in the Counter I/O Definitions Window
Tab Name Function

Fix Parameter Set Sets fixed parameters.
I/O Data Set Sets I/O data.
Fixed Parameters Settings Tab Page
The various fixed parameters for counter I/O are set in the Fix Parameter Set Tab Page.

SYNC-SCAN This setting determines whether the I/O data refresh cycle of the
CNTR-01 Module is synchronized with the HIGH or LOW scan
cycle of the Machine Controller.
Top Register No. Displays the leading register number that corresponds to the parame-
(Leading Register ter.
Number)
Fix Parameter Name Displays the name of the fixed parameter.
Parameter Settings Displays the parameter settings for channels 1 to 4 (CH#1 to CH#4).

The fixed parameters can be reset to their default values (of each channel) without inputting
each parameter. The following table shows the default values of the fixed parameters.
3-78
Table 3.13 Default Values of Fixed Parameters
Fixed Parameter Default Value

A/B Pulse Signal Type +5V Differential Input
C Pulse Signal Type +5V Differential Input
A/B Pulse Signal Polar Plus Logic (positive logic)
C Pulse Signal Polar Plus Logic (positive logic)
Pulse Count A/B Pulse (x4)
Counter Mode Reversible Counter
PI Latch Detection PI Latch
Coincident Detection Not used.
Coincident IRQ Not used.
Frequency x100
The procedure to reset parameters to their default values is given below.

1. Move the cursor to the channel number that you want to reset to default values. 3
2. Click Set (S) and then Default (R) on the Counter I/O Definitions menu.
3. Verify the message in the message box and click the Yes Button.
4. The fixed parameters in the channel number selected in step 1. will be returned to their
default values.
I/O Data Settings Tab Page

The CNTR-01 Module's I/O data is set in the I/O Data Set Tab Page.
3-79

Channel Number Selects the channel displayed in the I/O Data Set Tab.
Selection
Status (Operating Displays the status of each bit in the register that contains the operat-
Status Display) ing status. The corresponding box will contain a black circle when
the bit is ON and a white circle when the bit is OFF.
Operation Mode Selects the status of each bit in the register that controls the operat-
(Operating Mode ing mode. Click the Set Button to activate the new operating mode
Settings) settings.
Data Name (for input) Displays the name of the input data.
REG-No. (for input) Displays the register number of the corresponding input data name.
Input Data Displays the current value of the corresponding register number and
input data name.
Data Name (for output) Displays the name of the output data.
REG-No. (for output) Displays the register number of the corresponding output data name.
Output Data Displays the current value of the corresponding register number and
output data name.
• Switching the Data Format of the Display

The I/O Data of the Counter Module can be switched among three data formats: deci-
mal, hexadecimal, and binary. Switch the data format by selecting another format from
the drop-down list.
• Decimal:
Click View (V) and then DEC (D) on the Counter I/O Definitions menu.
• Hexadecimal:
Click View (V) and then HEX (H) on the Counter I/O Definitions menu.
• Binary:
Click View (V) and then BIN (B) on the Counter I/O Definitions menu.
3-80
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Counter I/O Definitions

3.5.15 Analog Input Definitions
This section explains how to set the Analog Input Definitions.
Outline of the Analog Input Definitions

The AI-01 Module is equipped with 8 analog input (AI) channels. The overall input circuit is
isolated, but the channels are not isolated from each other.
It is possible to use 1, 2, 4, or 8 channels. Processing speed can be improved by selecting
fewer channels because it is not necessary for the CPU to scan all 8 channels.
Input servicing is performed at fixed intervals, once for each scan (high-speed or low-speed)
in the CPU-01 Module. Each channel can be set to the high-speed or low-speed scan inde- 3
pendently.
Set the scan timing and allocates registers to 4 analog input channels in the Analog Input
Definitions Window.
Three types of analog input ranges must be selected.
System Bus
multiplexer
Interface
Input Isolation A/D CN1

Port Circuit Convertor
Analog
Opening the Analog Input Definitions Window

Open the Analog Input Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individ-
3-81
3.5.15 Analog Input Definitions
Fig 3.16 Analog Input Definitions Window
The Analog Input Definitions Window Original Menus

3 Menu Command Function
Edit (E)
Set (S)
Offset/Gain (O) Sets the offset and gain.
Setting Analog Input Definitions

The Analog Input Definitions determine the operation and the disable status of the analog
inputs.

Channel Displays the channel number (1 to 8).
In Range Selects the input range: -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V, or 0 to 20 mA.
(Input Range)
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No. Input the number of the register (I register number) that handles the
input.
Word (Number of Displays the number of consecutive register words.
Words)
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan in which inputs are serviced.
Current Data In online mode, these columns display the current value in the order
of current value, units, and hexadecimal current value of the
Machine Controller's register. The unit corresponds to the unit set in
In Range. In offline mode, nothing will be displayed.
3-82
Setting the Offset and Gain

1. Click Set (S) and then Offset/Gain (O) on the Analog Input Definitions menu.
2. Input the desired offset and gain in the following dialog box and then click the OK But-
ton.

1. Move the cursor to the channel number to be deleted.
3
2. Click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (D) on the Analog Input Definitions menu.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Analog Input Definitions

3.5.16 Analog Output Definitions
This section explains how to set the Analog Output Definitions.
Outline of the Analog Output Definitions

The AO-01 Module is equipped with 4 analog output (AO) channels.
The overall output circuit is isolated, but the channels are not isolated from each other. The
voltage output range can be set to either -10 to 10 V or 0 to 10 V.
Output servicing is performed at fixed intervals, once for each scan (high-speed or low-
speed) in the CPU-01 Module. Each channel can be set to the high-speed or low-speed scan
independently.
Set the scan timing and allocates registers to 4 analog output channels in the Analog Output
Definitions Window.
3-83
3.5.16 Analog Output Definitions

Filter
System Bus
Filter
PWM
Interface
CN1
Control
Filter
Filter
Photocoupler
Isolation
Opening the Analog Output Definitions Window

Open the Analog Output Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Indi-
Fig 3.17 Analog Output Definitions Window
3-84
Analog Output Definitions Window Original Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Analog Output Defi-
nitions Window.

Edit (E)
Set (S)
Offset/Gain (O) Sets the offset and gain.
Set Register (R) Sets the register.
Setting Analog Output Definitions

The Analog Output Definitions determine the operation and the disable status of the analog
3
outputs.

Channel Displays the channel number (1 to 4).
Out Range Selects the output range: -10 to +10 V or 0 to 10 V.
(Output Range)
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No Input the number of the register (O register number) that handles the
output.
Word (Number of Displays the number of consecutive register words.
Words)
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan in which outputs are serviced.
Output, Data In online mode, these columns display the current value in the order
of current value, units, and hexadecimal current value of the
Machine Controller's register. The unit corresponds to the unit set in
Out Range.
A new current value input in the Output column can be stored in the
Machine Controller's register immediately by clicking the Set Button
or clicking Set (S) and then Set Register (R) on the Analog Output
Definitions menu.
3-85
3.5.17 SVA Motion Parameters Settings
Setting the Offset and Gain

1. Click Set (S) and then Offset/Gain (O) on the Analog Output Definitions menu.
2. Input the desired offset and gain in the following dialog box and then click the OK But-
ton.
3 1. Move the cursor to the channel number to be deleted.

2. Click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (D) on the Analog Output Definitions menu.
The data selected in step 1. will be deleted.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Analog Output Definitions

This section explains how to set the motion parameters of the SVA Modules.
Outline of SVA Motion Parameter Settings

SVA Modules are available that control 2 axes per Module or up to 4 axes per Module.
The SVA Modules have either 2 or 4 connectors (CN1 to CN4) for connections to the SER-
VOPACKs. Each of these connectors has an analog output for speed reference, an analog
input for speed monitoring (SVA-02 only), a phase-A/B/C pulse input (5-V differential or
12-V), a pulse latch digital input, general-purpose digital inputs, and general-purpose digital
outputs.
3-86
Module Main Features

SVA-01 • Analog-output 4-axis Servo Module
• Independent position control, speed control, and phase control are possible for each axis.
• Up to 64 axes (up to 16 Modules) can be controlled.
• Interpolations and complex processing operations can be easily programmed in motion programs.
• The CN5 External Interface Connector is used to connect the SVA-01 Module with the following external
I/O signals.
External Inputs: (6 inputs x 4 axes) + (1 common digital input)
External Outputs: (2 outputs x 4 axes) + (1 common digital output)
SVA-01 16 Modules max. Speed, Position, and Phase Control
• Inverters
• Analog servos
SGDA Speed
SVA-01
SGDB reference SER-
SGDM D/A VOPA M
CK
PG
Counter
Encoder pulse
3
M M M M
SVA-02 • Analog-output 2-axis Servo Module

• Independent position control, speed control, torque control, and phase control are possible for each axis.
• Up to 32 axes (up to 16 Modules) can be controlled.
• Interpolations and complex processing operations can be easily programmed by motion programs.
SVA-02 16 Modules max.

• Inverters Speed, Position, and Torque Control
Phase Control
• Analog servos
SGDA Speed Torque
SGDB SVA-02 reference SVA-02 reference
SGDM D/A SER- D/A SER-
Torque control VOPA M Speed control M
D/A VOPA
CK D/A CK
Torque
Speed monitor PG monitor PG
A/D A/D
Counter Counter
Encoder pulse Encoder pulse
M M
3-87
Motion Control CN1

Analog output: Speed ref. NREF
• Speed control
Servo Connector
• Position control Pulse input: phase A/B/C
• Phase control Pulse latch digital input PIL
• Zero point return
function 3 General-purpose digital inputs DI0 to D12
Monitor function 6 General-purpose digital outputs DO0 to DO5
Sensor ON output (5V/24V)

SENS/DO6
CN2
Same as above.
System Bus CN3
Interface Same as above.
Servo Parameters
• OW CN4
• IW Same as above.
CN5
External I/O signals
Fig 3.18 SVA-01 Module
Servo Control 2 Analog outputs:Speed ref. NREF CN1

Positive torque ref.TLIMP
• Speed control
Servo Connector
• Position control 1 Analog input: Speed monitor NREF
• Torque control Pulse input: phase A/B/C
• Phase control
• Zero point return Pulse latch digital input PIL
General-purpose digital inputs DI0 to DI5
function (5 points + PI latch)
Monitor function 6 General-purpose digital outputs DO0 to DO5
Sensor ON output (5V/24V)SENS/DO6
CN2
System Bus
Interface Same as above.
Servo Parameters
• OW
• IW
Fig 3.19 SVA-02 Module

To set the SVA motion parameters, the required data must be set (or referenced) in three tab
pages: the Fixed Parameters Tab, Set Up Parameters Tab, and Monitor Tab.
The following table lists the basic I/O specifications for the two models of SVA Modules.
3-88
Table 3.14 Comparison of the SVA-01 and SVA-02 Modules
Item 4-axis Module (SVA-01) 2-axis Module (SVA-02)

Size 2-slot 1-slot
Number of Axes 4 axes 2 axes
Controlled
Analog Outputs For speed reference: For speed reference:
PWM 16 bits, 4 channels PWM 16 bits, 2 channels
For torque reference: None For torque reference:
D/A 12 bits, 2 channels
Analog Inputs None 16 bits, 2 channels
Pulse Inputs Phase-A/B/C inputs, 4 channels Phase-A/B/C inputs, 2 channels
DI 3 inputs x 4 channels (5 points + PI latch input) x 2 channels
DI0: SV RDY DI0: General-purpose (RDY)
DI1: SV ALM DI1: General-purpose (ALM)
DI2: BRK DI2: General-purpose (ZERO)
DI3: General-purpose (OTF)
DI4: General-purpose (OTR)
DI5: PI latch
3
DO 6 outputs x 4 channels 6 outputs x 2 channels
DO0: SVON DO0: SV ON
DO1: SV ALM-RST DO1: General-purpose
DO2: SV PCON (ALM-RST)
DO3: SV SEN DO2: General-purpose (PCON)
DO4: OTF DO3: SV SEN
DO5: OTR DO4: General-purpose
DO5: General-purpose
External Inputs 6 inputs x 4 + 1 RCI input None
(OTF, OTR, DEC,
ZERO, EXT,
RI) x 4
(RCI) x 1
(An PI latch is possible with
ZERO and EXT.)
External Outputs 2 outputs x 4 + 1 RCO output None
(BRK, RO) x 4
(RCO) x 1
Opening the SVA Motion Parameters Window

Open the SVA Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individual Mod-
ule Definition Operations. The Fixed Parameters Tab Page will be displayed first.
3-89
3
Fig 3.20 SVA Definitions Window
The Motion Parameters Window is composed of three tab pages: The Fixed parameters,
Set Up Parameters, and Monitor Tabs.
Tab Name Function

Fixed Parameters Sets the Motion Fixed Parameters.
Set Up Parameters Sets the Motion Setting Parameters.
Monitor Monitors the Motion Parameters.
SVA Motion Parameters Window Original Menus

Refer to SVB Motion Parameters Window Original Menus in 3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters
Settings for details.
Setting SVA Motion Parameters

Motion Fixed Parameters Tab Page
The motion fixed parameters required for Servo adjustment are set in the Fixed Parameter
Tab Page.

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 to axis 4). Set the fixed param-
eters for each axis in the Fixed Parameter Tab.
Parameter Name Displays the parameter name.
Input Data (Set Data) Input (or select) the parameter value in this column.
Unit Displays the units of the corresponding set data.
3-90
INFO Refer to MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-2.1) or
MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on motion
fixed parameter settings.
Motion Setting Parameters Tab Page

Parameters required for Servo adjustment are set in the Set Up Parameters Tab Page.

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 to axis 4). The parameters for
each axis are displayed.
REG-No. Displays the number of the register that corresponds to the parameter
name. The range of registers depends on the servo number currently
being displayed, as shown in the following table.
Input Data (Set Data) Input the parameter value in this column.
Unit Displays the units of the corresponding set data.
Current Value In online mode, the parameter's current value will be displayed. In
Axis Number
Servo Number
1 2 3 4
1 C000 to C03F C040 to C07F C080 to C0BF C0C0 to C0FF
4 CC00 to CC3F CC40 to CC7F CC80 to CCBF CCC0 to CCFF
3-91
Axis Number
Servo Number
1 2 3 4
5 D000 to D03F D040 to D07F D080 to D0BF D0C0 to D0FF
8 DC00 to DC3F DC40 to DC7F DC80 to DCBF DCC0 to DCFF
9 E000 to E03F E040 to E07F E080 to E0BF E0C0 to E0FF
INFO Refer to the MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-2.1) or
setting parameters.
3 Motion Monitor Tab Page

The Motion Monitor Tab Page displays the current values of the motion parameters. The
parameters are only displayed in the Monitor Tab Page; the settings cannot be changed here.
3-92

name. The range of registers depends on the servo number currently
being displayed. See Table 3.15 Register Ranges for details.
Monitor Data In online mode, the current values of the parameters are displayed.
Unit Displays the units of the parameter.
MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on monitor
parameter settings.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing the SVA Motion Parameters 3

1 This operation deletes the SVA motion fixed parameters and setting parameters of all axes.
2 The edited motion fixed parameters cannot be saved if the RUN (Servo ON) Flag is ON. Save the
motion parameters data after this flag has gone OFF.
The RUN (Servo ON) Flag is bit 0 of parameter number 2 (RUN Command Settings) in the Set Up
Parameters Tab. The register number for parameter 2 is OWC001.
3 The Save (S) command saves the motion fixed parameters for all axes of the servo number currently
being displayed.
4 The Error Detection Message Box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appen-
dix A Error Messages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.
3.5.18 PO-01 Motion Parameters Settings
This section explains how to set the motion parameters of the PO-01 Module.
Outline of PO-01 Motion Parameter Settings

The PO-01 Module is a pulse-train output Motion Control Module. One PO-01 Module can
be connected to up to 4 pulse motor drivers (4 axes).
Two connectors (CN1 and CN2) are provided for connections to pulse motor drivers. Each
connector is equipped with 2 (5-V differential) pulse-train outputs, 4 digital outputs (DO)
and 5 digital inputs (DI) for various pulse driver control applications.
To set the motion parameters, the required data must be set (or referenced) in three tab
pages: the Fixed Parameters Tab, Set Up Parameters Tab, and Monitor Tab.
3-93
CN1
Motion Functions
2 Pulse-train outputs (2 points): CCW
Override Function CW
Pulse Motor Driver

Software Limit
4 Digital outputs: 1 Excitation ON (1 point)
Function 3 General-purpose (3 points)
Emergency Stop
Function 5 Digital inputs (5 points):
Connector
1 Excitation monitor/zero point
3 General-purpose
1 Emergency/ deceleration to a stop
System Bus
Interface
Servo Parameters CN2
OW Same as above.
IW
Opening the PO-01 Definitions Window

Open the PO-01 Definitions Window in accordance with the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individ-
The PO-01 Definitions Window is composed of three tab pages: The Fixed Parameters, Set
Up Parameters, and Monitor Tabs.
3-94
Table 3.16 Tab Pages in the PO-01 Definitions Window
Tab Name Function

Fixed parameters Sets the Motion Fixed Parameters.
Set Up parameters Sets the Motion Setting Parameters.
It is possible to switch between these tab pages by selecting View (V) and then Next Page
(N) or Back Page (B) from the PO-01 Definitions menu.
PO-01 Definitions Window Original Menus

Refer toSVB Motion Parameters Window Original Menus in 3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters
Settings for details.
Setting PO-01 Motion Parameters

3
The parameters required in the MP920 are set in the Fixed Parameters Tab Page.

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 to axis 4). Set the motion
fixed parameters for each axis.
No. Displays the parameter number of the motion fixed parameter.
Unit Displays the units of the corresponding parameter.
INFO Refer to MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on
motion fixed parameter settings.
Setting Parameters Tab Page

Parameters required in the MP920 are set in the Set Parameter Tab Page.
3-95

No. Displays the parameter number of the setting parameter.
name.
The range of registers depends on the motion number and axis num-
ber currently being displayed.
setting parameter settings.
Motion Monitor Tab Page

parameters are only displayed in the Motion Monitor Tab Page; the settings cannot be
changed here.
3-96

No. Displays the parameter number of the motion monitor.
name.
monitor parameter settings.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing the PO-01 Definitions

1 This operation deletes the motion fixed parameter and setting parameter settings of all axes.
3 The Save (S) command saves the fixed parameters for all axes of the servo number currently being dis-
played.
3-97
3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters Settings
This section explains how to set the motion parameters for the SVB-01 Module.
The SVB Module is equipped with a MECHATROLINK interface, and can connect to a
maximum of 14 SERVOPACKs and I/O devices that are MECHATROLINK-compatible.
SVB Module definitions are set on two levels: MECHATROLINK and the motion parame-
ters. The required settings will differ depending on the device connected using MECHA-
TROLINK.
MECHATROLINK Device
SERVOPACK I/O Device
3 MECHATROLINK Yes Yes
Definitions
Motion Parameter Settings Yes No
First, define the MECHATROLINK interface according to 3.5.20 MECHATROLINK Defini-

tions. The Motion Parameters Window cannot be opened without the MECHATROLINK
definitions first being set.
Outline of SVB Motion Parameter Settings

The SVB-01 Module has a single MECHATROLINK connector and can control up to 14
Module Devices with MECHATROLINK interfaces.
To set the motion parameters, the required data must be set (or referenced) in four tab pages:
the Fixed Parameters Tab, Set Up Parameters Tab, SERVOPACK Tab, and Monitor
Tab.
3-98
CN1
MECHATROLINK connector
MECHATROLINK
System bus connector

Control
• Servo control
• Remote I/O control
• Inverter control
Opening the SVB Motion Parameters Window

Open the SVB Motion Parameters Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individ-
ual Module Definition Operations. The Fixed Parameters Tab Page will be displayed first.
The SVB Motion Parameters Window is composed of four tab pages: The Fixed Parame-
ters Tab, Set Up Parameters Tab, SERVOPACK Tab, and Monitor Tab.
3-99
Table 3.17 Tab Pages in the SVB Motion Parameters Window
Tab Name Function

Fixed Parameters Sets the Motion Fixed Parameters.
Set Up Parameters Sets the Motion Setting Parameters.
SERVOPACK Sets the SERVOPACK Setting Parameters.
It is possible to switch between these tab pages by clicking View (V) and then Next Page (N)
or Back Page (B) on the Motion Parameters Window's menu.
SVB Motion Parameters Window Original Menus

These menus can be used only in the SVB Motion Parameters Window.

3 Edit (E)
Axis Data Copy (C) Temporarily saves the displayed axis setting
data.
Axis Data Paste (P) Copies the temporarily saved axis data to the
currently selected axis data.
Details (D) Displays individual data in bit format.
Default Set (R) Sets the default value.
Copy Current Value (V) Sets the set data a the current value.
View (V)
Refresh Current Value Updates the display of the current value of the
(R) servo parameters.
Axis Data Copy

Select the axis data to be copied, and then select Edit (E) and then Axis Data Copy (C) from
the menu. The source axis data will be copied and saved temporarily in the cut buffer.
Axis Data Paste

Select the axis data to be copied, and then select Edit (E) and then Axis Data Paste (P) from
the menu. The axis data saved temporarily in the cut buffer will overwrite the axis data at the
copy destination.
Copying between axes is possible using the Copy Axis Data and the Paste Axis Data functions. Copy-
ing between axes requires separate operations for fixing, setting, and SERVOPACK parameters.If the
pasted data is for a different type of parameter, an error message will be displayed.
3-100
Details (D)
Use this function to display setting data as bit images for motion parameters except for servo
parameters. The information can be displayed for each bit by selecting Edit (E) and then
Details (D) from the menu bar.
Default Set (R)

Use this function to restore the settings data for the motion fixed parameters, setting param-
eters, and servo parameters (for the MECHATROLINK interface only) to their default val-
ues.
Select Edit (E) and then Default Set (R) from the menu bar. The axis parameters currently
displayed will be set to their default values. Parameters whose current values are displayed
will have their current values updated.
Copy Current Value (V)

3
This function is enabled only for servo parameters. It overwrites the settings data using the
data displayed in the Current Value field. Select Edit (E) and then Copy Current Value (V)
from the menu bar. The data on the SERVOPACK will be overwritten temporarily.
Check the details displayed, and then select File (F) and then Save (S) from the menu bar to
save the data permanently. This operation is possible while the servo is ON.
Refresh Current Value (R)

This function is enabled only for servo parameters. Current values are not automatically
updated when the servo parameters are displayed. Select View (V) and then Refresh Current
Value (R) to read and display the most recent values.
The following table shows the functions given above.
Motion Servo
Setting Motion
Fixed Parameters Remarks
Parameters Parameters
Parameters (See *1)
Axis Data Copy (C)/ Yes Yes No No ---
Axis Data Paste (P)
Details (D) Yes Yes No Yes Parameters
in bit format
only
Default Set (R) Yes Yes Yes No ---
Copy Current Value No No Yes No Enabled only
(D) when online
Refresh Current No No Yes No Enabled only
Value (R) when online
∗ Possible also when the servo is ON.

Note: Yes: Operation possible, NO: Operation not possible.
3-101
Setting Motion Fixed Parameters

The parameters required in the MP920 are set in the Fixed Parameters Tab Page.

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 to axis 4). Set the fixed param-
eters for each axis.
SERVOPACK Displays the type of SERVOPACK.
No. Displays the parameter number of the motion fixed parameter.
Input Data (Set Data) Input (or select) the parameter value in this column. The settings for
each parameter are listed below.
3
fixed parameter settings.
3-102
Setting Parameters Tab Page

Parameters required in the Motion Controller are set in the Set Parameter Tab Page.

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 or axis 2). Set the setting
parameters for each axis.
No. Displays the parameter number of the setup parameter.
name.
ber currently being displayed, as shown below.
Axis Number
Servo Number
1 2 3 4
4 CC00 to CC3F CC40 to CC7F CC80 to CCBF CCC0 to CCFF
3-103
Axis Number
Servo Number
1 2 3 4
8 DC00 to DC3F DC40 to DC7F DC80 to DCBF DCC0 to DCFF
12 EC00 to EC3F EC40 to EC7F EC80 to ECBF ECC0 to ECFF
13 F000 to F03F F040 to F07F F080 to F0BF F0C0 to F0FF
16 FC00 to FC3F FC40 to FC7F FC80 to FCBF FCC0 to FCFF
3
MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on setting
parameter settings.
SERVOPACK Tab Page

SERVOPACK parameters required in the MP920 are set in the SERVOPACK Tab Page.
3-104

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 to axis 4). Set the SERVO-
PACK for each axis.
No. Displays the parameter number of the servo parameter.
MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on servo
parameter settings.

3
parameters are only displayed in the Motion Monitor Tab Page; the settings cannot be
changed here.
3-105
3.5.20 MECHATROLINK Definitions

Axis Number Select the desired axis number (axis 1 or axis 2). The parameters for
No. Displays the parameter number of the parameter.
name.
3 MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: Motion Module (SIEZ-C887-2.5) for details on monitor
parameter settings.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing the SVB Motion Parameters

1 This operation deletes the SVA motion fixed parameters and setting parameters of all axes.
being displayed.
This section explains how to set the MECHATROLINK Definitions.
Outline of the MECHATROLINK Definitions

To set the motion parameters, the required data must be set in three tab pages: The Trans-
mission Parameters Tab, I/O Assignment Tab, and I/O Map Tab.
The status of transmissions can be monitored in the Status Tab.
3-106
Opening the MECHATROLINK Definitions Window

Open the MECHATROLINK Definitions Window according to the procedure given in 3.3
Basic Individual Module Definition Operations. Open the MECHATROLINK Definitions
Window from the M-LINK details field in the Module Configuration Definitions Window.
3-107
The settings are divided into four tab pages, as shown in the following table.
Transmission Parameters Sets the MECHATROLINK transmission parameters.

I/O Assignment Allocates the MECHATROLINK's I/O.
The MECHATROLINK Definitions Window Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the MECHATROLINK
Definitions Window.

Edit (E)
Parameter Setting (D) Returns the allocation settings to default values.
3 Assignment Delete (A) Clears the allocation settings.
Setting MECHATROLINK Definitions

Transmission Parameters Tab Page
This tab sets the parameters required to use the MECHATROLINK communications system.

Master/Slave Sets whether the Machine Controller is used as a Master station or a
Slave station.
Own Station Address When the Machine Controller is being used as a master station, the
local station address is fixed at 0 and cannot be changed. When it is
being used as a slave station, set a station address between 1 and 30.
Message Trust Level Sets the error recovery level for sending MEMOBUS commands.
0 Send command just once and wait indefinitely for a response
from the destination.
1 Send command once and resend if a response is not received
within 8 seconds.
2 When sending the command, send each word of data twice
consecutively and wait indefinitely for a response from the
destination. This method improves transmission quality but
reduces transmission efficiency by 50%.
3-108

Max Slave ST Number Transmission
Number of Slaves Transmission Cycle
(Maximum Number of Speed
Slave Stations)
2 Stations 4 Mbps 500 µs
3 Stations 2 Mbps 1 ms
3
I/O Assignment Tab Page
1. Setting Assignment Data
The I/O Assignment Tab Page is used to set the I/O devices, I/O registers, scan, etc.,
connected in the MECHATROLINK.
3-109

ST# Displays the station number. Up to 14 stations can be set.
TYPE Sets the type of I/O device connected at the station. Select an I/O
device type from the pull-down list.
D Controls the input register's disable setting.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
INPUT, SIZE Sets the leading input register and number of registers (SIZE). The
number of registers is set automatically. Be sure that the range of
registers set for each station does not overlap with another station's
register numbers. The setting range for registers is determined by the
leading register number and ending register number set in the Mod-
ule Configuration Definition Window.
D Controls the output register's disable setting.
• : Enabled
3 • : Disabled
OUTPUT, SIZE Sets the leading output register and number of registers (SIZE). The
registers set for each station do not overlap with another station's
This setting is not required when a SERVOPACK has been selected
for the TYPE field.
SCAN Sets the scan for I/O servicing. The scan will be fixed at High when
a SERVOPACK has been selected for the TYPE field.
(Comment)
INFO The I/O devices set using the TYPE field are shown in Appendix D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices.
2. Deleting I/O Assignments

The procedure to delete the allocation settings for one station at a time is given below.
a) To delete a station's allocation data, move the cursor to the row of the station, to be
deleted, click Edit (E), and then Assignment Delete (A).
b) The station's allocation settings will be deleted.
I/O Map Tab Page

The I/O Map Tab Page displays the status of the Machine Controller's I/O allocations.
3-110
HI Allocates to an input set for a high-speed scan.

HO Allocates to an output set for a high-speed scan.
LI Allocates to an input set for a low-speed scan.
LO Allocates to an output set for a low-speed scan.
DEL Deletes allocations.
Status Tab Page

The Status Tab Page displays the data that is currently being transmitted by the MECHA-
TROLINK.
The tab only displays the status; the displayed values cannot be changed.
3-111
3
The meaning of each column is identical to the columns in the I/O Assignment Tab Page
except for the additional "STS" column.
• STS
In online mode, the MECHATROLINK transmission status information is displayed in
hexadecimal. The meaning of each bit is shown in the following diagram. In offline
F EDCBA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Model code
Reserved
Transmission error (high-speed scan)
Transmission error (low-speed scan)
Reserved
Normal transmission
Saving, Deleting, and Closing MECHATROLINK Definitions

3-112
This section explains the parameter settings for RS-232C, local I/O, and MECHATROLINK in
the MP930.
The MP930 Machine Controllers feature an all-in-one structure, i.e., the required basic Mod-
ule functions are contained in a single unit.
The parameter settings for each Basic Module are the same as the settings for building-block
Machine Controllers. To set the parameters easily, the MP930 Machine Controllers feature a
virtual building-block structure. The following diagram shows the virtual building-block
structure used by MP930 Machine Controllers.
Virtual Building-block Structure

3
RS- MC350 MC350
MC350
232C I/O -NET
Open the Module Configuration Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.2
Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation.
3-113
Fig 3.21 MP930 Module Configuration Definitions Window
This window consists of tab pages used to define the slots of each rack, and the rack settings.
A maximum 4-rack Machine Controller can be set with the CP-717, but the number of racks
is limited to 1 rack for the MP930. Racks 2 to 4 cannot be set.
The maximum number of function Modules (i.e., the number of slots) that can be mounted
to each rack is nine, but the MP930 is an all-in-one type, so its settings are limited to a max-
imum of five slots. The Modules allocated to these slots cannot be changed.
Rack 1:
Slot 00 Slot 01 Slot 02 Slot 03 Slot 04

MP930 RESERVED RS-232C MC350-I/O MC350-NET
Rack and Slot Information

An MP930 virtual rack is allocated to the tab page for rack 1.

Select Rack, Set the information on the rack. The MP930 is set automatically to
Rack Kind rack 1 and short rack.
No. This row shows the virtual slot numbers of the slots in the rack.
Module The Module is set automatically using the Module name set in each
slot.
3-114

Control CPU No. Set the number of the CPU to control each Module. The MP930
CPU is set automatically to 01.
Cir No. The Cir No for RS-232C and MC350-NET Modules is set automati-
cally to 01.
sion.
Replacement Hot Swapping (Removal/insertion under power) is not supported in
I/O Start Register Refer to the settings for MC350-I/O and MC350-NET.
I/O End Register Refer to the settings for MC350-I/O and MC350-NET.
Input DISABLE Controls each Module's Input Enable/Disable setting.
Blank: Setting not possible, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Output DISABLE Controls each Module's Output Enable/Disable setting.
Motion Leading The motion leading register is set automatically.
3
Register
Motion Ending The motion ending register is set automatically.
Register
Detail This is not supported in the current version.
Status This is not supported in the current version.
INFO Setting Ranges for the MP930 I/O Leading/Ending Register Numbers
numbers.
• MC350-I/O (Local I/O): 0000 to 0001 hex
• MC350-NET (Remote I/O): 0010 to 020F hex
Settings made automatically cannot be changed.

Refer to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations for details.
3.6.4 Opening Individual Module Definition Windows
Open the Individual Module Definition Windows according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic
Individual Module Definition Operations. Refer to the following for setting data for individ-
ual Modules.
• RS-232C definitions
3-115
3.6.5 RS-232C Definitions
• MC350-I/O definitions
• MC350-NET definitions
3.6.5 RS-232C Definitions
This section explains the settings for the general-purpose serial (RS-232C) port allocated to
virtual slot number 02.
CIR#00
CIR#01
3
Opening the Generic Serial Definitions Window

Open the Generic Serial Definitions Window by referring to 3.3 Basic Individual Module
Fig 3.22 Generic Serial Definitions Window
3-116
Tab Pages
Use the tab pages to set the parameters for the RS-232C Module. There are two tab pages,
one for each port.
Tab Page Details

CIR#01 Sets the RS232-C transmission parameters.
CIR#02 Sets the RS232-C transmission parameters.
INFO When the Generic Serial Definitions Widow is opened without any settings having been made previ-
ously, a Create New Message Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next oper-
ation.
General-purpose Serial Definitions

3
Two CIR# definition tabs are displayed in the Generic Serial Definitions Window. Make the
definitions while switching between the tabs as required.
General-purpose Serial Transmission Definitions

Circuit Number Select the CIR# for the tab page.
Transmission Protocol Select from MEMOBUS, MELSEC, or no protocol.
Master/Slave Select whether the Module is a master or a slave.
Device Address Set the master's address to 0, and slave addresses from 1 to 63.
Serial I/F Select RS-232 .
Transmission Mode Select from RTU, ASCII, or none.
Data Length 8Bit: 8 bits; 7Bit: 7 bits
Parity Bit Select even, odd, or none (no parity).
Stop Bit 1stop: 1 stop bit; 2stop: 2 stop bits
Transmission Protocol
• MELSEC: Mitsubishi's special protocol (control protocol type 1) for use with general-
purpose sequencers and computer links.
• No protocol: Data can be transferred at any time by the user application program.
Transmission Mode
• RTU: Specify RTU mode for MEMOBUS protocols.
• ASCII: Specify ASCII mode for MEMOBUS protocols.
• None: Specify MELSEC, OMRON, or no protocol.
3-117
3.6.6 MC350-I/O Definitions
The serial transmission parameters (communications parameters) are set to predetermined values, so it
is necessary to set the parameters again only for special cases. The values shown in the Generic Serial
Definitions Window are the default settings.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing General-purpose Serial Definitions

1 When the Delete command is executed, the 2-circuit general-purpose serial definitions data
INFO will be deleted.
2 Ports Connecting to the CP-717
The transmission protocol for a port connecting to the CP-717 should be set to MEMOBUS. The
MEMOBUS specification is the default setting. The maximum transmission speed for a connection to
3 the CP-717 is 19.2 Kbps.
This section explains the MC350-I/O (Local I/O) Definitions that are set for virtual slot 03.
Local I/O
Opening the Local I/O Definitions Window

Open the Local I/O Definitions Window by referring to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Defini-
tion Operations.
3-118
Fig 3.23 The Local I/O Definitions Window
Local I/O Definitions

3
No. Displays the number of the setting.
Item Displays the name of the setting and the I/O signal name.
D Controls the register's disable setting. A register is one word in
length, so the setting applies to 16 I/O points. The register is disabled
when a check is displayed in the box.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No. Indicates the I/O register number. In the MP930, the inputs and out-
puts both use 16 points, and the register number allocation is fixed
(IW0000 and OW0001).
Word Displays the number of consecutive words in the register. In the
MP930, the allocation is fixed at 1 word, so the number of words is
“1.”
SCAN Sets the transmission processing scan.
High: High-speed scan
Low: Low-speed scan
(NA): No scan specification
Current Value In online mode, the current value of the allocated Machine Control-
ler register will be displayed in binary. The current values of discrete
outputs can be changed and are immediately saved in the Machine
Controller's register when inputs are confirmed. In offline mode,
nothing will be displayed.
3-119
REG-No.
The following table shows the default register allocations for group input signals.

Auto Mode IB00000
Manual Mode IB00001
Start IB00002
Program Stop IB00003
Pause IB00004
E-Stop IB00005
Alarm Reset IB00006
Machine Lock IB00007
Debug Mode IB00008
Debug Run IB00009
3 Skip 1 IB0000A
Skip 2 IB0000B
Local I/O Definitions Window (Current Values)
0000 0001 0010 1010 H012A

0000 0000 0000 0000 H0000
Saving, Deleting, and Closing Local I/O Definitions

3-120
3.6.7 MC350-NET Definitions
This section explains the MC350-NET (MECHATROLINK) Definitions that are set for vir-
tual slot 04.
Outline of MECHATROLINK Connections

The following example provides a conceptual diagram of MECHATROLINK connections.
In this example, Network Servos and an I/O Unit are connected to the MP930 Machine Con-
troller (MC Unit) by high-speed serial communications (MECHATROLINK).
MC Unit S#1
MP930 RDY RUN
I/O Unit
POW ER ERR ALM
PRT1 PRT2
YASKAWA BAT
YASKAWA
JEPMC-MC350 JEPMC-IO350
(IO350)
6
CN1
CN1 IN1 OUT1 IN2 OUT2
SW 1
A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1
PORT1
A1 B1 SW1
1 IN2
6 SW2 IN1
OUT2
OUT1
3
DC24V
PORT2
DC 0V
BATTERY
I/O
MECHATROLINK
！！！！
14 stations max.
S#2 S#3 S#3 S#6

SERVOPACKs (Type SGD-ooAN/SGDB-ooN/SGDH-oooE + NS100 Module)
In this diagram, a Remote I/O Unit is connected in station 1 (S#1) and SERVOPACKs are
connected in stations 2 through 5 (S#2 through S#5).
Opening the MECHATROLINK Definitions Window

Open the MECHATROLINK Definitions Window by referring to 3.3 Basic Individual Mod-
ule Definition Operations.
Fig 3.24 The MECHATROLINK Definitions Window
3-121
Tab Pages
Set the various devices connected to the MECHATROLINK network. The following four
tab pages are displayed.
Tab Page Details

Transmission Parameters Sets the MECHATROLINK transmission parameters.
I/O Allocation Allocates the MECHATROLINK's I/O.
INFO When the Definitions Window for each Module is opened without any settings having been made pre-
viously, a New File Message box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next opera-
tion.
3
The MECHATROLINK Definitions Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands on the MECHATROLINK
Definitions Window's Edit (E) menus. See 3.2.4 Module Configuration Definitions Window
Menus for details on commands on the other menus.

Edit (E)
Parameter Setting (D) Returns the allocation settings to default values.
Assignment Delete (A) Clears the allocation settings.
Setting MECHATROLINK Definitions

This tab page is used to set the parameters required to use the MECHATROLINK transmis-
sion system.

Master/Slave Sets whether the Machine Controller is used as a Master station or a
Slave station. The MP930 can be used as a Master station only.
3-122

Own Station Address The MP930 is always a Master station, so the local station address is
fixed at 0 and cannot be changed.
Message Trust Level Sets the error control method used when sending MEMOBUS com-
mands. In the MP930, the Message Trust Level is fixed at 1.
0 Send command just once and wait indefinitely for a response
from the destination.
1 Send command just once and resend if a response is not
received within 8 seconds.
2 When sending the command, send each word of data twice
consecutively and wait indefinitely for a response from the
destination. This method improves transmission quality but
reduces transmission efficiency by 50%.
Trans Cycle The transmission cycle can be set to 2 ms only.
Transmission Speed: The transmission speed can be set to 4 Mbps
only.
I/O Assignment Tab Page 3

This tab page is used to set the I/O devices connected in the MECHATROLINK and their
transmission definition data.

ST# Displays the station number. Up to 14 stations can be set in the
MP930.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
INPUT, SIZE Sets the leading input register and number of registers (SIZE). The
registers set for each station does not overlap with another station's
3-123

• : Enabled
• : Disabled
OUTPUT, SIZE Sets the leading output register and number of registers (SIZE). The
registers set for each station do not overlap with another station's
ule Configuration Definitions Window.
SCAN Sets the scan for I/O servicing. The scan will be fixed at “High”
when a SERVOPACK is set in the TYPE field.
(Comment)
3 1. TYPE (MECHATROLINK Devices)

Refer to D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices for a list of the currently supported MECHA-
TROLINK Devices.
2. INPUT/OUTPUT SIZE
3. Automatic Input Register Allocation

When a SERVOPACK has been connected, the input registers are allocated automati-
cally as shown in the following table. These registers are allocated automatically only
when automatic PGM generation is set on the Group Definitions Window to enable
automatic ladder program generation.
Axis Input Signals Axis 01 Axis 02 Axis 03 ... Axis 04

Servo ON IB00100 IB00110 IB00120 ... IB001D0
JOG+ IB00101 IB00111 IB00121 ... IB001D1
JOG- IB00102 IB00112 IB00122 ... IB001D2
STEP+ IB00103 IB00113 IB00123 ... IB001D3
STEP- IB00104 IB00113 IB00124 ... IB001D4
ZRN IB00105 IB00115 IB00125 ... IB001D5
Zero Point Setting IB00106 IB00116 IB00126 ... IB001D6
Stop IB00107 IB00117 IB00127 ... IB001D7
3-124
INFO The ending register number of "020F" is set considering the MECHATROLINK devices that are likely
to be connected. Reset this value if more registers are needed.
4. Deleting Allocation Data

a) To delete a station's allocation data, move the cursor to the row of the station to be
deleted, select Edit (E), and then Assignment Delete (A).
b) The station's allocation data will be deleted.
I/O Map Tab Page

This tab page displays the status of the Machine Controller's I/O allocations. In the MP930,
the I/O allocation data set in the I/O Assignment Tab Page will be displayed but cannot be
changed.
Table 3.19 I/O Map Tab Page

DEL Deletes allocation.
Status Tab Page

This tab page can be used to check the MECHATROLINK's transmission status.
The tab page only displays the present status of transmissions; the status cannot be changed.
3-125
3.6.8 MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions
except for the additional "STS" column.
1. STS
In online mode, the MECHATROLINK transmission status information is displayed in
3 hexadecimal. The meaning of each bit is shown in the following diagram. In offline
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Model code
Reserved
Reserved
Normal transmission
Saving, Deleting, and Closing MECHATROLINK Definitions

Refer to the procedures in 3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation for details.
Motion parameters must be set when a servo is set as a MECHATROLINK I/O device.
Outline of Motion Parameters

Parameters must be set for Servo Modules connected to the MP930 via a MECHA-
TROLINK network.
3-126
MP930
SGDB SGDB
SERVO- SERVO-
PACK PACK
Opening the MP930 Motion Parameter Window

To open the MP930 Motion Parameter Window, double-click the Motion Parameter File
Icon under the Motion Programs Folder displayed in the File Manager.
To open the Motion Parameter Window from the Engineering Manager Window, select File
(F), Open (O), Definition (D), and then Motion Parameter (P).
INFO The tab pages can be scrolled in the following order by selecting View (V) and then Next Page (N)
from the menu.
• Fixed Parameters, Set Up Parameters, SERVOPACK, Monitor
To scroll in the opposite direction, select View (V) and then Back Page (B) from the menu.
MP930 Motion Parameter Window Control Tabs

The MP930 Motion Parameter Window consists of four control tabs: Fixed Parameters,
Set Up Parameters, SERVOPACK, and Monitor.
Table 3.20 Motion Parameter Window Control Tabs
Tab Function
Fixed Parameters Sets the fixed motion parameters.
Set Up Parameters Sets the setup motion parameters.
SERVOPACK Sets the Servo parameters.
Monitor Monitors the motion parameters.
3-127
MP930 Motion Parameter Window Original Menus

Refer to SVB Motion Parameters Window Original Menus in 3.5.19 SVB Motion Parameters
Settings.
Fixed Parameters Tab Page

Setting Optional Values
This tab page is used to set the motion fixed parameters required for servo adjustment.

Group Name Select one of the group names that was set in the group definitions.
Logical Axis Name Select a logical axis name. Set motion fixed parameters for each
axis.
Input Data (Set Data) Input (or select) the setting for the parameter.
INFO Refer to MP930 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-1.1) for
details on motion fixed parameter settings.
3-128
Set Up Parameters Tab Page

This tab page is used to set the parameters required for servo adjustment.
3
Logical Axis Name Select a logical axis name. Set motion setting parameters for each
axis.
Reg No. Displays the register number corresponding to the parameter name.
Input Data (Set Data) Input the setting for the parameter.
Unit Displays the unit used to set the parameter.
Current Value Displays the current setting of the parameter in online mode. Noth-
ing will be displayed in offline mode.
details on motion setting parameter settings.
In online mode, set values that are input are immediately saved to Machine Controller registers when
the Enter Key is pressed. The current value displays will be refreshed using these values.
3-129
SERVOPACK Parameters Tab Page

This tab page is used to set the servo parameters.

3 Group Name Select one of the group names that was set in the group definitions.
Logical Axis Name Select a logical axis name. Set servo parameters for each axis.
SERVOPACK Name Displays the SERVOPACK type.
Input Data (Set Data) Input the setting for the parameter.
Unit Displays the unit for setting the parameter.
Current Value Displays the current value saved in the SERVOPACK.
INFO 1 Refer to MP930 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-1.1) for
details on servo parameter settings.
2 Displaying Current Values
The current values will not be displayed if a SERVOPACK alarm exists even when the SERVOPACK
Tab is clicked. First clear the alarm, and then try again to display the current values.
3-130
Monitor Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the current values for the motion parameters. This window is
only for displaying the values, and settings cannot be changed here.

3
Logical Axis Name Select a logical axis name. The parameters are monitored for each
axis.
Reg No. Displays the register number corresponding to the parameter name.
This register number is allocated a fixed allocation according to the
servo number.
Monitor Data Displays the current value for the parameter in online mode. Nothing
will be displayed in offline mode.
Unit Displays the unit for setting the parameter.
Saving MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions

In online mode, the motion parameters are saved to both the Machine Controller and the
hard disk. In offline mode, they are saved only to the hard disk.
The procedure to save motion parameters is given below.
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the Motion Parameter Window menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the message box (motion parameters).
1 The save operation must be executed separately for each axis and for each of the Fixed Parameters, Set
Up Parameters, and SERVOPACK Tabs.
2 In online mode, changes to fixed parameters and servo parameters cannot be saved if the RUN (Servo
ON) Flag is ON. Save the data after the flag has gone OFF during servo drive operation. The RUN
(Servo ON) Flag is bit 0 of parameter number 2 (RUN command settings) in the Set Up Parameters
Tab. The register number for parameter 2 is OWC001.
3-131
Deleting MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions

The procedure to delete motion parameter settings is given below.
1. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) from the Motion Parameter Window menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the message box (motion parameters).
INFO When the delete operation is executed, the fixed and setting parameter data for all of the axes will be
deleted, and the default values will be set.
Closing MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions

To exit the motion parameter definitions and display operations, close the MP930 Motion
Parameter Window by selecting File (F) and then Close (C) from the menu.
3-132
This section explains the basic parameter settings for the Serial, Local I/O, SVA, CNTR, and
MLINK Modules in the MP940.
3.7.1 Outline of MP940 Module Configuration Definitions
The MP940 is a 1-axis controller with a bus connection of a SGDH SERVOPACK. It con-
sists of Communications, Local I/O, and other Modules built into a single case.
MP940
SGDH CNTR
SVA MP940 Local
CPU I/O DI
DO
AO
3
MLINK or
SERIAL DeviceNet
RS-232C
CP-717
RS-422/485 MLINK or MLINK or
DeviceNet DeviceNet
Engineering Tool
The MP940 Machine Controllers feature an all-in-one structure, i.e., the required basic Mod-
ule functions are contained in a single compact unit.
The parameter settings for each Basic Module are the same as the settings for building-block
Machine Controllers. To set the parameters easily, the MP930 Machine Controllers feature a
virtual building-block structure. The following diagram shows the virtual building-block
structure used by MP930 Machine Controllers.
3-133
MP940
MP940
TX
Virtual Building-block Structure
BAT
RX
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2 M
E
C
MLINK
RUN
MP940 SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
or
2
PP O
L
COPY
→ NO I
N
260IF
PORT1 K
I/O
PORT2
POWER
LE
+24V
D
GND
FG
It is necessary to define how each Module in the virtual building-block structure will be
used.
Table 3.21 Module Definitions

3 Defined Module Settings
MP940 Defines the main Machine Controller parameters. No settings are
required.
SERIAL Sets the serial communications parameters.
LIO Sets the local I/O parameters.
SVA Sets the motion parameters.
CNTR Sets the counter parameters.
MLINK Sets the MECHATROLINK parameters.
Open the Module Configuration Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.2
Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation.
For the MP490, slots 00 to 06 of rack 1 must be set. Slot 01, however, is reserved by the sys-
tem, and therefore cannot be set.
Fig 3.25 Module Configuration Definitions Window
3-134
This window consists of tab pages used to define the slots of each rack, and the rack settings.
A maximum 4-rack Machine Controller can be set with the CP-717, but the number of racks
is limited to 1 rack for the MP940. Racks 1 to 3 cannot be set.
The maximum number of function Modules (i.e., the number of slots) that can be mounted
to each rack is nine, but the MP940 is an all-in-one type, so its settings are limited to a max-
imum of six slots. The Modules allocated to these slots cannot be changed.
Rack 1:
Slot 00 Slot 01 Slot 02 Slot 03 Slot 04 Slot 05 Slot 06

MP940 RESERVED SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR MLINK or
260IF
3
Rack and Slot Information
An MP940 virtual rack is allocated to the tab page for rack 1. Slot numbers are displayed in
the columns from left to right and setting items are displayed in rows from top to bottom.

Select Rank, Set information on the rack. The MP930 is set automatically to rack
Rack Kind 1 and short rack.
No. This row shows the virtual slot numbers of the slots in the rack.
Module The Module is set automatically using the Module name set in each
slot.
Control CPU No Set the number of the CPU to control each Module. The MP940
CPU is set automatically to 01.
Cir No. Circuit numbers are set for each type of Module starting from 01 for
Communications and Motion Modules. With the MP940, this would
be the Serial, SVA, and MLINK Modules. There is only one of each
kind of Module, so the Cir No is set automatically to 01 for each.
sion.
Replacement Hot Swapping (Removal/insertion under power) is not supported in
I/O Start Register Set the address of the leading I/O register. Refer to the settings for
LIO, CNTR, and MLINK.
I/O End Register Set the address of the ending I/O register. Refer to the settings for
LIO, CNTR, and MLINK.
Input DISABLE Controls each Module's Input Enable/Disable setting.
Output DISABLE Controls each Module's Output Enable/Disable setting.
3-135

Motion Leading The address of the first motion parameter register is set automati-
Register cally.
Motion Ending The address of the ending motion parameter register is set automati-
Register cally.
Detail This setting is not supported in the current version.
Status Displays the status of each Module in online mode.
INFO Setting Ranges for the I/O Leading/Ending Register Numbers

numbers.
3 • LIO (Local I/O): 0000 to 0001 hex
• CNTR (counters): 0002 to 0011hex
• MLINK (Remote I/O): 0100 to 02FF hex
• 260IF (DeviceNet)
Settings made automatically cannot be changed.

Refer to the procedures in 3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation for details.
Open the Individual Module Definition Windows according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic
Individual Module Definition Operations. Refer to the following for setting data for individ-
ual Modules.
• Serial definitions
• LIO definitions
• SVA parameter definitions
• CNTR I/O definitions
• MLINK (CERF) definitions
• 260IF definitions
3.7.6 Serial Transmission Definitions
The MP940 provides a serial transmission interface that includes one RS-232C circuit and
one RS-422/485 interface circuit. The interface supports the Yaskawa MEMOBUS protocol
and other standard transmission protocols. The MDR 14-pin RS-232C port (port 1) can also
3-136
be used as a engineering port to connect the CP-717 as an engineering interface.

This section describes the hardware and software settings required for serial transmissions.
These setting will enable the MP940 to function as either a master or slave under the speci-
fied protocol.
Serial transmissions are programmed in the drawing and function programs to send and
receive data using the MSG-SND and MSG-RCV functions.
MP940
TX
BAT
RX
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2 M
E
C
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
TEST T
R Transmission
RS-232C MDR－14
FLASH
2
PORT1
O
processor 1
PP
L
COPY
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K
Communica-
I/O
tions CPU
Transmission RS-422 / MDR－14
PORT2 processor 2 485 PORT2
POWER
LE
+24V
D
GND
FG
3
Opening the Serial Definitions Window
Open the Serial Definitions Window by referring to 3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition
Operations.
3-137
Tab Pages
Use the tab pages to set the parameters for the Serial Module. There are two tab pages, one
for each port.
Tab Page Details

CIR#01 Sets the RS-232C transmission parameters.
CIR#02 Sets the RS-422/485 transmission parameters.
INFO When the Serial Definitions Window is opened without any settings having been made previously, a
Create New Message Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next operation.
Serial Communications Definitions

3 Two CIR# definition tabs are displayed in the Serial Definitions Window. Make the defini-
tions while switching between the tabs as required.
CP-217 Transmission Definitions
The definitions for CP-217 transmission are listed in the following table.

Circuit Number Select the CIR# for the tab page.
Transmission Protocol Select from MEMOBUS, MELSEC, or no protocol.
Master/Slave Select whether the Module is a master or a slave.
Device Address Set the master’s address to 0, and slave addresses from 1 to 63.
Serial I/F Select RS-232 (RS-232C), RS-485, or RS-422.
Transmission Mode Select from RTU, ASCII, or none.
Data Length 8Bit: 8 bits; 7Bit: 7 bits
Parity Bit Select even, odd, or none (no parity).
Stop Bit 1stop: 1 stop bit; 2stop: 2 stop bits
Sending (Send Delay) Set the delay between executing the send/receive functions (MSG-
SND OR MSG-RCV) and sending the message.
Automatically Set whether or not to automatically respond to quires from the mas-
Reception ter.
(Automatic Reception)
Readout of Input Relay Set the leading address and range of the input relays that can be read
for automatic response.
Readout of Input Set the leading address and range of the input registers that can be
Registers read for automatic response.
Readout/Write-in of Set the leading address and range of the coils that can be read/written
Coil for automatic response.
Readout/Write-in of Set the leading address and range of the holding registers that can be
Hold Register read/written for automatic response.
3-138

Write-in width of Coil/ Set the range of the coils and holding registers that can be written for
Hold Register automatic response.
Transmission Protocol
• MELSEC: Mitsubishi's special protocol (control protocol type 1) for use with general-
purpose sequencers and computer links.
• OMRON: OMRON's SYSMAC C-series Host Link protocol.
• No protocol: Data can be transferred at any time by the user application program.
Serial I/F
Select CIR#01 for RS-232C and CIR#2 for RS-485/422.
Transmission Mode 3
• RTU: Specify RTU mode for MEMOBUS protocols.
• ASCII: Specify ASCII mode for MEMOBUS protocols.
• None: Specify MELSEC, OMRON, or no protocol.
Sending (Send Delay)

When Enable is selected, a delay until the beginning of transmissions (1 to 100 ms) can be
set.
• Master Station:
The delay will be included between execution of the MSG-SND function and the trans-
mission of the command.
• Slave Station:
The delay will be included between reception of a command by the MSG-RCV function
and the transmission of the response.
Automatically Reception (Automatic Reception)

Specify the ranges of relays, registers, and coils to check when automatically sending a
response message to a query from the master. These settings are valid for slave stations only.
There is no need to set the ranges when message transmissions will not be performed
between the master and slaves. Also, if the ladder program is being used to return a response
message with the MSG-RCV function, disable the automatic response so that redundant pro-
cessing is not performed.
With the system default settings, response messages will be sent using the ranges set with
the following parameters.
3-139
Leading Register Numbers and Number of Words

The leading register numbers and number of words are listed in the following table.
Machine Controller
Setting Item
MP920 CP-316 CP-316H CP-916A CP-916G RIO-05
Readout of Input Leading register IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000
Relays
Number of words 5120 6400 6400 2304 2304 2304
Readout of Input Leading register IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000 IW0000
Registers
Number of words 5120 6400 6400 2304 2304 2304
Read/Write Coils Leading register MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000
Number of words 32768 8192 16384 3072 3072 3072
Read/Write Leading register MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000 MW0000
Holding Registers
Number of words 32768 8192 16384 3072 3072 3072
3 Default Settings for General-purpose Serial Parameters

The default setting of the serial parameters are listed in the following table.
Setting Item CIR01 CIR02

Rack Number 01 01
Slot Number 02 02
Circuit Number 01 01
Transmission Protocol MEMOBUS MEMOBUS
Master/Slave Slave Slave
Device Address 01 02
Serial I/F RS-232 RS-485
Transmission Mode RTU RTU
Data Length 8 8
Parity Bit Even Even
Stop Bit 1 1
Baud Rate 9,600 9,600
Sending (Send Delay) None None
Automatically No No
Reception
(Automatic Reception)
Readout of Input Relay IW0000/5120 IW0000/5120
Readout of Input IW0000/5120 IW0000/5120
Registers
Readout/Write-in of MW00000/32768 MW00000/32768
Coils
Readout/Write-in of MW00000/32768 MW00000/32768
Hold Register
Write-in width of Coil/ MW00000/MW32767 MW00000/MW32767
Hold Register
3-140
Saving, Deleting, and Closing General-purpose Serial Definitions

INFO 1 When the delete operation is executed, the 2-circuit general-purpose serial definitions data will be
deleted.
2 Ports Connecting to the CP-717
The transmission protocol for a port connecting to the CP-717 should be set to MEMOBUS. The
MEMOBUS specification is the default setting. The maximum transmission speed for a connection to
the CP-717 is 19.2 Kbps.
3.7.7 LIO Definitions
The LIO Module is equipped with 8 digital inputs (DI), 8 digital outputs (DO), and 1 analog
output (AO). I/O servicing is performed at fixed intervals, once for each high-speed scan or 3
low-speed scan in the MP940.
One of the digital inputs can be used as an interrupt by enabling the interrupt in the Module
Configuration Definitions Window.
The register numbers allocated to each I/O port are fixed.
Connector I/O REG-NO

Discrete inputs 8 points IW0000
Discrete outputs 8 points OW0000
Analog output 1 channel OW0001
Analog input 1 channel IW0001
MP940 Output Isolated

TX
port 8
DO
BAT
RX
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
Input port Isolated

PRT2 M
E
C
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
8
System bus
DI
TEST T
C
FLASH R
2
PP O
L
COPY
P
→ NO I
N
I/O
interface
PORT1 K
U 1
I/O
Interrupt
port
PORT2
Output AO
POWER
port
LE
+24V
D
GND
FG
Shared
AI mem- SGDH
ory
3-141
3.7.7 LIO Definitions
Opening the LIO Definitions Window

Open the LIO Definitions Window according to procedures in 3.3 Basic Individual Module
LIO Definitions
The LIO definitions set the I/O operations and disable status.
3
Setting Items

No. Displays the I/O item.
Item Displays the name of the I/O item.
Operation Set the operation of the I/O item. The setting is made automatically
for everything but interrupts input.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
REG-No. Displays the I/O register number for the I/O item. This setting is
made automatically and cannot be changed.
Word Displays the number of consecutive words of the I/O registers for the
(Number of Words) I/O item. This setting is made automatically and cannot be changed.
SCAN Set the transmission processing scan.
SYSTEM: System scan
Current Value In online mode, the current value of the Machine Controller registers
will be displayed. The current values of discrete I/O are displayed in
binary and the current values of discrete outputs can be changed. The
current values of interrupt inputs are displayed as ON or OFF. The
current values are immediately saved in the Machine Controller's
register when inputs are confirmed. In offline mode, nothing will be
displayed.
Unit Displays the unit of the I/O item.
3-142
Saving, Deleting, and Closing LIO Definitions

3.7.8 SVA Parameter Settings
The SVA Module connects to the servo connector on an SGDH SERVOPACK via the bus
connection to control one axis through shared memory.
To control the SGDH, the SVA Module sends and receives data through the shared memory
to perform all operations traditionally performed through analog voltage, such as speed con-
trol and encoder pulse inputs.
Refer to the MP940 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-
C887-4.1) for details.
Shared memory
MP940 SGDH
3
Servo ON
Servodriver operation P/PI switch
commands
Operating mode
Control mode switch
Current control
Speed control
Alarm reset Servomotor
Speed ref IN Torque ref PWM
INVRF M
Speed Torque ref IN
INTRF
Latch request
Torque
Count
Latched data
Position PG count CNTR base PG
board PG
Multi-turn data Encoder
Others Torque monitor
Speed monitor
Control methods Sensor
I/O status
Analog input monitor A/D V-REF

Latched data
CNTR Sensor
Count
PG
External encoder
Fig 3.26 SVA Module
Opening the SVA Motion Parameters Window

Open the SVA Motion Parameters Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individ-
3-143
3
Tab Pages
The SVA Motion Parameters Window is composed of four tab pages: Fixed Parameters,
Setup Parameters, SERVOPACK, and Monitor.
Tab Page Function

Fixed Parameters Sets the basic motion fixed parameters.
Set Up Parameters Sets the motion setting parameters in registers.
SERVOPACK Sets the servo parameters of the SGDH.
Monitor Sets the parameters to monitor.
INFO When the SVA Motion Parameters Window is opened without any settings having been made previ-
ously, a "New File" Message Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next opera-
tion.
SVA Motion Parameters Window Original Menus

Refer to SVB Motion Parameters Window Original Menus under 3.5.19 SVB Motion
Parameters Settings for details.
Setting SVA Motion Parameters

Fixed Parameters Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the motion fixed parameters required for servo adjustment. Refer
3-144
to the initial Motion Parameters Window.

Axis Number Displays the axis number. The axis is fixed at Axis 1.
No. Displays the number of the fixed parameter.
Input Data (Set Data) Input (or select) the value for the parameter. Refer to the list of
motion fixed parameters for details.
Unit Displays the unit for setting the data.
Refer to 6.3.1 Motion Fixed Parameter Details in the MP940 Machine Controller User’s
Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details on parameter settings.
Set Up Parameters Tab Page

Click the Set Up Parameters Tab.
3

No. Displays the number of the setting parameter.
name.
motion setup parameters for details.
Refer to 6.3.2 Motion Setting Parameter Details in the MP940 Series Machine Controller
User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details on parameter settings.
3-145
details on servo parameter settings.
SERVOPACK Parameters Tab Page

Click the SERVOPACK Tab.

No. Displays the number of the servo parameter.
motion SERVOPACK parameters for details.
Refer to 6.4 Parameters for SGDH SERVOPACK in the MP940 Machine Controller User's
Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details on servo parameter settings.

Click the Monitor Tab. The settings cannot be changed in this window.
3-146

No. Displays the number of the monitor parameter.
3
Reg-No. Displays the register number corresponding to the monitor parame-
ter.
Monitor Data In online mode, the parameter's current value will be displayed. In
Refer to 6.3.3 Motion Monitoring Parameter Details in the MP940 Machine Controller
User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details.
Saving, Deleting, and Closing MP930 Motion Parameter Definitions

being displayed.
3.7.9 CNTR I/O Definitions
The MP940 CNTR Module provides 1 pulse input (PI) with a 5-V differential interface.
The CNTR Module has a Latch Input Signal, so the counter value can be latched when the
latch signal is received. A Coincident Detection Signal Output is also provided, so a signal
can be output to an external device when the count matches an internal set value.
3-147
The count data is input to the CPU-01 Module once each scan (high-speed or low-
speed).
MP940
TX
BAT
RX
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2
Pulse input 5-V differen-
M
E CPU processor tial interface
RUN C
I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2 O
PP
L
COPY I
→ NO N
K
Latch input
PORT1
Coincident detection input

I/O
3 PORT2
POWER
+24V LED
GND
FG
Opening the CNTR I/O Definitions Window

Open the CNTR I/O Definitions Window according to the procedure in 3.3 Basic Individual
Module Definition Operations.
3-148
Tab Pages
The Counter I/O Definitions Window is composed of two tab pages: Fixed Parameter Set
Tab and I/O Data Set Tab.
Tab Page Function

Fixed Parameter Set Sets the CNTR fixed parameters.
I/O Data Set Sets the CNTR I/O data.
INFO When the CNTR I/O Definitions Window is opened without any settings having been made previously,
a New File Message Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next operation.
CNTR I/O Definitions Window Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the CNTR I/O Defini- 3
tions Window.
Table 3.22 CNTR I/O Definitions Window Menu Commands

Set (S)
Default (R) Returns settings to default values by channel.
View (V)
DEC (D) Displays I/O data in decimal.
HEX (H) Displays I/O data in hexadecimal.
BIN (B) Displays I/O data in binary.
CNTR I/O Definitions

Fixed Parameter Set Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the sync scan. Select System, High, or Low from the pull-down
list.
Refer to the MP940 Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-
C887-4.1) for details on scans.
Table 3.23 Fixed Parameter Settings
No. Setting Item Details Default

- Top Register No Displays the leading address of the I/O register 0
(Leading to be used.
Register
Number)
1 A/B Pulse Signal Always set to 5-V Differential Input. -
Type
3-149
No. Setting Item Details Default

2 A/B Pulse Signal The polarity of the A/B pulse 0
Polar Positive: 0, Negative: 1
3 Pulse Count 0: Signed (multiply x1) 6
1: Signed (multiply x2)
2: Up/Down (multiply x1)
3: Up/Down (multiply x2)
4: A/B pulse (multiply x1)
4 Counter Mode Always set to Reversible Counter. -
5 PI Latch Detection Always set to PI Latch. -
6 Coincident Detec- Use of coincident detection 0
tion Unuse: 0, Use: 1
7 Coincident IRQ Use of coincident interrupt 0
Unuse: 0, Use: 1
3 Coincident IRQ is valid only when Coincident
Detection above is set to “1.”
8 Select the use of Use of gear ratio 0
electronic Unuse: 0, Use: 1
gear
9 Pulse number per 1 to 65535 2048
one cycle of
the encoder
10 Moving amount per 1 to 2-1 10000
one cycle of
the machine
11 Encoder side gear 1 to 65535 1
ratio
12 Gear ratio (load) 1 to 65535 1
I/O Data Set Tab Page

Click the I/O Data Set Tab.
1. Channel Number
The channel number display is fixed at CH#1.
3-150
2. IN Data
a) Status
Displays the status of each bit in the operating status register. The corresponding box
will contain a black circle when the bit is ON and a white circle when the bit is OFF.
The leading input register is the status word.
Status Meaning
Data Setting Error ON: Data setting error
Fixed Data Setting Error ON: Fixed parameter setting error
Count Value Preset ON: Count value preset completed.
PI Latch Detected ON: PI latch detection completed.
A/B Pulse 0 ON: Feedback pulses within ±1 pulse
Coincident Detection Signal ON: Coincident detected signal ON (pulse
units).
Writing Fixed Parameter Now ON: Parameters being written online.
A-pulse disconnect indication ON: Disconnected. 3
B-pulse disconnect indication ON: Disconnected.
Module Ready ON: CNTR Module is ready.
b) IN Data Settings
Setting Item Register Range Meaning

Increment Pulse IL0004 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 pulse
Hardware Counter Current IL0006 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 pulse
Value
PI Latch Data IL0008 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 pulse
After Convert Increment IL000A 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 reference
Pulse unit
Counter Current Value IL000C 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 reference
unit
After Convert PI Latch IL000E 0 to 2147483647 -
Data
System Monitor IL0010 0 to 2147483647 -
3. OUT Data
a) Operation Mode
The status of each bit of the output mode register is displayed. Settings can be
selected with option buttons.
Status Meaning
Count Enabled/Disabled
Count Value Do/Don’t
PI Latch Do/Don’t
Candescent Do/Don’t
3-151
3.7.10 MLINK (CERF) Definitions
b) OUT Data Settings
Setting Item Register Range Meaning

Count Preset Data OL0004 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 pulse
Set Coincident Detection OL0006 0 to 2147483647 1 = 1 pulse
Saving, Deleting, and Closing CNTR I/O Definitions

INFO The Error Detection Message Box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appen-

3
To show the concept of the MLINK, the following illustration shows an example of net-
work-compatible I/O Module connections to the MP900-series Machine Controller using the
MECHATROLINK high-speed serial communications.
MP940 S#1
MP940 I/O Unit
BAT
RDY
TX
RX
YASKAWA
(IO350)
RUN
JEPMC-IO350
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2 M
E
RUN C
CN1
IN1 OUT1 IN2 OUT2
6
H
INIT
5
A
TEST T
4
FLASH R
3
2 O
PP
2
L
COPY I A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1
1
→ NO
N
K
PORT1
SW1
I/O
IN2
SW2 IN1
OUT2
OUT1
DC24V
PORT2
DC 0V
POWER
+24V LED
GND
FG
14 stations max.
S#2 ST#3
Fig 3.27 MLINK Connections Example

In this diagram, a Remote I/O Module is connected in station 1 (S#1) and MECHA-
TROLINK I/O Devices are connected from station 2 on.
To set the MLINK parameter, data must be set on the following tab pages: Transmission
Parameters Tab, I/O Assignment Tab, and I/O Map Tab. Communications status can be
checked on the Status Tab Page.
3-152
Opening the MECHATROLINK (CERF) Window

Open the MECHATROLINK Definitions Window according to the procedure given in 3.3
Basic Individual Module Definition Operations.
3
The above illustration shows the window as it appears when first opened.
Tab Pages
The tab pages are used to set the devices to be connected to the MLINK network. The
MLINK Definitions Window is composed of four tab pages.
Tab Page Function

Transmission Sets the basic MLINK transmission parameters.
Parameters
I/O Assignment Allocates the MLINK I/O devices and registers.
I/O Map Allocates the detailed I/O map.
INFO When the MECHATROLINK (CERF) Window is opened without any settings having been made pre-
viously, a "New File" Message Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button to proceed to the next
operation.
MECHATROLINK (CERF) Window

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the MECHATROLINK
(CERF) Window.

Edit (E)
Default (D) Returns the allocation data to the default values.
Assignment Delete (A) Clears the allocation data.
3-153
MLINK Definition Settings

This section describes the settings on the tab pages.

This tab page is used to set the parameters required to use the MLINK transmission system.
Setting Item Details Default

Master/Slave Sets whether to use the Machine Controller as a Master
master station or as a slave station.
Own Station When the Machine Controller is being used as a 0
Address master station, the local station address is fixed at
0 and cannot be changed. When it is being used as
a slave station, set a station address between 1
and 14.
Message Trust Sets the error control method used when sending 0
3 Level MEMOBUS commands. Set the level from the
table of message trust levels given below.
Max Slave ST One of three levels can be selected. Refer to the 14 stations
Number table of the maximum number of slave stations
(Maximum Slave given below. Set the number according to the
ST Number) scale of the system.
Scan Set to High or Low. Low
Table 3.24 Message Trust Levels
Level Details
0 Send command just once and wait indefinitely for a response from the destina-
tion.
1 Send command just once and resend if a response is not received within 8 sec-
onds.
2 When sending the command, send each word of data twice consecutively and
wait indefinitely for a response from the destination. This method improves
transmission quality but reduces transmission efficiency by 50%.
Table 3.25 Maximum Number of Slave Stations
Number of Slave Communications

Baud Rate
Stations Cycle
14 stations 4 Mbps 2 ms
3-154
I/O Assignment Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the I/O devices and registers connected in the MECHA-
TROLINK. 3
ST# Displays the station number. Up to 14 stations can be set.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
INPUT, SIZE Sets the leading input register number and number of registers
(SIZE). The number of registers is set automatically. Be sure that the
range of registers set for each station does not overlap with another
station's register numbers. The setting range for registers is deter-
mined by the leading register number and ending register number set
in the Module Configuration Definitions Window.
• : Enabled
• : Disabled
OUTPUT, SIZE Sets the leading output register number and number of registers
(SIZE). The number of registers is set automatically. Be sure that the
range of registers set for each station do not overlap with another sta-
tion's register numbers. The setting range for registers is determined
by the leading register number and ending register number set in the
Module Configuration Definitions Window.
SCAN Sets the scan for I/O servicing. Set the scan according to the scan set
on the Transmission Parameters Tab Page.
Station Name Comments up to 32-characters can be input for each station.
(Comment)
INFO Refer to Appendix D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices for the I/O devices set using the TYPE field.
3-155
Deleting I/O Allocations

1. To delete a station's allocation data, move the cursor to the row of the station to be
deleted, click Edit (E) and then Assignment Delete (A).
2. The station's allocation settings will be deleted.
I/O Map Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the status of the Machine Controller's I/O allocations.

DEL Deletes allocation.
INFO The scan settings on the I/O Map Tab Page are not used for the MP900 series. All settings will be per-
formed according to the scan settings on the Transmission Parameters Tab Page.
Status Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the data that is currently being transmitted by the MLINK.
3-156
The tab only displays the status; the displayed values cannot be changed.
except for the additional “STS” column.
3
STS
In online mode, the MLINK transmission status information is displayed in hexadecimal.
The meaning of each bit is shown in the following diagram. In offline mode, nothing will be
displayed.
F EDCBA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Model code
Reserved
Reserved
Normal transmission
Saving, Deleting, and Closing MLINK Definitions

3-157
3.7.11 260IF Setup
3.7.11 260IF Setup
Perform the setup for the 260IF from the CP-717 Engineering Tool.
Opening the 260IF Definitions Window

The procedure to open the 260IF Definitions Window is given below.
1. Double-click the Module configuration definitions of the controller mounting the 260IF.
The Module Configuration Definitions Window will be displayed.
Rack 1 ・・・・・・・・・
No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Module MP940
MP920 RESERVED SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR 260IF
Control CPU Number
・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・
3 I/O Start Register

I/O End Register
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・・・
・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・

With the MP940, the 260IF is allocated to slot 06 and this cannot be changed; select the
260IF Module.
The I/O leading and ending register addresses must be set in the 260IF Module settings.
Allocate the I/O register addresses to be used within the ranges shown below.
I/O Leading Register (IW/OW Register Start 0000 to 07FF

Offset)
I/O Ending Register (IW/OW Register End 0000 to 07FF
Offset)
2. Double-click the slot set for the 260IF Module to open the 260IF Definitions Window.
3-158
Fig 3.29 260IF Definitions Window 3

Setting Methods
The 260IF Definitions Window consists of the following three tab pages.
Transmis- I/O Status Status

sion Param-
eters
Tab Page Details

Transmission Sets the communications and network parameters for the 260IF
Parameters Module.
I/O Status Displays the communications status with the slaves when setting the
master at online. For details, refer to Chapter 6 Network Mainte-
nance in the MP920 Machine Controller User's Manual: 260IF
Status Displays the 260IF Module status when online. For details, refer to
Chapter 6 Network Maintenance in the MP920 Machine Controller
User's Manual: 260IF DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-5.2).

This tab page is used to set the following items.
1. Communications Cycle Time Information Settings

Communications Cycle If using the 260IF as a DeviceNet master, enter the communications
Time (Set Value) cycle time set value.
Communications Cycle Displays the communications cycle current value during I/O trans-
Time (Current Value); mission.
Display Only
3-159
3.7.11 260IF Setup

Communications Cycle Displays the communications cycle maximum value during I/O
Time (Maximum transmission.
Value); Display Only
Refer to 4.2 Calculating Communications Cycle Times in the MP920 Machine Control-
ler User's Manual: 260IF DeviceNet (SIEZ-C887-5.2) for details.
The asterisks ("**") displayed on the left of the I/O allocations setting table denote the 260IF
itself, allocated using the Module configuration definitions.

Master/Slave Set the operating mode (i.e., DeviceNet master or slave) for the 260IF.
Set to the same value as the value set using 260IF setting switch SW1
(X1).
MAC ID The MAC ID is the DeviceNet MAC ID (i.e., DeviceNet address) of
3 the 260IF. Set to the same value as the value set using 260IF setting
switches SW2 and SW3.
MAC ID Field The MAC ID field is the DeviceNet MAC ID (i.e., DeviceNet address)
for I/O allocation. MAC ID fields are set automatically in order start-
ing from 00.
D Input enable/disable sets whether or not the Controller CPU exchanges
I/O data with the 260IF. Select it to disable I/O data exchange.
INPUT Set the leading address of the input area (input register IWxxxx) allo-
cated to the relevant device. Specify using a hexadecimal word
address.
BSIZE Displays in bytes the size of the input area (input register IWxxxx)
1 slave. For example, if setting 3 bytes from IW1100 and 1 byte from
IW1102, the registers are used as shown below.
Register Address F to 8 7 to 0
IW1100H
IW1101H
IW1102H
IW1103H
D Output enable/disable sets whether or not the Controller CPU
exchanges I/O data with the 260IF. Select it to disable I/O data
exchange.
OUTPUT Set the leading address of the output area (output register OWxxxx)
allocated to the relevant device. Specify using hexadecimal word
address.
BSIZE Displays in bytes the size of the output area (output register OWxxxx)
allocated to the device. Specify from 1 to 256 (in decimal) for 1 slave.
The bytes are little endian, the same as the input registers.
SCAN The data exchange cycle (SCAN) is the timing for exchanging I/O data
between the Controller CPU and the 260IF. The Controller CPU data
exchange cycle is asynchronous with I/O transmission. When set to
High, the Controller CPU exchanges I/O data using the CPU's high-
speed scan timing. When set to Low, the Controller CPU exchanges
data using the CPU's low-speed scan timing.
3-160

TYPE Set the I/O transmission type (TYPE) to Polled or Strobed.
• Polled enables any DeviceNet slaves to be set.
• Strobed enables input only, and limits DeviceNet slaves to commu-
nications of 8 bytes maximum.
For details on polled and strobed connections, refer to the DeviceNet
specifications manual.
EM (Explicit EM allocation (EM) is checked only when the 260IF is the DeviceNet
Message) master and only message communications are to be performed with the
slaves. DeviceNet slaves performing I/O transmission can exchange
messages, but EM allocation is not necessary to be set.
COMMENT A comment of up to 32 characters can be input to include the name,
type, or other information on the relevant device.
3. Saving Parameters
When the parameter settings have been completed, save the parameters by selecting File
(F) and then selecting Save (S) from the menu.
4. I/O Allocation Settings Supplementary Explanation 3
a) Master/Slave Selection and MAC ID Settings
Select the operating mode in Master/Slave Settings to match the 260IF setting switch
SW1 (X1) set value.
Set the DeviceNet address in MAC ID to match the 260IF setting switches SW2 and
SW3 set values.
b) Communications Cycle Settings
Enter the communications cycle time required in 4.2 Calculating Communications
Cycle Times in the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: 260IF
This setting is not necessary when using the 260IF as a DeviceNet slave.
c) I/O Allocation
Allocate the I/O registers for sending and receiving I/O data between the Controller CPU and
the 260IF according to the DeviceNet system configuration.
3-161
3.7.11 260IF Setup
5. Example of Slave I/O Allocation

Set the 260IF as shown in the following diagram to use the 260IF as a DeviceNet slave
with MAC ID = 3, to send and receive I/O data between the slave and the DeviceNet
master using 64 bytes of input and 64 bytes of output.
Master device Node address #00

(MAC ID = 00)
PS MP940 260IF
Node address #03
(MAC ID = 03)
Slave
3 2. I/O Allocation Settings
Master/Slave: Master MAC ID： 3
00
01
02
03 IW1100 064 OW1200 064 High Polled Slave
・・・
・・・

(MAC ID = 00) (MAC ID = 03)
Master Slave
IB11000
IB11001
IB11002
Output data ・
・
・
IB1100F
OB12000
OB12001
OB12002
Input data ・
・
・
OB1200F
3-162
4 System Configuration
Definitions
This section explains how to define the system configuration that must be pre-
set before using the MP900 Series.
4.1 System Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

4.1.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 4
4.1.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.2 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6

4.2.1 Opening the System Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
4.2.2 System Configuration Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.2.3 System Configuration Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.2.4 Changing Machine Controller Status- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
4.2.5 Saving System Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.2.6 Closing System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.3 Scan Time Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11

4.3.1 Opening the Scan Time Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
4.3.2 Scan Time Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
4.3.3 Setting the System Scan Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
4.3.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4.3.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.3.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.4 Application Information Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

4.4.1 Opening the Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.4.2 Application Information Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.4.3 Setting Application Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4.4.4 Saving Application Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4.4.5 Closing Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4-1
System Configuration Definitions
4.5 Data Trace Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

4.5.1 Opening the Data Trace Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.5.2 Data Trace Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19
4.5.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.5.4 Data Trace Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
4.5.5 List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29
4.5.6 Graph Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
4.5.7 Closing Data Trace Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-38
4-2
4.1 System Configuration Definitions
This section describes the system configuration definitions that set the system operating envi-
ronment for the hardware settings made with the module configuration definitions in the previ-
ous chapter.
4.1.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions
The Definition Folder is registered under the PLC folder in the File Manager Window. It is
used to access the definitions folder containing the Machine Controller's system environ-
ment and operating environment settings.
Types of System Configuration Definitions

The following table lists the System Configuration Definition Files that can be accessed by
opening the Definitions Folder in the PLC Folder. The files listed as "Yes" in the required
column must be set. The other files are set as required by the system configuration.
System Configuration
Definition File
Function Required 4
Application Information Edits the system information history. -
Setting
System Configuration Checks and modifies the Machine Controller status. -
Scan Time Setting Sets the high-speed, low-speed, and system scan Yes
times.
Data Trace Defines the data to be traced. -
Module Configuration Defines the system configuration. Yes
Refer to the previous chapter for the Module configuration.
4.1.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows
The methods used to open the following System Configuration Definitions Windows will be
described.
• System definitions
• Scan time definitions
• Application information definitions
• Data trace definitions
The System Configuration Definitions Windows can be opened from the File Manager or
the Engineering Manager.
4-3
4.1.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode

As shown below, open the relevant PLC folder from the tree on the left side of the File Man-
ager.
Open the Definition Folder from the PLC Folder, and then move the cursor to the desired
definition file and double-click. The files contained in the selected folder will also be dis-
played in the right window of the File Manager, so double-clicking the file here will have the
same effect.

The definition menu can be displayed by selecting File (F), Open (O), and then Definition
(D) from the Engineering Manager Window. Select the desired item from the menu.
New Definition Files

When a system information definition file is opened for the first time, there is no existing
data and a dialog box will be displayed to confirm that a new file is to be created. Click the
OK Button to continue with the definition operations.
4
4.1.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode
When the data files are created or modified, where they are stored depends on whether the
Machine Controller has been logged onto in online mode or offline mode.
Logging in Online
When in online mode, the data stored at the Machine Controller is accessed. When data is
newly created or modified, it is saved to both the Machine Controller and the hard disk.
Logging in Offline
When in offline mode, the Machine Controller is not connected, and the data stored on the
hard disk is accessed. When data is newly created or modified, it is saved only to the hard
disk. When data is created in offline mode, the data file must later be transferred to the
Machine Controller in online mode to enable using it in the Machine Controller. If the data
file is not transferred, the data in the Machine Controller will not be changed.
4-4
Data file designation
NO
Online
YES
Only PLC data read Only HDD data read
Data created or updated
NO
Online
YES
PLC data updated
4
HDD data updated
The creation and updating of all data and files is managed in offline mode.
4-5
4.2.1 Opening the System Configuration Window
4.2 System Configuration
This section explains how to perform operations in the System Configuration Window.
The System Configuration Window is used to check the operating mode and status of the
Machine Controller's CPU, and to make settings.
4.2.1 Opening the System Configuration Window
Open the System Configuration Window according to instructions in 4.1.2 Opening System
Configuration Definitions Windows.
Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the System Configuration Window.
Hyphens will be displayed in offline mode.
Login Information Details

PT# The communications logical port is displayed.
UT# The unit number of the MP900-series Machine Controller is dis-
played. The unit number is always 1.
CPU# The number of the CPU which was logged onto is displayed. The
CPU number is always 1.
Tab Pages
The System Configuration Window has only one tab page, System Configuration.
Tab Page Details

System Configuration Sets the Machine Controller status and calendar values.
4-6
4.2.2 System Configuration Window Menus
The following menus are available through the System Configuration Window.

File (F)
Open (O) Opens windows for individual functions.
Close (C) Closes the System Configuration Window.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers a system configuration shortcut.
Save (S) Saves system definition data.
Print (P) Prints documents.
Edit (E)
Delete Assignment (D) Clears the shared memory allocation data.
Control (C)
CALENDAR (D) Changes the calendar values.
CPU RUN (R) Sets online operating mode.
CPU STOP (S) Sets offline stop mode.
4
ERR RESET (E) Resets the display of detected errors.
MEM CLEAR (M) Clears the Machine Controller's memory.
MEM COMPACT (L) Compresses the Machine Controller's user pro-
gram memory.
CPU RESET (T) Cannot be used with the MP930.
View (V)
Window (W)
Help (H)
4-7
4.2.3 System Configuration Tab Page
4.2.3 System Configuration Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the following items. Status-related items can be accessed only in
online mode.

Start-up Alter Power Select the method with which the Machine Controller will be started
Down (Start-up Upon following power interruption.
Ordinary Interruption)
Write Protect Program Enabled: Programs and definition data can be changed.
Disabled: Programs and definition data can be displayed but they
cannot be changed. Register values, however, can still
be changed.
Battery Check Select whether battery alarms are detected or not.
Retain H-Scan Input Designate the number of times that the previous high-speed input
Values Setting values are to be retained in the event of an I/O error. Designate a
(Retention of Previous number from 1 to 255.
High-scan Input Value) If 3 is designated, for example, then high-speed scan inputs will be
reset when an I/O error occurs for four consecutive times for high-
speed scan inputs.
4 Retain L-Scan Input

Values Setting
Designate the number of times that the previous low-speed input val-
ues are to be retained in the event of an I/O error. Designate a num-
(Retention of Previous ber from 1 to 255.
Low-scan Input Value) If 3 is designated, for example, then low-speed scan inputs will be
reset when an I/O error occurs for four consecutive times for low-
speed scan inputs.
Controller Firmware Displays the Machine Controller's system software number (in
Version (System online mode only).
Software Number)
Running Status Displays the current operating status of the Machine Controller in
online mode.
Start up Status Displays the Machine Controller's status at startup.
Power up Status Displays the Machine Controller's status when rebooted.
Start up Memory Displays the memory status at startup.
Status
Running Status
Status Meaning
Ready ON: Normal ON when Module is normal. OFF when an error
OFF: Self-diagnosis error has occurred.
Run ON: Running ON when online mode (scan executed). Turns

OFF: Stopped OFF if a fatal error occurs or if an operation is
executed in the System Configuration Window
that stops the Machine Controller.
Alarm ON: Alarm ON when an alarm has occurred. OFF when nor-
OFF: Normal mal.
Error ON: Error ON when an error has occurred. OFF when nor-
OFF: Normal mal.
4-8
Status Meaning
BAT Alarm ON: Battery voltage low ON when battery voltage is low. OFF when bat-
OFF: Battery voltage tery voltage is normal.
normal
BUS ON: Bus being accessed ON during CPU Module bus access. OFF when
Access OFF: Bus accessed bus access is stopped.
stopped
4.2.4 Changing Machine Controller Status
When the System Configuration Window is displayed and active, the status of the Machine
Controller can be changed using the Control (C) menu on the Engineering Manager's menu
bar. The changes made are immediately reflected in the Machine Controller's operation.
Machine Controller status cannot be changed in offline mode.
Starting Machine Controller Operation

1. Select Control (C) and then CPU RUN (R) from the menu.
4
Stopping Machine Controller Operation

1. Select Control (C) and then CPU STOP (S) from the menu.
Execution of the user program will stop when the Machine Controller stops operation.
Resetting the Machine Controller's Error Display

The procedure to reset the display of errors detected by the Machine Controller. Before
resetting the display, use the register list function to check the error contents.
1. Select Control (C) and then ERR RESET (E) from the menu.
Clearing Machine Controller Memory

When the Machine Controller's memory is cleared, the user programs and definition data
will be deleted. The contents of the flash memory, however, will not be affected.
1. Select Control (C) and then MEM CLEAR (M) from the menu.
4-9
4.2.5 Saving System Definitions
The Machine Controller operation must be stopped when this operation is executed. The basic control
cycle will not return to its default value when Machine Controller memory is cleared. The power sup-
ply must be turned OFF and then back ON to return the basic control cycle to the default value.
Compressing Memory
If the user program becomes too large and the available user program memory is reduced,
then the user program memory will become fragmented when the program is repeatedly
changed. If that occurs, it may become impossible to make changes or additions to the pro-
gram even if the required memory capacity is available. By executing the memory compres-
sion operation, the utilized area in the user program memory will be packed and the
fragmented area will be repaired.
1. Select Control (C) and then MEM COMPACT (L) from the menu.
By using memory compression, programs can be created up to the limit of the user program memory.
4 When the user program memory is full, however, existing programs cannot be changed.
4.2.5 Saving System Definitions
The procedure to save the system definitions is given below.

3. Click the OK Button in the message box.
INFO An Error Detection Message is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appendix A
Error Messages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.
4.2.6 Closing System Configuration
To close the window, select File (F) and then Close (C) from the menu.
4-10
4.3 Scan Time Definitions
This section explains how to set the scan times.
The scan times are the cycles repeated by Machine Controller to execute the user programs
(high-speed scan program, low-speed scan program) over and over. The MP940 also features a
system scan to enable high-precision servo control.
All three scan times must be set for the MP940: High-speed, low-speed, and system. The scan
time settings are important factors in MP940 operation. Refer to the MP940 Machine Controller
User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) and be sure that suitable times are
set.
4.3.1 Opening the Scan Time Window
Open the Scan Time Window according to instructions in 4.1.2 Opening System Configura-
tion Definitions Windows.
Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the System Configuration Window.
Hyphens will be displayed in offline mode.
Information Details
PT# Displays the communications logical port.
UT# Displays the unit number of the MP900-series Machine Controller.
The unit number is always 1.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto. The CPU
number is always 1.
4-11
4.3.2 Scan Time Window Menus
Network Information
MP900-series network information is displayed. The information displayed is always the
same because the MP900 is a stand-along controller.
Information Details
Network Number NT#000: Network 0
Station Number ST#00: Station 0
Controller Number CPU#01: CPU 1
Controller Type MP900 series: Controller type
4.3.2 Scan Time Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Scan Time Window.

File (F)
4 Open (O) Opens windows for individual functions.

Close (C) Closes the Scan Time Window.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers a scan time setting shortcut.
Save (S) Saves scan time setting data.
View (V)
PC Add (A) Adds the Machine Controller displaying the scan
time.
PC Delete (D) Deletes the Machine Controller displaying the
scan time.
Set (S) Set the basic control cycle (B).
Window (W)
Help (H)
4.3.3 Setting the System Scan Time
The scan times determine the flow of program execution. The MP940 provides three differ-
ent scan times: system, high-speed, and low-speed. The system scan time must be set first
because it is used as a basis for setting the high-speed and low-speed scan times.
4-12
The scan times must be set as shown in the following table. Refer to the MP940 Machine
Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details.
Scan Scan Time Setting

System scan Select one of 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 ms.
High-speed scan A multiple of the system scan time between 0.5 and 32 ms
Low-speed scan A multiple of the system scan time between 2.0 and 100 ms
Opening the Basic Control Cycle Window

Select View (V), Set (S), and Basic Control Cycle (B) from the menu.
4.00
0.40
0.12
Setting Item Contents

Set Time Sets the system scan time. The current system scan time setting is
shown underneath the setting.
Maximum Time Sets the maximum value of the system can time. The maximum
value measured to present is shown underneath the setting.
Current Time Displays the current system scan time.
Steps Displays the number of steps for the system scan time.
Background Time Displays the percentage of background processing in the overall sys-
tem processing.
Watchdog Set Set the watchdog time as a presumed maximum limit to the system
scan time.
1 The power supply must be turned OFF and back ON to after the basic control cycle is changed.
2 The basic control cycle will not return to its default value when Machine Controller memory is cleared.
The power supply must be turned OFF and then back ON to return the basic control cycle to the default
value.
4.3.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions
Refer to the window shown in 4.3.1 Opening the Scan Time Window.
4-13
4.3.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions
In online mode, the Machine Controller's high-speed scan time is displayed. In offline mode,
the scan time data saved on the hard disk is displayed.

High Speed Scan Setting: Input the set value for the scan time.
Setting Maximum Run Time: The maximum value for the scan time is dis-
played here. To clear the maximum value, input 0 here. In offline
Mode, 0 is always displayed.
Current Run Time: The current scan time is displayed here. In offline
mode, 0 is always displayed.
Number of steps: The total number of steps in the scan program is
displayed here. Number of steps.
Low Speed Scan Sets the low-speed scan time. The meaning of the data is the same as
Setting for the high-speed scan.
Start-up DWG Steps Displays the total number of steps in the startup drawing.
Interrupt DWG Steps Displays the total number of steps in the interrupt drawing.
User Function Steps Displays the total number of steps in user functions.
Total Steps Displays the total number of steps in all drawings.
Program Memory Total: Displays the total capacity of the program memory (drawings,
4 functions, and motion programs). In offline mode, 0 is always dis-
played.
Available: Displays the amount of program memory available. In
offline mode, 0 is always displayed.
INFO In online mode, the maximum value can be cleared by inputting 0 in the Maximum H-Scan Run Time
or the Maximum L-Scan Run Time and saving it. After the old maximum value has been cleared, a
new one will be entered.
4.3.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions
The procedure to save the scan time definitions is given below.

2. Click the Yes Button in the Scan Time message box.
4.3.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions
Exit the scan time definitions by closing the Scan Time Window.
4-14
4.4 Application Information Definitions
4.4 Application Information Definitions
This section explains how to set application information.
The procedure to set the current application information is given below such as the names of
equipment using the Machine Controller, revision history, etc. Parts of the data set here are
reflected in the covers of document printouts, but it does not affect actual Machine Controller
operation.
Use the application information for system development-related history, memos, etc.
4.4.1 Opening the Application Information Window
Open the Application Information Window according to instructions in 4.1.2 Opening Sys-
tem Configuration Definitions Windows.
4.4.2 Application Information Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Application Informa-
tion Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Application Information Window.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers an application information shortcut.
Save (S) Saves application information data.
Exit (X) Closes the application.
4-15
4.4.3 Setting Application Information

View (V)
Window (W)
Help (H)
4.4.3 Setting Application Information
Refer to the Application Information Window in 4.4.1 Opening the Application Information
Window.
Setting Item Contents

Order No. Input the system order number, up to eight characters.
4 Controller Name Input a name for the MP900-series Machine Controller, up to eight
characters.
Controller Type Input the model number of the Controller that is to be used, up to 32
characters.
User Input the user, up to 32 characters.
Used Input the area of use, up to 32 characters.
Equip. Input the name of the equipment, up to 32 characters.
Usage Input the application, up to 32 characters.
Date Prepared Input the date prepared, up to 48 characters.
Revision History Input the revision history, up to 48 characters.
Up to 15 revision history records can be input.
4.4.4 Saving Application Information
2. Click the Yes Button in the Application Information message box.
4.4.5 Closing Application Information
Exit the application information settings by closing the Application Information Window.
4-16
4.5 Data Trace Definitions
This section explains how to define data to be traced and how traced data is displayed.
Data being traced can be obtained using trigger conditions. The trace data can be displayed in
either a list or a graph, and it can be saved.
4.5.1 Opening the Data Trace Window
Open the Data Trace Window according to instructions in 4.1.2 Opening System Configura-
tion Definitions Windows.
Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Data Trace Window. Hyphens will
be displayed in offline mode.
Information Details
number is always 1.
4-17
4.5.1 Opening the Data Trace Window
Group and Status Information

Information Details
Group Number Displays the group name set in the group definitions.
Status Displays the data trace status in the CPU of the currently displayed
group number.
RUN: Data trace currently being executed.
STOP: Data trace not being executed.
Tab Pages
The Data Trace Window consists of three tabs: Data Trace Definition, List, and Graph.
Table 4.1 Data Trace Tab Pages
Tab Page Function

Data Trace Definition Sets the data trace trigger.
List Displays the traced data in a list.
Graph Displays the traced data in a graph.
4
INFO 1 While the Data Trace Window is active, the tab pages can be accessed in the following order by select-
ing View (V) and then Next Page (N) from the menu.
• Data Trace Definition Æ List Æ Graph Æ Data Trace Definition
2 To access the tab pages in reverse order, select View (V) and then Back Page (B) from the menu.
4-18
4.5.2 Data Trace Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Data Trace Window.

File (F)
Open (O) Opens the function window.
Close (C) Closes the Data Trace Window.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers a data trace definition shortcut.
Save (S) Saves trace definition data.
Delete (D) Deletes trace definition data.
Trace Data (T)
Read (R) Reads trace data from floppy disk.
Write (W) Writes trace data to floppy disk.
Trace Data Write (CSV Saves trace data in CSV format.
Type)
Page Setting (M) Used to make the page settings for printing.
Trace Data Print (P) Prints trace data. 4
Edit (E)
Trigger Initiate Condition (T)
Delete (D) Deletes the trigger condition.
Trace Setting (S)
Delete (D) Deletes an item specified for tracing.
Add (A) Adds an item for tracing.
Default Setting (D) Sets the default values.
View (V)
Mode (M)
RE-DSP (R) Refreshes the display data.
AUTO (A) Automatically refreshes the display data.
4-19
4.5.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations

Sampling (S)
Number of read data Changes the number of data to be read.
(R)
Trace Time Axis (T) Changes the trace time axis.
Jump to Appoint Data Displays trace data from any sample number.
(O)
Data (D)
DEC (D) Displays trace data in decimal.
HEX (H) Displays trace data in hexadecimal.
m/s (M) Switches the time axis unit.
Control (C)
Trace Start (S) Starts the data trace.
Trace Stop (P) Stops the data trace.
Window (W)
4 Tile (T) Lines up windows in the display.
Help (H)
About App.. (A) Displays version information.
4.5.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations
The three tab pages are switched between to set the trace trigger, check trace data, and per-
form other operations for tracing.
Standard Operations
A standard procedure for data tracing is given below.
1. Set the data trace trigger conditions on the Data Trace Definition Tab Page.
2. Start the trace.
3. Check the trace data list on the List Tab Page.
4. Set the graph scale and other parameters on the Graph Tab Page to display the trace data
in graph form.
5. Repeat the above steps to produce various trace data. It is often convenient to switch
between the list display and the graph display.
4-20
Trace Definitions List Display
Graph Display
The tab pages are described in the following sections.
4.5.4 Data Trace Definition Tab Page 4

This tab page is used to set the following items.
• Setting trace definitions
• Editing trace definitions
• Saving and deleting trace definitions
• Starting traces
• Saving and deleting trace data
• Reading trace data
Setting Trace Definitions

Refer to the Data Trace Definition Tab Page in 4.5.1 Opening the Data Trace Window.

Data Name Input a name for the trace definition data, within 32 characters. The
name entered here has no effect on data trace execution.
Trace Timing Select the timing for executing the data trace.
Program: Executes the data trace when a TRACE system function is
executed in a drawing or function program.
H-SCAN: Executes the data trace with each high-speed scan.
L-SCAN: Executes the data trace with each low-speed scan.
Trace Interval Input the trace scan cycle (0 to 32,767). Cannot be set when "Pro-
gram" is selected for the Trace Timing Box.
If 3 is input, for example, the data trace will be executed at an inter-
val of once every four scans. If 0 is input, then the data trace will be
executed each scan.
4-21
4.5.4 Data Trace Definition Tab Page

Trace No. of Times Input the maximum number of times that the data trace is to be exe-
cuted. Cannot be set when "Program" is selected for the Trace Tim-
ing Box.
If 0 is input, a continuous trace (cyclic trace) will be executed until it
is stopped either manually or by the condition in the Terminate Trig-
ger Condition Box. If 1000 is input, the trace will be executed for
1,000 data samples.
Trigger Condition: Input the condition for beginning the data trace. Cannot be set when
Initiate (Initiate Trigger "Program" is selected for the Trace Timing Box.
Condition) If no condition is input here, then the trace operation must be started
manually.
Trigger Condition: Input the condition for stopping the data trace and the number of
Terminate 1 or traces to be executed after the condition is met. Up to two terminate
Terminate 2 (Terminate trigger conditions can be set. Cannot be set when “Program” is
Trigger Condition) selected for the Trace Timing Box.
If 0 is input in the Delay Box, the trace will be stopped immediately
when the trigger condition is met. If no terminate trigger condition is
input, the data trace will be executed until it is stopped either manu-
ally or by reaching the number of traces specified in the Trace No. of
Times Box. If there are two conditions set for the terminate trigger
condition, then the data trace will be stopped when either of those
4 Trace Data Definition

conditions is met.
Input the register numbers, drawing numbers, scale conversion val-
ues, or comments that are to be traced. A maximum of 16 items can
be specified.
Details of Trace Data Definitions

REG (Register Input the numbers of the registers to be traced. The types of registers
Number) that can be input are S, O, M, and D registers. Depending on the for-
mat of the register, the data to be traced can be integer data, double-
length integer data, or bit data.
DWG (Drawing If the register number to be traced is a D register (i.e., if a D register
Number) is input in the REG Box), then input a D register drawing number.
For a motion program, input a motion program drawing number
(MPxxxx). If the register number is not a D register, there is no need
to input anything here. D registers in different scans cannot be speci-
fied at the same time. Also, the data trace can be executed only when
the scan level of the D registers to be traced is the same as the scan
level specified in the Trace Timing Box.
SCALE (Scale Input the scale conversion value for the traced data. This value will
Conversion Value) be the amplitude when the trace data is displayed in a graph.
Comment Input a comment for the register to be traced, up to 32 characters.
If the trace data definition is saved with no data entered in the Trace Data Definition field,
the trace definition data for the currently displayed group will be deleted. In effect, this is the
same as deleting it by selecting File (F) and then Delete (D) from the Data Trace Menu.
4-22
INFO Trigger Conditions

1 There are three trigger conditions: Initiate trigger, terminate trigger 1, and terminate trigger 2.
2 If a bit register number is input on the left side, only "=" can be selected as the operator. Input either
ON or OFF on the right side.
3 If a non-bit register number is input on the left side, select the operator from among "<," "≤," "=," "≠"
"≥," or ">," and input a number on the right side.
4 For the terminate trigger delay, input a number from 0 to 65,534.
5 Input a comment up to 32 characters.

The default values can be set by selecting Edit (E) and then Default Setting (D) from the
Data Trace Menu. The Trace Timing will become "Program," the Trace No. of Times will
become 0, and all other data will be cleared.
Tracing D Registers
4
1 The execution timing and DWG settings are checked when the trace definitions data is saved. The fol-
lowing table shows the possible combinations. Do not use any other combinations.
Trace Timing DWG

Program Hxx, Hxx.xx, MPxxxx
H-SCAN Hxx, Hxx.xx, MPxxxx
L-SCAN Lxx, Lxx.xx
For example, an error will occur if an MPxxxx drawing with the trace timing set to the low-speed scan
is detected when saving.
2 An error will be detected at the Controller when online if the motion program or drawing is not regis-
tered or if the upper limit of D register numbers is exceeded.
4-23
3 Error checks are not performed in offline mode.
Editing Trace Definitions

This section explains how to edit trace definition data.
Deleting the Trigger Condition

The procedure to delete the trigger condition is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the trigger condition to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E), Trigger Initiate Condition (T), and then Delete (D) from the Data Trace
Menu.
3. The trigger condition specified in step 1. will be deleted.
INFO When a trigger condition is deleted, all of the settings associated with that trigger condition will be
deleted. For example, if terminate trigger condition 1 is deleted, the data for the condition type, com-
ment, and delay will all be deleted.
4
Deleting a Trace Data Condition Row
The procedure to delete a trace data condition row is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the row of the trace data to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E), Trace Setting (S), and then Delete (D) from the Data Trace Menu.
3. The trace definition selected in step 1. will be deleted.
Inserting a Trace Data Condition Row

The procedure to insert a trace data condition row is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the trace data definition is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit (E), Trace Setting (S), and then Add (A) from the Data Trace Menu.
3. A blank row will be inserted at the position specified in step 1.
Saving and Deleting Data Trace Definitions

Saving
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the Data Trace Menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the Data Trace message box.
4-24
Saving a trace definition with no data is the same as deleting it. If the save operation fails, an error
message will be displayed. Referring to Appendix <$chapnumError Messages, remove the cause of the
error, and then save the data again.
Deleting
1. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) from the Data Trace Menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the Data Trace message box.
Starting the Data Trace

The Machine Controller starts the data trace operation immediately when trace definition
data is saved to the Machine Controller. If trace definitions are changed and saved again, the
data traced up to that point will be lost and the data trace operation will start again from the
beginning.
The current trace execution status is displayed in the Status Box.
INFO If the Machine Controller does not perform a data trace, it may be due to the following conditions:
4
1 The Machine Controller is currently in offline stop mode.
2 The CP-717 is in offline mode.

3 The TRACE system function in the main program is not being executed when "Program" is set for the
Trace Timing Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page.
4 The RESET input for the TRACE system function in the main program is ON when "Program" is set
for the Trace Timing Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page.
5 The actual number of trace times has reached the Trace Number of Times set in the Trace No. of Times
Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page.
6 The condition set in the Terminate Trigger Condition Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page
has been met.
7 The data trace has been manually stopped.
Saving and Deleting Trace Data

The data resulting from a data trace can be saved to a floppy disk. The data that is saved
depends on the tab page that is active.
If the Data Trace Definition Tab Page is active, only the trace definitions will be saved. If the
List or Graph Tab Page is active, the trace definitions and the trace data will both be saved.
Write File Window Configuration

Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Write (W). The Write File Window will be dis-
played.
4-25

File Name Input the file name and the number of the floppy disk drive where
the trace data is to be saved. The default file name is
$DTRACE.DAT. After inputting the file name, click the Update
Button. The trace data saved to the file that was input will then be
displayed under numbers 1 to 10.
No. Displays the trace data number.
4 Trace Data Name Displays the name of the trace data. The trace data name is where the
data for the Data Name Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab
Page is saved.
Date Displays the date when the data last traced was saved.
Time Displays the time when the data last traced was saved.
Data Displays the type of data saved.
Symbols
The following symbols have special meanings in the client area of the Write File Window.
• A hyphen (-) indicates that the data saved there is trace definition data only.
• indicates the data saved there includes both trace definition data and traced data.
• ∗∗ indicate that no data is saved there.
Saving Trace Data

The procedure to save trace data is given below.
1. Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Write (W) from the menu. The Write File Win-
2. Input the name of the file to be written in the File Name Box and click the Update But-
ton. A list of trace data will be displayed.
3. Click at the No. column at which to write the trace data.
4. Click the Execute Button.
5. Click the Cancel Button.
The trace data will be written successfully.
4-26
Deleting Trace Data

Either a trace data file or individual trace data saved in a floppy disk can be deleted.
The procedure to delete trace data is given below.
1. Deleting Trace Data Files
The procedure to delete the trace data file displayed in the File Name Box of the Write
File Window is given below.
a) Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Write (W) from the menu. The Write File
Window will be displayed.
b) In the File Name Box, input the name of the file to be deleted, and then click the
Update Button.
c) Click the Delete File Button.
d) Click the Yes Button in the message box. The trace data file specified in step b) will
be deleted.
e) Click the Cancel Button to complete the deletion of the trace data file.
2. Deleting Individual Trace Data
The procedure to delete trace data for specific trace data numbers is given below.
4
a) Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Write (W) from the menu. The Write File
b) In the File Name Box, input the name of the file containing the data to be deleted.
Then click the Update Button.
c) Select the number of the data that is to be deleted.
d) Click the Delete List Button.
e) Click the Yes Button in the message box. The trace data item specified in step c) will
be deleted.
f) Click the Cancel Button to complete the deletion of the trace data items.
Reading Trace Data from a Floppy Disk

This section explains how to read trace data that has been saved to a floppy disk.
Read File Window Configuration

Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Read (R) from the menu. The Read File Window
will be displayed.
4-27
Reading Trace Data

The procedure to read trace data from a floppy disk is given below.
1. Select File (F), Trace Data (T), and then Read (R) from the menu. The Read File Win-
2. In the File Name Box, input the name of the file containing the data to be read. Then
4 click the Update Button. A list of trace data will be displayed.
3. Select the number of the data that is to be read.
4. Click the Execute Button.
5. Click the Cancel Button to complete the reading of the trace data.
INFO 1 A maximum of 10 trace data items can be written to a single file.
2 Trace data is read by group. If the read operation is executed for Group 1, for example, the trace data
for the other group numbers will not be read.
4-28
4.5.5 List Tab Page
This tab page is used to display the results of a data trace in numeric form. The following
items can be set in the List Tab Page.
• Setting the List Tab Page
• Updating displayed data
• Updating the base number of displayed data
• Starting and stopping manual traces
• Changing the trace time axis
• Changing the sample number from which to start the display
• Setting the number of data items to read
Setting the List Tab Page

Click the List Tab in the Data Trace Window.
Group and status information are displayed in the List Tab Page.
Information Details
Group Number Displays the group name set in the group definitions.
Data Name Displays the name input in the Data Name Box in the Data Trace
Definition Tab Page.
Last Status Displays the time when data was last traced and the execution status
of that data trace.
RUN: Data trace being executed.
STOP: Data trace stopped.
Status Displays the data trace execution status in the CPU of the currently
displayed group number.
RUN: Data trace being executed.
STOP: Data trace stopped.
4-29
4.5.5 List Tab Page
Display Configuration
List
Trace time axis type Data name 1 Data name 2 ・・・・

Register number Register 1 Register 2 ・・・・
Sample number 1
Sample number 2
・ Trace data
・
・
・
• The trace time axis type is determined by the trace time axis setting.
• The sample numbers are displayed after the register number in the column under the
trace time axis type.
• The registers set in the Trace Data Definition field in the Data Trace Definition Tab Page
are displayed in order in the Register Number row.
Display Items
4
Display Items Details
Trace time axis Displays the axis type for trace data. Refer to Details of Trace Time
Axis Setting provided after this table.
Data names Displays the names automatically given to trace data: DATA-01,
DATA-02, DATA-03, etc.
Register numbers Displays the numbers of the registers that are traced.
Sample numbers Displays the sample numbers. The display format depends on the
registers being traced.
Trace data Displays the traced data according to the register data types (integer,
double-length integer, real, or bit).
4-30
Details of Trace Time Axis Setting

There are four types of trace time axes: TIMEA, TIMEB, SNOA, and SNOB. Each of these is
explained below.
• TIMEA
Trace data is displayed in time units*, with the time at which the trace was begun as 0.
Accordingly, 0 represents the oldest trace data. The data is traced with each scan as set
in the Scan Time Window.
• TIMEB
Trace data is displayed in time units*, with the time at which the trace was stopped as 0.
Accordingly, 0 represents the newest trace data. The data is traced with each scan as set
in the Scan Time Window.
• SNOA
Trace data is displayed in sample number units, with the time at which the trace was
begun as 0. Data is traced at the interval set in the Trace Timing Box in the Data Trace
Definition Tab Page. Trace data numbers are displayed in order, from smaller to larger
(0 1, 2, 3...), with 0 being the earliest. 4
• SNOB
Trace data is displayed in sample number units, with the time at which the trace was
stopped as 0. Data is traced at the interval set in the Trace Timing Box in the Data Trace
Definition Tab Page. Trace data numbers are displayed in order, from larger to smaller
(...3, 2, 1, 0), with 0 being the most recent.
∗ The data can be displayed in units of either 1 or 0.01 second. To switch

these two unit settings, select View (V), Data (D), and then m/s (M) from
the Data Trace Menu. The placement of the decimal point will vary
depending on the length of time for the trace, so 01.000 is no different
from 1.0000.
Updating Display Data

The most recent trace data can be displayed.
The procedure to update the trace data is given below.
Select View (V), Mode (M), and then RE-DSP (R) from the Data Trace Menu.
Automatic Updating of Trace Data

1 When View (V), Mode (M), and then Auto (A) are selected from the Data Trace Menu, the trace data is
automatically scrolled and the most updated trace data is displayed. It is not possible to switch to
another tab page while in the automatic update mode.
2 Selecting View (V), Mode (M), and then Auto (A) again cancels the automatic updating.
4-31
4.5.5 List Tab Page
Changing the Base Number of Display Data

The data can be displayed in either decimal or hexadecimal format by changing the base
number. The base number, however, cannot be changed, for bit data.
Decimal Display
The procedure to display the data in decimal format is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the item to be displayed in decimal.
2. Select View (V), Data (D), and then DEC (D) from the Data Trace Menu. The data will
be displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal Display
The procedure to display the data in hexadecimal format is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the item to be displayed in hexadecimal.
2. Select View (V), Data (D), and then HEX (H) from the Data Trace Menu. The data will
be displayed in hexadecimal.
4 Manually Starting and Stopping Data Traces

Traces can be started and stopped manually.
Starting Manually
To manually start a data trace operation, select Control (C) and then Trace Start (S) from the
Data Trace Menu.
Stopping Manually
To manually stop a data trace operation, select Control (C) and then Trace Stop (P) from the
Data Trace Menu.
Changing the Trace Time Axis

The procedure described below to change the time axis for displaying the trace data is given
below.
1. Select View (V), Sampling (S), and then Trace Time Axis (T) from the Data Trace
Menu.
4-32
2. In the Select Trace Time Axis Display Dialog Box, set the time axis display and the
sampling interval and then click the OK Button.
The numeric data will be displayed.
INFO If the Trace Timing Box under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page is set to "Program" and the time
axis is changed to either Time Display A or Time Display B, the sampling interval must be input in the
dialog box in step 2. of the above procedure.
Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display

4
The procedure to change and display trace data beginning with any desired sample number
is given below.
1. Select Sampling (S) and then Jump to Appoint Data (O) from the Data Trace Menu.
2. Input the beginning sampling number in the Dialog Box, and then click the OK Button.
The trace data will be displayed beginning with the number that was input.
Changing the Amount of Data to be Read

The procedure to change the number of trace data items to be read is given below. When the
RE-DSP function is subsequently executed, the number of data items set here will be read
from the Machine Controller.
1. Select View (V), Sampling (S), and then Number of Read Data (R) from the Data Trace
Menu.
4-33
4.5.6 Graph Tab Page
2. Input the number of data items to be read in the Setting Number of Read Data Dialog
Box, and then click the OK Button.
INFO Specify the number of data items to be read as the number of frames. A frame consists of one traced
data sample for each item being traced.
This tab page is used to display the data resulting from a data trace in graphic form. The fol-
lowing operation can be performed from the Graph Tab Page.
• Opening the Graph Tab Page
• Setting the Graph Tab Page
4 • Updating the displayed data
• Starting and stopping manual traces
• Changing the trace time axis
• Changing the sample number from which to start the display
• Changing the number of data items to be read
• Closing the data trace definitions
Opening the Graph Tab Page

Click the Graph Tab Page in the Data Trace Window.
4-34
Graph Tab Page

Refer to information for the List Tab Page.
Display Configuration
Graph
A Register #
S = Scale value
U = Max. trace data value
L = Min. trace data value Display ON/OFF
B Register #
S = Scale value Graph Display Area

U = Max. trace data value Displays integers, double-
L = Min. trace data value
length integers, and real data
Display ON/OFF
Register #
4
C
S = Scale value
D Register #
S = Scale value Sample number Sample number


Bit Data Display Area
Relay number
(4 max.)
Relay number
Relay number
Relay number Scroll mode switch
Set graph Scroll slider
4-35
Setting Items

Register Number Select the number of the integer, double-length integer, or real num-
ber register to be traced. Any register number set in the Trace Data
Definition field under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page can be
selected. Register numbers cannot be selected, however, while in the
automatic update mode.
Scale Conversion Input the scale conversion value for the trace data. Changing this
Value value adjusts the vertical amplitude of the graph. With automatic
updating, this value is continually displayed as the amplitude. (Refer
to Updating Display Data under 4.5.5 List Tab Page.) The default
setting is the value set for "SCALE" in the Trace Data Definition
field under the Data Trace Definition Tab Page. If 0 is set, the ampli-
tude will be the same as if 32767 is set.
Maximum Value Displays the maximum value for the trace data.
Minimum Value Displays the minimum value for the trace data.
Display ON/OFF The trace data display can be switched ON and OFF by clicking
here.
Relay Number Displays the number of the bit register to be traced.
Integer, Double Displays integer, double-length integer, and real number data in
4 Integer, Real number graph form. A maximum of four data items can be displayed at one
Data Display time.
Bit Data Display Displays bit data in graph form. A maximum of four data items can
be displayed at one time.
Scale Slider Used to adjust the horizontal oscillation of the trace data by dragging
the slider, or by pressing the Right and Left Cursor Keys.
Scroll Mode Switch Turn this switch ON (indicated by a check mark) to scroll the graph
according to the movement of the scroll box when the scroll box in
the scroll bar in the data display area is dragged. When this is turned
OFF, the graph is not scrolled while the box is being dragged, and
the graph display is then modified after the dragging has stopped.
Sample Number Displays the sample number. The form of the display will vary
depending on the trace time axis. By clicking on a sample number
position, a vertical line can be displayed in the graph display area at
that position.
Setting Graph Button Used to change settings such as the scale gradation for the currently
displayed graph, the number of display points, etc. in the following
procedure.
4-36
Setting Graph Button

1. Click the Setting Graph Button. The following Setting Graph Dialog Box will be dis-
played.
2. Input the graph settings in the dialog box, and then click the OK Button.
The graph display will be changed according to the new settings.
Updating Display Data

The most recent trace data can be displayed.
For details on how to update the trace data display, refer to Updating Display Data under
4.5.5 List Tab Page.
4
Manually Starting and Stopping Data Traces
Traces can be started and stopped manually.
For details on how to start and stop data traces manually, refer to Manually Starting and
Stopping Data Traces under 4.5.5 List Tab Page.
Changing the Trace Time Axis

The trace time axis can be changed.
For details on how to change the time axis for displaying the trace data, refer to Changing
the Trace Time Axis under 4.5.5 List Tab Page.
Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display

The beginning sample number can be changed.
For details on how to display trace data beginning with any desired sample number, refer to
Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display under 4.5.5 List Tab Page.
Changing the Amount of Data to be Read

The number of data items to be read can be changed.
For details on how to change the number of trace data to be read, refer to Changing the
Amount of Data to be Read under 4.5.5 List Tab Page.
4-37
4.5.7 Closing Data Trace Definitions
4.5.7 Closing Data Trace Definitions
Exit the data trace definition settings by closing the Data Trace Window.
4-38
5 Motion Programming
This chapter describes the procedure to develop motion programs.
5.1 Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

5.1.1 Outline of Motion Program Development- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3

5.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
5.2.3 Group Definition Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
5.2.4 Setting Group Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.2.5 Saving Group Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9 5
5.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.2.7 Closing Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.3 Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11

5.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Global Registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12
5.3.3 Motion Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
5.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5.3.5 Motion Editor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20
5.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25
5.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
5.4 Compiling Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29

5.4.1 Compile Execution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29
5.4.2 Compile Execution Steps- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.3 Normal Completion of the Compile Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.4 Error Completion of the Compile Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.5 Debugging Motion Programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31

5.5.1 Outline- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.5.2 Opening the Debug Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.5.3 Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34
5-1
Motion Programming
5.1.1 Outline of Motion Program Development
5.1 Developing Motion Programs
5.1.1 Outline of Motion Program Development
The following illustration outlines the procedure to develop motion programs. It is assumed
that the module configuration and system configuration have already been defined.
Define Module Configuration. Refer to Chapter 3 Module

Change Configuration Definitions.
motion
parameters.
Define System Configuration. Refer to Chapter 4 System

Set the Configuration Definitions.
Feed- scans.
back
Sets the motion control envi-
Define Groups. ronment, e.g., control signals,
Set signals number of axes, etc.
and axes.
Develops program on the

Create the motion program. Motion Editor.
Check program with Monitor. Test with Debug Operation.
Refer to Chapter 6 Monitoring Tools.
Start actual operation.

5
5-2
5.2 Group Definitions
This section explains how to set definitions for the groups, which are important settings for exe-
cuting motion programs.
Groups can be defined only in offline mode and logging in.

If you are in online mode, log off and then log in again in offline mode to enable defining the group.
Group Definitions can be referenced in either online or offline mode.
5.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions
Groups
One group defines all of the axes for managing one set of control signals. For the MP940,
each group contains only one axis. The same axis cannot be defined in more than one group.
Group Registration
Several groups can be controlled by some Machine Controllers. For the MP940, however,
only one group can be controlled by each Machine Controller. The group is registered
mainly by defining the control signals and axis information. 5
For Machine Controllers for which four groups can be registered, four independent motion
programs are executed in parallel by one Machine Controller. At least one group must be
registered to execute the motion programs.
Number of Groups and Tasks

The number of groups and the number of tasks is set in the group definitions. The number of
motion programs executed in parallel will be the number of groups times the number of
tasks in each group.
For example, if there are three tasks in Group 1 and four tasks in Group 2, then seven motion
programs will be executed in parallel, as shown in the following diagram.
5-3
Motion Programming
5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window
Group 1 Task 1 MPM001 PFORK□，□，・・・□
Task 2 MPM002 ・・・
Group 2 Task 1 MPM009 ・・・
Drawing programs Motion programs
The maximum number of programs that can be executed in parallel is as follows:

• MP940: 1 group x 4 tasks = 4 programs
• MP930: 4 groups x 4 tasks = 16 programs
• MP920: 8 groups x 8 tasks = 64 programs
The PFORK command can also be used for executing small tasks, so the number of pro-
grams that can be executed in parallel is actually greater than this. Hardware resources are
shared, so be sure to consider the effects on overall system performance.
5
5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window
To open from the File Manager, double-click the Group Definition File Icon.
To open from the Engineering Manager Window, select File(F), Open(O), Definition(D),
and then Group Definition(G).
5-4
Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Group Definition Window. Hyphens
will be displayed in offline mode.

number is always 1.
Tab Pages
The Group Definition Window contains the Group List Tab and the Group 01 Tab.
Tab Page Details

Group List Registers the group names.
Group 01 Sets the detailed group information.
INFO The tab pages can be scrolled in the following order by selecting first View (V) and then Next Page (N)
from the menu.
• Group List Æ Group 01 Æ Group 02 Æ ... 5
To scroll pages in the opposite direction, select View (V) and then Back Page (B) from the menu.
5.2.3 Group Definition Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Group Definition
Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the group definition window.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers a group definition shortcut.
Save (S) Saves group definitions.
Delete (D) Deletes group definitions.
Print (P) Prints group definition contents.
View (V)
5-5
Motion Programming
5.2.4 Setting Group Definitions

Next Page (N) Displays the next tab control.
Back Page (B) Displays the previous tab control.
Window (W)
Help (H)
When setting group definitions, first set the name of each group and then define its opera-
tion.
Group List Tab Page

This tab page is used to divide, motion programs into multiple groups for processing. Each
group has an individual group number, drawing (DWG) number, and group name. The group
5 number and drawing number are pre-defined, but the user sets the group name on the Group
List Tab Page.
Refer to the window shown in 5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window.
Display/Setting Item Details

Group No. Displays the group number.
From four to eight groups can be created, depending on the Machine
Controller model.
DWG No. Displays the drawing number that corresponds to the group number.
The drawing number cannot be changed.
This drawing number indicates the location where the motion pro-
gram control ladder logic program is generated when PGM Auto-
matic Generation is specified in the detailed group information. If
Automatic Generation is not specified, the drawing number is not
relevant. The contents cannot be changed.
Group Name Displays and sets the group name with up to 16 characters.
Save Button Clicking the Save Button saves the group name to the Group List.
Setting Group Names

Use the following procedure to set group names.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the group name is to be input.
2. Input the group name and press the Enter Key.
3. Click the Save Button. A group number tab corresponding to the group name will be
5-6
added to the window.
Added group setting tab
Group List Group 01
Group 01 Tab Page

Click the Group 01 Tab in the Group Definition Window to display the following window.
This tab page is used to define the detailed information for the group.
Detailed group information must be set separately for each group.

Group Name Displays the name of the group currently being defined.
Axis (Number of Input the number of axes to be controlled by the group. If 0 is input,
Controlled Axes) no axes will be controlled.
• MP930: 0 to 14 (number of axes)
• MP920: 0 to nnn (number of axes)
The number of axes depends on the combination of
Motion Modules. Refer to the MP920 User's Manual:
Design and Maintenance. (SIEZ-C887-2.1).
Task (Number of Input the number of main motion programs to be run simultaneously.
Tasks) • MP930: 1 to 4 (number of tasks)
• MP920: 1 to 8 (number of tasks)
Group Input Signal Allocate group input signals to I or M registers.
The default settings are recommended.
Other (Override Define the registers for setting the override signals.
Signal) The default settings are recommended. If the signals must be
changed, use M registers.
5-7
Motion Programming

Create Ladder Dwgs. Specify whether a motion management ladder logic program1 is to
(Automatic Program be generated automatically.
Generation)
Program Status/ The MSEE instruction is used to start a motion program from a
Control (Motion Work motion management ladder logic program. Define the registers to be
Registers) used with the MSEE instruction. Two words per task are required for
work registers, and either M or D integer registers can be specified.
With this version, the registers must start with the D register
D00000, i.e., the setting cannot be changed. The upper limit of the D
register will depend on the number of tasks.
Axis Definition Allocate a logical axis name, within eight characters, to the physical
axis numbers2 for the number of control axes. The axis definitions
cannot be set if the number of control axes is set to 0.
Axis Input Signal Allocate group input signals to I or M registers.
The default settings are recommended.
Alarm Out (Alarm Define the leading register number for outputting alarms. M, I, or O
Output Register) integer registers can be specified. The number of continuous alarm
registers will be stored for the number of parallel processes used for
the motion programs in that group. For example, if MW00010 is
defined as the leading alarm output register and there are four paral-
lel processes, then MW00010 to MW00013 will be used in order of
parallel numbers.
MW00010 Task 1 alarm register

5 MW00012 Task 3 alarm register
1 Motion management ladder logic program

A motion management ladder logic program is a standard ladder logic program for executing group
input, override, and axis input functions. If this standard ladder logic program is not required, save
the group definition with automatic generation disabled.
2 Physical axis number
A physical axis number consists of an integer and a decimal. The integer is the Servo Module num-
ber. With the MP900-series, it is always 01. The figure to the right of the decimal point is the axis
number. Values from 01 to 15 are displayed.
5-8

Pos Output (Position Define the leading register number for outputting the current posi-
Output Register) tion. M, I, or O double-length integer registers can be specified. The
number of continuous current position output register will be used
for the number of control axes. For example, if ML00020 is defined
as the leading current position register and there are three control
axes, then three double-length words (from ML00020 to ML00024)
will be used in order from axis 01.
ML00020 Axis 1 current position
Restart Sets whether or not to restart from the ABORT status. Consult with
your Yaskawa representative before using this feature, for which
restrictions exist.
INFO The same alarm output registers are used for all tasks. To manage alarms separately for each task when
two or more tasks are set, save the contents of the alarm output registers to other registers immediately
following the MSEE instruction in the ladder logic program. 5
5.2.5 Saving Group Definitions
The procedure to save the group definitions is given below.

1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the Group Definition Menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the Group Definition Message Box.
3. The Auto Edit Window will be displayed. Specify the motion program call method, and
click the OK Button.
INFO 1 The Auto Edit Dialog Box is displayed only when the group is defined with PGM Automatic Genera-
tion enabled when Create Ladder Dwgs. is set to ON in the Group Definition Window.
2 Group definition data can be saved only in offline mode. This data is thus not written to the Machine
Controller when it is saved. It is necessary to connect online to the Machine Controller and then trans-
5-9
Motion Programming
5.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions
fer the group definition data.
5.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions
The procedure to delete group definitions is given below.

1. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) from the Group Definition Menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the Group Definition Message Box.
INFO When a group is deleted, all of the group definition data will be deleted.
5.2.7 Closing Group Definitions
Defining a group is completed by closing the Group Definition Window.
To exit group definitions, close the Group Definition Window by clicking the Button in
the window or by selecting File(F) and then Close (C).
5-10
5.3 Creating Motion Programs
This section explains the basics of motion programming, from editing to compiling and saving
files.
5.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Program
The following flowchart shows the standard steps in developing a motion program. The
operations from starting the File Manager on up to the definitions must be performed before
beginning the motion programming.
The flow of operations in developing a motion program is as follows:
File Manager startup
Setting definitions Module, System, and Group defi-

nitions (setting the number of glo-
bal registers)
Motion Editor startup

General-
purpose editor
Online Import
5
Motion program MPMxxx.TXT
MP940 editing Export
TX
BAT R
X
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
M
PRT2
E
C
Compiling
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2
PP O
COPY L
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K
I/O
MPMxxx YES
Error?
PORT2
NO
POWER
+24V LED
GND
FG
File saving and
transferring
Online
Debugging
End
Fig 5.1 Motion Program Development Flow
5-11
Motion Programming
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Global Registers
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Global Registers
Defining global registers can reduce the need for communications, but it requires managing
the global registered used in ladder logic programs and motion programs.
There are limits on the global registers (M and O registers) that can be used in motion pro-
grams. Motion programs that use registers that are out of the specified ranges will cause
compiler errors to prevent mistakes in programming.
An example of an M register map is shown below. O registers depending on the I/O registers
allocated in the Module Configuration Definitions Window.
MW00000 Reserved by the system
MW00001 Interpolation overrides
MW00002 Motion control work registers
Alarm output registers

Allocated in the Group Definition.
O and I registers can also be allo-
cated instead of M registers.
Current position output

registers
Not used The range of registers that

can be used is defined.
5 MW32767
Fig 5.2 M Register Map
Opening the Register Write Enable Setting Window

Use the following procedure to open the Resister Writing Permission Window.
1. Double-click the Motion Folder under the Program Folder in the File Manager Window.
Program Folder
High-speed
drawing
Motion
5-12
2. Point at the Motion Folder, click the right mouse button, and select Open (O) and then
Resister Writing Permission (R) from the pop-up menu.
The Register Write Enable Setting Window will open.
Setup of register writing permission ×
Setup of the range of the register which permits writing in the

motion program.
M registers ： MW to （DEC）
O registers ： OW to （HEX）
User permissions：
Set Reset Close
INFO The Resister Writing Permission Window can also be opened by selecting File (F), Open (O), and then
Resister Writing Permission (R) from the menu.
Setting Register Write Enable Setting Properties

5
M and O Registers
Input the range of register numbers that can be used in the motion programs. Input M regis-
ter number in decimal and O register number in hexadecimal. The default range will be from
0 to the highest register number. The highest register number depends on the model.
User Permissions
Set the user permissions required to set the enabled ranges. Any user with permissions lower
than the value set here will not be able to set values.
Setting Parameters
Click the Set Button to enable the set values.
5-13
Motion Programming
5.3.3 Motion Properties
INFO 1 When the Engineering Manager is opened, all values are for display only, i.e., they cannot be changed.
2 One register write enable setting parameter file is created in the PLC Folder on the hard disk. The set-
tings in this file are effective for all of the motion programs within the same PLC folder.
3 Register write enable ranges are checked only the M and O registers appear on the left side of substitu-
tion statements. They are not check elsewhere.
4 O registers OWC000 to OWCFFF are reserved by the system and are not checked for write enable
ranges.
5.3.3 Motion Properties
Motion properties consist of the attribute information for a motion program. Although the
properties are set to defaults by the system, they must be set according to the program struc-
ture, specifications, etc.
Motion properties can be updated at any time. These values are referenced during compiling,
and a work area is allocated.
Be sure to check the motion properties before beginning programming, and make settings as
required.
Opening the Motion Properties Window

5
With the Motion Editor open, select File (F) and then Motion Properties (R).
Fig 5.3 Motion Properties Window
5-14
Tab Pages
The Motion Program Configuration Definition Window contains two tabs: Configuration
Definition and Update History.
Tab Page Details

Configuration Definition Sets the program attributes. Normally, the default values should be
used.
Update History Records the motion program update history.
Configuration Definition Tab Page

The items on the Configuration Definition Tab Page are explained below.

Standardization Level This is not supported by the current version. There is no need to
input anything here.
File Privileges Input the read/write privileges for the drawing/function program. For
any given data item, it is not possible to set a value higher than the
current user privilege. For details on file privileges, refer to 2.1.5
User Management
D Registers When using D registers in the drawing/function program, enter the
number of words in the D registers. If 0 is input here, D register can-
not be accessed from the program.
If 10 is input, for example, the D register numbers that can be used in 5
the program are as follows:
• Integer registers: DW00000 to DW00009
• Double-length integer registers:DL00000 to DL00008
• Real number registers: DF00000 to DF00008
• Bit registers: DB000000 to DB000009F
Parallel Processing Set the maximum number of parallel processes to be specified by the
PFORK command.
• MP930: 4 (maximum number of parallel processes)
• MP920: 8 (maximum number of parallel processes)
Group No. to MBOX Displays information related to the motion program. It is for refer-
ence only and cannot be changed.
Title This title will be output as a comment in the Print Confirmation Dia-
log Box when the motion program list is printed
Update History Tab Page

The time and date at which the motion program was revised are registered automatically,
along with the user name that was logged on.
5-15
Motion Programming
5.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor
5.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor
The Motion Editor is a programming tool that is required in inputting and editing original
motion programs. It provides functions such as text editing, compiling, debugging, and mon-
itoring.

5 There are three ways to open the Motion Editor.
1. Double-click the Motion Program Folder in the File Manager.
2. Select File (F) and then Motion Editor (E) from the File Manager Menu.
3. Alternatively, select an item and then right-click to display the pop-up menu. Then
select Open (O).
A new motion program can be created by selecting either of the following menu items while
a motion-related file or folder is selected in the above figure.
• Select File (F) and then Make New Program (N).
• Select File (F), Open (O), and then Motion Editor (E).
5-16

From the Engineering Manager Window, select File (F), Open (O), Motion Program (M),
and then Motion Editor (E).
Motion Editor Window Configuration

The Motion Editor is displayed as one of the child windows in the Engineering Manager
Window. Other function windows besides the Motion Editor are also displayed in the Engi-
neering Manager Window. When the Motion Editor is active, the menu bar of the Engineer-
ing Manager changes to reflect that.
Engineering Manager
Menu bar (function menu)
Tool bar (Tool icons)
Motion Editor
PT# : CPU#
Group name Tool icons Debug tool icons
Line numbers Program edit area
Function bar (Debug function keys)

Status bar 5
Table 5.1 Motion Editor Window Configuration
Configuration Details
Group Name Indicates the name of the group in which the motion program is
located.
Menu Bar The menu bar which is enabled by the Motion Editor.
Tool Icons Often used commands are available through these icons.
Line Numbers Line numbers are allocated automatically when the program is input.
Program Edit Area This is the area where the program is actually input.
Debug Tool Icons These are icons and function keys that are allocated debugging func-
Debug Function Keys tions. For details, refer to 5.5 Debugging Motion Programs.
5-17
Motion Programming
5.3.5 Motion Editor Window Menus
5.3.5 Motion Editor Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of the menu commands when the Motion Editor is
active.

File (F)
Open (O)
Definition (D)
Module Configuration Display the various definition windows.
(M)
System Configuration
(S)
Scan Time Setting (T)
Application Info. (I)
Data Trace (D)
Fault Monitor (F)
Group Definition (G)
Motion Parameter (P)
Drawing (R)
5 Open New DWG (O) Ladder programming tools

Properties (R)
Main Program (L)
SFC Flow Chart (S)
SFC Time Chart (T)
SFC Action Box (B)
Constant Table (# Reg)
(H)
Constant Table (M
Reg) (M)
I/O Convert Table (C)
Interlock Table (I)
Part Composition
Table (A)
Tuning Panel (P)
5-18

Tool (T)
Register List (C) Displays Machine Controller registers.
Cross Reference (X) Detects the using registers.
Disable Coil List (D) Detects the coils being disable.
Comment List (C) Comment making tool
Register Replace (S) Register No. detection/replacement tool
C Register (C)
C Register Map (M) C register management tool
Table Data Definition (G)
Table Data Map (L) Table data management tool
Tab
Tab list -
Motion Program (M)
Open New File (N) Opens a new program.
Open (O) Opens an existing program.
Position Monitor (P) Displays the position monitor.
Task Monitor (T) Displays the task monitor.
Motion Alarm (A) Displays the alarm information.
Close (C) Closes the Motion Editor.
Motion Properties (R) Defines the motion properties.
5
Regist User Menu (U) Registers a shortcut button for the Motion Editor.
Save (S) Saves the program.
Save As (A) Saves the program with a new name.
Delete (D) Deletes the program.
Import (I) Converts a text file to a motion program file.
Export (E) Converts a program file to a text file.
Print (P) Prints data.
Exit (X) Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit (E)
Undo Cancels the last operation.
Cut (T) Standard text editing commands
Copy (C)
Paste (P)
Find (S) Finds a text string.
Replace (R) Replaces one text string with another.
Go To (J) Jumps to a specified row number.
Head (U) Jumps to first row.
Last (E) Jumps to last row.
Semicolon (I) Adds a semicolon at the last column of a pro-
gram line.
Position Teaching (P) Takes the current position as a command oper-
and.
5-19
Motion Programming
5.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions

View (V)
Font (F) Changes the font.
Tool Bar (T) Displays or hides the Tool Bar.
Status Bar (S) Displays or hides the Status Bar.
Function Bar (B) Displays or hides the Function Bar.
Debug Operation Function Allocates function keys for debug operation.
Bar (D)
Position Teaching Function Allocates function keys for teaching positions.
Bar (P)
Error List (L) Refreshes the error list display.
Monitor Parallel No. (M) Refer to 5.5 Debugging Motion Programs.
Monitor Regeneration (V)
Debug (T)
Debug (D) Refer to 5.5 Debugging Motion Programs.
Hold (H)
Abort (C)
Multi Step Run (G)
Start Point (P)
Break Point (B)
Step Run (S)
5 Step In (I)
Code Generation (L)
Current Value Update (N)
Debug OFF (X)
Window (W)
Help (H)
This section explains the menu bar and the commands that are commonly used.
Searching for a Character String

The following procedure can be used to search for a specified character string in a program
that is being edited.
1. Select Edit (E) and then Find (S) to display the Find Window.
2. Enter the character string to be searched for and specify the search direction, and then
click the Find Next Button.
5-20
a) When a matching character string is found, it will be displayed in reversed color and
the search will stop. Either click the Find Next Button again to resume the search for
the next matching character string or click the Cancel Button to stop the search.
b) If no matching character string is found, a bell will sound. Either enter a different
character string to be searched for and execute the search again, or click the Cancel
Button close the Find Window.
Replacing a Character String

The following procedure can be used to replace one specified character string with another
in a program that is being edited.
1. Select Edit (E) and then Replace (R) to display the Replace Window.
2. Enter the character string that is to be replaced and the character string that it is to be
replaced with, and click the Find Next Button.
a) When a matching character string is found, it will be displayed in reversed color and
the search will stop. Then execute one of the follow operations:
• Either click the Replace Button to replace only that character string and search
for the next instance, or click the Replace All Button to replace all instances of
that character string.
• Click the Find Next Button to leave that character string unchanged and search
for the next instance.
• Click the Cancel Button close the Find Window.
5
b) If no matching character string is found, a bell will sound. Either enter a different
character string to be searched for and execute the search again, or click the Cancel
Button close the Find Window.
Jumping to a Specified Line

Use the following procedure to move the cursor to a specified line number in the program.
1. Select Edit (E) and then Jump (J). A window will be displayed for the jump destination.
2. Input the line number (Row No.) and then click the Execution (S) Button.
To cancel the jump operation, click the Cancel Button to close the window.
Jumping to the Beginning of the Program

Select Edit (E) and then Head (U) to move the cursor to the first line of the program.
Jumping to the End of the Program

Select Edit (E) and then Last (E) to move the cursor to the last line of the program.
Adding a Semicolon
The semicolon function can be enabled or disabled by selecting Edit (E) and then Semicolon
5-21
Motion Programming
(I).
With this function enabled, a semicolon is added in the last column of a program line when
the Enter Key is pressed. The motion language specifications require a semicolon in the last
column of every program line, so the purpose of this function is to lighten the program input
load.
A checkmark will appear in the menu before the Semicolon Command when it is enabled.
The Semicolon Button in the tool icon in the Motion Editor will also stay in pressed state.
To disable the semicolon function, remove the check mark by again selecting Edit (E) and
then Semicolon (I) (or click the Semicolon Tool Icon).
Teaching Positions
The procedures described here take the current coordinate values for the axes controlled by
the MP940 as the coordinate value operand for a movement command.
Opening the Position Monitor Window

The Position Monitor Window is opened to display the current coordinate values.
Select File (F), Open (O), Motion Program (M), and then Position Monitor (P) from the
Engineering Manager Menu. The Position Monitor Window is shown below.
Setting the Teaching Axes

There are two procedures that can be used to set the teaching axis:
• From the Position Monitor Window
• Using the teaching function keys.
1. Setting from the Position Monitor Window.
a) Select File (F), Edit (E), and then Position Teaching (P). The Position Teaching
Window will open.
Alternatively, click the Teaching Button in the Motion Editor Window.
Teaching Button
5-22
The logical axis names and check boxes defined in the Group Definitions are dis-
played as shown below.
Position Display (MPxxxx) ×
Teaching Axis Teaching Axis

Logical axis name 1 ・・・
Logical axis name 2

・・・
Logical axis name 3

・・・
Teach Close Next
Fig 5.4 Position Teaching Window

b) Set the axes to be taught.
There are two ways to set the axes to be taught. Use these are required.
• Using the Teach Button
The current position will be taught for the logical axis whose check boxes have
been checked.
• Using the Logical Axis Name Buttons 5
The current position will be taught for only the logical axis whose button has
been pressed.
2. Setting with Teaching Function Keys
Axis value can be taught directly from the function keys without opening the Position
Display Window.
Select View (V), Position Teaching Toolbar (P) from the Engineering Manager Window
menus.
5-23
Motion Programming
The function keys will be displayed along with the logical axis names.
Engineering Manager ×
File (F) Edit (E) View (V)
Font
Switch between
these two with ALT Debug operation toolbar
+ F10.
Position teaching toolbar
Click here.
Motion Editor
1 Logical Axis Name 1 2 Logical Axis Name 2 3 Logical Axis Name 3 12 MENU
5 INFO Function Keys

1 Eight logical axis names defined in the Group Definitions are allocated to the function keys from the
left (F1 to F8).
2 Press the F12 (MENU) Key to switch to the next eight axes (i.e., eight axes starting from the 9th).
There can be a maximum of 48 axes per group.
3 The MENU Key is F10 on non-DOS computers.

4 Shortcut Keys
The following shortcut keys can be used when the Motion Editor Window is active.
Alt + F10 Switches between Debug Operation and Position

Teaching Function Keys.
Alt + V, D Switches to Debug Operation Function Keys.
Alt + V, P Switches to Position Teaching Function Keys.
5 When switching between more than one Motion Editor Window, the function keys will be reset to axes
1 to 8.
Obtaining Coordinate Values

The following example shows how to obtain the coordinate values. Assume that the cursor is
just after the MOV command in the Motion Editor Window.
5-24
If the Teach Button in the Position Teaching Window is clicked this point, the coordinate
values displayed in the Position Monitor Window will be moved into the MOV command
operand as the A1 and B1 coordinate values.
The MOV command is used in this example, but coordinate value constants can be obtained
in the same way for other commands that have axis information operands.
When the Position Monitor and Position Teaching Windows are no longer required, close
each of them by clicking on the Button in the upper right corner.
Specifying Fonts
The font used in the Motion Editor Window can be set.
When View (V) and then Font (F) are selected in the Motion Editor Window, the Font Spec-
ification Window will be displayed. Specify the font to be used, the font style, and the size, 5
and then click the OK Button.
Error List
The compiling error list can be redisplayed when required.
Select View (V) and then Error List (L) to display the Error List Window displayed when
compiling.
Alternatively, click the List tool icon.
To close the window, click the Close Button.
5.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands
This section explains the import and export commands which are associated with external
program text files.
The program source files saved by the Motion Editor consist of not only text files but also
various types of data, including the operating environment. Accordingly, there is no problem
with the operating environment for the Motion Editor, but source files cannot be directly
opened by general-purpose editors. For that reason, the Motion Editor is provided with
5-25
Motion Programming
5.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands
import and export commands to allow general-purpose text editors to be used.
General-
Motion purpose
Editor
editor
Motion Program
program source file
source
file (Text file)
Import
Export
Fig 5.5 Import and Export Commands
Importing
The import function is used for bringing files created by a general-purpose editor into the
5 Motion Editor. This function converts a text file into a motion program file.
Use the following procedure to import a file.
1. Select File (F) and then Import (I).
The window for opening the text file to be converted will be displayed.
2. Search for the file by using Look in or other method.

3. Select the file by clicking it.
4. Click the Open Button.
The selected text file will be read and a new Motion Editor Window will be displayed.
After editing the program, save the file.
5-26
Exporting
The export function is used in the following cases:
• To temporarily save a file that is being edited by the Motion Editor.
• To edit an existing program with a standard text editor.
If an error, such as a syntax error, will occur in the Motion Editor when programming has not yet been
completed, the program cannot be saved in that condition. Unless there are no errors, use the following
export procedure to save programs that are in the process of being edited.
The export procedure is as follows:

1. With the edited program open, select File (F) and then Export (E). A window will be
displayed to specify where the text file is to be saved.
2. Select or input the name of the file and the destination folder, and click the Save Button.
If a file by that name already exists, it will be overwritten when the new file is saved.
3. After the file has been saved, close the Motion Editor Window.
5.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor
To close the Motion Editor and return to the Engineering Manager, select File (F) and then
Close (C).
5-27
Motion Programming
5.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor
1 Motion parameter can be changed or saved while the Motion Editor Window is open. If the number of
decimal digits in the fixed parameters is changed, however, a warning message will be displayed. Con-
firm the safety of the system before proceeding.
Engineering Bulider ×
The number of decimal places
will be changed. This could
change the amount of axis
movement. Caution is required.
Is it okay to save?
Yes (Y) No (N)
Fig 5.6 Warning Message for Save
2 Fixed parameters can be saved only when the servo is OFF. A Controller error message will be dis-
played if an attempt is made to change or save fixed parameters when the servo is ON.
5-28
5.4 Compiling Motion Programs
5.4 Compiling Motion Programs
This section explains the process involved in compiling a motion program.
5.4.1 Compile Execution
The program is compiled automatically when the file is saved.

Use the following procedure to execute the compile operation by saving the file.
1. With the motion program open, the program will be compiled when any of the following
operations are performed.
• Select File (F) and then Save (S).
• Select File (F) and then Save As (A).
• Click the Save icon.
While the program is being compiled, the progress of the operation will be displayed by
a bar in the Motion Editor Window, as shown in the following illustration.
2. If an object to be saved during the compile operation already exists, the following win-
dow will be displayed to confirm the overwrite. To overwrite the existing object, click
the Yes Button. To save the new object without overwriting the existing one, select File
(F) and then Save As (A) and input a different name.
5
Insufficient Memory Errors when Saving Files
The following error messages will be displayed if the object or source areas are insufficient when sav-
ing files online.
Error Message Meaning

CPDH_CPU_0B2 object memory area exceeded. Object area overflow
Saving may be possible by using MEM compress
(M) to compress the memory area. Memory
compression is done from within the System
Configuration Definition Window.
Insufficient memory in the CPDH_CPU_0B3 Source storage area
program memory area. Saving may be possible by overflow
using MEM compress (M) to compress the memory
area. Memory compression is done from within the
System Configuration Definition Window.
Remedy
1 From the Motion Editor Window, open the System Configuration Definition Window by selecting File
(F) and then System definition (S) from the menu.
2 Stop the CPU by selecting Control (C) and then CPU STOP (S) from the menu.
3 Compress memory by selecting Control (C) and then MEM compress (M) from the menu.
4 Start the CPU by selecting Control (C) and then CPU RUN (R) from the menu.
5-29
Motion Programming
5.4.2 Compile Execution Steps
If the insufficient memory error occurs again for saving, then the physical memory is insufficient.
Delete unneeded programs or other files. The error message will appear more frequently as the amount
of memory available decreases. Compressing memory each time will help.
5.4.2 Compile Execution Steps
When the compile operation is started, the status of the compile operation is displayed in the
a progress bar.
When the compile operation is completed, the Compile Execution Window will be closed.
5.4.3 Normal Completion of the Compile Operation
If the compile operation is completed normally, the file will be saved to the hard disk. Then,
in Online Mode, the compiled file will be transferred to the Machine Controller.
The user will then be returned to the Motion Editor Window. If there is no need for editing,
close the Motion Editor.
5
5.4.4 Error Completion of the Compile Operation
If an error occurs during the compile operation, the Error List Window will be displayed.
Check the error contents, correct the program, and execute the compile operation again.
Even after this window has been closed, it can be displayed again by using the Error List (L)
command.
The cursor can be moved to the relevant place in the

Motion Editor by double-clicking the line number dis-
played in the Error Row column.
The motion program file cannot be saved as long as there are any compile errors. To save it tempo-
rarily, it is necessary to use the export command.
5-30
5.5 Debugging Motion Programs
This section describes the Debug Operation used to debug motion programs.
5.5.1 Outline
Debug operations are used to debug motion programs. Open the Motion Editor in Online
Mode to turn ON and OFF the debug operations.
Debug commands include standard start points and breakpoints, and single-step execution.
The Engineering Builder Window will be displayed if the user tries to enter debug operations in
Offline Mode, and the operation will be cancelled.
5.5.2 Opening the Debug Window
The Debug Operation is provided as one of the functions of the Motion Editor. The Motion
5
Editor Window and the Debug Operation Window are the same window. Logging in online,
however, is required to use the Debug Operation. It is not possible in Offline Mode.
The portions of the Motion Editor Window that are used for Debug Operation are shown
below.
Debug Menu
Engineering Manager
Debug T
Motion Editor
PT# : CPU#
・・・・
DM Off
・
Debug Tool Icons

Line Motion program source data
numbers
Debug Function Keys

Status Bar
5-31
Motion Programming
5.5.2 Opening the Debug Window
Debug Operation Window Configuration
Item Details
Debug Menu The commands used in debug operations are displayed under this
menu.
Debug Tool Icons Icons have been created for frequently used debug commands.
Status Bar Displays information on debug operations.
Debug Function Keys Function Keys have been allocated for debug commands.
Debug Menu
The debug commands that are available on the menu bar can be selected from a pull-down
menu.

File (F) Refer to 5.3 Creating Motion Programs.
Edit (E)
View (V)
Font (F) Refer to 5.3 Creating Motion Programs.
Tool Bar (T)
Status Bar (S)
Error List (L)
5 Monitor Parallel No. Refer to 6.3 Motion Program Monitoring for
(M) details.
Monitor Regeneration
(V)
Debug (T)
Debug ON (D) Enables the debug operations.
Hold (H) Holds the motion command that is currently
being executed.
Abort (C) Aborts the debug operations.
Multi Step Run (G) Executes lines 1 to n.
Start Point (P) Specifies the first row for debugging.
Break Point (B) Specifies the last row for debugging.
Step Run (S) Executes debugging one step at a time.
Step In (I) Hands control to a subroutine.
Code Generator (L) Compiles and updates the object.
Current Value Update Updates current coordinates.
(N)
Debug OFF (X) Disables debug operations.
Window (W) Refer to other portions of this chapter.
Help (H)
5-32
Debug Icons
Icons have been created for frequently used debug commands, and these commands can be
executed by left-clicking the mouse button.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
1. Debug ON
2. Debug OFF
3. Current Value Update
4. Step In
5. Step Run (Step Over)
6. Start Point
7. Break Point
8. Multi Step Run.
9. Hold ON/OFF.
10.Abort
Debug Function Keys 5

Debug commands are supported by Function Keys also.
Debug Status Bar

The debug status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Edit Window and shows the following
debug statuses. More than one status may be displayed.
Status Meaning
Debug Mode Debug operations enabled
Running Operating normally.
Hold Movement commands remain in hold.
Abort Resetting debug operations.
5-33
Motion Programming
5.5.3 Debug Operations
Status Meaning
Alarm An operation error has occurred.
Break Held at the breakpoint.
This section explains the actual debug operations.

Debug operations are possible only when there are no compile errors in the program opened
in the Motion Editor, which is the program to be debugged.
Starting and Stopping Debug Operations

The first command that must be set when starting debug operations is the Debug ON com-
mand. All commands used in debug operations are enabled when the Debug ON command
is given and "Debug Mode" will be displayed on the status bar.
1. Click the DM Button to enable the tool icons related to debug operations.
"Debug Mode" will be displayed on the status bar.

2. The Debug OFF command will disable debug operations, and the display will return to
the previous screen.
INFO 1 Use the Debug ON command when program operation has been stopped.
2 The Debug ON command is valid for one main program only. It cannot be set for multiple main pro-
grams simultaneously.
3 If the CP-717 system is exited without using the Debug OFF command to close the debug operations,
an error will occur when the user next tries to start debug operations. If an error occurs, execute the
Debug OFF command and then the Debug ON command.
Debug Window Configuration

The following window will be displayed during debug operations. Start points and break-
points will appear after the line numbers in the line number display section. The entire line
that is currently being debugged will be displayed in reversed color as an operation cursor.
The user can confirm which line is being executed by following the operation cursor.
5-34
Start point Operation cursor
・・・・・・
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;
00006 msee mps100;
00007 fmx t30000;
・・・・・・
Break point
Setting Start Points

The start point symbol (⇒) is displayed from when it is set and during debugging. The sym-
bol disappears when debugging is stopped.
Select the first line for debugging and click the SP Button. The start point symbol will
appear at the end of the line number. To release the start point (⇒), repeat the step to set the
start point on the same line.
The following example shows the editing cursor at line 00005.
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

5
During step execution, the (⇒) symbol may not appear for commands with short execution
times, because the start point is set and the command executed at the same time.
Setting Break Points

A breakpoint ( ) will remain at the same position once it is set until it is cleared. Select the
line where the debugging is to be stopped, and click the BP Button. The breakpoint symbol
( ) will appear at the end of the designated line number.
Break points can be cleared by the following four methods:
• Set a different breakpoint.
• Click the BP Button again in the line where a breakpoint is currently set.
• Abort the debug operations.
• Disable the debug operations.
Operation Cursor
The operation cursor displayed in reversed color shows the command that is currently being
executed.
The operation cursor will automatically scroll through the program and indicate the com-
mand currently being executed if the cursor moves from the line currently being displayed in
the Motion Editor Window.
The operation cursor will turn back into the edit cursor when the operation is stopped. The
5-35
Motion Programming
operation cursor will be displayed during normal operation if a program opened using the
Motion Editor is being executed.
Step Run
Step Run can be used to debug the program one line at a time. Depending on how the sub-
routine written using the MSEE command is executed, the Step Run command is divided
into Step Over and Step In commands. Debugging of the main program, including subrou-
tines, is executed using a combination of these commands.
Normally, the Step Run command means Step Over.
Step Over
Debugging is executed one line at a time using the Step Run command. The subroutine writ-
ten using the MSEE command is processed as one execution unit, and stops at the next com-
mand after the MSEE command.
An example of execution of the Step Over command is shown below.
1. Set the cursor in the line for which the Step Run command is to be executed.
Cursor
・・・・・・
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;
5 00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;
・・・・・・
2. The execution of a command can be confirmed by the operation cursor during execu-
tion. The operation cursor may not be visible, however, for command executions that
are completed quickly.
Operation cursor
・・・・・・
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;
00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;
・・・・・・
5-36
3. A breakpoint and the cursor are automatically set when one line has been debugged.
Breakpoint
・・・・・・
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;
00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;
・・・・・・
Cursor
Step In
The Step In command is used to debug subroutines written using the MSEE command. It is
valid for MSEE commands. If it is used for other commands the function will be the same as
if the Step Over command was executed.
When the Step In command is executed, the Motion Editor Window for the subroutine
opened using the MSEE command will be opened and control transferred. Other debug com-
mands can be used in the subroutine, just as for main programs.
If the RET command is executed during the subroutine, the Motion Editor Window for that
subroutine will be closed, and the program will return to the next command after the MSEE
command. Up to 8 levels of subroutines can be nested within a subroutine.
An example of execution of the Step In command is shown below.
5
1. The first line has been set in the MSEE command. The MPS101 subroutine is about to
be executed.
Cursor
・・・・・・
00010 msee mps101;
00011 fmx t30000;
・・・・・・
2. When the Step In command is executed the subroutine is opened, and the debug envi-
ronment is prepared and progress is shown in a progress bar.
100%
3. The Motion Editor Window for the subroutine is opened, and the cursor set to the first
line. Both Step In and Step Over commands can be used.
Cursor
00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 dw14=1;
00003 fmx t10000;
00004 mvs
・・・・・・
ret
5-37
Motion Programming
4. When the subroutine RET command is executed, the subroutine window is closed and
the display returns to the main program.
Cursor
・・・・・・
00010 msee mps101;
00011 fmx t30000;
・・・・・・
Multi Step Run

One or more lines of commands for which the start point and breakpoint have been set will
be executed. Either the start point or breakpoint can be set first. The start point is automati-
cally cleared when execution is stopped, however, breakpoints remain until a new break-
point is set.
When a Breakpoint is Passed

In the following example, the start point has been set on line 2 and the breakpoint on line 7.
Start point
MPS101 "GROUP01"
00001 abs;
5 00002 mov [a1]100;
00003 ・・・
・・・・・・
00007 fmx +20000;
Break point
When the Multi Step Run command has been executed, debugging is executed for lines 2
through 6, and stops at the breakpoint in line 7.
Cursor
MPS101 "GROUP01"
00001 abs;
00002 mov [a1]100;
00003 ・・・
・・・・・・
00007 fmx +20000;
Break point
The operation cursor may not be visible for some commands. Refer to 6.3 Motion Program
Monitoring for information on commands for which the operation cursor is displayed.
When the Breakpoint Is Not Passed

If the set breakpoint is not passed and the logic is normal, the following processing will be
executed.
5-38
• Main Programs
Debugging will be executed until the END command, where it will stop.
• Subroutines
The RET command will be executed, the program will return to the MSEE command,
and stop at the next command.
In the following example, the breakpoint is set at an earlier line. As a result, the Step Over
command will be executed until the END command where it will stop.
The execution process is shown below.
1. Open mps102 using the Step In command.
Break point
・・・・・・
00004 mov [a1]100 ;
00005 msee mps102;
00006 msee mps103;
・・・・・・
Cursor
Start point
2. The debug operations enter the subroutine. If the Multi Step Run command is executed
with the settings shown in the diagram, the RET command will be executed, and control
will return to the main program.
5
Start point
00001 MPS120 ・・・

00002 mov [b1]200;
00003 fim t100;
・・・・・・
ret;
Cursor
Break point
3. Once back at the main program, the process will step at the next command.
Cursor
・・・・・・
00004 mov [a1]100 ;
00005 msee mps102;
00006 msee mps103;
・・・・・・
Hold ON/OFF
The Hold command holds the command currently being executed. When the Hold command
is executed again, the hold is cleared, and execution of the command is continued.
The Hold command is enabled only for the movement commands, however, and is ignored
when executed for other commands.
5-39
Motion Programming
The timing charts for the following commands is outlined in the following table.
0010 mov [a1] 100; Hold enabled.

0011 ob1010=1; Hold disabled.
0012 tim t 500; Hold disabled.
0013 mvs [b1] 100. [c1] 200; Hold enabled.
0014 mov [c1] 0; Hold enabled.
On Off On
Hold
1. mov
Hold effective
2. ob101
Hold ineffective
t500
3. tim
4. mvs
Hold effective
Abort
5 The Abort command aborts the execution of the debug operations. Debugging cannot be
resumed once this command has been executed.
Operation Flow after Abort

The operation flow after the Abort command has been executed is outlined below.
1. Start points and breakpoints are cleared, and the corresponding symbols disappear.
2. Debug control returns to the main program, even if a subroutine is currently being
debugged. The main program window will be the active window, and the edit cursor
will point to the first line. As a result, resumption of the debug operations will always be
from the main program.
3. If the Motion Editor Window for subroutines is open, it will not automatically close.
This allows the user to not only check the debug operations, but to also save any subrou-
tines that have been edited during the debug operations to the Motion Controller.
Refer to Editing during Debug Operations later in this chapter.
Abort Example
An example of the execution of the Abort command is shown below.
1. Place the cursor on the MSEE command and execute the mps101 subroutine using the
Step In command.
5-40
Cursor
00001 MPM001 "GROUP01"

・・
・・
・・
・・
00010 msee mps101;
2. Once the subroutine is executed, set the start point and breakpoint as shown below.
Start point
00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 fmx t10000;
・・・・・・
00019 mvs [d1]200 f1000 pfn;
00020 ret;
Break point
3. Then, execute the Abort command instead of the Step Run command. The start point
and breakpoint will be cleared, the debug command turned OFF, and the debug opera-
tions reset. The window will remain open.
00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 fmx t10000; 5
・・・・・・
00019 mvs [d1]200 f1000 pfn;
00020 ret;
4. As the debug operations were reset, the main program only can be debugged, and the
start point is set at the beginning.
Cursor
00001 MPM001 "GROUP01"

・・
・・
・・
・・
00010 msee mps101;
Current Value Update

The Current Value Update command is used to correct distortions to current values from axis
movement by the motion program when axes are jogged or otherwise moved by the ladder
logic program during the debug operations.
Be sure to execute this command when axes have been moved through manual intervention during the
debug operations.
5-41
Motion Programming
Editing during Debug Operations

If the program is to be improved or faults in the program is discovered during debug opera-
tions, the program can be corrected and re-executed when the operation cursor is not dis-
played (no commands are being executed).
Editing Programs
The following limits apply to editing programs:
• Only programs that are displayed in the active window during the debug operations can
be displayed.
• Subroutine windows opened during the debug operations cannot be edited. Windows
can, however, be switched and scrolled.
• Programs not related to the debug operations can be edited but cannot be saved.
1 Programs cannot be edited when the operation cursor is displayed, indicating that the debug operations
are being executed.
Operation cursor
・・・・・・
00012 fmx t30000 ;
00013 mvs [a1]100;
・・・・・・
5 00020 pfork
2 The following program can be edited. The debug operations are stopped, and the edit cursor will go to
the front of the PFORK command.
Cursor
・・・・・・
00012 fmx t30000 ;
00013 mvs [a1]100;
・・・・・・
00020 pfork
5-42
3 In the following program, the MPS101 subroutine, which has been called from the MPM001 main pro-
gram using the Step In command, is active. In addition, the MPM002 program, which is unrelated to
the debug operations, is open.
Main program
Subroutine
Motion Editor opened from the
00005 MPM001 main program
・・ Motion Editor
・・ 00005 MPS101
・・・・
・・
・・
Motion Editor
00005 MPM002
Program unrelated to
the debug operations ・・
・・
・・
In this example, MPM002, which is unrelated to the active window MPS101, can be edited, but
MPM001 cannot be edited because it is still in the debug operations. MPM002 cannot be saved.
Editing
Editing and Temporary Registration 5
The edit operation is based on the Motion Editor edit functions. Press the SHIFT + Enter
Keys or selecting Debug (T) and then Code Generator (L) to temporarily store altered data
on the Machine Controller. To register the data permanently, select File (F) and then Save
(S). Refer to the next section Updating Files for details.
Temporary registration on the Machine Controller is designed to perform a test run for
debug operations. Update the file only when there are no problems with the test run.
If the temporary save step is omitted and editing executed, the steps for temporarily saving
the data will be executed automatically. The compilation will be executed first and, if no
errors occur, the temporary save step will be executed. The execution is disabled if an error
occurs during compilation.
An example of the editing operation is shown below.
1. Set the edit cursor at line 6 to insert an allocation statement.
Cursor
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
5-43
Motion Programming
2. Input the substitute text dw14=14.
Cursor
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 dw14=14;
00007 ;
3. Press the Shift + Enter Keys or select Debug (T) and then Code Generator (L) to com-
pile the amended text. The execution can be recommenced if no errors occur.
30%
Handling Breakpoints
Breakpoints are set for line numbers. Breakpoints are not set for the command allocated to
that line number. As a result, breakpoints will be with different commands when the pro-
gram has been edited and line numbers have changed as a result.
Take note of the current breakpoint settings during editing.
An example of editing breakpoints is shown below.
1. Set the breakpoint at line 9.
5 Break point
00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mvs [c1]o;
00010 ;
Cursor
2. Edit the command at line 9. The breakpoint will remain with the same command in this
example because the text is being overwritten.
Break point
00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mvs [c1]200 ;
00010 ;
Cursor
5-44
3. Two lines of commands have been added at line 9. The line numbers will move and, as a
result, the breakpoint will be located at the TIM command.
Break point
00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 tim t100;
00010 mw100 = 100;
00011 mvs [c1]200 ;
00012 ;
Cursor
4. The TIM command has been deleted. The line numbers will move up one, and the
breakpoint will be located with the substituted text.
Break point
00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mw100 = 100;
00010 mvs [c1]200 ;
00011 ;
Cursor
Updating Files 5
The file update process during the debug operations involves temporary registration and per-
manent registration. The temporary registration command is designed for test runs, and only
allows operation results of program changes to be confirmed. If the results of the test run are
good, the adjustments can be saved properly to the file.
Temporary Registration
Adjusted programs can be temporarily registered on the Machine Controller by pressing the
Shift + Enter Keys, or by selecting Debug (T) and then Code Generator (L). The original
program on the Machine Controller will be overwritten only when the permanent registra-
tion command is executed.
Permanent Registration
Files registered on the hard disk and Machine Controller are updated with adjusted pro-
grams. The Motion Editor cannot be closed if permanent registration is not executed. Select
File (F) and then Save (S) before closing the Motion Editor.
1. Execute permanent registration in the active Motion Editor Window.
2. A message saying that the program is being edited will be displayed if the debug opera-
tions are turned OFF without executing permanent registration. Click the OK Button to
save the update. This method can be used to execute permanent registration.
5-45
Motion Programming
INFO If the RET command is executed in the subroutine after temporary registration but without permanent
registration, permanent registration will be automatically executed. If original program that has not
been debugged is to be kept, create a PLC folder in the File Manager for copying and saving that pro-
gram, or use the Export command to save the required program.
Restrictions during Debug Operations

The restrictions that apply to the debug operations are outlined below.
Effective Commands during Debug Operations

As shown on the following table, some commands are enabled when the program is stopped,
and some are enabled during the debug operations.
When During
No. Command
Stopped Operation
1 Debug Mode ON (DM) Enabled Disabled
2 Debug Mode OFF (Off) Enabled Disabled
3 Update Position (POS) Enabled Disabled
4 Step Run (1 step run) Enabled Disabled
5 Step In (In sub program) Enabled Disabled
5 6 Start Point (SP) Enabled Disabled
7 Break Point (BP) Enabled Disabled
8 Multi Step Run (GO) Enabled Disabled
9 Hold ON/OFF (HOLD) Disabled Enabled
10 Abort (X) Disabled Enabled
Cursors and Breakpoints after Step Run

The edit cursor and breakpoint move to the next line after the Step Run command is exe-
cuted. If there is a nonexecutable command for comments or labels on the next line, how-
ever, the cursor and breakpoint will stop at the next executable command that appears.
An example of edit cursor and breakpoint movement is shown below.
1. Set the cursor to line 5.
5-46
Break point
00001 MPS001 "GROUP"

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
Cursor
2. Execute Step Over.
Break point

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
Cursor 5
3. The comment and label lines are passed, and the breakpoint and cursor are set to line 9,
which has the FMX command.
Break point

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
Cursor
5-47
Motion Programming
Commands that Cannot be Executed with Step Run

The Step Run command cannot be executed for some commands. An error message will be
generated for these commands shown on the following table. Set the start point to the next
command that can be executed with the Step Run command.
Command Code Example Remarks

IF if ib01==1;
ELSE else; Start points cannot be set.
IEND iend;
WHILE while ib01==1;
WEND wend;
PFORK pfork L1 L2;
JOINTO jointo L3;
PJOINT L3: pjoint L1 L2;
SFORK sfork ib01==1?L1 ib01==0?L2;
SJOINT L3: sjoint;
END end; Start points cannot be set.
Commands for which Start Points and Breakpoints Cannot be Set

Start points and breakpoints cannot be set for the nonexecutable commands shown in the fol-
5 lowing table. Error messages will be generated if start points or breakpoints are set for these
commands. Set the start points and breakpoints to commands that can be set.
Start Break
Command Coding Example Remarks
Point point
ELSE else; No Yes Step Run is not possible.
END end; No Yes Step Run is not possible.
;line ; No No
"Comment"; line "Interpolation speed"; No No
Label line Label; No No
Executing from Command and Label lines

Step Run can be executed from lines with semi-colons (;) only and comment lines that start
with quotation marks ("). In such cases, the next subsequent executable command is exe-
cuted.
An example is shown below.
Set the cursor to a comment line.
5-48
Cursor
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
00010 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
When step execution is performed, the executable commands after line 6 are executed. In
this example, the FMX command is executed.
Break point
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
00010 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
Operation cursor
SNG Operation
The SNG command does not function in debug operations.
SNG commands are specified on lines 30 and 31, however these lines will be executed with
Step Run. 5
Break point
00028 mov [a1]0.;

00029 ob101 = 0
00030 sng mov [a1]100. ;
00031 sng mov [b1]100. ;
00032 ob101 = 1
00033 mov [a1]100.;
Cursor
5-49
6 Monitoring Tools
This chapter explains the monitoring functions that check the Machine Con-
troller's operating conditions.
6.1 Monitoring Tools- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3

6.1.1 Outline of the Monitoring Tools- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.2 Using the Ladder Programming Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4

6.2.1 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.2.2 Tuning Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.3 Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6

6.3.1 Outline of Motion Program Monitoring- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
6.3.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
6.3.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
6
6.4 Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.4.1 Outline of Position Monitor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.4.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.4.3 Position Monitor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
6.4.4 Position Monitor Window Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
6.4.5 Closing Position Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
6.5 Task Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14

6.5.1 Outline- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.5.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.5.3 Task Monitor Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
6.5.4 Task Monitor Display Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16
6.5.5 Task Monitor Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16
6.5.6 Closing Task Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6-1
Monitoring Tools
6.6 Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

6.6.1 Outline of Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.6.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.6.3 Motion Alarm Window Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19
6.6.4 Displaying Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20
6.6.5 Closing Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
6-2
6.1 Monitoring Tools
6.1 Monitoring Tools
The Monitoring Tools support program debugging and confirmation of motion program execu-
tion conditions.
6.1.1 Outline of the Monitoring Tools
The Monitoring Tools display the contents of MP900-series Machine Controller registers,
data related to the servo being controlled, and other data in real time. Logging in online is
thus required to use these tools. The menu commands to start the Monitoring Tools will not
be displayed in Offline Mode, except for the Register List Tool.
CPU registers SERVOPACK Motor
Tuning Motion Program

panel
　MOV　[A1]100　・・・
Displays val- 　PFORK　・・・
ues of special 　・・・
registers.
Register Motion pro- Position Task Motion

gram moni-
list
tor
Program execu-
monitor monitor alarms
6
Displays reg- tion is followed Displays axis Display task exe- Displays
ister values. by cursor. current positions. cution status. alarms.
ラダー
Move from menu commands (online)
プログラム
Ladder
program
Refer to the following for details.

• Using the Ladder Programming Tool
• Motion Programming Monitor
• Position Monitor
• Task Monitor
• Motion Alarm
6-3
Monitoring Tools
6.2.1 Register Lists
6.2 Using the Ladder Programming Tool
This section describes the Register List and Tuning Panel, which are often used as Motion Mon-
itoring Tools from the Ladder Programming Tool.
The current values of the Machine Controller's internal registers, the S, I, O, M, D, and C
registers, can be displayed in real time on a register list. These register values are not just for
reference only, but can also be changed.
A separate Register List Window is opened for each set of register display parameters, so
more than one window can be opened at the same time. When the Open Register (O) com-
mand is executed, a window to display the contents of the registers will be opened as a child
window.
Parent window
Register List Window

Menu Bar
Register Window
PT#: CPU#
Child windows
6 Register Window
PT#: CPU#
Refer to 7.2.7 # Register Lists for register list operations.
6.2.2 Tuning Panel
The Tuning Panel is used to define comments for names, units, and other items for registers
used in drawing and function programs. In Online Mode, the current values of defined regis-
ters are displayed and can be changed.
Tuning Panel Window

Definitions data is input on the Tuning Panel. Up to 100 definitions can be created.
6-4
6.2 Using the Ladder Programming Tool
No. Data name S Definition CV Unit Lower Upper REG-No. DWG
DWG Input mode
Refer to 7.6.2 Creating Tuning Panels for Tuning Panel operations.
6-5
Monitoring Tools
6.3.1 Outline of Motion Program Monitoring
6.3 Motion Program Monitoring
This section how to follow motion program execution conditions one step at a time with an
operation cursor.
6.3.1 Outline of Motion Program Monitoring
The motion program monitor function is built into the Motion Editor to follow program exe-
cution. It works together with the Motion Editor.
Motion program monitoring is performed automatically when the CP-717 connected to the
Machine Controller in Online Mode is opened. If an open program is running, the currently
executed program statement line will be displayed with an operation cursor.
For details on opening the window and menu configuration, refer to Chapter 5 Motion Pro-
gramming.
CP-717 Motion Editor Window
・・・・・・
00005 VEL [A1] 6000;
00006 ACC [A1] 1000;
00007 MOV [A1] 1000; The operation cursor shows
00008 ACC [A1] 500; the line in the motion program
that is currently being exe-
・・・・・・ cuted. The cursor will move to
the next line when execution
of the current line has been
completed.
6
MP940
TX
BAT R
X
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
M
PRT2
E
C
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6
H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2
PP O
COPY L
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K
I/O
PORT2
POWER
+24V LED
GND
FG
6.3.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor
When a motion program that is being executed is opened from the Motion Editor, it is dis-
played in the program monitor mode.
In the program monitor mode, the motion command currently being executed is displayed in
reversed color as shown in the following illustration. The area moves according to the pro-
gram execution.
6-6
Monitor Display for PFORK Command

The PFORK command is used to branch execution into up to four processes executed in par-
allel based on the operands of the command. The process number to be monitored must be
specified to enable monitoring.
When monitoring is performed, the motion command in the block specified by label 1 is dis-
played by default, and the commands in process with label 1 are monitored.
・
・
PFORK　 Label 1, Label 2, Label 3, Label 4;
Label 1: Process 1
JOINTO Label 9
Label 2: Process 2
6
JOINTO Label end The motion com-
mand from block
1 is highlighted as
Label 3: Process 3 the default.
JOINTO Label 9
Label 4: Process 4
JOINTO Label 9
Label 9:PJOINT;
・
・
Use the following procedure to change the block that is to be displayed for monitoring.
1. Select View (V) and then Monitor Parallel No. (M) in the Motion Editor Menu.
2. Input the parallel number (block number) in the dialog box, and then click the Execu-
tion Button. For the parallel number, input a number from 1 to 4.
6-7
Monitoring Tools
6.3.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display
Commands Displayed for Monitoring

The following table shows the commands that are displayed in reversed color in the monitor
mode.
Command Command
MOV Positioning MVS Linear interpolation
MCW Clockwise circular interpola- SPH Spherical interpolation
tion
MCC Helical circular interpolation ZRN Zero point return
SKP Skip MVT Set time positioning
SPL Spline path compensation EXM External positioning
PFN In-position check UFC User function call
ACC Acceleration time change DCC Deceleration time change
SCC S-curve time constant change TIM Dwell time
IOW I/O wait MSEE Subroutine call
6.3.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display
This section explains how to stop and restart the monitoring display.
Stopping the Monitoring Display

To stop the monitoring display, press the Space Key while the focus is on the Motion Editor
Window. The cursor condition will be changed from reversed color display to edit. The pro-
6 gram can be edited while the monitoring display is stopped.
00003 VEL [A1] 3000;

00004 ACC [A1] 2000;
00005 MOV [A1] 1000;
00003 VEL [A1] 3000;

00004 ACC [A1] 2000;
00005 MOV [A1] 1000;
Editing cursor
If an attempt is made to edit and save a program that is being executed while the monitoring display is
stopped, the program will not run normally.
Restarting the Monitoring Display

The following procedure can be used to restart a monitoring display that has been stopped.
6-8
Select View (V) and then Monitor Regeneration (V) in the Motion Editor Menu while the
focus is on the Motion Editor Window.
INFO If a motion program is saved while the monitoring display is stopped, the monitoring display will be
restarted
6-9
Monitoring Tools
6.4.1 Outline of Position Monitor
6.4 Position Monitor
This section explains how to use position monitoring to display the current positions of the axes.
6.4.1 Outline of Position Monitor
The Position Monitor Window displays and periodically updates the current positions of the
axes controlled by the Machine Controller.
The current positions are displayed for both the workpiece coordinate system coordinates
and the machine coordinate system coordinates. With a MP900-series Machine Controller,
only one axis is displayed.
axis 2
axis 2
(axis 1) Current
position
(axis 2)
(0,0) Workpiece coordinates axis 1

axis 1
(0,0) Machine coordinates
Fig 6.1 Coordinate System Example
6 6.4.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window
The Position Monitor Window can be opened from the Engineering Manager. Select File
(F), Open (O), Motion Program (M), and then Position Monitor (P) from the menu.
The Position Monitor Window will be opened.
6-10
6.4.3 Position Monitor Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Position Monitor Win-
dow.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Position Monitor Window.
Register User Menu Registers a Position Monitor Window shortcut.
(U)
Save (S) Not used with this window.
Delete (D) Not used with this window.
View (V)
Status Bar (B) Displays the Status Bar.
Display Item (S) Selects a display item.
Window (W)
Help (H) 6
6.4.4 Position Monitor Window Configuration
The items displayed in the Position Monitor Window include the workpiece coordinates for
axes defined by groups, machine coordinates, and workpiece coordinate system feedback
positions.
Refer to the window shown in 6.4.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window.
6-11
Monitoring Tools
6.4.4 Position Monitor Window Configuration
Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the System Configuration Definition
Window. Hyphens will be displayed in Offline Mode.

Position Information
The following table lists the items displayed on the Position Monitor.

Group Name Selection Select a group name from the list in the box below the login informa-
tion.
The current positions will be shown for the axes defined for the
selected group. If "All Groups" is selected, the current positions will
be shown for the axes for all groups.
Physical Axis Displays the physical axis numbers for axes defined by the selected
group.
Logical Axis Displays the logical axis names for the physical axis numbers in the
Group Definitions.
Work Coordinate Displays the workpiece coordinates for each axis. The workpiece
6 System coordinates are shown with the workpiece coordinates offset
(OLoo2E) added to the target position monitor (ILoo02).
Machine Coordinate Displays the machine coordinates for each axis. The machine coordi-
System nates use the target position monitor (ILoo02) values.
Work Coordinate Displays the workpiece coordinate system feedback positions for
System Feedback each axis. These positions are shown with the workpiece coordinate
offset (OLoo2E) added to the position monitor (ILoo08).
Unit This is the unit for the coordinates. It is defined by a Servo Module
Function Selection Flag.
INFO 1 The Servo Module Function Selection Flags are in a fixed parameter.
2 The workpiece coordinate offset is a setting parameter.
3 The target position monitor and position monitor are parameter monitors.
Selecting Display Items

The workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates, and the workpiece coordinate system
feedback positions are all displayed when the Position Monitor Window is opened, but any
of these items can also be selected for display. To select one of them, use the following pro-
6-12
cedure.
1. Select View (V) and then Display Item (S) in the Position Monitor Window.
2. A dialog box will be displayed. Check the item to be displayed, and then click the Set
Button.
Position Monitor Display Items
Workpiece coordinates
Machine coordinates
Workpiece feedback position
Position deviation
Set Cancel
The item checked in step 2. will be displayed.
Physical Axis 01.01

Logical Axis A1 Unit
Work coordinate system 480 mm
The machine coordinate system, work coordinate feedback positions, and position devi-
ations are not checked and not displayed.
6
INFO Position deviations cannot be displayed with MP900-series Machine Controllers. It can only be
selected as a display item.
6.4.5 Closing Position Monitoring
Exit position monitoring by closing the Position Monitor Window.

To close the Position Monitor Window, select File (F) and then Close (C) in the Position
Monitor Menu.
6-13
Monitoring Tools
6.5.1 Outline
6.5 Task Monitor
This section explains how to display motion program execution conditions in the Task Monitor.
The Task Monitor will work properly only when PGM automatic generation is enabled in the Group
Definitions. Do not use the Task Monitor otherwise.
6.5.1 Outline
With task monitoring, the Machine Controller displays, task by task, the program currently
being executed, and shows their execution status.
The following diagram shows four processes four groups with four tasks under the first
group and four processed under the first task. The execution status for all tasks and pro-
cesses under one group can be monitored in the Task Monitor at the same time. MP900-
series Machine Controllers, however, support only one group.
Group name Tasks Processes
Task Monitor Group 01 MPM001 PFORK: Process 1
PFORK: Process 2
PFORK: Process 3
6 PFORK: Process 4
MPM002 PFORK: Process 2
Group 02
Group 03
Group 04
6.5.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window
Open the Task Monitor Window from the Engineering Manager. Select File (F), Open (O),
Motion Program (M), and then Task Monitor (T) from the menu.
The Task Monitor Window will be opened.
6-14
6.5 Task Monitor
Group01 MPM001
Login Information

6.5.3 Task Monitor Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Task Monitor Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Task Monitor Window. 6
Register User Menu Registers a Task Monitor Window shortcut.
(U)
Delete (D) Cannot be used with this window.
View (V)
Detailed Mode (M) Displays monitoring in detail.
Window (W)
Help (H)
6-15
Monitoring Tools
6.5.4 Task Monitor Display Modes
6.5.4 Task Monitor Display Modes
Task monitoring can be displayed in either of the following two modes.
Display Mode Details

Standard Displays the motion program's groups and the execution conditions
of the tasks (motion programs) executed in parallel within those
groups. This is the default mode.
Detailed Displays the PFORK command operating conditions and the pro-
gram's execution step numbers in addition to the information dis-
played in the standard display mode.
Standard Display Mode

When the Task Monitor Window is opened, it appears in the standard display mode as
shown in the following illustration.
Task Monitor
PT#・・・・
Task 1 Task 2 Task 3
Group
Group Mode Main Program Program Status Main Program Program Status ・・・
MPMxxx
・・・
Detailed Display Mode

6 To switch from the standard display mode to the detailed display mode, select View (V) and
then Detailed Mode (M) in the Task Manager Menu. To return to the standard display mode,
select Detailed Mode (M) again.
Task Monitor
PT#・・・・
Task 1 Task 2
Group
Group Mode Main Program Program Status Step# Main Program Program Status Step#
MPMxxx
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Process 4
・・・
6.5.5 Task Monitor Configuration
The items displayed by the Task Monitor in both standard and detailed mode are listed in the
6-16
6.5 Task Monitor
following table.

Group Name Displays the group name set in the group definitions.
Group Mode Displays the group execution status. Refer to the Group Mode Mes-
sages, below.
Task n Main Program Displays the number of the motion program running for Task n.
In detailed mode, the process number is displayed below the motion
program number.
Task n Program Status Displays the execution status of the motion program running for
Task n.Refer to the Program Status Messages and Process Status
Message, below.
In detailed mode, the process status for each process executed in par-
allel for PFORK is displayed.
Step # Displays the step number being executed in the program (detailed
mode only).
Group Mode Messages

Group running
Group paused
Group stopped for debugging
Group alarm
Auto mode
Manual mode
Program Status Messages Process Status Messages

Program running
Program paused
Motion function running
Holding
6
Program aborted Aborted
Program stopped for debugging Stopped for debugging
Program alarm Alarm
Program break Break
Program debug mode Returning
Main program duplication Debug mode
Main program number overflow Skip signal latch
6.5.6 Closing Task Monitoring
Close this program by closing the Task Monitor Window.

To close the Task Monitor Window, select File (F) and then Close (C) in the Task Monitor
Menu.
6-17
Monitoring Tools
6.6.1 Outline of Motion Alarm Monitor
6.6 Motion Alarm Monitor
This section describes the Motion Alarm Monitor, which displays detailed information when
alarms occur in the motion system.
The Motion Alarm Monitor will work properly only when PGM automatic generation is enabled in the
Group Definitions. Do not use the Motion Alarm Monitor otherwise.
6.6.1 Outline of Motion Alarm Monitor
This function can be used to check whether or not a motion alarm has occurred at the
Machine Controller using the Motion Alarm Monitor.
Motion Alarm Monitor
Motion program
Error?
6
6.6.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window
Open the Task Monitor Window from the Engineering Manager. Select File (F), Open (O),
Motion Program (M), and then Motion Alarm (T) from the menu.
6-18
Login Information

6.6.3 Motion Alarm Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Motion Alarm Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Motion Alarm Window.
Register User Menu Registers a Motion Alarm Window shortcut.
(U)
Delete (D) Cannot be used with this window.
6
View (V)
Window (W)
Help (H)
6-19
Monitoring Tools
6.6.4 Displaying Motion Alarms
When an alarm occurs, this function displays the name of the group and the program where
the error occurred, a program error message, the physical axis number, and the servo error
code.

Group Name Displays the name of the group where the alarm occurred.
Main Program Displays the program where the alarm occurred.
Program Error If an alarm occurs in the program, a message will be displayed to
indicate that an alarm has occurred.
Physical Axis Displays the number of the physical axis where the error occurred.
Servo Error Code Displays the servo error code.
Refer to the MP900-series Motion Controller User’s Manual:
Design and Maintenance for information on alarm codes.
Error Code Detail When this button is clicked, an Error Code Details Dialog Box is dis-
Button played for the error in the line where the cursor is placed. The Error
Code Details Dialog Box can also be displayed by double-clicking in
the servo error column in a cell when an error code is displayed. No
explanation will be displayed, however, for program errors.
Motion Alarm Example
Motion Alarms
PT#・・・・
6 Group
Group 01
Main Program
Group mode
Program Error Axis
01.01
Servo error
02
01.02 05
Group mode MPM001
MPM002
Error code details
Servo Error Code Details Dialog Box

Servo error codes displayed in the Motion Alarm Window are given in hexadecimal. Errors
are allocated to each bit in the hexadecimal number. The Details Dialog Box shows the ON/
OFF status and the meaning of each bit.
The current status is indicated by the filled circles (z).
6-20
Motion Alarm Code Details ×
Servo Error Bit Details
0 Servo amp abnormal z ON ○ OFF

Positive direct overtravel
1 ○ ON z OFF
2 Negative direct overtravel ○ ON ○ OFF
3 Positive direct soft limit ○ ON ○ OFF
4 Negative direct soft limit ○ ON ○ OFF
5 Servo power supply hasn't been completed ○ ON ○ OFF
6 Locating timeover ○ ON ○ OFF
7 Excessive locate movement quantity ○ ON ○ OFF
8 Filter type change error ○ ON ○ OFF
9 Filter fixed number change error ○ ON ○ OFF
10 Control mode error ○ ON ○ OFF
11 Origin unestablishment ○ ON ○ OFF
12 Origin establish movement ○ ON ○ OFF
13 User fixed number establishment error ○ ON ○ OFF
14 M-LINK Servo same period communicate ○ ON ○ OFF
error
15 M-LINK Servo communicate error ○ ON ○ OFF
16 M-LINKServo command timeout error ○ ON ○ OFF
17 ABS ENC revolution quantity over ○ ON ○ OFF
MECHATROLINK Servo Alarm Code HHHH
OK
Fig 6.2 MP930 MECHATROLINK Servo Module Error Code Details Dialog Box
Motion Alarm Error Code Details ×

Servo Error Bit Details
1 Positive direct overtravel ○ ON ○ OFF

2
3
Negative direct overtravel
Positive direct soft limit
○
○
ON
ON
○
○
OFF
OFF
6
4 Negative direct soft limit ○ ON ○ OFF
6 Locating timeover ○ ON ○ OFF
10 Control mode error ○ ON ○ OFF
11 Origin unestablishment ○ ON ○ OFF
17 ABS ENC revolution quantity over ○ ON ○ OFF
18 PG disconnect error ○ ON ○ OFF
OK
Fig 6.3 MP920 SVA Module Error Code Details Dialog Box
6-21
Monitoring Tools
1 Servo alarm error codes show the motion monitor parameter alarms (ILoo24).
2 MECHATROLINK servo alarm codes are displayed only for the MECHATROLINK Interface Servo
Module.
Motion monitor parameter servo driver alarm codes (IWxx24) are shown.
3 The Servo Error Code Details Dialog Box is not refreshed.

The Motion Alarm Window is refreshed every 0.5 second.
Effective Module Error Bits

Displays in the Details Dialog Box are displayed as shown in the following table. "Yes" indi-
cates the Modules for which the status is displayed.
9200 9200 9200 MP920 MP920 MP920 MP940

Bit Name MP910 MP930
SVA SVB PO01 SVA SVB PO-01 SVA
0 Save amp abnormal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 Positive direct overtravel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Negative direct overtravel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Positive direct soft limit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Negative direct soft limit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5 Servo power supply hasn't Yes Yes Yes Yes
been completed
Servo OFF Yes Yes
6 Locating timeover Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6 7 Excessive locate Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
movement quantity
Excessive speed Yes Yes
8 Filter type change error Yes Yes Yes Yes
9 Filter fixed number change Yes Yes Yes Yes
error
10 Control mode error Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
11 Origin unestablishment Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 Origin establish movement Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 User fixed number Yes Yes Yes Yes
establishment error
14 M-LINK Servo same Yes Yes Yes Yes
period communicate error
15 M-LINK Servo Yes Yes Yes Yes
communicate error
16 M-LINK Servo command Yes Yes Yes Yes
timeout error
17 ABS ENC revolution Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
quantity error
18 PG disconnect error Yes Yes
6-22
9200 9200 9200 MP920 MP920 MP920 MP940

Bit Name MP910 MP930
SVA SVB PO01 SVA SVB PO-01 SVA
MECHATROLINK Servo Yes Yes Yes Yes
Alarm Code Displays
6.6.5 Closing Motion Alarms
Close this program by closing the Motion Alarm Window.

To close the Motion Alarm Window, select File (F) and then Close (C) in the Motion Alarm
Menu.
6-23
7 Ladder Logic Programming
This chapter explains ladder logic programs called drawings or drawing pro-
grams.
7.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3

7.1.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.2 Setting Drawing Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

7.2.1 Outline of Property Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.2.2 Opening Property Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.2.3 Property Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.2.4 Configuration Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.2.7 # Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
7.2.8 Update History - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.2.9 Saving Property Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.3 Creating Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17 7

7.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Logic Programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3.2 Programming Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3.3 Programming Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.3.4 Programming Window Display Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.3.5 Entering Ladder Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.3.6 Editing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31
7.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-37
7.3.8 Disabling Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-44
7.3.9 Displaying Current Values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-46
7.3.10 Creating Comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-48
7.3.11 Saving Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-48
7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-50
7.3.13 Closing Ladder Logic Program Editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-51
7-1
Ladder Logic Programming
7.4 Creating Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52

7.4.1 Outline of Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52
7.4.2 Table Program Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52
7.4.3 Table Program Window Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-53
7.4.4 Switching Input Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-54
7.4.5 Inputting # Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-55
7.4.6 Inputting M Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-56
7.4.7 Inputting I/O Conversion Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-56
7.4.8 Inputting Interlock Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-58
7.4.9 Inputting Component Assembly Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-60
7.4.10 Inputting Data in C Constant Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-62
7.4.11 Editing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-68
7.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-72
7.4.13 Printing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-73
7.5 Creating Data Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-74

7.5.1 Outline of Data Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-74
7.5.2 Table Data List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-75
7.5.3 Table Data List Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-77
7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-77
7.5.5 Opening Column Attributes Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-79
7.5.6 Column Attributes Window Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-80
7.5.7 Setting Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-80
7.5.8 Editing Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-81
7.5.9 Saving Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-83
7.5.10 Opening Table Data Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7.5.11 Table Data Window Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7.5.12 Setting Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-84
7 7.5.13 Editing Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-85
7.5.14 Saving and Closing Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-86
7.6 Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-87

7.6.1 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-87
7.6.2 Creating Tuning Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-92
7.6.3 Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-97
7.6.4 Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-102
7.6.5 Comment Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-104
7.6.6 Replacing Register Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-106
7-2
7.1 Ladder Programming System
7.1 Ladder Programming System
This section provides a diagram showing the relationships between the various tools provided to
create ladder programs for MP900-series Machine Controllers, including supplemental com-
mands, program editing tools, and other tools.
Refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-
C887-1.2C) for details on specific ladder program instructions and instruction specifications.
7.1.1 Ladder Programming System
The following diagram shows the relationships between the supplemental commands, pro-
gram editing tools, and other tools available for ladder programming.
7-3
7.1.1 Ladder Programming System
Symbol/register
input mode
Drawings/Func- Parent
diagram
Automatically tions
registered Open Main
program
Configuration
definitions
Table data instruc- Shared

tions
Symbol Table data
definitions TBLxxx definitions
QTBLxx
Comment
list
Properties
Table program
# register list execution
instructions
MCTBL Constant tables
XCALL xxxx (M resister)
Update
history
I/O conversion
IOTBL tables
I/O
definitions ・・・
(Functions only) Interlock

Ladder ILKTBL tables
diagrams
Table programs
Component
ASMTBL assembly tables
SFC action box ・・・

SFC time chart
Not
shared
# constant Constant tables
SFC flowchart tables (# resister)
Refer to ladder pro-

gramming manual. Shared
C constant C constant
tables tables
Disable coil lists

Register lists Registers
7 Cross-references
I，Q，M，D
Tuning panels Comment lists
Register number
conversion
Tools
Based on the above diagram, the following items are described in this chapter.
• Setting properties
• Creating parent and main programs
• Creating table programs
• Creating tuning panels
• Creating C registers
• Creating table data
• Tools
7-4
7.2 Setting Drawing Properties
This section describes the Property Windows used to manage the configuration information for
individual ladder programs.
7.2.1 Outline of Property Window
Properties are attributes set for each ladder program or function program. The following
information can be set.
• Configuration definitions
• I/O definitions (functions only)
• Symbol definitions
• # register definitions
• Revision histories
There are default settings for properties so they do not always have to be set. Settings are
required, however, for ladder logic programs that use many registers.
Check what attributes have been set before using ladder logic programs.
7.2.2 Opening Property Windows
Use one of the following two procedures to open a Property Window.

Select File (F), Open (O), Drawing (P), and then Properties (R) on the programming
menus.
If the program is not open, an Open DWG Setting Window will be displayed. Specify DWG
for a main ladder program or FUNC for a ladder function program, input the drawing name, 7
and click the OK Button. The Open DWG Setting Window will not be displayed if the pro-
gram is open.
The Property Window for the program will be opened.
7-5
7.2.2 Opening Property Windows
If the properties are for a ladder function program, the following tabs will be displayed.

Select the ladder or function program for which the Property Window is to be opened from
the tree area, and then select File (F), Open (O), and DWR Property (R).
You can also point at the ladder or function program for which the Property Window is to be
opened in the tree area, click the right mouse button, and then select the command from the
pop-up menu.
7
7-6
Tab Pages
There are different tab pages for drawing program and function program Property Windows.
Tab Pages for Main Program Property Windows

DWG Properties Defines configuration information for drawing programs.
Symbol Definition Defines drawing program symbols.
# Register List Sets # registers for drawing programs.
Update History Displays Update History for drawing programs.
Tab Pages for Function Program Property Windows

FUNC Configuration Defines configuration information for function programs.
I/O Definition Defines function program I/O.
Symbol Definition Defines function program symbols.
# Register List Sets # registers for function programs.
Update History Displays Update History for function programs.
INFO 1 Select View (V) and then Next Page (N) from the programming menus to move through the tab pages
in order, starting with the DWG Configuration or FUNC Configuration Tab Page on the left.
2 Select View (V) and then Back Page (B) to move through the tab pages in reverse order.
7.2.3 Property Window Menus

7
The menus displayed in Property Windows are the same as those displayed in the ladder pro-
gram windows. Refer to 7.3.3 Programming Window Menus.
7.2.4 Configuration Definition Tab Page
Refer to the window shown in 7.2.3 Property Window Menus.

DWG Rank Enter one character for the rank of the program. The rank is deter-
mined by the user.
Read/Write Privilege Enter the reading and writing privileges for the program. None of the
privilege data can be set to a higher value than the current user's
privileges.
Number of D Registers When D registers are to be used by the programs, enter the number
of words for the D registers. D registers cannot be accessed by the
programs if this number is set to 0.
7-7
7.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page

Number of # Registers When # registers are to be used by the programs, enter the number of
words for the # registers. # registers cannot be accessed by the pro-
grams if this number is set to 0.
Number of SFC1 When using SFC within the program, enter the number of output bits
Output Bits for each SFC step in 16-bit units (maximum 128 bits.) If 0 is entered,
the SFC output bit time chart cannot be displayed, but there is no
effect on the operation of the SFC.
DWG Title Enter a program title of up to 48 characters.
• The number of D and # registers will differ depending on the type of Machine Control-
ler.
• There are some Machine Controller models that will not support the use of SFC pro-
grams. Refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and
Maintenance.
• The D register numbers that can be used in the program when 10 is input as the number
of D registers are shown in the following table.
Type Register Number Range

Integers DW00000 to DW00009
Double-length DL00000 to DL00008
integers
Real numbers DF00000 to DF00008
Bits DB000000 to DB000009F
The number of words allocated to D and # registers is used for reserving memory. Therefore, when
subscripted registers are used during programming, the programs must be created such that they do not
exceed the memory area set within the program. An operating error will occur when data is read from
or written to a D or # register beyond the set memory area.
7
7.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page
This tab page is used only for function programs. Click the I/O Definition Tab in the Prop-
erty Window.
1 SFC
SFC is the abbreviation for Sequential Function Chart, which is a programming language.
7-8

Number of Inputs Enter a number between 1 and 16 for the number of function input
data items.
Number of Address Enter 1 for address input and 0 for no address input.
Inputs
Number of Outputs Enter a number between 1 and 16 for the number of function output
data items.
Input Type Select the type of function input data. Refer to the Data Types table
after this table.
Input Comment Enter a function input data comment of up to 8 characters.
Address Comment Enter a function address input data comment of up to 8 characters.
Output Comment Enter a function output data comment of up to 8 characters.
Output Type Select the function output data type.
Table 7.1 Data Types
Selected Item Meaning

B-VAL Bits
I-VAL Integers
I-REG
L-VAL Double-length integers
L-REG
F-VAL Real numbers
F-REG
7.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page
Click the Symbol Definition Tab in the Property Window.
Setting Symbol Definition Data 7

Click the Symbol Definition Tab in the Property Window.

Symbol Name Enter a symbol name of up to 8 characters.
No. of Register Enter the number of the register to which to allocated the symbol.
Size Enter the number of data items to be allocated to the symbol.
Range Enter the symbol class.
Initial This data is not effective in the current version.
7-9
1. Symbol Name
Numbers, dashes, and underscores cannot be used as the first character of symbol
names. Symbols beginning with $ have been defined in or automatically allocated by
the CP-717. Such symbols are called automatic symbols and are displayed as follows:
• $AUTOxxx (xxx is any number starting with 001.)
Drawing and function programs cannot be saved if they contain automatic symbols.
Change automatic symbols to another symbol name.
2. No. of Register
By defining a symbol for a register number, that number does not have to be entered
when entering operands in the program. Enter the symbol only, and the corresponding
register number will be displayed automatically.
3. Size
The default setting is 1. Data that is entered here is displayed in hexadecimal, with an H
preceding the hexadecimal value.
This data is used when symbols are automatically allocated for register numbers. For
example, if symbols are automatically allocated to registers starting from MW00001
and the data size is 1, the register number for the second symbol will be MW00002. The
symbols will be allocated in order from MW00001 with a size of 1 word. If symbols are
automatically allocated with size of 2, the symbols will be allocated from MW00001
and each will have be two words in size. The register number for the second symbol will
be MW00003.
Refer to Automatic Register Number Allocation for Symbols later in this section.
4. Range
• AUTO:Shows that the register number has an automatically allocated symbol. This
symbol range will be displayed when the symbol has been allocated by the
CP-717.
7 • MTBL:Shows that the symbol is for the host link. Depending on the host link func-
tions, the host link can be executed and the same definition data can be set for
each scan type.
• USER:Shows that the symbol has been defined by the user. This symbol range will
appear when the register number has been allocated by the user.
INFO The maximum number of symbols that can be defined differs depending on the type of Machine Con-
troller.
Editing Symbols
Symbols can be edited in rows units.
Deleting Symbols
When a symbol name has been altered in the program window, the original symbol name is
7-10
not automatically deleted. These superseded symbol names should be deleted by the user,
but they cannot be deleted from the program window.
The procedure to delete symbol names is given below.
1. Move the cursor to the symbol name to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E) and DEL (D) from the programming menus.
The row selected in step 1. will be deleted.
Alphabetizing Symbols
The following procedure can be used to display symbols in alphabetical order.
• Select View (V) and then Sort (S) from the programming menus.
The symbol names will be displayed in alphabetical order.
Automatic Register Number Allocation for Symbols

All symbols in the AUTO range will be automatically allocated to register numbers starting
with any number.
If a symbol name is entered that has not been allocated to a register number in the program
window, meaning the symbol has not been defined, open the Symbol Definition Tab Page to
display the symbols in a table like the one shown below.
No. Symbol Name No. of Register Size Range Initial ▲

01 DATA1 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
02 DATA2 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
03 DATA3 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
04 ▼
Normally, symbols would be automatically allocated when the Range column shows AUTO.
If, however, a register number has already been set in the No. of Register column, either by 7
previous automatic allocation or manual input of register numbers, symbols will not be allo-
cated automatically for those register numbers even if the Range column shows AUTO.
Automatic D and M Register Number Allocation

Symbols can be automatically allocated to D and M registers starting from a specified num-
ber. Use the following procedure to automatically allocate D and M registers.
1. Enter the symbol definition data to allocate as shown below.
2. Select Data (D), Auto Number (A), and then AUTO (A) from the programming menus.
3. The Automatic Symbol Allocation (D, M) Window will be displayed. Input the leading
register numbers from which to allocate local registers (D) and global registers (M), and
then click the Set Button.
The register numbers will be automatically allocated and displayed.
In this example, DATA1 is set to integer D register data with a data size of 1, DATA2 is
set to real number M register data with a data size of 1, and DATA3 is set to integer M
7-11
register data with a data size of 1. Therefore, the register numbers will be DW00000,
MF00002, and MW00001 respectively, if the register numbers are automatically allo-
cated by setting the first D register number to 0 and the leading M register number to 1.
No. Symbol Name No. of Register Size Range

01 DATA1 DW00000 H0001 AUTO ▼
02 DATA2 MF00002 H0001 AUTO ▼
03 DATA3 MW00001 H0001 AUTO ▼
04 ▼
INFO 1 In step 1., the register type (DW, MW, etc.) is also entered in the No. of Register column. Nothing
needs to be entered in the No. of Register column if operands have been specified in symbol input
mode in the program window. In the Size column, enter a decimal value corresponding to the size of
the register type (in word units for word type, and bit units for bit type). Enter AUTO in the Range col-
umn.
2 If no data is entered in the No. of Register column, and automatic register number allocation is exe-
cuted, the result will be the same as if DW was entered. Automatic register number allocation is exe-
cuted in the order of bit, integer, double-length integer, and real number data.
Automatic Number Allocation to All Registers

The procedure to automatically allocate symbols to S, I, O, M, D, C, and # register numbers
starting from any number is outlined below.
1. Enter the symbol definition data for which register numbers are to be automatically allo-
cated. Select "AUTO" as the range.
2. Select Data (D), Auto Number (A), and then AUTO (A) from the programming menus.
3. The Automatic Symbol Assignment (AUTO) Window will be displayed. Enter the lead-
7 ing register number, and click the Set Button.
The register numbers will be automatically allocated and displayed.
For example, if the data size settings are two words for DATA1, one word for DATA3,
and one word for DATA4, DATA1 will take two words and the register numbers will be
MW00010, MW00012, and MW00013 respectively.
No. Symbol Name No. of Register Size Range

01 DATA1 MF00010 H0002 AUTO ▼
02 DATA2 MF H0001 AUTO ▼
03 DATA3 MW00012 H0001 AUTO ▼
04 DATA4 MW00013 H0001 AUTO ▼
05 ▼
7-12
INFO In step 1., the register type is also entered in the No. of Register column. The register number does not,
therefore, need to be entered when entering operands as symbols in the program window. In the Size
column, enter a decimal value corresponding to the register type (in word units for word type, and bit
units for bit type). Enter AUTO in the Range column.
Upward Linking of Symbols

Symbols can be defined so that symbol names defined in drawings with different hierarchies
can be used to reference the same register number. This is called symbol linking.
Normally, a symbol that is defined for a drawing or function will be unique to that drawing
or function program, and cannot be referenced from other drawings or functions. By using
the upward linking function for symbols, a symbol defined in a parent drawing can also be
referenced by a child drawing, provided the drawing is a process drawing of the same type.
Parent Child Grandchild
HO1 HO1.01
HO1.02 HO1.02.01
The procedure to link symbols is outlined below.

1. Enter the symbol definition data to be linked as shown below. Set "MTBL" as the range.
2. Select Data (D) and then Symbol Link (L) from the programming menus.
Definition data in the same scan as the parent drawing is searched according to the sym-
bol, and the data displayed.
INFO Do not enter any data in the No. of Register and Size columns. Enter "MTBL" in the Range column. 7
7.2.7 # Register Lists
This section explains how to make and alter # register settings.
Making # Register Settings

Click the # Register List Tab in the Property Window to display the window shown below.
The # register settings are made in this window. This operation cannot be executed if the
register size is set to 0 on the DWG Properties Tab Page.
7-13
7.2.7 # Register Lists

No. of REG Displays the # register numbers. The number of registers is declared
in the Configuration Definition Tab Page.
Value Enter the # register values.
Changing the Base of # Register Values

The display mode, or base, of the register values can be changed. Depending on the display
mode, # registers can be changed to #W, #L, #F, etc.
Decimal Integer Display

Select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then DEC (D) from the programming menus to display
the register values in decimal.
Hexadecimal Integer Display

When in decimal integer display mode, select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then HEX (H) in
the Property Window to display the register values in hexadecimal.
7 Real Number Display

Select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then FLOAT (F) from the programming menus to dis-
play the register values as real numbers.
Binary Integer Display

Select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then BIN (B) from the programming menus to display
the register values as binary numbers.
Decimal Double-length Integer Display

Select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then LONG (L) from the programming menus to display
the register numbers as double-length integers.
ASCII Display
Select Data (D), Cardinal (C), and then ASCII (A) from the programming menus to change
7-14
the register numbers to ASCII characters.
INFO Undefined data will be displayed if register values that cannot be displayed as ASCII characters are set
to ASCII display mode.
Changing # Register Values

Input the numbers permitted by the base of the register value. Negative values can be
entered for decimal display.
The procedure to change # register values is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the register value to be changed.
2. Enter the new value.
Clearing # Register Values

The procedure to clean consecutive registers to a user-defined value is outlined below.
1. Select Data (D) and then Set (S) from the programming menus.
2. The Register Data Clear Window will be displayed. Enter the leading register number,
number of registers to be cleared, and the replacement data, and click the Set Button.
The data will be initialized.
7.2.8 Update History
This section explains how to display and delete Update History data.
Displaying Update History

Click the Update History Tab in the Property Window to display the following window. 7
Up to 10 Update History records can be created for each drawing in the drawing or function
programs. The Update History is displayed in chronological order.
7-15
7.2.9 Saving Property Information

Date Displays the date the drawing or function program was saved.
Time Displays the time the drawing or function program was saved.
User Name Displays the name of the user that saved the drawing or function pro-
gram.
Deleting Update History

There are two methods for deleting the Update History: All data for a particular drawing or
function program can be deleted or individual records in the Update History can be deleted.
Deleting All Update History Records

Use the following procedure to delete all of the update history records currently displayed.
1. Select Edit (E) and then ALLDEL (Z) from the programming menus to delete all
Update History data currently being displayed.
2. All Update History data will be deleted.
Deleting Individual Update History Records

Use the following procedure to delete one update history record.
1. Move the cursor to the Update History record to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then DEL (D) from the programming menus.
3. The Update History record selected in step 1. will be deleted.
7.2.9 Saving Property Information
7 Property information must be saved at the same time as the drawing or function program is
saved. Execute Save (S) from the drawing number or function symbol program window for
which the property settings were made
The procedure to save property information is outlined below.
1. Select Window (W) from the programming menus and select the program window
where the property settings were made.
2. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the programming menus.
INFO If the save operation fails, an error message will be displayed. Referring to Appendix A Error Mes-
sages, remove the cause of the error and then retry the save operation.
7-16
7.3 Creating Ladder Logic Programs
This section explains how to create drawing (DWG) and function ladder logic programs (main
programs).
• Outline of creating ladder programs

• Opening the programming window
• Programming window menus
• Programming window display modes
• Input ladder instructions
• Editing programs
• Creating branching circuits
• Setting disable coils
• Jumps
• Displaying current values
• Creating comments
• Saving ladder programs
• Printing ladder programs
• Exiting editing of ladder programs
7.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Logic Programs
The CP-717 includes a Ladder Logic Program Editor for inputting ladder logic programs.
The Ladder Logic Program Editor is automatically opened when a new or existing program
is opened, enabling ladder logic programs to be edited immediately.
7.3.2 Programming Window

7
Opening the Programming Window
The Programming Window can be opened from the File Manager or Engineering Manager.
Opening New Drawings from the File Manager

1. Select File (F) and then Make New DWG (N) on the File Manager Menu.
2. The Open DWG Setting Window will be opened. Enter the name and type of drawing in
the dialog box and click the OK Button.
An empty Programming Window will be displayed.
7-17
7.3.2 Programming Window
Opening Existing Drawings from the File Manager

1. Click the desired drawing number in the Directory Tree.
2. Select File (F), Open (O), and then Main Program (L) on the File Manager Menu.
The existing program will be displayed and editing will be enabled.
Opening New/Existing Drawings from the Engineering Manager

1. Select File (F), Open (O), Drawing (R), and then Open New DWG (O) from the pro-
gramming menus.
2. The Open DWG Setting Window will be displayed. Enter the name and type of drawing
in the dialog box and click the OK Button.
7-18
INFO 1 In the dialog box, set the Type Box to DWG to open the main drawing program, and set to FUNC to
open the main function program.
2 Up to 5 drawing number or function symbol programs can be open at the same time in the Program-
ming Window.
Programming Window Configuration
Drawing name Ladder.....

PT# login information
1 0000
1 0001
Ladder program Comments
2 000n
・・・・・・・・・

Level Step No.
・・・・・・・・・
Starter line D registers # registers Total steps Input mode

Level Displays the nesting level of each program.
Step No. Displays the step number of the instruction.
Program For drawings, the program executed is displayed. For user functions,
the function's internal program is displayed.
The current value of each operand is also displayed while the pro-
gram is being executed.
Comments Comments for the program being executed will be displayed. Refer
to 7.3.10 Creating Comments for information on how to create com-
ments.
7
D registers Display the number of D registers set in the DWG properties.
# registers Display the number of # registers set in the DWG properties.
Total No. of Steps Displays the total number of steps for the program.
Operand Input Mode Displays the operand input mode.
ADR: Register Input Mode
SYM: Symbol Input Mode
S-A: Symbol/Register Input Mode
7-19
7.3.3 Programming Window Menus
7.3.3 Programming Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu command in the Programming Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Programming Window.
Remake Comment (R) Cannot be used with MP920/MP930 Machine
Controllers.
Remake Cross Info. (X) Refreshes cross-reference information.
Regist User Menu (U) Registers shortcuts for the Programming Win-
dow.
Save (S) Saves programs.
Page Setting (M) Sets the printer paper margins.
Print Program (P) Prints the main program.
Exit (X) Closes the Engineering Manger.
Edit (E)
Cut (X) Cuts an instruction and places it on the clip-
board.
Copy (C) Copies an instruction to the clipboard.
Paste (V) Pastes the contents of the clipboard.
INS (I) Inserts an instruction.
DEL (D) Deletes an instruction.
UNDELETE (Z) Restores deleted data.
COPYA (Y) Copies the ladder logic program file.
View (V)
7 Input Mode (M)
Address (O) Sets to operand input mode.
Symbol (S) Sets to symbol input mode.
Address + Symbol (D) Sets to operand and symbol input mode.
Normal (N) Switches to normal display mode.
Large (L) Switches to large display mode.
Symbol (Y)
Drawing (R) Switches to program symbol display mode.
Comment (C) Switches to comment symbol display mode.
Comment Bar (B) Displays the Comment Bar.
Function Bar (F) Displays the Function Bar.
7-20

Command (C)
RELAY (R) Select instructions.
MATH (A) Refer to MP900 Series Machine Controller
User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-
LOGIC (L) C887-1.2) for details on instructions.
CONTROL (C)
FUNCTION (F)
MOVE (M)
DDC (D)
TABLE (T)
MOTION (M)
SFC (S)
Debug (G)
SYNC (S) Synchronously refreshes current values.
HOLD (H) Pauses refreshing current values.
DIS-ON (N) Disables the COIL instruction and turns it ON.
DIS-OFF (F) Disables the COIL instruction and turns it OFF.
ENABLE (E) Releases the COIL instruction from disable sta-
tus.
REFER (R) Opens the program window being called
BACK (B) Displays the program opened using the REFER
command.
Cursor (S)
Jump to Line (L) Moves the cursor to the desired step number.
Window (W)
Arrange Icons (A) Lines up icons. 7
Help (H)
About Application (PrgBld) Displays version information for the CP-717.
(A)
7.3.4 Programming Window Display Mode
The section describes the display modes that are available for the Ladder Editor in the Pro-
gramming Window. The display can be changed as required during programming.
7-21
7.3.5 Entering Ladder Instructions
LADDER Program
symbols
Symbol
Normal display
Comment mode
Display symbols
mode
Large
Ladder program Comments
Display/ don’t Function

display display
mode
Switching Program Display Modes

There are two program display modes: Normal, for displaying characters at normal size and
Large, for displaying characters at a larger size.
Program Display Mode Switching Procedure

Normal (default) Select View (V) and then Normal (N).
Large Select View (V) and then Large (L).
Switching Symbol Display Modes

There are two symbol display modes in the Programming Window: Comment Symbol Dis-
play Mode, which displays symbols created using the Create Comment operation and Pro-
gram Symbol Display Mode, which displays symbols created by symbol definitions. When
the Programming Window is first opened, the display mode is Comment Symbol.
7
Program Display Mode Switching Procedure
Program Symbol Click View (V), Symbol (Y), and then Drawing (R).
Comment Symbol Click View (V), Symbol (Y), and then Comment (C).
Switching Function Bar Display Modes

Pressing function keys when the function bar is displayed will execute the same functions as
selecting instructions from programming menus.
Select View (V) and then Function Bar (F) from the programming menus to switch ON and
OFF the function bar display. Function keys will not operate if the function bar is not dis-
played.
This section explains how to input and edit ladder instructions and operands.
7-22
• Structure of ladder instructions

• Ladder instruction input methods
• Operand input methods
• Inputting instructions
Structure of Ladder Instructions

Basically, ladder instructions consist of three elements: A symbol, a numeric processing
instruction or register number, and a bit processing instruction or current value.
Basic Structure of Ladder Instruction
Symbol Input/Not displayed
Register number or
numeric processing Input/Not displayed
instruction
Current value or bit
processing instruction Input/Not displayed
For current values expressed as bit processing instructions, the text will be displayed in bold
if the condition of the bit processing instruction is met and will be displayed in normal text is
the condition is not met.
The register value is displayed for numeric processing instructions. The current value is dis-
played only in Online Mode.
Bit processing Numeric processing

instruction instruction
LIMIT-SW Symbol Symbol IN-DATA
MB00101 Register No. Register No. MW00100
Bit instruction Current value 01000
Displayed in bold text if condi-

tion is met in Online Mode. 7
Inputting Ladder Instructions
There are three methods that can be used to input ladder instructions. Use the methods as
required to facilitate inputting.
Refer to MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-
C887-1.2C) for details on instructions. Refer to the list of instructions that can be entered
located in Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions.
Using Mnemonics
Instructions can be selected easily from the keyboard by inputting mnemonics and pressing
the Enter Key. These mnemonics eliminate the need to search for the instruction on pull-
down menus or the function bar. Refer to Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions
for lists of mnemonics.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (-| |-) is described
7-23
below.
1. Enter the mnemonic for N.O. CONTACT (][).
2. Press the Enter Key. The N.O. CONTACT instruction will be input.
Selecting Instructions from the Programming Menus

Display the Command Pull-down Menu, and select the instruction.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (-| |-) is described
below.
• Select Command (C), RELAY (R), and then N.O. Contact (A) from the programming
menus. The symbol will be input.
Selecting Instructions from the Function Bar

Instructions displayed on the function bar can be selected using function keys. The function
bar display must be activated first. Refer to Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions
for lists of function bar commands.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (–| |–) is described
below.
1. Press the F11 Key (F-SEL) on the function bar until the N.O. CONTACT instruction
(-| |-) is displayed.
2. Press the F1 Key to select (-| |-) on the function bar. The N.O. CONTACT instruction
will be displayed.
Operand1 Input Methods

There are four methods for inputting operands:
• Using register numbers
7 • Using symbols
• Using symbols and register numbers
• Using constants
Changing Input Modes

The input mode can be changed using one of the procedures outlined on the table below.
Input Mode Procedure Status

Register Click View (V), Input Mode (M), and then Address (O) ADR
Symbol Click View (V), Input Mode (M), and then Symbol (S) SYM
Address + Symbol Click View (V), Input Mode (M), and then Address + Symbol (D) S-A
1 Operand
An operand is information required by the instruction, such as symbols, register numbers, and con-
stants.
7-24
Register Input Mode is the default when the program window is first displayed.
Register Number Input Mode

Only register numbers can be entered in Register Number Input Mode. The cursor will not
move to the input position for symbols.
1. Change to the Register Input Mode (ADR). Select the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for register numbers. Enter the register num-
ber.
INFO If the register number entered in step 2. has a symbol defined for it in the comment bar or comment list,
that symbol will also be displayed, assuming comment and symbol display modes have been set.
Symbol Input Mode

Only symbols can be entered in Symbol Input Mode. The cursor will not move to the input
position for register numbers.
1. Enter the Symbol Input Mode (SYM) and select the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for symbols. Enter the symbol.
INFO 1 If the symbol input at step 2. is defined on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in the Property Window,
the register number corresponding to that symbol will also be displayed.
2 Refer to Defining Symbols to define symbols. Symbols must be defined before they can be entered.
Input Using Symbols and Register Numbers

Both a symbol and register number can be entered in Symbol + Register Input Mode using 7
the following procedure. Symbols will be defined automatically and do not need to defined
on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in the Property Window.
1. Enter the Symbol + Register Input Mode (S-A) and select the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for symbols. Enter the symbol.
3. The cursor will then appear at the input position for register numbers. Enter the register
number.
Input Using Constants

The procedure to input using constants is outlined below.
1. Enter the Operand Input Mode (ADR) and select the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for constants. Enter the constant. Constants
can be decimal (integer, double-length integer, or real number) or hexadecimal (integer
or double-length integer).
7-25
INFO Input Format for Constants

The following table shows the input format for constants.
Window Input
Input Value Explanation
Display String
Decimal Integer 00100 100 Use numerals between 0 and 9.
Place a minus sign (-) in front of
negative values.
Double- 0000010000 10000L Use numerals between 0 and 9 and
length enter L at the end of the value.
Integer Place a minus sign (-) in front of
negative values.
If the input value is greater than
32,767 or less than -32,768, the
value will become a double-length
integer automatically, even with-
out an L at the end of the value.
Real 100.1E 100.1E Use numerals between 0 and 9 and
Number place an E at the end of the value.
Place a minus sign (-) in front of
negative values.
If the input value includes a dot (.),
the value will become a real num-
ber automatically, even without an
E at the end of the value.
Hexadecimal Integer H32FF H32FF Place an H at the beginning of the
value, and use 0 to 9 and A to F.
Double- H000032FF H32FFL Place an H at the beginning of the
length value, and use 0 to 9 and A to F.
Integer Place an L at the end of the value.
If the input value is longer than 4
7 digits, the value will become a dou-
ble-length integer automatically,
even without L at the end of the
value.
Inputting Instructions
Inputting instructions can be divided into several patterns. These will be described using the
following instructions.
• Math, logic, and comparison instructions
• Conditional instructions
• Functions
• MOVW, XCHG, etc.
• SEE
• END
• Inline comments
7-26
Inputting Math, Logic, and Comparison Instructions

The cursor normally moves to the right when the Enter Key is pressed after inputting the
math, logic, or comparison operation. The cursor will move to the beginning of the next line
when window size restrictions do not allow further instruction input to the right or after the
STORE instruction appears.
As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.
1 0000 |- MW01000 N Æ MW02000
1. Select the INTEGER ENTRY (|-) instruction.
2. Enter the register number, MW01000.
3. Select the STORE ( ⇒ ) instruction.
4. Enter the register number, MW02000.
Inputting Conditional Instructions

There are no special instructions provided for conditional instructions. Select the [] instruc-
tion to show that an instruction is conditional. The instruction inside the square brackets [] in
the following instruction will be executed if the condition, bit register IB00010, is met. The
bit status is checked only to determine whether the condition is met.
IB00010
1 0000
1 0001 [├ MW00010 ] [⇒ MW02000 ]
1. Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction and the register number, IB00010. This instruc-
tion will form the condition.
2. Select the INTEGER ENTRY (|-) instruction. 7
3. Select the CONDITIONAL ([ ])instruction and enter the register number, MW00010.
4. Enter the STORE instruction in the same way as in steps 2. and 3.
Inputting Functions
There are two types of functions: System functions (functions created by the system) and
user functions (functions created by the user). The input method is the same for both types of
functions. User functions need to be defined before they can be entered.
Input functions in the following order: Create the function box, the inputs, the addresses, and
then the outputs.
7-27
1 0000 FUNC-01
IN-1 OUT-1 MB000002

1 0001 MB000001
FIN FOUT
IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 [├ MW00010 ] FIN FOUT ⇒ MW00011
1 0005 　 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3 MW00021

FIN FOUT
ADDRESS
1 0006
MA01000
1. Creating the Function Box

• Select the FSTART instruction and enter the function name, FUNC-01.
The function box will be displayed.
Function Box
Function name
Inputs Outputs
Addresses
Next, create the function input section, address input section, and output section as
described below.
2. Entering the Inputs
The following example is for inputting bits (defined using B-VAL).
a) Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction and the bit register number MB000001.
b) Input the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the N.O. CONTACT
7 instruction will be connected.
1 0000 FUNC-01
IN-1 OUT-1
1 0001 MB000001 FIN
IN-2 OUT-2
Create the input section for integer data (defined using I-VAL), double-length integer
data (defined using L-VAL), or real number data (defined using F-VAL) as follows:
The following example is for integer data.
c) Enter the INTEGER ENTRY instruction and the register address, MW00010.
d) Input the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the INTEGER ENTRY
instruction will be connected.
IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 ├ MW00010 FIN
F
7-28
Create the input section for integer data (defined using I-REG), double-length integer
data (defined using L-REG), or real number data (defined using F-REG) as follows:
The following example is for an integer register.
e) Select the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the register number (or
constant) will be connected.
1 0005 IN-3 OUT-3

FIN
f) Enter the register number or constant.
1 0005 　 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3

FIN
3. Address Section
The following example shows how to input addresses,
a) Select the FIN instruction.
b) Enter the register number, MA01000.
ADDRESS
1 0006
MA01000
4. Entering Outputs
Create the output section for bit data (defined using B-VAL) as follows:
a) Select the FOUT instruction.
b) Enter the COIL instruction and the register number MB000002. The function output
parameters and the COIL instruction will be connected.
IN-1 OUT-1 MB000002

1 0001 MB000001
FIN FOUT
7
Create the output section for integer data (defined using I-VAL), double-length integer
data (defined using L-VAL), or real number data (defined using F-VAL) as follows:
c) Select the FOUT instruction.
d) Enter the STORE instruction and the register number, MW00011. The function out-
put parameters and the STORE instruction will be connected.
IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 [├ MW00010 ] FIN FOUT ⇒ MW00011
Create the output section for integer data (defined using I-REG), double-length integer
data (defined using L-REG), or real number data (defined using F-REG) as follows:
e) Select the FOUT instruction.
f) Enter the register number, MW00021.
7-29
1 0005 　 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3 MW00021

FIN FOUT
Inputting MOVW, XCHG and Other Instructions

MOVW, XCHG and similar instructions require two or more operands. When the instruction
is entered, the cursor moves to the input position for the first operand. Enter the required
operands to complete the instructions.
1 0002 MOVW MW00020 ÆMW00120 W=00010
1. Select the MOVW instruction. The cursor will move to the input position for the first
operand. The MOVW instruction will be moved to the next line and displayed at the
beginning of the next line.
2. Enter the first operand, MW00020 and press the Enter Key.
3. Enter the second operand, MW00120 and press the Enter Key.
4. Enter the third operand, 00010 and press the Enter Key.
Inputting SEE Instructions

Input the SEE instruction as shown below.
1 0002 SEE H01.01
1. Select the SEE instruction. The cursor will move to the input position for the drawing
number.
2. Enter the drawing number, H01.01.
7 Inputting the END Instruction

The END instruction is placed at the end of the IF, WHILE, and FOR statements, and at the
end of drawing and function programs. The END instruction will be changed to IEND,
WEND, or FEND depending on the statement when it is entered. For drawing and function
programs, the END statement will be changed to DEND when entered.
1 0000 |- 00000 ÆJ
1 0002 Æ MW02000
1 0003 WHILE
2 0004 |- J <00100
2 0006 ON
2 0007 |- MW00200 +MW00100j Æ MW02000
2 0010 |- J +00001 ÆJ
1 0013 WEND
1. Enter the counter (J), the integer math instruction to clear the work register (MW02000)
7-30
to zero, and the STORE instruction.

2. Select the WHILE instruction.
3. Enter the WHILE statement (steps 4 to 10 in the above diagram).
4. Enter the END instruction. The type of END instruction will be determined automati-
cally and the appropriate END instruction will be displayed. In this case, WEND will be
input.
Inputting Inline Comments

Comments can be entered at any position in main programs and user function programs.
Inline comments do not affect the program execution at all.
The procedure to input inline comments is outlined below.
1. Select the COMMENT instruction.
2. Enter the comment, "MW01000 is motor rpms."
3. Enter double quotation marks (") at the end of the comment.
1 0000 "MW01000 is motor rpms"
INFO Up to 70 characters per line can be entered for the inline comment, with a maximum of 180 characters
in total if carriage returns are used. Depending on the number of carriage returns, however, the maxi-
mum number of characters possible in the character string may be reduced.
7.3.6 Editing Programs
Instructions can be edited. If the user starts to edit programs while online, the current value
will not be refreshed until the edited program is saved normally.
• Insert
• Delete
7
• Undelete
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Change operand
• Jump to step number
• Opening Programming Window for SEE and FSTART instructions
• Retracing display windows: Back
Programs cannot be edited under the following circumstances:

• When the cursor is in a blank position other than at an instruction or operand.
• During the execution of other edit operations.
7-31
Inserting
The procedure to insert instructions into a string of instructions is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then INS (I) from the programming menus. "INS" will appear at the
bottom of the screen to indicate that the insert operation is in progress, space to insert
instructions will be provided, and the rest of the problem below the insertion area will
temporarily not be displayed.
SGL01
MB000020
1 0000 MB000202
Insertion area
3. Enter the instruction. Further instructions can be entered until step 4. is performed.
4. Select Edit (E) and then INS (I) from the programming menus.
The instruction entered in step 3. will be inserted and the portion of the program below
the insertion point will be displayed correctly again.
Deleting
The procedure to delete a block of instructions is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to beginning of the block of instructions to be deleted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then DEL (D) from the programming menus. "DEL" will appear at
the bottom of the screen to indicate that the delete operation is in progress.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the block of instructions to be deleted. The section to be
deleted will be displayed in reversed color.
7 1 0002 IB00000 OB00000
SGL02
1 0004 MB004900 MB006801
4. Select Edit (E) and then DEL (D) from the programming menus.
The block of instructions specified in steps 1. and 3. will be deleted.
INFO Cancelling Delete Operation

Press the ESC Key to cancel the delete operation without deleting any instructions.
Deleting One Instruction in a Relay Circuit

• The power line may be corrected as shown in the diagram below if one instruction in a
relay circuit is deleted, depending on the connection status of the circuit where the
instruction was deleted.
7-32
1 0000 MB001000 MB001001 1 0000 MB001000
1 0002 MB001002 1 0001 M

MB001002
• Circuits will be connected after an instruction is deleted if they are connected directly to
the deleted element.
1 0000 MB001000 MB001001 1 0000 MB001000 MB001001
1 0002 MB001002
Circuits will be open after an instruction is deleted if they are connected in series to
the deleted element.
Deleting Multiple Instructions Including Relay Circuits

When multiple instructions including relay circuits are to be deleted, select a power connection
instruction as the start of the block to be deleted, and select a COIL instruction as the end of the block.
UNDELETE
The UNDELETE can be used to undo one delete, cut, or paste operation. The range in which
the UNDELETE can be used is shown below.
DEL Effective
UNDELETE
Function key operation or data input via

Enter Key expect for cursor movement Effective
CUT UNDELETE
7
Instruction changed.
UNDELETE Effective
PASTE
The following example shows executing UNDELETE after DELETE.
7-33
DB001020 IB00100 OBC0010
DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410
Delete
DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410
UNDELETE (Edit (E) - UNDELETE (Z)
DB001020 IB00100 OBC0010
DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410
Cutting
Instructions can be cut. Cut data is copied to the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can
be reproduced multiple times using the paste operation.
The procedure to cut instructions is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the start of the section to be cut.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Cut (X) from the programming menus. "CUT" will appear at
the bottom of the window to indicate the cut operation is in progress.
7 3. Move the cursor to the end of the section to be cut. The section to be cut will be dis-
played in reversed color.
4. Select Edit (E) and then Cut (X) from the programming menus.
The section specified in 1 and 3 will be cut.
INFO 1 Press the ESC Key to cancel the cut operation without cutting any instructions.
2 Unlike the delete operation, power lines will not be corrected when instructions are cut using the cut
operation.
Copying
Instructions can be copied to the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can be reproduced
multiple times using the paste operation.
The procedure to copy instructions to the clipboard is outlined below.
7-34
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the section to be copied.

2. Select Edit (E) and then Copy (C) from the programming menus. "Copy" will appear at
the bottom of the window to indicate that the copy operation is in progress.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the section to be copied. The section to be copied will be
displayed in reversed color.
4. Select Edit (E) and then Copy (C) from the programming menus.
The section specified in steps 1. and 3. will be copied.
Pasting
The contents of the clipboard can be reproduced. The instructions copied to the clipboard
using the cut or copy operations will be reproduced. This data is saved and can be repro-
duced multiple times.
When the cut or copy operations are executed again, the instructions on the clipboard will be
cleared and replaced with the new cut or copied instructions.
The procedure to reproduce instructions on the clipboard is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is to be pasted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Paste (V) from the programming menus.
3. The data on the clipboard will be inserted into the position specified in step 1.
Changing Instructions and Operands

The procedure to change previously entered instructions or operands is outlined below.
Changing Relay Numbers

1. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the relay number to be changed.
2. Enter the new relay number. 7
Changing Contacts
1. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the contact instruction to be changed.
2. Enter the new contact instruction.
Changing Relay Numbers and Contacts

1. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the operand to be changed.
2. Enter the new operand.
3. Enter the new relay number.
Changing Operands
1. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the operand to be changed.
2. Enter the new operand.
7-35
The following operands exist and can be changed. You cannot, however, change to an
operands that is not supported by the instruction.
• Decimal and hexadecimal integer constants, decimal and hexadecimal double-length
integer constants, and decimal real number constants.
• S, I, O, M and D registers, and subscripted S, I, O, M and D registers.
• C and # registers, and subscripted C and # registers.
• Registers for X, Y, Z and A constants, and subscripted registers for X, Y, Z and A
constants.
• Subscript registers (I and J).
Changing Comments
1. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the comment to be changed.
2. Select the comment instruction.
3. Enter the new comment.
4. Enter double quotation marks (") at the end of the comment.
Jumping to a Particular Step Number

The procedure to move the cursor to a particular step number in the program is outlined
below.
1. Select Cursor (S) and then Jump to Line (L) from the programming menus.
2. Enter the step number in the Display Position Dialog Box and click the Set Button.
Display position
Step No. 15
7 Set Cancel
3. The cursor will move to the step number designated in the previous step.
Opening Program Windows Used by SEE and FSTART Instructions

When SEE or FSTART instructions are used in the drawing or function program that is cur-
rently displayed, the drawing or function program window that is called by these instruc-
tions can be opened.
The procedure to open the program window used by SEE and FSTART instructions is out-
lined below.
1. Move the cursor to the drawing number or function symbol that the SEE or FSTART
instruction is calling.
1 0000 SEE H01.01

H
7-36
2. Select Debug (G) and then REFER (R) from the programming menus.
3. The program window called in step 1. will be opened.
INFO 1 The refer operation cannot be executed in Offline Mode.

2 The current values when the relevant SEE or FSTART instruction was executed will be shown in any
drawing or function program opened with the refer operation.
Returning to Previous Windows

The window from which the refer operation was used can be returned to in the reverse order.
Select Debug (G) and then BACK (B) from the programming menus to return to the previ-
ous windows in reverse order.
Up to 4 windows that have been previously opened can be returned to in the reverse order.
7.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits
When branches and parallel connections are used in relay circuits, the cursor moves accord-
ing to branches, connection points, and parallel connections. The cursor position for the next
instruction switches for branch and connection points. The cursor position can be reserved
or released by alternately designating branch and connection points. Branch and connection
point designation are found on the Command Selection Menu. Mnemonics can also be used
to designate branches or connection points.
Setting Branches
As shown in the following diagram, branches are display to the left of a COIL instruction,
and input positions for parallel circuits are reserved starting from the branch. The branch
will be automatically displayed without setting it if a contact is to be connected to the power
7
line.
Branch
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000
1 0002 IB00002 OB00001
The procedure to set the branch shown in the above diagram is outlined below.
1. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction.
1 0000 IB00000
Select Command (O), RELAY (R), and then Branch (T) from the programming menus.
7-37
2. A branch will appear.
Branch point
1 0000 IB00000
3. Enter the relay number.
Branch point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
INFO 1 The mnemonic for a branch, a comma (,), can be used at step 2. to display a branch.
2 Insert a COIL instruction after completing step 4. to display the cursor at the branch designated in step
3., rather than at the power line. This enables the next instruction to be entered from this point.
Branch point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000
3 The cursor will move to the last branch if several branches have been designated.
Setting Connection Points

As shown in the following diagram, connection points are shown to the right of the contact
instruction and the input positions for parallel circuits will be reserved between a branch and
connection point if there is a branch, and between the power line and the connection point if
7 there is no branch.
Connection Point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000
1 0002 IB00002
The procedure to set the connection point shown in the above diagram is outlined below.
1 0000 IB00000
2. Select Command (O), RELAY (R) and then Join (J) from the programming menus.
3. A connection point will appear.
7-38
Connection Point
1 0000 IB00000
Connection Point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
INFO 1 The mnemonic for a connection point, a period (.), can be used at step 2. to display a connection point.
2 Once step 4. has been completed, the input position for the next instruction will be on the new line after
the connection point. If a branch has been designated previously, the next instruction will be entered
from the branch position, and if not, the next instruction will be entered from the power line.
Setting Parallel Connections

As shown in the following diagram, the connection point specified above is connected to the
right side of the current instruction input position. A connection point must be specified first
to enable connection.
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000
1 0002 IB00002
Connection point
The procedure to set the parallel connection shown in the above diagram is outlined below. 7
1. Designate the connection point as shown below.
Connection point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
Connection point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
1 0002
3. Select Command (O), Relay (R) and then Connect (C) from the programming menus.
7-39
Connection point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
1 0002
Connection point
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001
1 0002 IB00002
INFO 1 The mnemonic for a parallel connection, a comma and a period (, .), can be used at step 3. to display a
parallel connection.
2 Once step 4. has been completed, the input position for the next instruction will be to the right of the
parallel connection.
Creating a Pulse Generation Circuit

Pulse Generation Circuits are programmed the same way as the branching method explained
in the three preceding sections, Setting Branches, Settings Connection Points, and Setting
Parallel Connections.
1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000
1 0003 MB009971 OB00001
7 ON PULSE instruction
OFF PULSE instruction
The procedure to create the pulse generation circuit shown in the above diagram is outlined
below.
1. Enter the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
2. Select the ON PULSE instruction and then enter the branch.
1 0000 IB00000
3. Enter the register number which is the operand for the ON PULSE instruction.
1 0000 IB00000 MB009970
4. Enter the COIL instruction.
7-40
1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000
5. Select the OFF PULSE instruction.

6. Enter the register number which is the operand for the OFF PULSE instruction.
1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000
1 0003 MB009971
1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000
1 0003 MB009971 OB00001
Creating Timer Circuits

Timer circuits are created by setting the following points:
• Branches, connection points, and parallel connections.
• Time limit setting constants or register numbers for time limit settings.
• Register numbers for counting.
Timer circuit
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]
1 0003 IB00001
7
1 0005 IB00002 OB00001
The procedure to create the timer circuit shown in the above diagram is outlined below.
1. Enter the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
2. Select the ON DELAY instruction and then enter the branches and connection points.
1 0000 IB00000
[T ]
3. Enter the time limit settings (constants or register numbers) which are the operands for
the ON DELAY instruction.
7-41
1 0000 IB00000 005.00

[T ]
4. Enter the register number for counting as an operand of the ON DELAY instruction.
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010

[T ]
5. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction and then set the branches and the parallel con-
nections.
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]
1 0003
6. Enter a register number as the operand of the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]
1 0003 IB00001
1 0005
8. Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction.
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

7 [T ]
1 0003 IB00001
1 0005 IB00002
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]
1 0003 IB00001
1 0005 IB00002 OB00001
INFO Branch, connection point, and parallel connection settings can be made when the cursor is on the time
7-42
limit setting or the register for counting.
Series Connections
When connection points or parallel connections have not been stipulated, the next contact
will be connected in series and the cursor will move to the right from the current instruction
position. Contacts will be connected in series whether or not there is branching. There is no
limit to the number of contacts.
When the series connection extends across one line, as shown in the following diagram, the
input position for the next instruction will automatically appear at the start of the next line.
End of the line
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 IB00002 IB00003 IB00004
1 0005 IB00004 OB00000
Continuation
Creating Complicated Circuits

Complicated sequence circuits, such as the one shown in the following diagram, can be cre-
ated by setting branches, connection points, and parallel connections.
1 0000 MB000000 IB00000 OB00000
DATA1
1 0001 MB000001 IB00001 MB00000A MB00000B OB00001
DATA1
1 0004 MB000010 MB000011 MB000002 MB000003 OB00002
DB000000
7
1 0013 IB00100 MB000300
1 0016 DB000001 MB000301
1 0018 IB00101 005.00 MW00102 OB00100

[T ]
1 0021 IB00102
1 0023 IB00103 OB00101
The procedure (steps 1 to 24) for creating the sequence circuit shown in the above diagram is
outlined in the following table.
Step Instruction Branch or Connection Selection Operand Input

1 N.O. CONTACT Connection point MB000000
2 N.O. CONTACT Parallel connection MB000001
7-43
7.3.8 Disabling Coils
Step Instruction Branch or Connection Selection Operand Input

3 N.C. CONTACT Branch, connection point IB00000
4 N.C. CONTACT Connection point, parallel connec- IB00001
tion
5 N.O. CONTACT - MB000010
6 N.C. CONTACT Parallel connection MB000011
7 COIL Branch OB00000
8 N.O. CONTACT Branch MB00000A
9 N.O. CONTACT - MB00000B
10 COIL - OB00001
11 N.O. CONTACT - MB000002
12 N.C. CONTACT - MB000003
13 COIL - OB00002
14 N.O. CONTACT - IB00100
15 ON PULSE Branch DB000000
16 COIL - MB000300
17 OFF PULSE - DB000001
18 COIL - MB000301
19 N.C. CONTACT - IB00101
20 ON DELAY Branch, connection point 5 MW00012
21 N.O. CONTACT Branch, parallel connection IB00102
22 COIL - OB00100
23 N.O. CONTACT - IB00103
24 COIL - OB00101
The procedure for step 3 in the table, for example, is outlined below.
1. Select the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
7 2. Select the BRANCH instruction.

3. Select the connection point.
4. Enter I0000 and press the Enter Key.
INFO 1 In step 4., the operand code will determine what type of register is required for the operand. Enter only
the register type and number, and IB00000 will be entered automatically.
2 When multiple operands are used, press the Enter Key after inputting each operand to ensure that each
operand is entered correctly.
7.3.8 Disabling Coils
COIL instructions can be forcibly fixed to the energized state (Disabled ON) or to the de-
energized state (Disabled OFF), and disable settings for COIL instructions can be cleared.
Coil status will be displayed as shown below depending on the disable ON/OFF status.
• COIL Instruction Notation
7-44
: Disable cleared (normal state).
: Disabled ON.
: Disabled OFF.
• SET COIL Instruction Notation
S : Disable cleared (normal state).
S : Disabled ON.
S : Disabled OFF.
• RESET COIL Instruction Notation
R : Disable cleared (normal).
R : Disabled ON.
R : Disabled OFF.
1 Devices may malfunction if the above operations are executed during equipment operation. Execute
these operations only after checking that equipment is not being operated.
2 In Online Mode, disabled coil settings will be written to the Machine Controller at the same time as the
settings are created or cleared.
3 When coils are set to Disabled ON or OFF, only the specified coil will be set to ON or OFF. Other coils
will not be affected by the disable settings, even if they are the same type of coil. Other instructions
using the same relay number, however, such as the N.O. CONTACT instruction, will be affected.
Setting Disabled ON
The procedure to force-set and to fix a COIL instruction to ON during program execution is 7
outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction to be set to Disabled ON.
2. Select Debug (G) and then DIS-ON (N) from the programming menus. The COIL
instruction notation will change to Disabled ON.
Setting Disabled OFF

The procedure to force-set and to fix a COIL instruction to OFF during program execution is
outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction to be set to Disabled OFF.
2. Select Debug (G) and then DIS-OFF (F) from the programming menus. The COIL
instruction notation will change to Disabled OFF.
7-45
7.3.9 Displaying Current Values
Clearing Disable Settings

The procedure to clear Disable Settings for COIL instructions is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction for which the disable setting is to be cleared.
2. Select Debug (G) and then ENABLE (E) from the programming menus. The COIL
instruction notation will return to normal.
7.3.9 Displaying Current Values
In Online Mode, current values can be displayed at the same time as the program.
The current values for instructions are displayed as follows:
Instruction Current Value Display

Contacts Contacts will be shown as open or closed on the circuit diagram.
Closed contacts appear bolder than open contacts.
Coils Coils will be shown as ON or OFF on the circuit diagram. ON coils
will appear bolder than OFF coils.
Operands Operand values used for processing are displayed below the expres-
sions.
Current values are updated frequently and the latest data is displayed.
INFO Current values cannot be displayed in Offline Mode.
Synchronized Refreshing of Current Values

The values of designated S, I, O, M, D, C, and # registers, the values of subscript registers I
and J, and current program values when ON/OFF condition has been met for a designated
7 relay number will be displayed. The data display will be refreshed when the condition is
met. If the condition is not met, the display will remain at the previous values. Up to two
registers can be set at the same time. If two registers are set, an AND of the individual con-
ditions will be used.
The procedure to synchronously refresh current values is outlined below.
1. Select Debug (G) and then SYNC (S) from the programming menus.
2. Enter the register numbers and values in the Set Current Value Collection Condition
Window and click the Set Button.
7-46
Set Current Value Collection Condition
Register Value
MW1000 10
Set Cancel Clear
The current values will be refreshed when the set condition is met.
INFO Click the Clear Button in step 2. to clear all the set refreshing conditions for current values.
Displaying Current Values Using the Refer Operation

If the cursor is on the SEE instruction or a user function symbol, the SEE instruction or user
function symbol will be expanded into the drawing program or user function program using
the refer command. Accordingly, the current values when the SEE instruction or the FUNC-
TION CALL instruction (FSTART) is executed can be displayed.
Move the cursor to position (A) in DWG.L in the following diagram, and execute the refer
operation to open the DWG.L01 Program Window. The current value displayed for
DWG.L01 will be the value displayed when the SEE instruction is executed at position (A)
in DWG.L. The value when the SEE instruction is executed at position (B) will not be dis-
played.
Cursor position
DWG.L DWG.L01
(A) SEE L01 ・

・・ 7
・・
・・
(B) SEE L01 ・
・・
・・
・・
DEND DEND
The procedure to display current values using the REFER instruction is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the drawing number or function symbol position for the SEE or
FSTART instruction.
2. Select Debug (G) and then REFER (R) from the programming menus.
The program window being called will be displayed.
7-47
7.3.10 Creating Comments
Pausing Refreshing of Current Values

Select Debug (G) and then HOLD (H) from the programming menus to pause refreshing of
current values.
Execute the hold operation again when the refreshing of current values is paused to restart
the refreshing of current values.
7.3.10 Creating Comments
The procedure to create register comments is outlined below.

1. Select View (V) and then Comment Bar (B) from the programming menus to open the
Comment Window.
2. Enter a register number.

3. Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters.
4. Enter a comment of up to 48 characters.
5. Press the Enter Key. The comment will be written simultaneously to a comment file.
6. Repeat steps 2. to 5. to enter the next comment. Select View (V) and then Comment Bar
(B) again to close the Comment Window.
INFO 1 If the cursor is moved to a register number before performing step 1., that register number will be dis-
played as the default in step 2.
2 The symbol entered in step 3. is different to the symbol defined on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in
the Property Window.
7
7.3.11 Saving Ladder Logic Programs
This section explains how to save ladder logic programs and the configuration of the Error
Window.
Saving Ladder Logic Programs

Ladder logic programs are saved to the Machine Controller and the hard disk in Online
Mode, and to the hard disk in Offline Mode.
If a drawing or function program window is open, all related programs (such as SFC and
table programs) will be saved at the same time.
The procedure to save ladder logic programs is outlined below.
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the programming menus.
7-48
3. Click the OK Button in the next message box.
An insufficient memory error may occur when saving. Refer to 5.4.1 Compile Execution for details.
Error Window Configuration

The ladder logic program will be compiled when it is saved. If a compile error is detected,
the Error Window will be opened.
Save Error
DWG / FUNC H01

No. Type Code Message Remarks
Main
1 　　　0104 Command of END' not
program 1 0 0 0
1 ﾌﾟﾛｸﾞﾗﾑ　　　0104 found
ENDがない
OK Cancel
7-49
7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs

Type Displays the type of program for which an error was detected.
Code Displays the code number for the error.
Message Displays the error message.
Step 1 The step number for which an error was detected will be displayed
for main programs and SFC programs. The line number for which an
error was detected will be displayed for table programs and tuning
panels.
Step 2 This data is disabled for main programs and SFC programs. The row
number for which an error was detected is displayed for table pro-
grams and tuning panels.
Detail 1 This data is disabled for main programs, SFC programs, constant
tables (# registers), table programs other than interlock tables, and
tuning panels. For constant tables (# registers), the numbers for
which errors were detected will be displayed. For Create Interlock
Table Windows, the suitable number for which the error was
detected will be displayed.
Detail 2 Under development. This data is not available in the current version.
Remarks Under development. This data is not available in the current version.
Move the highlighted error indication in any error window and click the OK Button to move
the cursor to the position where the error was detected.
Click the Cancel Button to close the Error Window.
7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs
Ladder logic programs can be printed from the program window without starting up the
Print Manager. Only the ladder logic program that is currently open, however, will be
printed.
7 Page Settings
Use this procedure to set the print page margins.
1. Select File (F) and then Page Setting (M) from the programming menus.
2. Set each margin in the Ladder Program Page Set Window, and click the OK Button.
Ladder Program Page Set
Up Margin 8 mm
Down Margin 8 mm
Left Margin 15 mm
Right Margin 5 mm
OK Cancel
Printing
Use this procedure to print the ladder logic program currently displayed.
1. Select File (F) and then Print (P) from the programming menus.
7-50
2. The Print Setup Window will be displayed. Set the printer name and click the OK But-
ton.
INFO Refer to the relevant printer manual for the print settings in step 2.
7.3.13 Closing Ladder Logic Program Editing
The edit process for ladder logic programs is exited by closing the Programming Window.
Select File (F) and then Close (C) from the programming menus to close the Programming
Window.
7-51
7.4.1 Outline of Table Programs
7.4 Creating Table Programs
This section explains how to create table programs.
7.4.1 Outline of Table Programs
Tables can be used to easily create constant tables or ladder logic programs by entering reg-
ister numbers, contact types, interlock information, and other data.
There are six types of tables:
Table Program Function

Constant tables Creates tension control parameters, position control parameters, and
(# register) other constants specific to a drawing or function program.
Constant tables Creates mechanical and electrical equipment specifications and
(M register) other constants used by all drawing and function programs.
I/O conversion tables Creates scale conversions for numeric data and signal conversions
for bit signals.
Interlock tables Creates device startup and operating conditions and other interlocks.
Component assembly Simultaneously creates multiple solenoid valve circuits, auxiliary
tables sequence circuits, and other standard circuits.
C constant tables Creates constant tables used in all drawings and functions, e.g.,
items for facilities or products.
7.4.2 Table Program Window
Opening Table Program Windows

Except for the window for C constant tables, the Table Program Windows can be opened
7 from the File Manager and the Engineering Manager.

1. Click the drawing number in the directory tree.
2. Select File (F) and then Open (O) on the File Manager Menu.
3. Select the type of table from the submenu.

1. Select File (F), Open (O) and then Drawing (R) on the File Manager Menu.
2. The submenu will be displayed. Select the type of table from the five types outlined ear-
lier in this section.
Refer to the following sections to input table program data after opening the Table Program
Window.
• 7.4.5 Inputting # Register Constant Table Data
• 7.4.6 Inputting M Register Constant Table Data
7-52
• 7.4.7 Inputting I/O Conversion Table Data

• 7.4.8 Inputting Interlock Table Data
• 7.4.9 Inputting Component Assembly Table Data
• 7.4.10 Inputting Data in C Constant Tables
INFO 1 C constant tables cannot be opened from the File Manager. Select File (F), Open (O), and then C Reg-
ister (C) from the Engineering Manager windows.
2 The Open DWG Setting Window will be opened if a Table Program Window is opened when no draw-
ing or function program is open. Enter the drawing name and type, and click the OK Button.
3 The table program is set for the drawing or function ladder logic program from which it was opened.
Therefore, if different drawing number or function symbol table programs are to be set, the ladder
logic program for that drawing number or function symbol must be opened.
7.4.3 Table Program Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in Table Program Window.

File (F)
Open (O) Opens each function windows.
Close (C) Closes Table Program Windows.
Register User Menu Registers shortcuts for Table Program Windows.
(S)
Save (S) Saves table programs.
Delete (D) The delete function cannot be used with Table
Program Windows.
Page Setting (M) Sets print margins. 7
Print Table (P) Prints table programs.
Edit (E)
Cut (T) Cuts table data.
Copy (C) Copies table data to the clipboard.
Paste (P) Copies the contents of the clipboard.
Delete Row (D) Deletes multiple consecutive rows.
Insert Row (I) Inserts a row.
Input (I)
Input Setting Data (S) Switches to settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to table definition input mode.
(T)
Input Register (R) Switches to register input mode.
Direction of Cursor Sets the direction for cursor movement.
Movement (C)
7-53
7.4.4 Switching Input Modes

View (V)
Display Head Row (F) Moves the cursor to the first row in the table.
Display Designated Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Row (R)
Display Last Row (E) Moves the cursor to the last row in the table.
Next Page (N)* Moves the cursor to the next page of the table.
Previous Page (B)* Moves the cursor to the previous page of the
table.
Window (W)
Help (H)
∗ The Next Page (N) and Back Page (B) operations are displayed for # reg-
ister constant tables.
7.4.4 Switching Input Modes
The input modes for input table data can be switched to select the most efficient mode. The
direction the cursor will move after input cell data can also be specified.
Table Data Input Modes

Input Mode Details
7 Settings Input Mode Only setting cells can be entered in Settings Input Mode. No inputs
can be made to other cells.
Select Input (I) and then Input Setting Data (S) from the menus.
Table Definition Input Data can be entered into any cell in the table.
Mode Select Input (I) and then Input Table definition (T) from the menu.
Register Input Mode Only register numbers can be entered in Register Input Mode. No
inputs can be made to other cells.
Select Input (I) and then Input Register (R) from the menu.
7-54
Switching Cursor Movement Direction

Use the procedure to switch the cursor movement direction after table data has been entered
and the Enter Key pressed.
Movement Direction Details

Horizontal Select Input (I) and then Direction of Cursor Movement (C) from
the menus. The Designate Direction of Cursor Movement Window
Vertical
will be displayed. Specify the direction of movement and click the
No movement OK Button.
7.4.5 Inputting # Register Constant Table Data
# register constant tables are created by inputting constants (integer, double-length integer,
and real number constants), symbols, and # register numbers.
When a # register constant table is saved, the constants are automatically converted and the
results placed in the # registers after the upper and lower limits of each constant have been
checked.
Table data can be created for as many # registers as are set on the DWG Definition Tab Page
in the Property Window.
Setting Item Details 7

Data Name Enter constant names of up to 48 characters.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination #
register.
Save Point Enter the # register number to which the constant will be saved.
SETVAL Enter the constant to be saved to the # register. When inputting in
hexadecimal, add an "H" to the beginning of the value, such as
H00FF.
When inputting settings, input values within the range outlined in the
Lower Limit and Upper Limit columns. The settings will be checked
against these limits.
Unit Enter a unit for the constant of up to 8 characters.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the constant.
Upper Limit Enter the upper limit of the constant. The lower limit must be equal
to or less than the upper limit.
1 SETVAL, Upper Limit, Lower Limit, and Save Point must be set. An error will occur when the table is
7-55
7.4.6 Inputting M Register Constant Table Data
saved if these are not set.

2 # register constant tables cannot be created if the number of # registers is set to 0 on the DWG Defini-
tion Tab Page in the Property Window.
7.4.6 Inputting M Register Constant Table Data
M register constant tables are created by inputting constants (integer, double-length integer,
real number, and hexadecimal constants), symbols, and M register numbers. When an M
register constant table is saved, it is automatically converted to a subroutine that saves the
constants to M registers after the upper and lower limits of each constant have been checked.
The subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Up to 200 rows of table data can be entered

Data Name Enter constant names of up to 48 characters.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination M
register.
SETVAL Enter the constant to be saved in the M register. When inputting in
H00FF.
7 against these limits.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the constant.
Upper Limit Enter the upper limit of the constant. The lower limit must be equal
to or less than the upper limit.
Save Point Enter the M register number to which the constant will be saved.
INFO SETVAL, Upper Limit, Lower Limit, and Save Point must be set. An error will occur when the table is
saved if these are not set.
7.4.7 Inputting I/O Conversion Table Data
Input registers and conversion equations are designated in I/O conversion tables, and the
output register to which the result of the conversion will be saved is defined. When a I/O
conversion table is saved, it is automatically converted to a subroutine that converts the val-
7-56
ues in the input registers according to the conversion equation and saves the results in the
output registers. An additional equation that checks the upper and lower limits can be added
for the results of the scale conversion. Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL
instruction in the main program.
Up to 200 rows of table data can be entered.

Data Name Enter a name of up to 36 characters.
Input Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the input register.
Register Enter the input register number. The current value will be displayed in
Online Mode.
Unit Enter a unit of up to 8 characters for the input register value.
Setting Lower Limit Enter the lower limit for the check after scale conversion.
Range
Upper Limit Enter the upper limit for the check after scale conversion.
Scale Conversion/Bit Enter the equation for converting the input register values. Leave a
space between the input equation values and the operands. Refer to the
MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Ladder Program-
ming (SIEZ-C887.2C) for information on conversion equations.
Output Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the output register. 7
Register Enter the number of the output register to which the scale-converted
value is to be saved. The current value will be displayed when online.
Unit Enter a unit of up to 8 characters for the output register value.
1 The input register and output register must be set. An error will occur when the table is saved if they
are not set.
2 I/O conversion tables cannot be created for user functions.
7-57
7.4.8 Inputting Interlock Table Data
7.4.8 Inputting Interlock Table1 Data
Interlock tables define the device startup and operation and other interlock conditions. Inter-
lock conditions are defined by inputting symbols, bit register numbers, and signal type (N.O.
CONTACT, N.C. CONTACT, or COIL). When an interlock table is saved, it is automati-
cally converted to a subroutine made up of N.O. CONTACTs, N.C. CONTACTs, and
COILs. Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Refer to the following sections.
• Inputting table data
• Switching between subtables and main tables
• Splitting and joining blocks
• Registering comments
Inputting Table Data

Up to 500 rows and 25 columns of table data can be entered.
7 Setting Item Details

No. The row number for each block is displayed. The blocks are num-
bered alphabetically, and are followed by a numeric row number.
M Enter the input mode for interlock conditions as one letter: I, S, O, or
X. Refer to the Interlock I/O Modes table given after this table.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the register num-
ber to be interlocked.
Register Enter the bit register number that controls the interlock.
1 Interlock tables
Interlock tables are a type of table program that show device startup and operating condi-
tions.
7-58

Signal Enter the interlock condition. Enter ( ) for N.O. CONTACT,
( ) for N.C. CONTACT, and ( ) for COIL. The interlock
condition is input as A for N.O. CONTACT, B for N.C CONTACT,
and C for COIL.
Table 7.2 Interlock I/O Modes
M (Mode) Details
I Used when defining input signals. N.O. CONTACT ( ) and N.C.
CONTACT ( ) can be input in columns 1 to xx in rows defined
in this mode.
S Used when inputting table data in subtables. This mode is effective
only for main tables. The subtable output and the main table input
symbols (or registers) must be the same.
O Used when defining output signals. COIL ( ) can be input in col-
umns 1 to xx in rows defined in this mode.
X Used when defining output signals as input signals. An entry must be
made in the Register column when this mode has been input. Define
the same symbol output within the main table if working with the
main table, and within subtable 1 if working within subtable 1.
INFO Deleting Condition Signals

Select the signal to be deleted and press the Space Bar. The column for the deleted signal will be
cleared.
1 The mode, register, and signal must be set. An error will occur when the table is saved if these are not 7
set.
2 Interlock tables cannot be created for user functions.
Switching Between Subtables and Main Tables

Interlock tables are made up of one main interlock table and interlock subtables which corre-
spond to rows in the main interlock table.
Subtables are created when interlock conditions are divided into different levels. The sub-
table numbers are determined by the row number in the main table, with the subtable for row
A01 being called subtable A01, and the subtable for row B02 being called subtable B02.
Select View (V) and then Sub Table/Main Table (A) from the table program menus to switch
between main tables and subtables.
INFO
When switching from main tables to subtables, the cursor must already be in the row in the main table
7-59
7.4.9 Inputting Component Assembly Table Data
for that subtable.

No subtable can be displayed for a row where data other than S is set in the Mode column.
Splitting and Joining Blocks

Interlocks can be split into a maximum of 26 blocks, to treat each block as an independent
interlock.
The procedure to split and join blocks is outlined below.
1. Move the cursor to the block to be split or joined.
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
2. Select View (V) and then Block Division (W) from the table program menus.
The block will be split or joined.
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
INFO 1 Each time the split/join operation is executed, splitting and joining blocks will be performed alter-
nately.
2 Blocks in subtables cannot be split, and one interlock cannot be extended across multiple blocks. Each
interlock must consist of one block only.
Registering Comments
7 Use the following procedure to select whether or not to register the data in the Data Name
column as the register comment for the same row.
1. Select Edit (E) and then Entry Comment (T) from the table program menus.
2. Click either Register name as comment or Do not register name as comment in the
Comment Registration Selection Window.
3. Click the OK Button.
7.4.9 Inputting Component Assembly Table Data
Component assembly tables are created by inputting I/O register numbers for user functions
and work register numbers. When a component assembly table is saved, each row of the part
composition table is treated as one function program, the register numbers in the user func-
tion programs are re-allocated, and a subroutine is created containing the same functions.
Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Refer to the following sections.
7-60
• Inputting table data

• Switching part units
• Switching table formats
Inputting Table Data

Up to 100 rows of table data can be entered. Only 32 columns in total of input and output
data, however, can be entered.
Normal Display

Part Name Enter an existing user function signal. After the signal is input the I/
O signals for user functions will be displayed automatically.
Input Enter the input register numbers or direct values to be allocated to
each user function input. Put an "Ho" in front of numeric values
when inputting in hexadecimal.
Output Enter the output register numbers for allocating each user function
output. 7
Head Work Enter the D register number or # register number for allocating the
work registers used within the user function.
INFO 1 Component assembly tables cannot be created for user functions.

2 The default number of columns for the input and output sections of the part composition table will con-
tain three columns each by default. The number of columns must be increased beforehand when input-
ting functions with four or more I/Os in the Part Name column.
Switching Part Units

The procedure to switch between single part or multiple part composition tables is shown
below.
1. Select View (V) and then Designate Part Unit (P) from the table program menus. The
Part Unit Selection Window will be displayed.
7-61
7.4.10 Inputting Data in C Constant Tables
2. Designate the part unit in the window and click the OK Button. The table unit will be
switched and the component assembly table displayed.
Switching Table Formats

There are two formats for part composition tables: Normal display, which displays register
numbers only, and Symbol + Settings display which displays register numbers and user
function symbols.
To switch between Normal display and Symbol + Settings display, select View (V) and then
Disp Selection (D) from the table program menus.
The table format will be switched and the part composition table displayed.
INFO The table format cannot be switched if the part unit is set to Single Selection.
C registers are registered on C constant tables and can be accessed from drawing and func-
tion programs. C registers can be accessed from programs only.
Up to 200 C registers can be registered and are managed as a unit using the C Register Con-
stant Table List.
Opened from
menus
Cレジスタ表
C Register Open Cレジスタ表
Constant Cレジスタ表
C constant
Table List tables
7
(Read only)
Cレジスタ表
Cレジスタ表
Cレジスタ表
Drawings
Outline of Creation Procedure

1. Open the C register constant table list. (Refer to 7.4.2 Table Program Window.)
2. Select a C constant table or create a new one.
3. Open the C constant table.
4. Edit the C constant table.
5. Save the C constant table.
7-62
C Register Constant List Window Configuration

The C Register Constant List Window displays a list of the registered C constant tables in
ascending order. The C Constant Table Window can be opened and C register data defined
from the C Register Constant Table List Window.

No. Number within table.
Tbl Name C register table names are displayed.
Register The number of the first C register is displayed.
Size The size of each C register starting from the first C register number
is displayed in words.
Comment The C register table comments are displayed.
C Register Constant Table List Window Menu Configuration

The following table shows the function of menu commands in the C Register List Window.

File (F)
7
Close (C) Closes the C Register Constant Table List Win-
dow.
Resist User Menu Resisters shortcuts for Table Program Windows.
Constant Table (C) (T) Opens C constant tables.
New Open (N) Creates a new C constant table.
Delete (D) Deletes C constant tables.
Update (U) Modifies C constant tables.
View (V)
Window (W)
7-63

Tile (C) Lines up windows in the display.
Help (H)
Operation in the C Register List Window

The following operations are possible in the C Register List Window.
• Opening C constant tables
• Creating new C constant tables
• Deleting C constant tables
• Correcting C constant table information
Opening C Constant Tables

1. Click the C constant table number in the No. column on the C constant table.
Product Info.
Line Constant
Procon
2. Select File (F) and then Constant Table (C) (T) from the C Register Constant Table List
Menu. The C constant table selected in step 1. will be opened.
The C Constant Table Window can also be opened by double-clicking the table number in
step 1.
Creating New C Constant Tables
7 New C constant tables can be created using the following procedure. When a new table is
created, the C constant table for that table will be opened.
1. Select File (F) and then New Open (N) from the C Register Constant Table List Menu.
The New Window will be displayed.
2. Enter the table name, leading register number, size, and comment in the New Window
and click the OK Button.
7-64
3. The C Register Table Window will be opened.
INFO 1 Enter a table name of up to 8 characters. Enter an initial register number between CW0 and CW4095.
The sum of the initial register number and number input for the size must be 4096 or less.
2 Leading register numbers and register sizes that overlap with other C register ranges cannot be input.
Deleting C Constant Tables

Use the following procedure to delete C constant tables.
1. Click the No. column of the C constant table to be deleted.
Product Info.
Line Constant
Procon
2. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) on the C Register Constant Table List Menu.
The C constant table selected in step 1. will be deleted.
Product Info.
Procon
Modifying C Constant Table Information

The register range and other C constant table information can be modified using the follow-
ing procedure. The C Constant Table Window for that C register table will be opened after
the modifications have been made.
1. Click the No. column of the C constant table to be modified.
Product Info.
7
Procon
2. Select File (F) and then Update (U) from the C Constant Table List Menu. The Update
3. Select the items to be modified in the Update Window and click the OK Button. The C
Constant Table Window will be opened.
INFO The name of the register table cannot be modified. Enter a leading register number between CW0 and
CW4095. The sum of the register number and size must be 4096 or less. Leading register numbers and
register sizes that overlap with other C register ranges cannot be input.
7-65
Opening C Constant Table Windows

C constant tables are opened by clicking the corresponding C constant table number in the C
Register Constant Table List Window.
C Register Table Window Menu Configuration

The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the C Register Table Win-
dow.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the C Constant Table Window.
Regist User Menu (S) Registers shortcut keys for the C Constant Table
Window.
Save (S) Saves C constant tables.
Page Setting (M) Sets print margins.
7 Print Table (P) Prints C register tables.

Edit (E)
Cut (T) Cuts table data.
Copy (C) Copies table data to the clipboard.
Paste (P) Reproduces data on the clipboard.
Insert Row (I) Inserts a blank row.
Input (I)
Input Setting Data (S) Switches to Settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to Table Definition input mode.
(T)
Input Register (R) Switches to Register input mode.
Direction of Cursor Changes the direction of cursor movement.
Movement (C)
7-66

View (V)
Display Head Row (F) Moves the cursor to the first row of the table.
Display Designated Moves the cursor to a specific row in the table.
Row (R)
Display Last Row (E) Moves the cursor to the last row of the table.
Window (W)
Help (H)
Setting C Constant Tables

C registers are created by inputting constants (integer, double-length integer, real number,
and hexadecimal constants), symbols, and C register numbers. When C registers are saved,
the constants are automatically converted to C registers after the upper and lower limits of
each constant are checked.
Table data can be created for as many C registers as are currently open.
Lower Upper
No. Data Name Symbol SET VAL Unit Limit Limit Save Point
1
2
・
・
・
C register definition area

7
Table name Leading Register No Input Mode

Data Name Enter a data name for each constant of up to 48 characters.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination C
register.
SET VAL Enter the constant to be saved to the C register. When inputting in
H00FF.
against these limits.
7-67
7.4.11 Editing Table Programs

Lower Limit Enter the lower constant limit.
Upper Limit Enter the upper constant limit. The lower limit must be less then or
equal to the upper limit.
Save Point Enter the C register number to which the constants will be saved.
Table Name Displays the name of the currently open C register table.
Leading Register No. Displays the leading C register number in the currently open C regis-
ter table.
Input Mode Displays the current input mode.
The set value, upper limits and lower limits, and save points must be set, otherwise, an error will occur
when the C constant tables are saved.
This section describes the editing functions used for all table programs. Table programs can
be edited by row, column, or block.
• Moving the cursor
• Selecting cells to edit
• Cutting and pasting table data
• Inserting and deleting rows
• Inserting and deleting columns
Moving the Cursor

The cursor is normally moved by pressing the Cursor Keys or clicking a cell in the table.
The cursor can also be moved to the first or last row and the previous or next page as
7 required.
First Row
Select View (V) and then Display Head Row (F) from the table program menus. The cursor
will move to the first row in the table.
Last Row
Select View (V) and then Display Last Row (E) from the table program menus. The cursor
will move to the last row in the table.
Specific Row
1. Select View (V) and then Display Designated Row (R) from the table program menus. A
window to set the table row will be displayed.
2. In window, input the row number to which the cursor is to be moved and click the OK
7-68
Button. The cursor will move to the specified row.
Next Page
Select View (V) and then Next Page (N) from the table program menus. The cursor will
move to the first row of the next page.
Previous Page
Select View (V) and then Back Page (B) from the table program menus. The cursor will
move to the first row of the previous page.
Selecting Table Cells to Edit

1. Click the top-left cell of the section to be edited.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime
DecelerateTime DTime
ShortStopTime STime
2. Drag the cursor to the bottom-right cell of the section.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
ShortStopTime STime
Cutting and Pasting Table Data

Table data can be cut, copied, and pasted. The table data editing functions can be used only
in Table Definition Input Mode.
Cutting Table Data

7
Table data within a specified section can be cut in the following procedure. Cut data is cop-
ied to the clipboard, and this data can be reproduced multiple times by using the paste oper-
ation.
1. Select the section to be cut.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
2. Select Edit (E) and then Cut (T) from the table program menus.
3. The data specified in step 1. will be cut.
LineMaxSpeed
7-69
Copying Table Data

Table data within a specified region can be copied to the clipboard in the following proce-
dure, and this data can be reproduced multiple times by using the paste operation.
Use the following procedure to copy cell data.
1. Select the section to be copied.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
2. Select Edit (E) and then Copy (C) from the table program menus.
The section specified in step 1. will be copied to the clipboard.
Pasting Table Data

Use this procedure to paste the contents of the clipboard into a table.
1. The table data that has been previously cut or pasted to the clipboard can be pasted. The
data on the clipboard can be pasted multiple times, and is cleared and replaced with new
data each time the cut or copy operations are used.
LineMaxSpeed
2. Select Edit (E) and then Paste (P) from the table program menus.
The data will be reproduced at the position specified in step 1.
Inserting and Deleting Rows

Inserting Rows
7 Use the following procedure to insert one or more blank rows at any point in the table.
1. Move the cursor to the position where a row is to be inserted.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
2. Select Edit (E) and then Insert Row (I) from the table program menus. An Insert Row
3. Enter the number of rows to be inserted in the Insert Row Window and click the OK
Button. The number of specified rows will be inserted.
LineMaxSpeed
DecelerateTime
Deleting Rows
Use the following procedure to delete one or more consecutive rows.
7-70
1. Click the row to be deleted.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
2. Select Edit (E) and then Delete Row (D) from the table program menus.
The row specified in step 1. will be deleted.
LineMaxSpeed
ShortStopTime STime
INFO All of the rows currently displayed cannot be deleted.
Inserting and Deleting Columns

Columns can be inserted or deleted in interlock or part composition tables.
Inserting Columns
Use the following procedure to insert one or more column at the cursor position.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the column is to be inserted.
M2Roll
M4Roll
M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation
2. Select Edit (E) and then Insert Column (Q) from the table program menus. The Column
Insert Window will be displayed.
3. Enter the number of columns to be inserted in the Column Insert Window and click the 7
OK Button. The number of specified columns will be inserted.
M2Roll
M4Roll
M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation
INFO Columns cannot be inserted between the No. and Register columns in interlock tables.
7-71
7.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs
Deleting Columns
Use the following procedure to delete one or more consecutive columns.
1. Select part of the column to be deleted.
M2Roll
M4Roll
M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation
2. Select Edit (E) and then Delete Column (R) from the table program menus.
The column or columns specified in step 1. will be deleted.
M2Roll
M4Roll
M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation
INFO Columns cannot be inserted between the No. and Register columns in interlock tables.
7.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs
Saving
If a drawing or function program window is open, all programs (such as main programs) will
be saved at the same time.
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) from the table program menus.
2. A window to confirm saving will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
3. Click the OK Button in the window to inform normal completion of saving.
7
1 Interlock tables can be saved even if contact and COIL settings have not been made. This improves the
operability of the CP-717 by allowing the user to temporarily interrupt programming. The contact and
COIL settings must be made, however, before the program is executed.
2 The table programs will be compiled when they are saved. An error window will be displayed if a
compile error is detected.
3 Refer to Error Window Configuration under 7.3.11 Saving Ladder Logic Programs for information on
error windows.
Closing
The process of creating table programs can be exited by closing the Table Program Window.
Select File (F) and then Close (C) to close the Table Program Window.
7-72
7.4.13 Printing Table Programs
Table programs can be printed from the Table Program Window without starting the Print
Manager. Only the table program that is currently open, however, will be printed.
Refer to 7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs for information on page settings and print-
ing.
7-73
7.5.1 Outline of Data Tables
7.5 Creating Data Tables
This section explains how to create data used in table format (arrays) in the main program.
7.5.1 Outline of Data Tables
Table data can be accessed by using the table data manipulation instructions in the main pro-
gram.
The procedure to create table data can be divided into the following 3 procedures. Follow
the steps to create table data.
Table Data Creation

Procedure
Set table definition

information.
Set column
attributes.
Table Ladder
・・・
TBLxxx
table ・・・
Set table data.
TBLxxx ・・・
table
・・・
End.
1. Setting Table Definition Information

Open the Table Data List Window and select creating a new table. The Set Table Defini-
7 tion Window will be displayed. Set the table name, table type, number of columns and
rows, and table comment.
Setting Explanation
Table Name The name of the table.
Table Type Either array or record.
Column The number of columns in the table.
Rows The number of rows in the table.
Comment The table comment.
7-74
2. Setting Column Attributes

Open the Column Attributes Window and set the column attribute. The attributes to be
set include column names, data types, sizes, and display types.
Setting Explanation
Column Name The name of the column.
Data Type Integer, double-length integer, real number, or character string.
Size The length of the data.
Display Type The display format for the table data.
Column Comment The column comment.
3. Setting Table Data

Open the Table Data Window and set column data for the number of rows.
Table Name
Column Column Column Column name

1 2 ・・・ n
・・・・・・・・・・・・

Number of rows
Number of columns
If the table is an array table, there will be only one column name because all of the ele-
ment data types (integer, real number, etc.) are the same.
If the table is a record table, the column name, data type, and other settings must be
made for each column.
7
7.5.2 Table Data List Windows
This section explains how to open the Table Data List Window and the configuration of the
window and menus.
Opening Table Data List Windows

1. Open the PLC folder in the directory tree.
2. Double-click a table data list file in the table data folder. The Table Data List Window
will be opened.
The following window will be opened when creating a new data table.
7-75
7.5.2 Table Data List Windows

Select File (F), Open (O), Data Table Definition (G), and then Data Table Map (L) on the
Window Menu.
Table Data List Window Configuration

A list of registered data tables can be displayed. The data tables in the list are displayed in
alphabetic order. The column attributes and table data settings windows are opened from this
window to define data tables.
Refer to the window shown in 7.5.2 Table Data List Windows.
Setting Item Explanation

Table Name Displays table names.
7 Table Type Displays table types.

Column Displays the number of columns of table data.
Lines Displays the number of rows of table data.
Comment Displays the data table comments.
Column Attribute Opens the Column Attribute Window.
Button
Table Data Button Opens the Table Data Window.
7-76
7.5.3 Table Data List Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Table Data List Window.

File (F)
New Open (N) Creates new data tables.
Delete (D) Deletes data tables.
Regist User Menu (S) Registers shortcut keys for the Table Data List
Window.
Close (C) Closes the Table Data List Window.
View (V)
Tool Bar (T) Displays the Tool Tar.
Column Definition (C) Opens the Column Definition Window.
Table Data (D) Opens the Table Data Window.
Window (W)
Help (H)
7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data List Windows 7

The following operations are provided in the Table Data List Windows to manipulate the
tables.
• Opening Column Attribute Windows
• Opening Table Data Windows
• Creating new data tables
• Deleting data tables
Opening Column Attributes Windows

Column Attributes Windows can be opened from the Table Data List Window as follows:
Data type and other attributes can be changed for each column name given in the table.
Opening from the Table Data List Window

1. Click the No. column of the table.
7-77
7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data List Windows
2. Select View (V) and then Column Definition (C) on the Table Data List Menu, or click
the Column Definition Button.
Column Attribute Windows can be opened by double-clicking the table number.
Opening from the Table Data Window

Column Attribute Windows can also be opened by selecting File (F) and then Column Def-
inition (C) from the Table Data Menu.
Opening Table Data Windows

Table Data Windows can be opened from the Table Data List Window or the Column
Attribute Window.
Opening from the Table Data List Window

1. Click the No. column in the table.
2. Select View (V) and then Table Data (D) on the Table Data List Menu, or click the
Table Data Button.
Opening from the Column Attribute Window

Table Data Windows can also be opened by selecting File (F) and then Table Data (D) from
the Column Attributes Menu.
Creating Data Tables

Use the following procedure to create a data table. Once the data table is created, a Column
Attributes Window for that data table will be opened.
7 1. Select File (F) and then New Open (N) on the Table Data List Menu.
2. Enter the table definition information in the Table Definition Window, and click the OK
Button. The Column Attribute Window for the data table will be displayed.
7-78
Table Definition Settings
Setting Explanation
Table Name Enter a table name of up to 8 characters. Commas (,), question marks
(?), asterisks (*), inverted commas (“), and apostrophes (') cannot be
used.
Table Type Select the table type.
Array:All columns have the same attributes.
Record:Each column has different attributes.
Column and lines Enter the number of columns and rows in the table, between 1 and
10,000.
The size of the table data is calculated by multiplying the number of
columns by the numbers of rows. Use a table data size of 1 Mb or
less as a guide. Table data of more than 5 Mb cannot be created.
An error message box will be displayed if the size exceeds 5 Mb.
Reduce the number of columns and rows if this error is generated. A
message box giving a warning will be displayed when the table data
size exceeds 1 Mb.
Table Comment Enter a table comment of up to 32 characters.
Deleting Data Tables

The procedure to delete data tables is outlined below.
1. Click the No. column of the data table to be deleted.
2. Select File (F) and then Delete (D) on the Table Data List Menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box. The selected data table will be deleted.
7.5.5 Opening Column Attributes Windows
Refer to Opening Column Attributes Windows under 7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table
Data List Windows for information on how to open Column Attributes Windows. 7
7-79
7.5.6 Column Attributes Window Menus
7.5.6 Column Attributes Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in Column Attributes Win-
dows.
Table 7.3 Column Attribute Window Menus

File (F)
Open (O) Opens each function window.
Close (C) Closes Column Attributes Windows.
Save (S) Saves column attribute data.
Table Data (D) Opens Table Data Windows.
Change (H) Changes table definitions.
Edit (E)
Copy (C) Copies row data to the clipboard.
Cut (T) Cuts row data.
Paste (P) Reproduces data on the clipboard.
Insert (I) Inserts a blank row.
Delete (D) Deletes data.
View (V)
Go To (J) Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Window (W)
7 Cascade (C) Stacks windows in the display.
Help (H)
7.5.7 Setting Column Attributes
Column attributes can be set. All columns have the same attributes for array tables, so set-
tings are made for one column only. For record tables, each column has different attributes,
and settings are made therefore for each column.
7-80
Data table column attribute

Login information
Table Name Table Type Column Lines
Table Comment
No. Column Name Data Size Display Type Column Comment
Column attribute definition area
Setting Explanation
Table Definition Displays the table name, table type, number of columns, number of
Information rows, and table comments.
No. Displays column numbers. Only one number will be displayed for array
tables. For record tables, numbers up to the number of columns in the
table will be displayed.
Column Name Enter a column name of up to 8 characters.
Data Select the column data type.
Select integer, double-length integer, real, or character data.
Size Enter the table data size as a number of bytes between 1 and 80. This
entry, however, can only be made for character string data. The data size
will be 2 bytes for integer data, 4 bytes for double-length integer data,
and 4 bytes for real number data, and these values cannot be changed.
Display Type Set the data display type. The display type cannot be changed, however,
if the Data column is set to character string or real number data.
Select binary, decimal, hexadecimal, real, or character display.
Column Comment Enter a column comment of up to 32 characters.
7
INFO In Online Mode, only data in the Display Type and Column Comment columns can be changed.
7.5.8 Editing Column Attributes
The following operations can be used to edit column attributes by row.

• Inserting column attributes data rows
• Deleting column attributes data rows
• Cutting column attributes data rows
• Copying column attributes data rows
• Pasting column attributes data rows
• Jumping to column attributes data rows
• Changing table definitions
• Saving column attributes data
7-81
7.5.8 Editing Column Attributes
Inserting Column Attribute Data Rows

1. Click the column number where the row is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Insert (I) on the Column Attributes Menu.
3. The Setting Number of Insert Data Window will be displayed. Input the number of rows
to be inserted and click the OK Button. The specified number of blank row will be
inserted.
INFO 1 This operation does not increase the actual number of rows, but moves the data down by the number of
rows inserted. A message box will be displayed if rows will be deleted as a result of the insertion. Click
Yes or No to confirm or cancel the insertion.
2 The actual number of rows can be increased by changing the number of columns in the table defini-
tions. Refer to Changing Table Definitions later in this section.
Deleting Column Attribute Data Rows

Use the following procedure to delete one or more consecutive column attribute data rows.
1. Click the column number of the row to be deleted.
To delete more than one row, drag the cursor on the column number to select the range
to delete.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Delete (D) on the Column Attributes Menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box. The specified rows will be deleted.
INFO This operation does not reduce the actual number of rows, but moves the data up by the number of
rows deleted. The actual number of rows can be reduced by changing the number of columns in the
table definitions. Refer to Changing Table Definitions later in this section.
7
Cutting Column Attribute Data
Specified ranges of data can be cut using the following procedure. The data cut using the cut
operation is copied to the clipboard. The data on the clipboard can be reproduced multiple
times by using the paste operation.
1. Drag across the column numbers of the rows to be cut.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Cut (T) on the Column Attributes Menu. The specified range of
data will be cut.
Copying Column Attribute Data

Use the following procedure to copy specified range of data can be copied to the clipboard.
The data on the clipboard can be pasted as many times as required.
1. Select the range of data to be copied to the clipboard.
7-82
2. Select Edit (E) and then Copy (C) from the Column Attributes Menu. The specified
range of data in will be copied to the clipboard.
Pasting Column Attribute Data

Use the following procedure to paste column attribute data.
1. Click the column number where the data is to be pasted.
2. Select Edit (E) and then Paste (P) from the Column Attributes Menu. The data on the
clipboard will be pasted at the specified position.
Jump to Column Attribute Rows

Use the following procedure to move the cursor to a specific row.
1. Select View (V) and then Go To (J) on the Column Attributes Menu.
2. The Setting Display Data No. Window will be displayed. Enter the row number to
which the cursor is to be moved and click the OK Button. The cursor will be moved to
the specified row.
Changing Table Definitions

The procedure to change table data type and other table definitions is outlined below.
1. Select File (F) and then Change (H) on the Column Attributes Menu.
2. The Table Definition Window will be displayed. Enter the changes and click the OK
Button.
INFO Table definitions and table name cannot be changed if the Table Data Window is open. The only data
that can be changed in Online Mode is the table comment.Refer to Creating Data Tables under 7.5.4
Manipulating Tables in Table Data List Windows.
7
7.5.9 Saving Column Attributes
Use the following procedure to save column attributes.

1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) on the Column Attribute Menu.
2. A window will be displayed to confirm the save. Click the Yes Button.
3. A window will be displayed showing that the save has been completed normally. Click
the OK Button.
INFO If the save operation fails, an error message will be displayed. Refer to Appendix A Error Messages,
remove the cause of the error, and then retry the save operation.
7-83
7.5.10 Opening Table Data Windows
7.5.10 Opening Table Data Windows
Refer to Opening Table Data Windows under 7.5.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data List
Windows for the procedure to open the Table Data Window.
7.5.11 Table Data Window Menus
The following table shows the functions of menu commands in Table Data Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes Table Data Windows.
Column Definition (R) Opens the Column Attributes Window.
View (V)
Go To (J) Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Edit (E)
Copy (C) Not used with this window.
Row Insert (L)
Row Delete (D)
Line Insert (I)
Line Delete (G)
7 Window (W)
Help (H)
7.5.12 Setting Table Data
Table data can be set in the Table Data Windows. The data set in the following table is used
for the table data manipulation instructions in the main program, such as TBLBR and
TBLBW.
7-84
Table Data
Login information
Table Name Columns Lines
Column 1 Column 1 ・・・ Column n

Name Name ・・・ Name
Row 1
Row 2
・・・
Table data definition area
・・・

Table Name Displays the name of the table
Columns Displays the number of column declared in the table definitions.
Rows Displays the number of rows declared in the table definitions.
Column No. Displays the column numbers in order from the left.
Column Name Displays the column names in order from the left.
Row No. Displays the row numbers in order from the top.
Table Data Enter table data between 0 and 9 for decimal, between 0 and 9 and A and F
for hexadecimal, and 1 and 0 for binary. Enter an "H" at the beginning of
hexadecimal data numerals.
7.5.13 Editing Table Data
Jumping the Cursor

Use the following procedure to move the cursor to a specific row or column.
1. Select View (V) and then Go To (J) from the Table Data Menu.
2. The Jump Line and Column Setting Window will be displayed. Enter the row number 7
and column number to which the cursor is to be moved and click the OK Button. The
cursor will be moved to the specified position.
7-85
7.5.14 Saving and Closing Table Data
7.5.14 Saving and Closing Table Data
Saving
Data entered when making table data settings is saved as soon as the Enter Key is pressed.
Closing
Close the Table Data Window, the Column Attributes Window, and the Table Data List Win-
dow to exit the process for creating table data.
1. Active the Table Data Window and select File (F) and then Close (C) in the window.
2. Active the Column Attributes Window and select File (F) and then Close (C) in the
window.
3. Active the Table Data List Window and select File (F) and then Close (C) in the win-
dow.
7-86
7.6 Tools
7.6 Tools
This section describes the tools that assist programming.
• Register lists
• Tuning panels
• Cross-references
• Disable coil lists
• Comment lists
• Register number replacement
This section describes the register list structure and operations.
Outline
The current values of the Machine Controller's internal registers, the S, I, O, M, D, and C
registers, can be displayed or changed in real time on a Register List Window.
A separate Register List Window is opened for each set of register display parameters that is
set. More than one Register List Window can be open at the same time. When the Register
List (O) command is executed, a child window is opened to show the contents of the regis-
ters.
Parent window
Register List Window

Menu Bar
7
Register Window
PT#: CPU#
Child windows
環境選
択
Register Window
PT#: CPU#
環境選
択
Opening a Register List Window

A Register List Window can be opened as a separate window from either the File Manager
or the Engineering Manager.
7-87
Opening the Register List Window

The Register List Window can be opened from either the File Manager or the Engineering
Manager. Both of these procedures are explained below.
1. Opening From the File Manager
From the File Manager, select Tool (T) and then Register List (R).
2. Opening From the Engineering Manager

From the Engineering Manager, select File (F), Open (O), Tool (T), and then Register
List (R).
Window Configuration
When the Register List Parent Window is opened, one empty Register Data Window will be
opened as a child window.
Child Window Details

Register Data Window Displays the contents of the registers.
7-88
7.6 Tools
Register List Window Menus

File (F)
Open Register List (O) Displays the Register List Window.
Close (C)* Closes the Register List Window.
Exit (X) Exits the Register List.
View Mode (M)
DEC (D)* Displays register list in decimal.
HEX (H)* Displays register list in hexadecimal.
FLOAT (F)* Displays register list in real numbers.
BIN (B)* Displays register list in binary.
LONG (L)* Displays register list in double-length integers.
ASCII (A)* Displays register list in ASCII.
View (V)
Window (W)
Cascade (C)* Stacks windows in the display.
Tile (T)* Lines up windows in the display.
Help (H)
∗ Displayed only in the Register List Window.
Tool Icons in Register List Window

Among the various menu items, those that are most commonly used are available through
tool icons as shown in the following illustration. 7
Version information
ASCII display
Floating-point decimal display
Double-length integer display
Binary display
Hexadecimal display
Decimal display
Delete block
Next block
Open Register List Window (parent)
Call File Manager
7-89
Opening the Register Window

One Register Window is opened automatically when the Register List Window is opened.
Use the following procedure to open another Register Window when necessary.
Register contents can be displayed as integer, double-length integer, real, or bit data. The
data that is display is from the Machine Controller in Online Mode and from the hard disk in
Offline Mode.
To create a new Register Window, select File (F) and then Register List (O) from the Regis-
ter List Window menus. A new Register Window will be displayed in the Register List Win-
dow.
Register list
Displaying Registers
Set the following parameters in the Register Window and then click anywhere in the display
area. The contents of the registers will be displayed.
Setting Explanation
Register Number Sets the register number to start the display.
/DWG= Sets the drawing or function name for local registers.
/D= Sets the number of registers to display.
7 /TYPE= Sets the display type: Binary, decimal, hexadecimal, or ASCII.
Controller Displays the model of the Machine Controller. (Setting is not possi-
ble.)
Select Controller Button

The Select Controller Button is used to check registers from another Machine Controller.
When the button is clicked, a list of the PLC Folders registered in the File Manager will be
displayed. Select the desired PLC.
The default model will normally be the Machine Controller that was the source of starting
the register list. If the register list is started from the Engineering Manager, for example, the
default will be the Machine Controller from which the Engineering Manager was started.
Normally, only register data from the Machine Controller that is logged on to is display, and
there is no need to click the Select Controller Button.
7-90
7.6 Tools
Select
Controller N... CPU Name Order Name Group Name Server
INFO 1 If a register number other than for a D register is input for the register number setting, there is no need
to input a drawing number.
2 For a register number setting, the motion program number can be input for the Drawing Number Box.
3 A register list cannot be displayed for X, Y, A, or # registers.
4 In Offline Mode, a register list can be displayed for only the M register, and not for other registers.
However, if the register data is saved on the hard disk or a floppy disk using the file transfer function,
the register list can be displayed.
Changing the Display

The numeric display mode and register type can be changed for the list register display.
Changing the Numeric Display Mode
The display mode for the register's numeric values can be changed to decimal, hexadecimal,
binary, or ASCII.
• Decimal Display
Register values can be displayed in decimal by selecting View Mode (M) and then DEC
(C) in the Register List Window.
7
• Hexadecimal Display
Register values can be displayed in hexadecimal by selecting View Mode (M) and then
HEX (H) in the Register List Window.
• Binary Display
Register values can be displayed in binary by selecting View Mode (M) and then BIN
(B) in the Register List Window.
• ASCII Display
Register values can be displayed in ASCII by selecting View Mode (M) and then ASCII
(A) in the Register List Window.
INFO If register values that cannot be displayed as ASCII characters are set for ASCII display, undefined
data will be displayed.
7-91
7.6.2 Creating Tuning Panels
Changing the Register Type

The register type can be changed to integer, double-length integer, or real number.
• Integers
The register number and register values can be displayed as integers by selecting View
Mode (M) and then either DEC (D) or HEX (H) in the Register List Window.
INFO If DEC (D) is selected, the integer register will be displayed in decimal. If HEX (H) is selected, the
integer register will be displayed in hexadecimal.
• Double-length Integers
The register number and register values can be displayed as double-length integers by
selecting View Mode (M) and then LONG (L) in the Register List Window.
• Real Numbers
The register number and register values can be displayed as real numbers by selecting
View Mode (M) and then FLOAT (F) in the Register List Window.
Changing Register Values

Use the following procedure to change register values.
1. Move the cursor to the register value that is to be changed.
2. Input the value and then press the Enter Key.
INFO 1 For integer, double-length integer, or real number register lists, input values from 0 to 9 if using deci-
mal, 0 to 9 or A to F if using hexadecimal, or either 1 or 0 if using binary code. A negative value can be
input if the register values are displayed in decimal.
2 The values that are input will be immediately saved to the Machine Controller when the Enter Key is
7 pressed.
Exiting the Register List

Use the following procedure to exit the register list by closing the Register List Window and
the Register Window.
1. To close the Register List Window, select File (F) and then Close (C) in the Register
List Window.
2. To close the Register Data Window, select File (F) and then Exit (E) in the Register List
Window.
Names, units, and other comments are defined on tuning panels for the registers used in
drawing or function programs.
7-92
7.6 Tools
In Online Mode, the current value for the defined register is displayed and this value can be
changed.
Opening the Tuning Panel Window

The Tuning Panel Window can be opened from the File Manager or the Engineering Man-
ager.

1. Click a drawing number on the directory tree.
2. Select File (F), Open (N), and then Tuning Panel (P) in the File Manager Window.
The Tuning Panel Window will be opened.

Select File (F), Open (N), Drawing (R) and then Tuning Panel (P) in the Engineering Man-
ager Window.
INFO 1 The Open DWG Setting Window will be displayed if the Tuning Panel Window is opened when no
drawing or function program is open. Enter the drawing name and drawing type, and click the OK But-
ton. 7
2 The tuning panel settings are made for the main drawing or function program for which the Tuning
Panel Window was opened. If tuning panel settings are to be made for other drawing numbers or func-
tion symbols, the main program for that drawing number or function symbol must be opened.
7-93
Tuning Panel Window Menus

The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the Tuning Panel Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Tuning Panel Window.
Regist User Menu (S) Registers shortcut keys for the Tuning Panel
Window.
Save (S) Saves the tuning panel.
Page Setting (M) Sets the print margins.
Print Table (P) Prints tuning panel definition data.
Edit (E)
Cut (T) Cuts data.
Copy (C) Copies data to the clipboard.
Paste (P) Reproduces the data on the clipboard.
Insert Row (I) Inserts a blank row.
Input (I)
Input Settings (S) Switches to Settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to Table Definition input mode.
(T)
Input Register (R) Switches to Register input mode.
Direction of Cursor Sets the direction for cursor movement.
7 Movement (C)
View (V)
Display Head Row (F) Moves the cursor to the first row.
Display Designated Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Row (R)
Display Last Row (E) Moves the cursor to the last row.
Window (W)
Help (H)
7-94
7.6 Tools
Switching Input Modes

There are two input modes for tuning panels: Table Definition Input Mode where entries are
made for all cells in the table; and Register Input Mode where only register numbers are
input. The cursor position can be set to vertical, horizontal or no movement after the inputs
have been made and the Enter Key pressed.
The method for switching input modes is the same as for table programs. Refer to 7.4.4
Switching Input Modes.
Making Tuning Panel Settings

All definition data for tuning panels can be entered. Up to 100 definition data items can be
created.
Data Name Disp. Def. Current Unit Lower Upper

No. S Value Limit Limit REG-No. DWG
DWG No. Input Mode
Setting Explanation
Data Name Enter a data name of up to 48 characters.
S Enter S to permit current values to be set. If this cell is left blank, it
will not be possible to change the current value.
7
Disp. Def. (Display Enter the display format for current values: "X" for numerals and "."
Definition) for decimal points. Input examples for table definitions are shown in
the Table Formats table following this table.
Current Value Current values for the registers will be displayed. Register data from
the Machine Controller is displayed in Online Mode, and data from
the hard disk will be displayed in Offline Mode. If "x.xxx" is input in
the Disp. Def. column, the display will be "1.000" even if the actual
register value is 1000.
The current value can be changed if "S" is input in the Setting Per-
missions column. The input value is saved when the Enter Key is
pressed.
If respective values are specified in the Lower Limit and Upper Limit
columns, only values in that range can be entered as the current
value.
Unit Enter the unit for the current value of up to 8 characters.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit for the current value. If the same value is set for
both the upper and lower limits, that value is the only current value
that can be entered. Enter upper and lower limits such that the lower
value is equal to or less than the upper limit.
7-95
Setting Explanation
Upper Limit Enter the upper limit for the current value. If the same value is set for
both the upper and lower limits, that value is the only current value
that can be entered. Enter upper and lower limits such that the lower
value is equal to or less than the upper limit.
REG-No. Enter the register number for displaying the current value. I, O, M,
and D registers can be entered.
DWG If a D register number is input in the REG-No. column, input the D
register drawing number.
DWG No. Display the number of the drawing that is currently open.
Input Mode Display the current input mode.
Table Formats
Current Value Display Format Register Type

Positive signed number Xx.xxx Position number, double-length positive
number
Positive unsigned number Uxx.xxx Position number, double-length positive
number*
Hexadecimal Hxxxx Position number, double-length positive
number*
Real number (with exponent) x.xxxxxE.xx Real number
Real number x.xxxxx Real number
(without exponent)
Bit signal ON/OFF or 0/1 Bit*
∗ Negative values cannot be input when the current values are input.
Note: The decimal point will move depending on the current value. If cur-
rent values have more digits than can be displayed, these values will
be converted to real numbers with exponents and displayed.
7 Editing Tuning Panels

The editing methods for tuning panels are the same as for table programs. Refer to 7.4.11
Editing Table Programs.
Saving Tuning Panels

If a program window for the same drawing number is opened, that program (main or other
program) will be saved also.
The procedure to save tuning panels is outlined below.
1. Select File (F) and then Save (S) on the Tuning Panel Menu.
2. The Save DWG/FUNC Window will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
3. The Save Normally Completed Window will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
7-96
7.6 Tools
1 When tuning panels are saved, a check of whether or not the definition data is correctly input is per-
formed. An error window is displayed if an error is detected during this check.
2 Refer to Error Window Configuration under 7.3.11 Saving Ladder Logic Programs for information on
error windows.
Printing Tuning Panels

Tuning panels can be printed from the Tuning Panel Window without starting the Print Man-
ager. Only the tuning panel that is currently open, however, will be printed.
Refer to 7.3.12 Printing Ladder Logic Programs for information on page settings and print-
ing.
Exiting Tuning Panels

The process of creating tuning panels can be exited by closing the Tuning Panel Window.
Select File (F) and then Close (C) to close the Tuning Panel Window.
7.6.3 Cross References
The cross reference function will search programs to find out which registers are used in
which programs and how the registers are used.
Opening the Cross References Window

The Cross References Window is opened from the Engineering Manager.

7
1. Select File (F), Open (O), Tools (T), and then Cross References (X) from the menu.
The Cross Reference Condition Window will be displayed.
2. Set the conditions in the Cross Reference Condition Window and then click the OK
Button. The Cross Reference Window will be opened.
7-97
INFO If step 1. is executed when a drawing or function program is open, the Cross Reference Window will
open directly based on the leading register used in the program. This will apply to all the programs that
are open.
Cross Reference Window Menus

The following table shows the functions of the menu commands in the Cross Reference
Window.

File (F)
Close (C) Closes the Tuning Panel Window.
Register Set (R) Sets the cross reference conditions.
Remake Cross Info. (X) Updates the cross reference information.
Save (S) Not used with this window.
Print (P) Prints the cross reference data.
7 Exit (X) Exits the Engineering Manager.
View (V)
Option (O)
Normal (N) Displays the Normal Mode.
High-speed (H) Displays the High-speed Mode.
Expanded (O) Displays the Expanded Mode.
Window (W)
Help (H)
7-98
7.6 Tools
Executing Cross References

The cross reference conditions can be reset while the Cross Reference Window is open.
• Select File (F), Open (O), Tools (T), and then Cross References (X) from the menu. The
Cross Reference Condition Window will be displayed.
7-99
Specifying Cross Reference Conditions

Input the cross reference conditions on the Cross Reference Condition Window
Setting Explanation
Register Number Input the register number to search for.
Drawing Number Input the drawing number of function symbol in which to search. Wildcards
can be used as shown below.
* Searches all drawings.
L Searches the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches all low-speed drawings.
L10* Searches drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.01 Searches the specified drawing.
F* Searches all user functions.
FUNC001 Searches the specified user function.
Search Mode Set the search mode to normal, high-speed, or option. Refer to the Search
Modes, below.
Search Modes
1. Normal Search Mode
Select Option (O) and then Normal (N) from the menus.
In Online Mode, the PLC will be searched; in Offline Mode, the hard disk will be
searched. Table programs and tuning panels will not be searched in Offline Mode.
2. High-speed Search Mode
Select Option (O) and then High-speed (H) from the menus.
The cross reference information created by the cross reference information update func-
7 tion will be searched. High-speed searching is possible because the cross reference
information is searched instead of the programs. Always use the following procedure to
update the cross reference information before performing the search.
Updating Cross Reference Information
The cross reference information must be updated before executing a high-speed search.
a) Select File (F) and then Update Cross References (X) from the menus.
b) The Cross Reference Update Window will be display asking for confirmation. Click
the OK Button. The most recent cross reference information will be saved on the
hard disk.
3. Expanded Search Mode
Select Option (O) and then Option (O) from the menus.
In Online Mode, the PLC will be searched; in Offline Mode, the hard disk will be
searched. In both cases, the table programs and tuning panels on the hard disk will be
searched.
7-100
7.6 Tools
Search Results
The cross reference window is displayed as follows:
Cross References
Login information
Register No. Drawing No. Search mode
ＡＢＣ
1 Result A Result B ･･･
2 ･････････
･･････　　　　　　　　･･･
Setting Explanation
Login Information Displays the port and other information when logged in online.
Register No. Displays the register number that was searched for.
Drawing No. Displays the drawing number of function symbol that was searched.
Search Mode Displays the search mode that was used (normal, high-speed, or
expanded).
Results Refer to Display of Search Results following this table.
Display of Search Results

Search results are displayed in the following form.
H01 : 010 i ILKTB P002
6.
5.
4.
3. 7
2.
1.
1. Drawing Number or Function Symbol

The number of the drawing or the symbol of the function using the search register.
2. Program Type
The type of program using the search register.
• /: Main program
• |: SFC flowchart
• -: SFC action box
• =: Symbol definition
• :: Table program
• !: Tuning panel
• %: FBD
7-101
7.6.4 Disable Coil Lists
3. Position
The position of the search register. The step number is given for drawings, function pro-
grams, SFC flowcharts, and SFC action boxes. The row number is given for table pro-
grams.
4. Index Type
The type of index is given if the register is used as an indexed register.
• i: i register
• j: j register
5. Instruction Type
The type of instruction or program is displayed.
• #CTBL: # register constant table
• MCTBL: M register constant table
• IOTBL: Interlock table
• ASMTBL:Part assembly table
• TUNPNL:Tuning panel
• SYMBOL:Symbol definition
6. Table Number
The table number is displayed for interlock tables.
• P000: Tuning panel
• P001 on: Symbol definition
Closing Cross References

Close the Cross Reference Window to exit cross references.
Select File (F) and then Close (C) from the menu to close the window.
7
7.6.4 Disable Coil Lists
Disable Coils Lists searches for disabled coils in the program and display information on
them.
Opening the Disable Coil List Window

The Disable Coil List Window is opened from the Engineering Manager.

• Select File (F), Open (O), Tools (T), and then Disable Coil List (D) from the menu. The
Disable Coil List Window will be displayed.
7-102
7.6 Tools
Setting Disable Coil Lists

Setting Explanation
Ref. DWG Specify the range of programs to search. Refer to Specifying Search
Program Ranges following this table.
Search Execute Button Executes the search.
No. Displays the line number.
DWG/FUNC Displays the drawing number or function symbol using the disabled
coil.
STEP Displays the step number with the disabled coil. Refer to Step Num-
bers following this table.
RELAY Displays the relay number of the disabled coil.
DIS Displays the status of the disabled coil.
ON: Disabled coil is ON
OFF: Disabled coil is OFF
Comment Displays the relay number comment.
Specifying Search Program Ranges

7
Drawing and function main programs, as well as SFC action blocks (online only) can be
searched.
Search Range Details

* Searches all drawings.
L Searches the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches all low-speed drawings.
L10* Searches drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.01 Searches the specified drawing.
F* Searches all user functions.
FUNC001 Searches the specified user function.
7-103
7.6.5 Comment Lists
Step Numbers
Step numbers and program types are displayed as follows:
/ 010
The step number in the program

The program type
/: Main program
-: SFC program
Exiting Disable Coil Lists

Close the Disable Coil List Window to exit disabled coil lists.
7.6.5 Comment Lists
Drawing and function program titles and comments for registers in currently displayed pro-
gram can be managed in at the same time.
Opening Comment List Windows

Select File (F), Open (O), Tool (T), and then Comment List (C) in the window.
7-104
7.6 Tools
Setting the Comment List Window

The symbols and comments defined for register numbers are displayed in the Comment List
Window.

DWG/FUNC Name Enter the drawing number or function symbol for which comments
are to be created.
Type Select the type of comment display.
Program: Drawing, function, or table programs
SFC: SFC flowcharts
Time Chart: SFC timecharts
ABOX: SFC action boxes
DISPLAY Button Click the REFRESH (DISPLAY) Button to display the register
numbers, symbols, and comments used in the program set in the
DWG/FUNC and Type input fields.
Title Enter a drawing or function program title of up to 48 characters.
No. of REG. (Register Displays the register numbers used in the program set in the DWG/
Number) FUNC and Type input fields.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 16 characters to be used for the register num-
ber.
Comment Enter a comment of up to 48 characters for the register number.
Creating Comments
The procedure to create register comments is outlined below.
1. Set the drawing number or function name and the display type.
2. Click the DISPLAY Button to display the register numbers used within the specified
program.
3. Enter the title, symbols, and comments.
7
Comments are saved when the Enter Key is pressed after the comment has been entered in step 3.
Editing Comments
Comment lines can be edited by selecting cut, copy, paste, and delete from the editing menu.
Both the symbol and the comment in the selected line will be processed together.
To edit just the symbol or comment, double-click the cell, select the data with the cursor, and
then edit it.
Exiting the Comment Creation Process

Close the Comment List Window to exit comment lists.
Click the Button in upper right corner to close the window.
7-105
7.6.6 Replacing Register Numbers
The register replacement function can be used to search and replace any register number
used in a program.
1 Searching and replacing are not possible in Online Mode.

2 When register numbers are replaced, cross reference information is automatically updated. To reflect
the results of register number replacement in the PLC, transfer the drawing or function program that
was changed to the PLC using the file transfer function.
Opening the Register Number Replacement Window

The Register Number Replacement Window is opened from the Engineering Manager.

• Select File (F), Open (O), Tools (T), and then Register Replace (S) from the menu. The
Register Number Replacement Window will be displayed.
7
Search/replacement results display area
Executing Replacement
The register numbers that can be used depend on the Machine Controller. Refer to the
MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance for details.
Searches and replacements can be executed for drawings, functions programs, SFC pro-
gram, # constant tables, M constant tables, I/O conversion tables, interlock tables, and com-
ponent assembly tables.
7-106
7.6 Tools
Input the following items and click the OK Button to search and replace the register num-
bers.

Target Register Input the register number to search for.
Registers: S, I, O, M, D, C, #, X, Y, Z
Register types: Integer, double-length integer, real, bit
Replacement To replace the register, input the register number to use after replace-
ment.
S, M, D, C, #, X, Y, and Z registers cannot be replaced with I or O
registers or visa versa.
Input the register type of the leading register. If no replacement reg-
ister is specified, the target register will be search for but not
replaced.
Replacement/Search Input the number of registers to search for. Specify the number of
words for integer registers and the number of bits for bit registers.
With bit registers, between 1 and 30,000 bits can be searched for in
one operation.
Replacement/Search Input the starting and ending drawing numbers to search. To search
only one drawing, specify just the starting drawing number.
Replacement/Search Specify the order of displaying the search/replacement results as in
Condition order of drawing numbers or in order of register numbers.
OK Button Click this button to start the search.
Cancel Button Closes the Register Number Search/Replace Window.
New Condition Button Clears the search/replacement data.
Search/replacement Display the results of the search/replacement operation. Refer to
results display area Search/Replacement Results Display Format following this table.
Search/Replacement Results Display Format

1. Search Results Display Window
DWG No. Register １２３･･･

7
1 Result Result ･･････
2 Result Result ･･････
･･･

DWG No. Search drawing number
Register Target register
1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to Search/Replacement Results.
7-107
2. Search/Replacement Results Display Window
DWG No. Before After １２･･･

1 Results Results ･･･
2 ･･･
･･･

DWG No. Searched or replaced drawing number or function symbol
Before The register number before replacement
After The register number after replacement
1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to Search/Replacement Results.
Specifying Search/Replacement Ranges

The following type of wildcards can be used to specify search/replacement ranges. Wild-
cards cannot be used in both the start and end specifications
Search/Replacement
Details
Range
* Searches/replaces all drawings.
L Searches/replaces the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches/replaces all low-speed drawings.
L10* Searches/replaces drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches/replaces all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.01 Searches/replaces the specified drawing.
F* Searches/replaces all user functions beginning with F.
FUNC001 Searches/replaces the specified user function.
7 Search/Replacement Results
Search and replacement results are display when a search/replacement operation is executed.
The results are displayed in detail in the number columns on the search/replacement results.
∗ L01. 03 / 001 $ i
6.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
1. Replacement Result
An asterisk (*) is displayed when the replacement is successful. Nothing is displayed if
only a search was performed.
2. Drawing Number or Function Symbol
The drawing number or function symbol is not displayed. The page number is displayed
7-108
7.6 Tools
for table programs and other programs with multiple pages. For example, "L01.02P01"
indicates page 01 in L01.02.
3. Program Type
The type of program using the search register.
• /: Main program
• |: SFC flowchart
• -: SFC action box
• =: Symbol definition
• :: Table program
• !: Tuning panel
• %: FBD
4. Position
The position of the search register. The step number is given for drawings, function pro-
grams, SFC flowcharts, and SFC action boxes. The row number is given for table pro-
grams.
5. Application
The application of the search register is given
• Blank: Read
• $: Storage or coil
• &: Transfer (bit or word)
• @: Other (e.g., timer)
6. Index Type
The type of index is given if the register is used as an indexed register.
• i: i register
• j: j register
7
Closing Register Number Replacement
Close the Register Number Replacement Window to exit register number replacement.
7-109
A Error Messages
A
A.1 System Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-2

A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-9
A-1
Error Messages
A.1 System Error Messages

The following tables show the messages with error codes of the form CPDH_xxx_nnn.
ＣＰＤＨ＿ｘｘｘ＿ｎｎｎ
Error number
Classification code
CT: Thread or other internal error
CMP: Compiling error, e.g., for DWG
A CPU: Errors from PLC

DRV: Device driver-level errors
COM: Communications-related errors
Table A.1 CPDH_CT_nnn
Error Message Probable Cause Possible Correction

Reception buffer release error An error has occurred in the Win- Shutdown and restart Windows 95. Contact
(CPDH_CT_010) dows 95 memory area. your Yaskawa representative if the error per-
sists.
Queuing failure An error has occurred in shared Shutdown and restart Windows 95. Contact
(CPDH_CT_011) Windows 95 resources. your Yaskawa representative if the error per-
sists.
Source file write error An error has occurred in shared Shutdown and restart Windows 95. Contact
(CPDH_CT_013) Windows 95 resources. your Yaskawa representative if the error per-
sists.
Reception buffer allocation error An error has occurred in the Win- Shutdown and restart Windows 95. Contact
(CPDH_CT_00F) dows 95 memory area. your Yaskawa representative if the error per-
sists.
Required port not initialized Inconsistency between system and Make 215IF I/F card and System Configura-
(CPDH_CT_02B) 215IF I/F card definitions. tion Window data consistent.
Designated port error The selected port cannot be used. Change the 215IF settings in the System Con-
(CPDH_CT_02F) figuration Window.
Table A.2 CPDH_CMP_nnn

Undefined instruction code detected An undefined instruction code has Execute the instruction again. Contact your
(CPDH_CMP_001) been detected. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
IF instruction structure incorrect The IF instruction structure is Match the number of IF and IEND instruc-
(CPDH_CMP_002) incorrect. tions.
Reduce the number of nesting levels.
WHILE instruction structure incorrect The WHILE instruction structure Match the number of WHILE and WEND
(CPDH_CMP_003) is incorrect. instructions.
FOR instruction structure incorrect The FOR instruction structure is Match the number of FOR and FEND instruc-
(CPDH_CMP_004) incorrect. tions.
No END instruction There is no END instruction. Add an END instruction.
(CPDH_CMP_005)
Too many registered drawings The maximum number of regis- Reduce the number of drawings.
(CPDH_CMP_006) tered drawings has been exceeded.
A-2
AEND instruction structure incorrect The AEND instruction structure is Match the number of ABOX or SBOX
(CPDH_CMP_007) incorrect. instructions and AEND instructions in the
SFC Action Box Window.
Too many SFC flowchart steps The maximum number of steps in Reduce the number of SFC flowchart steps.
(CPDH_CMP_008) the SFC flowchart has been
exceeded.
Too many SFC output bits The maximum number of SFC Reduce the number of SFC output bits to
(CPDH_CMP_009) output bits has been exceeded. within the permissible range.
ABOX instruction structure incorrect
(CPDH_CMP_010)
The ABOX instruction structure is
incorrect.
Correct the ABOX instruction and the rela-
tionship between ABOX and SBOX instruc-
A
tions.
SFC flowchart branches exceeded The number of SFC flowchart Reduce the number of SFC flowchart
(CPDH_CMP_012) branches has been exceeded. branches.
SFC flowchart structure incorrect The SFC flowchart structure is Check the SFC flowchart for incorrect start,
(CPDH_CMP_013) incorrect. end, or branch settings.
Too many SFC flowchart step boxes The number of SFC flowchart Reduce the number of SFC flowchart step
(CPDH_CMP_014) step boxes has been exceeded. boxes.
Expansion program (table or other The table or other type expansion Check the expansion program for incorrect
program) structure incorrect program structure is incorrect. expansion program conversions in the CP-
(CPDH_CMP_015) 717. Contact your Yaskawa representative if
the error persists.
Table A.3 CPDH_CPU_nnn

1 DWG/FN object too large The size of one drawing or func- Reduce the size of the drawing or function
(CPDH_CPU_021) tion object is too large. objects.
Source memory control error A source memory control error Execute the load again.
(CPDH_CPU_040) has occurred.
1 DWG/FN object too large The size of one drawing or func- Reduce the size of the drawing or function
(CPDH_CPU_0B1) tion object file is too large. objects.
Reduce the number of steps.
Reduce the number of # registers.
Machine Controller cannot run due to The Machine Controller cannot Execute loading.
program memory error or watchdog time run due to a program memory
out error or a watchdog time out.
(CPDH_CPU_041)
Cannot use this function because Load operation cannot be per- Stop Machine Controller operation using the
Machine Controller is online formed because the Machine Con- System Configuration Window.
(CPDH_CPU_04D) troller is online.
Transmission error A transmission error has occurred. • Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_090) • Check if the connectors are set properly.
• Check that there is no noise interference.
Incorrect processing request from CP-717 There is an error in the processing Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_091) request from the CP-717. Replace the Machine Controller or CP-717 if
the error persists.
Incorrect processing request from CP-717 There is an error in the processing Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_092) request from the CP-717. Replace the Machine Controller or CP-717 if
the error persists.
A-3
Error Messages

Inappropriate file name • The file name is inappropriate. Enter an appropriate file name.
(CPDH_CPU_093) • The drawing number is incor-
rect.
• A system function symbol has
been used for the user function
symbol.
• The drawing number or func-
tion symbol called using the
SEE and FSTART instructions
A is incorrect.
File does not exist • The file does not exist. Check the registration status of the program
(CPDH_CPU_094) • A new drawing or function pro- file.
gram has been created.
• An illegal program number was
used by an indirect specifica-
tion for MSEE.
Register number exceeds range The register number exceeds the Enter an appropriate register number.
(CPDH_CPU_096) range for register numbers.
Relay instruction executed when it is The relay instruction was exe- • Check the 215IF settings.
disabled. cuted when it is disabled. • Check the specifications at the communica-
(CPDH_CPU_099) tions destination.
Machine Controller busy The Machine Controller is execut- Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_09A) ing processing and cannot, there-
fore, receive messages.
Long Machine Controller processing time Processing at the Machine Con- This is not an error. Wait until the processing
(CPDH_CPU_09B) troller will take some time. is finished.
File altered by different device The file has been altered by a dif- Read the file again.
(CPDH_CPU_09C) ferent device.
Module not operating normally The module is not operating nor- ---
(CPDH_CPU_09E) mally.
CP-717 response wait time exceeded • The CP-717 response wait time • Check that the connector is connected prop-
(CPDH_CPU_09F) has been exceeded. erly.
• The transmission cable is not • Check that the Unit number is set properly.
connected. • Check that there is no noise interference.
• The Machine Controller does • Put the Machine Controller into stop mode
not have enough processing and set a longer scan time.
time for CP-717 messaging ser-
vices.
Object memory area exceeded The object memory area has been Reduce the size of all drawing and function
(CPDH_CPU_0B2) exceeded. objects.
A-4
No free program memory space There is no free program memory • Compress memory from the System Defini-
(CPDH_CPU_0B3) space. tion Window.
• Reduce the size of all drawing and program
memory areas.
• Delete unused drawings or functions.
• Reduce the number of steps in each drawing
and function.
• Reduce the number of # registers in each
drawing and function.
• Reduce the number of symbols in each A
• Reduce the number of comments in each
Another drawing or function calling the Another drawing or function calls Delete the instruction that is calling the func-
function to be deleted the function that is being deleted. tion to be deleted, and then delete the func-
(CPDH_CPU_0C0) tion.
Data trace cannot be executed because Data trace cannot be executed Reset the trace definitions.
trace definition data number set to 0 because the trace definition data
(CPDH_CPU_0C1) number is set to 0.
Disable coil number exceeded maximum The maximum number of disabled Reduce the number of disabled coils.
(100) coils (100) has been exceeded.
(CPDH_CPU_0C2)
Flash memory write failure The write to flash memory pro- Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_0C3) cessing failed. Replace the Machine Controller if the error
persists.
Program write-protected The program is currently write- Set the program to write-enabled mode using
(CPDH_CPU_0F0) protected. the System Configuration Window.
Program memory not initialized The program memory has not Clear the memory or perform batch load oper-
(CPDH_CPU_0F1) been initialized. ation.
Program write-protected Program write protection in the Change the write-protection setting in the
(CPDH_CPU_0F0) system definitions are set to dis- System Definitions Window and retry the
able writing. operation.
Table A.4 CPHD_DRV_nnn

Interrupt level exceeds 0x0f. The designated interrupt level Set the interrupt level to between 0 and 16.
(CPDH_DRV_002) range of 0 to 16 in the systems
definition file has been exceeded.
215IF I/F DIP switch 2 error There is an shared memory Set a correct shared memory address.
(CPDH_DRV_003) address error in the system defini-
tions file.
Designated port number exceeds 1 to 6 The designated port number is Designate a correct port number.
range greater than the range of 1 to 6.
(CPDH_DRV_005)
215IF I/F DIP switch 3 error There is an shared memory Set a correct shared memory address.
(CPDH_DRV_007) address error in the system defini-
tions file.
A-5
Error Messages
Table A.5 CPDH_COM_nnn

Transfer handle could not be obtained. Communications have not been • Start the communications process.
Start the communications process. enabled. • Correct the communications setting to
(CPDH_COM_012) match the current communications device.
• Correct the settings in the personal com-
puter for the current communications
device.
• Check the cable between the communica-
A tions device and the PLC. It may not be cor-
rected properly.
CP-213 transmission error. An error related to the CP-213 • Check the CP-213 transmission settings.
(CPDH_COM_043) connection has occurred. • Check the devices connected to the CP-213.
Inverter is busy. The Inverter is busy and cannot Retry sending.
(CPDH_COM_044) accept the transmission.
Transmission error A transmission error has occurred. • Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_COM_0A0) • Check if the connectors are set properly.
• Check that there is no noise interference.
PLC is not running. An attempt was made to enter Start the CPU and then enter debug mode.
(CPDH_COM_0D0) debug mode with the CPU
stopped.
Currently in debug mode. • An attempt was made to enter • To debug a different program, switch any
(CPDH_COM_0D1) debug mode when the debug main motion programs currently in debug
mode was already in affect. mode to another mode.
• A normal mode source write • Repeat the operation.
(save) was attempted in debug If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
mode. PLC.
Not in debug mode. The following operations were Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_COM_0D2) attempted when not in debug If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
mode. PLC.
• Execution of a source open
command. Step or GO was exe-
cuted.
• A diff transfer.
The motion program is disabled. • An attempt was made to enter • Enable the motion program before entering
(CPDH_COM_0D3) debug mode for a motion pro- debug mode.
gram that has been disabled. • Enable the motion program before stepping
• A step-in was attempt to a in.
motion program that has been
disabled.
Motion program is running. An attempt was made to enter Enter debug mode after stopping the motion
(CPDH_COM_0D4) debug mode for a motion program program.
that is being executed.
No main motion program. An attempt was made to open the Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_COM_0D5) source for a motion subroutine If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
during debugging when the main PLC.
motion program does not exist.
No such file. A diff transfer was attempted with Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_COM_0D6) illegal data. If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
PLC.
A-6
Error in SB/BP signal. • A step was executed for a line Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_COM_0D7) with no command. If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
• A GO command was executed PLC.
with SP or PB set for an illegal
line.
Execution not possible. A compiling error occurred in the Clear CPU memory, load the motion program,
(CPDH_COM_0D8) Controller. and repeat the operation.
The following causes may be If the error persists, replace the CP-717 or
responsible for the compiling PLC.
error. A
• Debug mode was entered for an
illegal main motion program.
• Step or GO command was exe-
cuted when there was a save
error.
• An attempt was made to send
illegal data in a diff transfer.
• Program in CPU memory is
corrupted.
D register size change. The number of D registers in the Change the number of D registers in the
(CPDH_COM_0D9) motion properties for debug mode motion properties back to its original value.
changed and execution or diff
transfer was attempted.
Debug buffer area exceeded. Instructions were added that Delete the added instructions before saving.
(CPDH_COM_0DA) caused the debug buffer to be (Leave debug mode and allocate some of the
exceeded and saving or diff trans- program to subroutines.)
fer were attempted.
Table A.6 Other Error Messages

215IF set value error in system definition A 215IF settings error has Change the 215IF settings in the system defi-
file. occurred in the system definitions. nitions.
Error in network access Master server power supply inter- Start the master server.
(1425) rupted or LAN cable broken when Connect the LAN cable correctly.
master was shared.
Transfer not possible. A required file is being used by Stop the other application and repeat the oper-
Use a file. another application (e.g., Engi- ation.
(FMR001) neering Manager), preventing
execution.
Memory could not be acquired. A required file cannot be Stop all applications not required for the cur-
(FMR007) acquired. rent operation and repeat the operation.
No read permission. The file could not be read with the Check the read permissions from the program
PKT007 current user permissions. map in the File Manage and log in as a user
with the required permissions.
No write permission. The file could not be written with Check the read permissions from the program
PKT008 the current user permissions. map in the File Manage and log in as a user
with the required permissions.
Selected environment does not match PC. An attempt was made to log onto Select the correct PLC and PLC folder.
Check the connected PC. a PLC that is not the connected
PKT026 PLC.
A-7
Error Messages

Monitoring/debug information file error- An attempt was made to open a This message is just a warning, but to be safe,
File not saved or does not match. Resave. motion program online when the save the motion program to the hard disk.
motion program does not exist on
the hard disk.
A-8
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages
The following table shows a list of compile errors in motion programs. All error messages
and their causes are outlined in the table. If an error occurs, refer to the table and adjust the
motion program accordingly.
Error Message Probable Cause

Syntax error • Illegal command or no command.
• Illegal = (allocation operator).
• Inappropriate operator designation.
• Illegal comparison operator or inappropriate position. A
• An odd number of parentheses.
• Undefined characters used.
• Excessive number of items in an equation.
• WHILE and WEND commands do not match.
• IF and IEND commands do not match.
• Other syntax error
Incorrect address designation • Illegal address designation for command language or no address.
Variable range exceeded • The register (variable) range has been exceeded.
Arithmetic expression contains unusable • Illegal register type.
variable type • Illegal register kind.
Cannot load arithmetic expression • When an arithmetic expression is loaded, a maximum of 10 words of local
variables (D variables) are used as the work area during one parallel exe-
cution. This error will occur if this maximum is exceeded. Local variables
acting as work areas are used in the manner outlined below, and are
released and can be reused when one block of processing has been com-
pleted.
Cases where Local Variables are Used as Work Areas
1. When arithmetic expressions are loaded in order of priority, work areas
are used to temporarily store the results of operations that are calculated
first. Multiple words are used depending on the complexity of the
expression.
2 Work areas are used to temporarily store function results when functions
have been used in arithmetic expressions. Two words are used for each
function.
3 Work areas are used to temporarily store operation results when arith-
metic expressions have been used for coordinate designation in motion
commands. Two words are used for each coordinate command in which
arithmetic expressions are specified.
Too many decimal places • The decimal point position is incorrect. There are too many decimal
places.
• The limit for the number of digits designated to a value has been
exceeded.
• The range designated to a value has been exceeded.
Integer size exceeded • The limit for the number of digits designated to a value has been
exceeded.
• The range designated to a value has been exceeded.
Axis name error • The physical or logical axis name has not been registered in the group def-
initions.
• The same axis name has been used multiple times in one motion command
statement.
A-9
Error Messages
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause

Maximum number of axes exceeded • The maximum number of axes to be simultaneously used has been
exceeded.
Division by zero error • Division by zero has been included in the arithmetic expression.
Maximum characters per block exceeded • The number of characters set for one block has exceeded the maximum.
Command duplication error • A command that cannot be duplicated has been duplicated in the expres-
sion.
Unusable instruction • The END command has been used in a subroutine.
• The RET command has been used in the main program.
A • The RET command position is incorrect.
• The GOTO command position is incorrect.
• The position of a command that used an axis as an argument is incorrect in
a subroutine.
No END command • There is no END or RET command.
Maximum nesting level exceeded • Nesting in IF statements is too deep.
• Nesting in WHILE statements is too deep.
• Nesting in SFORK statements is too deep.
Number of branches exceeds range • The number of labels designated in PFORK statements exceeds the range.
• The number of labels designated in SFORK statements exceeds the range.
Duplicate labels used • Labels designated in PFORK duplicate SJOINT labels.
• Labels designated in SFORK duplicate PJOINT labels.
No label • Label designated in PFORK does not exist.
• JOINTO label for PFORK does not exist.
• Label designated in SFORK does not exist.
• JOINTO label for SFORK does not exist.
• Label designated in GOTO does not exist.
Max. number of parallel executions exceeded • The maximum number of parallel executions has been exceeded.
Label order incorrect • The label order in PFORK statements is incorrect.
• The label order in SFORK statements is incorrect.
Program name incorrect • The program name does not conform to MPMooo or MPSooo formats.
Duplicate label definitions • Label definitions are duplicated at another position.
Jump destination incorrect • The destination for the GOTO command is inside a parallel execution or at
another incorrect position.
Illegal character string defined • Characters other than alphanumerics are included in a label.
• There are too many characters in a label.
A-10
B File Manager Menus
B.1 Common Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B-2

B.2 Individual Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B-3
B-1
File Manager Menus
B.1 Common Menus
B.1 Common Menus

This section explains the common items on the pull-down menus under the menu bar in the
File Manager Window. These common items do not change regardless of where the cursor is
in the directory tree.
Unless otherwise specified, the following submenu will be displayed under File (F) and
then File Transfer (T), under View (V), Tool (T), and Help (H).

File (F) and then File Transfer (T)
All File Transfer Transfers files together.
Individual File Transfer Transfers files separately.
B Continuous File Transfer files to several Machine Controllers.
Transfer
Other Saves data to and then compares with flash
memory
View (V)
Details Window (W) Displays and hides the Detail Display Section.
Large Icons (G) Displays large icons in the List Display Section.
Small Icons (M) Displays small icons in the List Display Section
List (L) Displays a list of small icons in the List Display
Section.
Detail (D) Displays a list of detailed data in the List Display
Section.
Refresh (R) Displays the latest information.
Configuration (C) Displays system environment information for
the CP-717.
Tool (T)
User Menu Manager Not used in the current version.
(U)
Register List (R) Displays a list of registers.
Help (H)
B-2
B.2 Individual Menus
Root Folder and Group Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when the root
folder or a group folder is selected.
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
New (N)
Group Folder (G) Creates a new group folder. B
Order Folder (O) Creates a new order folder.
Delete (D) Deletes the group folder and its subdirectories.
Rename (M) Changes the name of the group folder.
Exit (X) Closes the File Manager.
Edit (E)
Default User Set (D) Sets the default user.
View (V) Refer toB.1 Common Menus.
Tool (T) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help (H) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Pop-up Menus

New (N)
Group Folder (G) Creates a new group folder.
Order Folder (O) Creates a new order folder.
Rename (M) Changes the name of the group folder.
Delete (D) Deletes the group folder and its subdirectories.
Order Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when an order
folder is selected.
B-3
File Manager Menus
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
New (N)
Controller Folder (C) Creates a new PLC folder.
Delete (D) Deletes the order folder and its subdirectories.
Rename (M) Changes the name of the order folder.
Edit (E)
B View (V) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.

Pop-up Menus

New (N)
Controller Folder (C) Creates a new PLC folder.
Rename (M) Changes the name of the order folder.
Delete (D) Deletes the order folder and its subdirectories.
PLC Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed a PLC folder is
selected.
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
Log On (G) Logs on to the Machine Controller.
Delete (D) Deletes the PLC folder and its subdirectories.
Property (R) Changes Machine Controller information.
Logoff (U) Logs off from the Machine Controller.
File Transfer (T) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Print (P) Opens the Print Manager.
Edit (E)
User Manager (U) Used to manage users.
CPU Control (C) Changes the CPU status.
View (V) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
B-4
Pop-up Menus

Online (O) Switches between online and offline modes.
Log On (G) Logs on to the Machine Controller.
Property (R) Changes the Machine Controller information.
Delete (D) Deletes the PLC folder and its subdirectories.
B
CPU Control (C) Changes the CPU status.
C Register and Table Data Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed a C register, pro-
gram, definition, or table data folder is selected.
Pull-down Menu

File (F)
Regist User Menu (S) Creates a shortcut icon.
Edit (E)
CPU Control (C) Changes the CPU status.*
∗ Valid only in online mode.
Pop-up Menus

B-5
File Manager Menus

Program Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when an interrupt
program, function program, high-speed scan program, initialization program, or low-speed
scan program folder is selected.
Pull-down Menus
B Menu Command Function

File (F)
Make New DWG (N) Opens a new program.
Edit (E)
View (V)
List Display (V)
Display All DWG (L) Sets the data files to be displayed in the List Dis-
play Section.
SFC Flow Chart (S)
(#)
Constant Table (M
Reg) (M)
I/O Convert Table (O)
Interlock Table (I)
Parts Assembling
Table (A)
Tuning Panel (P)
Tool Bar (T) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
... Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
B-6
Pop-up Menu

List Display (V)
Display All DWG (L) Selects the data file type to be displayed in the
List Display section.
...
Program File Menus B

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed a program file is
selected.
Pull-down Menu

File (F)
Open (O)
DWG Properties (R) Opens the Properties Window.
Main Program (N) Opens the Main Program Window.
SFC Flow Chart (S) Opens the SFC Flowchart Window.
Constant Table (# Reg) Opens the Constant Tables (# register) Window.
(#)
Constant Table (M Opens the Constant Tables (M register) Window.
Reg) (M)
I/O Convert Table (O) Opens the I/O Conversion Tables Window.
Interlock Table (I) Opens the Interlock Tables Window.
Parts Assembling Opens the Parts Assembling Tables Window.
Table (A)
Tuning Panel (P) Opens the Tuning Panel Window.
Delete (D) Deletes the program file.
Regist User Menu (S) Creates a shortcut icon on the desktop.*
Edit (E)
Enable/Disable (E) Enables or disables the program.
B-7
File Manager Menus

View (V)
List Display (V)
Display All DWG (L) Sets the data files to be displayed in the List Dis-
play Section.
SFC Flow Chart (S)
(#)
Constant Table (M
Reg) (M)
Interlock Table (I)
Parts Assembling
B Table (A)
Tuning Panel (P)
Tool Bar (T) Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
... Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Pop-up Menus

Open (O)
DWG Properties (R) Opens the Properties Window.
Main Program (N) Opens the Main Program Window.
SFC Flow Chart (S) Opens the SFC Flowchart Window.
Constant Table (# Reg) (#) Opens the # Constant Tables Window.
Constant Table (M Reg) Opens the M Constant Tables Window.
(M)
I/O Convert Table (O) Opens the I/O Conversion Tables Window.
Interlock Table (I) Opens the Interlock Tables Window.
Parts Assembling Table Opens the Component Assembling Tables Win-
(A) dow.
Tuning Panel (P) Opens the Tuning Panel Window.
B-8
View Display (V)
Display All DWG (L) Sets the data files to be displayed in the File Dis-
play Section.
SFC Flow Chart (S)
Constant Table (# Reg) (#)
Constant Table (M Reg)
(M)
Interlock Table (I)
Parts Assembling Table
(A)
Tuning Panel (P)
B
DWG Delete (D) Deletes the program file.
Enable/Disable (E) Enables and disables programs.
DWG Copy (C) Copies the program.
B-9
File Manager Menus
Motion Program Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a motion
program folder is selected.
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
Open (O)
Group Definition (G) Defines groups.
Motion Parameter (P) Defines and displays the motion parameters.
B Motion Editor (E) Edits the motion program.
Register Write Sets the number of M and O registers.
Permissions (R)
Edit (E)
Pop-up Menus

Open (O)
Group Definition (G) Defines group information.
Motion Parameter (P) Defines and displays the motion parameters.
Motion Editor (E) Edits the motion program.
Register Write Sets the number of M an O registers.
Permissions (R)
B-10
Motion Group Folder Menus
group folder is selected.
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
Make New Program (N) Opens a new motion program.
Open (O)
Motion Editor (E) Edits motion programs.
Position Monitor (C) Displays the current position.* B
Motion Alarm (A) Displays alarm information.*
Edit (E)
Pop-up Menus

Open (O)
Motion Editor (E) Edits motion programs.
Position Monitor (C) Displays the current position.*
B-11
File Manager Menus
Motion Program File Menus

program file is selected.
Pull-down Menus
File (F)
Open (O)
B Position Monitor (C) Displays the current position.*1
Motion Alarm (A) Displays alarm information.*1
Delete (D) Deletes motion program files.
Regist User Menu (U) Creates a shortcut icon.*2
Copy (C) Copies a motion program file.
Edit (E)
∗ 1. Valid only in online mode.

∗ 2. Refer to 2.5 User Menu Manager.
Pop-up Menus
Open (O)
Position Monitor (C) Displays the current position.*
Register in User Menu (S) Creates a shortcut icon.
Delete (D) Deletes the motion program file.
Copy (C) Copies the motion program file.
B-12
Group Definition File Menus
This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a group def-
inition file is selected.
Pull-down Menus

File (F)
Regist User Menu (S) Creates a shortcut icon on the desktop.*1
Print (P) Prints the contents of the selected file. B
Edit (E)
CPU Control (C) Changes the CPU status.*2
∗ 1. Refer to 2.5 User Menu Manager.

∗ 2. Valid only in online mode.
Pop-up Menus

B-13
C Drawing and Function
Instructions
C.1 Auxiliary Input Keys for Drawings and Function Programs - - C-2
C-1
Drawing and Function Instructions
C.1 Auxiliary Input Keys for Drawings and Function Programs

The following tables list the instructions used when creating drawings and functions. The
instructions are grouped by function. Each of these commands has an auxiliary input key
allocated to it.
Programs can be input more effectively by using the shortcut command keys allocated to the
following sequence control instructions.
• Program control instructions • Numeric comparison instructions

• Direct input instructions • Data manipulation instructions
• Sequence circuit instructions • Basic function instructions
• Logic operation instructions • DDC instructions
• Numeric math instructions • Table data manipulation instruc-
tions
• Numeric conversions instructions • Program control instructions
C Program Control Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display Pull-down Menu
Mnemonics
SEE SEE SEE [CONTROL(C)]-[SEE] 1[SEE]
FOR FOR FOR [CONTROL(C)]-[FOR] 4[FOR]
WHILE WHILE WHILE [CONTROL(C)]-[WHILE] 1[WHILE]
ON ON ON [CONTROL(C)]-[ON] 2[ON]
OFF OFF OFF [CONTROL(C)]-[OFF] 3[OFF]
IFON IFON IFON [CONTROL(C)]-[IFON] 5[IFON]
IFOFF IFOFF IFOFF [CONTROL(C)]-[IFOFF] 6[IFOFF]
ELSE ELSE ELSE [CONTROL(C)]-[ELSE] 7[ELSE]
END DEND END [CONTROL(C)]-[END] 8[END]
FEND
WEND
IEND
CONDITION [] [] [FUNCTION(F)]-[[]] 9[[]]
FUNCTION CALL (FSTART) FSTART [CONTROL(C)]-[FSTART] 4[FSTART]
FUNCTION INPUT (FIN) FIN [CONTROL(C)]-[FIN] 5[FIN]
FUNCTION OUTPUT (FOUT) FOUT [CONTROL(C)]-[FOUT] 6[FOUT]
INLINE COMMENT "“ "“ [CONTROL(C)]-[COMMENT] 10[CMT]
EXTENSION PROGRAM CALL XCALL XCALL [CONTROL(C)]-[XCALL] 2[XCALL]
SFC PROGRAM EXECUTION SFC SFC [SFC(S)]-[SFC] 8[SFC]
SFC STEP NUMBER SFCSTEP SFCSTEP [SFC(S)]-[SFCSTEP] 8[SFCSTEP]
ACTION BOX ABOX ABOX [SFC(S)]-[ABOX] 9[ABOX]
ACTION BOX SBOX SBOX [SFC(S)]-[SBOX] 10[SBOX]
C-2
Direct I/O Instructions
Function Bar
Mnemonics
DIRECT INPUT IN IN [CONTROL(C)]-[IN] 1[IN]
DIRECT OUTPUT OUT OUT [CONTROL(C)]-[OUT] 2[OUT]
DIRECT INPUT R INR INR [CONTROL(C)]-[INR] 3[INR]
DIRECT OUTPUT R OUTR OUTR [CONTROL(C)]-[OUTR] 4[OUTR]
INPUT STRAIGHT INS INS [CONTROL(C)]-[INS] 7[INS]
OUTPUT STRAIGHT OUTS OUTS [CONTROL(C)]-[OUTS] 8[OUTS]
Sequence Program Instructions

Function Bar
C
Mnemonics
NO CONTACT ... ][ [RELAY(R)]-[NO CONTACT(A)] 1[...]
NC CONTACT ... ]/ [RELAY(R)]-[NC CONTACT(B)] 2[...]
COIL ... @ [RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . COIL(C)] 10[...]
SET COIL ... @s [RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . SET COIL(S)] 9[...]
RESET COIL ... @R [RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . RESET 10[...]
COIL(R)]
ON PULSE ... ]P [RELAY(R)]-[ONPULSE(P)] 8[...]
OFF PULSE ... ]N [RELAY(R)]-[OFFPULSE(Q)] 9[...]
10-MS ON-DELAY .... [ON [RELAY(R)]-[ONDELAY[10MS](N)] 6[ONDLY]
10-MS OFF-DELAY .... [OFF [RELAY(R)]-[OFFDELAY[10MS](F)] 7[OFFDLY]
1-S ON-DELAY .... [SON [RELAY(R)]-[ONDELAY[1S](S)] 6[ONSDL]
1-S OFF-DELAY .... [SOFF [RELAY(R)]-[OFFDELAY[1S](R)] 7[OFFSDL]
BRANCH . , (comma) [RELAY(R)]-[BRANCH(T)] 3[.]
JOIN . . (period) [RELAY(R)]-[JOIN(J)] 4[.]
CONNECT . ,.(comma and [RELAY(R)]-[CONNECT(C)] 5[.]
period)
Logic Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Mnemonics
AND ^ & [LOGIC(L)]-[AND] 2[^]
OR v | [LOGIC(L)]-[OR] 3[v]
XOR . ^ [LOGIC(L)]-[XOR] 4[.]
C-3
Numeric Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Mnemonics
INTEGER ENTRY . ; [ART(A)]-[ENTRY (I) . INTEGER (I)] 1[.]
REAL NUMBER ENTRY . ;; [ART(A)]-[ENTRY (I) . REAL NUM- 1[.]
BER (F)
STORE . : [ART(A)]-[STORE(S)] 10[.]
ADDITION + + [ART(A)]-[+] 2[+]
SUBTRACTION - - [ART(A)]-[-] 3[-]
EXTENDED ADDITION ++ ++ [ART(A)]-[++] 2[++]
EXTENDED SUBTRACTION -- -- [ART(A)]-[- -] 3[--]
MULTIPLICATION x * [ART(A)]-[x ] 4[x]
DIVISION ³ / [ART(A)]-[÷] 5[÷]
C MOD MOD MOD [ART(A)]-[MOD] 6[MOD]
REM REM REM [ART(A)]-[REM] 6[REM]
INCREMENT INC INC [ART(A)]-[INC] 4[INC]
DECREMENT DEC DEC [ART(A)]-[DEC] 5[DEC]
ADD TIME TMADD TMADD [ART(A)]-[TMADD] 6[TMADD]
SUBTRACT TIME TMSUB TMSUB [ART(A)]-[TMSUB] 7[TMSUB]
SPEND TIME SPEND SPEND [ART(A)]-[SPEND] 8[SPEND]
Numeric Conversion Instructions

Function Bar
Mnemonics
SIGN INVERSION INV INV [ART(A)]-[INV] 7[INV]
1'S COMPLEMENT COM COM [ART(A)]-[COM] 8[COM]
ABSOLUTE VALUE ABS ABS [ART(A)]-[ABS] 1[ABS]
CONVERSION
BINARY CONVERSION BIN BIN [ART(A)]-[BIN] 8[BIN]
(BCD→BIN)
BCD CONVERSION (BIN→BCD) BCD BCD [ART(A)]-[BCD] 9[BCD]
PARITY CONVERSION PARITY PARITY [ART(A)]-[PARITY] 7[PARITY]
ASCII CONVERSION 1 ASCII ASCII [ART(A)]-[ASCII] 1[ASCII]
ASCII CONVERSION 2 BINASC BINASC [ART(A)]-[BINASC] 2[BINASC]
ASCII CONVERSION 3 ASCBIN ASCBIN [ART(A)]-[ASCBIN] 3[ASCBIN]
C-4
Numeric Comparison Instructions
Function Bar
Mnemonics
COMPARE (<) < < [LOGIC(L)]-[<] 5[<]
COMPARE (≤) £ <= [LOGIC(L)]-[<=] 6[≤]
COMPARE (=) = = [LOGIC(L)]-[=] 7[=]
COMPARE (≠) ¼ <> [LOGIC(L)]-[!=] 8[≠]
COMPARE (≥) Š >= [LOGIC(L)]-[>=] 9[≥]
COMPARE (>) > > [LOGIC(L)]-[>] 10[>]
RANGE CHECK RCHK RCHK [LOGIC(L)]-[RCHK] 5[RCHK]
Data Operation Instructions

Function Bar
C
Mnemonics
BIT ROTATION LEFT ROTL ROTL [MOVE(M)]-[ROTL] 6[ROTL]
BIT ROTATION RIGHT ROTR ROTR [MOVE(M)]-[ROTR] 7[ROTR]
MOVE BITS MOVB MOVB [MOVE(M)]-[MOVB] 2[MOVB]
MOVE WORD MOVW MOVW [MOVE(M)]-[MOVW] 1[MOVW]
EXCHANGE XCHG XCHG [MOVE(M)]-[XCHG] 3[XCHG]
SET WORDS SETW SETW [MOVE(M)]-[SETW] 4[SETW]
BYTE-TO-WORD EXPANSION BEXTD BEXTD [MOVE(M)]-[BEXTD] 5[BEXTD]
WORD-TO-BYTE BPRESS BPRESS [MOVE(M)]-[BPRESS] 6[BPRESS]
COMPRESSION
BINARY SEARCH BSRCH BSRCH [MOVE(M)]-[BSRCH] 7[BSRCH]
SORT SORT SORT [MOVE(M)]-[SORT] 8[SORT]
BIT SHIFT LEFT SHFTL SHFTL [MOVE(M)]-[SHFTL] 8[SHFTL]
BIT SHIFT RIGHT SHFTR SHFTR [MOVE(M)]-[SHFTR] 9[SHFTR]
COPY WORD COPYW COPYW [MOVE(M)]-[COPYW] 5[COPYW]
BYTE SWAP BSWAP BSWAP [MOVE(M)]-[BSWAP] 4[BSWAP]
Basic Function Instructions

Function Bar
Mnemonics
SQUARE ROOT SQRT SQRT [FUNCTION(F)]-[SQRT] 2[SQRT]
SINE SIN SIN [FUNCTION(F)]-[SIN] 3[SIN]
COSINE COS COS [FUNCTION(F)]-[COS] 4[COS]
TANGENT TAN TAN [FUNCTION(F)]-[TAN] 5[TAN]
C-5
Function Bar
Mnemonics
ARC SINE ASIN ASIN [FUNCTION(F)]-[ASIN] 6[ASIN]
ARC COSINE ACOS ACOS [FUNCTION(F)]-[ACOS] 7[ACOS]
ARC TANGENT ATAN ATAN [FUNCTION(F)]-[ATAN] 8[ATAN]
EXPONENT EXP EXP [FUNCTION(F)]-[EXP] 4[EXP]
NATURAL LOGARITHM LN LN [FUNCTION(F)]-[LN] 2[LN]
COMMON LOGARITHM LOG LOG [FUNCTION(F)]-[LOG] 3[LOG]
DDC Instructions
Function Bar
C Mnemonics
DEAD ZONE A DZ_A DZA [DDC(D)]-[DZA] 2[DZA]
DEAD ZONE B DZ_B DZB [DDC(D)]-[DZB] 3[DZB]
UPPER/LOWER LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT [DDC(D)]-[LIMIT] 4[LIM]
PI CONTROL PI PI [DDC(D)]-[PI] 2[PI]
PD CONTROL PD PD [DDC(D)]-[PD] 3[PD]
PID CONTROL PID PID [DDC(D)]-[PID] 4[PID]
FIRST-ORDER LAG LAG LAG [DDC(D)]-[LAG] 5[LAG]
PHASE LEAD/LAG LLAG LLAG [DDC(D)]-[LLAG] 6[LLAG]
FUNCTION GENERATOR FGN FGN [DDC(D)]-[FGN] 6[FGN]
INVERSE FUNCTION IFGN IFGN [DDC(D)]-[IFGN] 7[IFGN]
GENERATOR
LINEAR ACCELERATOR/ LAU LAU [DDC(D)]-[LAU] 7[LAU]
DECELERATOR 1
LINEAR ACCELERATOR/ SLAU SLAU [DDC(D)]-[SLAU] 8[SLAU]
DECELERATOR 2
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION PWM PWM [DDC(D)]-[PWM] 9[PWM]
Table Data Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Mnemonics
TABLE READ TBLBR TBLBR [TABLE(T)]-[TBLBR] 1[TBLBR]
TABLE WRITE TBLBW TBLBW [TABLE(T)]-[TBLBW] 2[TBLBW]
ROW SEARCH TBLSRL TBLSRL [TABLE(T)]-[TBLSRL] 3[TBLSRL]
COLUMN SEARCH TBLSRC TBLSRC [TABLE(T)]-[TBLSRC] 4[TBLSRC]
TABLE CLEAR TBLCL TBLCL [TABLE(T)]-[TBLCL] 5[TBLCL]
TABLE BLOCK MOVE TBLMV TBLMV [TABLE(T)]-[TBLMV] 6[TBLMV]
QUEUE TABLE READ QTBLR QTBLR [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLR] 1[QTBLR]
C-6
Function Bar
Mnemonics
QUEUE TABLE READ AND QTBLRI QTBLRI [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLRI] 2[QTBLRI]
INCREMENT
QUEUE TABLE WRITE QTBLW QTBLW [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLW] 3[QTBLW]
QUEUE TABLE WRITE AND QTBLWI QTBLWI [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLWI] 4[QTBLWI]
INCREMENT
QUEUE TABLE WRITE AND QTBLCL QTBLCL [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLCL] 5[QTBLCL]
INCREMENT
C-7
D MECHATROLINK Devices
D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-2
D-1
MECHATROLINK Devices
D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices
D.1 MECHATROLINK Devices
Slave Module
Name Model MP910 MP920 MP930 MP940
Classification
Servo S-series SGD Servodrives SGD-oooN Y Y Y N
Modules
S-series SGDB Servodrives SGDB-oooN Y Y Y N
S-series SGDH Servodrives SGDH-oooE + JUSP- Y Y Y N
NS100
Digital I/O 64-point I/O Module JEPMC-IO350 Y Y Y Y
Modules
16-point I/O Module 87816-1100X Y Y Y Y
16-point I/O Module 87816-1600X-Soloy Y Y Y Y
Wide-voltage 8-point Output Module 120DRA83030 Y Y Y Y
100-VAC 8-point Input Module 120DAI53330 Y Y Y Y
200-VAC 8-point Input Module 120DAI73330 Y Y Y Y
12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module 120DDI34330 Y Y Y Y
12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module 120DDO34340 Y Y Y Y
100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module 120DAO83330 Y Y Y Y
Wildcard I/O Module - Y Y Y Y
D Absoluter CDR001028 Y Y Y Y
CDR000264
Analog I/O ±10-V Analog Voltage Input Module 120AVI02030 Y Y Y Y
Modules
±10-V Analog Voltage Output Module 120AVO01030 Y Y Y Y
Special Preset Reversible Counter Module 120EHC21140 Y Y Y N
Modules Pulse MC 120MMB20230 Y Y Y N
VS-676H5 - Y Y Y N
VS-616G5 - Y Y Y N
PLC Module MP940 - Y Y Y Y
Note: Y = Connection possible, N = Connection not possible.
INFO Refer to the MP900 Series Machine Controller User's Manual: MECHATROLINK (SIEZ-C887-5.1)
for details.
D-2
No.4-3（インター）メカトロ製品用 SIE
Machine Controller MP900 Series

Programming Panel Software
USER'S MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-42-962-5696 Fax 81-42-962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
MOTOMAN INC. HEADQUARTERS
805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone 1-937-847-6200 Fax 1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTD.A.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude-Sao Paulo-SP, Brazil CEP: 04304-000
Phone 55-11-5071-2552 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
Motoman Robotics Europe AB
Box 504 S38525 Torsas, Sweden
Phone 46-486-48800 Fax 46-486-41410
Motoman Robotec GmbH
Kammerfeldstraβe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone 49-8166-90-100 Fax 49-8166-90-103
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Kfpa Bldg #1201, 35-4 Youido-dong, Yeongdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-010, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1805, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 20000, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION
4F., No.49 Wu Kong 6 Rd, Wu-Ku Industrial Park, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2298-3676 Fax 886-2-2298-3677
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone 852-2803-2385 Fax 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club, 21
Jianguomenwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone 86-10-6532-1850 Fax 86-10-6532-1851
TAIPEI OFFICE
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONGJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai China 200437
Phone 86-21-6553-6060 Fax 86-21-5588-1190
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing P.R. China Post Code: 100083
Phone 86-10-6233-2782 Fax 86-10-6232-1536
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic Technological Investment & Development Area,
Beijing 100076, P.R. China
Phone 86-10-6788-0551 Fax 86-10-6788-2878
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under
the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant
documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice
MANUAL NO. SIEZ-C887-2.4
for ongoing product modifications and improvements. © Printed in Japan May 2003 01-10 2
© 2001-2003 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 03-4③

Yaskawa cp717 Programing Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa cp717 Programing Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa cp717 Programing Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA

Machine Controller MP900 Series

YASKAWA MANUAL NO. SIEZ-C887-2.4

In some situations, the precautions indicated could have serious consequences if

would be used as follows to indicate that grounding is compulsory: .

Indicates important information that should be memorized.

INFO Indicates additional information or information that is useful to have memorized.

Copyright © Yaskawa Corporation, 2001.

Safety Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii

1 Welcome to the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-1

1.2 Installing the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8

1.3 Communications Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12

1.4 Outline of the Motion Program Development Procedure - - - 1-15

2 Manager Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-1

2.2 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41

2.3 List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47

2.4 Communications Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60

2.5 User Menu Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61

3.2 Basic Module Configuration Definition Operation - - - - - - - - - 3-5

3.3 Basic Individual Module Definition Operations - - - - - - - - - - 3-10

3.4 MP910 Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

3.4.5 Local I/O Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15

3.5 MP920 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19

3.6 MP930 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-113

3.7 MP940 Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-133

4.2 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6

4.3 Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11

4.4 Application Information Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

4.5 Data Trace Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

5 Motion Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1

5.2 Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3

5.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-4

5.3 Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11

5.4 Compiling Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29

5.5 Debugging Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31

6 Monitoring Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-1

6.2 Using the Ladder Programming Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4

6.3 Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6

6.4 Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10

6.6 Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

7 Ladder Logic Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1

7.2 Setting Drawing Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

7.3 Creating Ladder Logic Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17

7.4 Creating Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-52

7.5 Creating Data Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-74

7.6 Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-87

B File Manager Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B-1

C Drawing and Function Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -C-1

D MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -D-1

 About this Manual

 Description of Technical Terms

About the Software

1.1 CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

1.2 Installing the CP-717 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8

1.3 Communications Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12

1.4 Outline of the Motion Program Development Procedure- - - - 1-15

1.1.1 Recommended Personal Computers

∗ 1. NEC9800-series personal computers can be used. However, only RS-

∗ 2. Other CPUs with equivalent specifications to Intel CPUs can be used.

About this Manual

Description of Technical Terms

Saving Communications Port Settings

Exiting the Communications Process

Registering the PLC Folder

Logging On from Offline

Setting Module Configuration Definitions

Defining System Information

Defining Scan Time

Setting Motion Parameters

Creating Motion Control Ladder Programs

1 Creating Motion Programs